NC

®
Pro/ENGINEER 2001
Pro/NC
Topic Collection
Parametric Technology Corporation

Copyright © 2000 Parametric Technology Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
User documentation from Parametric Technology Corporation (PTC) is subject to copyright laws of the United States and other countries
and is provided under a license agreement, which restricts copying, disclosure, and use of such documentation. PTC hereby grants to the
licensed user the right to make copies in printed form of PTC user documentation provided on software or documentation media, but only
for internal, noncommercial use by the licensed user in accordance with the license agreement under which the applicable software and
documentation are licensed. Any copy made hereunder shall include the Parametric Technology Corporation copyright notice and any other
proprietary notice provided by PTC. User documentation may not be disclosed, transferred, or modified without the prior written consent of
PTC and no authorization is granted to make copies for such purposes.
Information described in this document is furnished for general information only, is subject to change without notice, and should not be
construed as a warranty or commitment by PTC. PTC assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear
in this document.
The software described in this document is provided under written license agreement, contains valuable trade secrets and proprietary
information, and is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and other countries. UNAUTHORIZED USE OF
SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT IN CIVIL DAMAGES AND CRIMINAL PROSECUTION.
Registered Trademarks of Parametric Technology Corporation or a Subsidiary

Advanced Surface Design, CADDS, CADDShade, Computervision, Computervision Services, dVISE, Electronic Product Definition,
EPD, HARNESSDESIGN, Info*Engine, InPart, MEDUSA, Optegra, Parametric Technology Corporation, Pro/ENGINEER,
Pro/INTRALINK, Pro/MECHANICA, Pro/TOOLKIT, PTC, PT/Products, and Windchill.
Trademarks of Parametric Technology Corporation or a Subsidiary

3DPAINT, Associative Topology Bus, Behavioral Modeler, CDRS, CV, CVact, CVaec, CVdesign, CV-DORS, CVMAC, CVNC,
CVToolmaker, DesignSuite, DIMENSION III, DIVISION, DIVISION EchoCast, dVSAFEWORK, dVS, e-Series, EDE,
e/ENGINEER, Electrical Design Entry, EPD.Connect, EPD Roles, EPD.Visualizer, Expert Machinist, Expert Toolmaker,
Flexible Engineering, i-Series, ICEM, ICEM DDN, ICEM Surf, Import Data Doctor, Information for Innovation, ISSM, MEDEA,
ModelCHECK, NC Builder, Parametric Technology, Pro/ANIMATE, Pro/ASSEMBLY, Pro/CABLING, Pro/CASTING, Pro/CDT,
Pro/COMPOSITE, Pro/CMM, Pro/CONVERT, Pro/DATA for PDGS, Pro/DESIGNER, Pro/DESKTOP, Pro/DETAIL,
Pro/DIAGRAM, Pro/DIEFACE, Pro/DRAW, Pro/ECAD, Pro/ENGINE, Pro/FEATURE, Pro/FEM-POST, Pro/FLY-THROUGH,
Pro/HARNESS-MFG, Pro/INTERFACE for CADDS 5, Pro/INTERFACE for CATIA, Pro/INTRALINK Web Client,
Pro/LANGUAGE, Pro/LEGACY, Pro/LIBRARYACCESS, Pro/MESH, Pro/Model.View, Pro/MOLDESIGN, Pro/NC-ADVANCED,
Pro/NC-CHECK, Pro/NC-MILL, Pro/NC-SHEETMETAL, Pro/NC-TURN, Pro/NC-WEDM, Pro/NC-Wire EDM, Pro/NCPOST,
Pro/NETWORK ANIMATOR, Pro/NOTEBOOK, Pro/PDM, Pro/PHOTORENDER, Pro/PHOTORENDER TEXTURE LIBRARY,
Pro/PIPING, Pro/PLASTIC ADVISOR, Pro/PLOT, Pro/POWER DESIGN, Pro/PROCESS, Pro/REFLEX, Pro/REPORT,
Pro/REVIEW, Pro/SCAN-TOOLS, Pro/SHEETMETAL, Pro/SURFACE, Pro/VERIFY, Pro/Web.Link, Pro/Web.Publish,
Pro/WELDING, Product Structure Navigator, PTC i-Series, Shaping Innovation, Shrinkwrap, Virtual Design Environment,
Windchill e-Series, Windchill Factor, Windchill Factor e-Series, Windchill Information Modeler, PTC logo, CV-Computervision logo,
DIVISION logo, ICEM logo, InPart logo, and Pro/REFLEX logo.
Third-Party Trademarks
Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation. Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation. CATIA is a registered trademark of Dassault Systems. PDGS is a registered trademark of Ford Motor Company. SAP
and R/3 are registered trademarks of SAP AG Germany. FLEXlm is a registered trademark of Globetrotter Software Inc.
VisTools library is copyrighted software of Visual Kinematics, Inc. (VKI) containing confidential trade secret information belonging
to VKI. HOOPS graphics system is a proprietary software product of, and copyrighted by, Tech Soft America, Inc. All other brand or
product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND

This document and the software described herein are Commercial Computer Documentation and Software, pursuant to FAR
12.212(a)-(b) or DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a), and are provided to the Government under a limited commercial license
only. For procurements predating the above clauses, use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to the restrictions set
forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software Clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or
Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights at FAR 52.227-19, as applicable.
Parametric Technology Corporation, 128 Technology Drive, Waltham, MA 02453-8905 6 September 2000
Table of Contents
About Pro/NC ..................................................................................................... 25
Pro/NC Concepts ............................................................................................... 26
To Create a Manufacturing Model .................................................................... 29
To Retrieve a Manufacturing Model ................................................................. 29
To Place a Workpiece in Part Machining......................................................... 29
To Manipulate a Workpiece .............................................................................. 30
To Place a "No Geometry" Workpiece in Part Machining.............................. 30
Part Family Tables in Pro/NC............................................................................ 30
To Replace a Design Model in Part Machining ............................................... 30
Example: Replacing a Design Model ............................................................... 31
To Build a Manufacturing Model in Assembly Machining ............................. 31
To Reclassify Components of a Manufacturing Assembly ........................... 32
About Manufacturing Process.......................................................................... 32
To Get Process Status and Tool Path Information......................................... 34
About Operations .............................................................................................. 34
To Create an Operation ..................................................................................... 35
The Operation Setup Dialog Box...................................................................... 35
To Specify Comments for an Operation .......................................................... 37
To Activate an Operation .................................................................................. 37
About Workcells ................................................................................................ 37
Workcell Types .................................................................................................. 37
To Create a Machine Tool (Workcell)............................................................... 39
Machine Tool Settings....................................................................................... 40
Pro/NC 3
Saving and Retrieving Workcells ..................................................................... 42
To Set Up a PPRINT Table ................................................................................ 43
The PPRINT Table.............................................................................................. 43
About Fixtures ................................................................................................... 45
To Create a Fixture Setup ................................................................................. 45
The Fixture Setup Dialog Box........................................................................... 45
To Activate a Fixture Setup .............................................................................. 46
To Modify a Fixture Setup................................................................................. 46
To Delete a Fixture Setup.................................................................................. 47
About Coordinate Systems............................................................................... 47
Machine and NC Sequence Coordinate Systems ........................................... 47
Z-Axis Orientation.............................................................................................. 48
To Specify a Coordinate System...................................................................... 48
About NC Sequences ........................................................................................ 49
To Create an NC Sequence............................................................................... 49
Elements of NC Sequence Setup ..................................................................... 49
To Customize a Name of an NC Sequence ..................................................... 50
To Specify Comments for an NC Sequence.................................................... 50
To Set Up Start and End Points for an NC Sequence .................................... 50
To Select an NC Sequence ............................................................................... 50
About Retract Surface....................................................................................... 51
To Set Up a Retract Surface ............................................................................. 52
To Set Up a Retract Sphere .............................................................................. 52
To Set Up a Retract Cylinder ............................................................................ 53
To Set Up a Traverse Plane .............................................................................. 53
4 Pro/NC
Controlling Retracts in Volume Milling............................................................ 54
About Automatic Material Removal ................................................................. 54
To Create a Material Removal Feature ............................................................ 54
Material Removal for Assembly Machining .................................................... 54
Automatic Material Removal in Milling ............................................................ 55
Automatic Material Removal in Turning .......................................................... 56
Automatic Material Removal in Holemaking ................................................... 56
Automatic Material Removal in Wire EDM ...................................................... 56
About Elements of Tool Setup ......................................................................... 56
To Set Up Tools in Advance ............................................................................. 58
To Set Up a Tool when Creating an NC Sequence ......................................... 58
Saving Tool Parameters.................................................................................... 58
To Save Tool Parameters.................................................................................. 59
Tool Parameters Library ................................................................................... 59
About the Tool Setup Dialog Box..................................................................... 59
To Set Up the Material Directory Structure ..................................................... 60
Example: Setting Up the Material Directory Structure ................................... 61
To Add a New Tool ............................................................................................ 61
To Specify the Cutting Data for the Tool ......................................................... 62
Using the Cutting Data Supplied for the Tool ................................................. 62
To Provide the Bill of Materials for the Tool ................................................... 63
To Retrieve Tool Parameters ............................................................................ 63
To Add a Sketched Tool.................................................................................... 64
To Modify an Existing Tool ............................................................................... 64
To Delete a Tool ................................................................................................. 64
Pro/NC 5
Standard Tools................................................................................................... 64
To Use a Standard Tool..................................................................................... 65
About Solid Tool Models................................................................................... 65
Example: A Solid Tool Model for Milling ......................................................... 65
To Create a Tool Model ..................................................................................... 65
To Assign Tool Material and Number of Teeth ............................................... 66
To Use a Tool Model.......................................................................................... 66
Using Assembly as a Tool Model..................................................................... 67
Tool Display ....................................................................................................... 67
Solid Tool Capabilities in Turning.................................................................... 67
Example: Using the Tool Outline in Turning................................................... 68
To Use Tool Outline in Turning ........................................................................ 68
To Use Customized Tools in Holemaking ....................................................... 68
Example: A Solid Tool Model for Holemaking ................................................ 69
About Sites......................................................................................................... 69
Manipulating Sites ............................................................................................. 69
To Create a New Site File .................................................................................. 70
To Activate a Site............................................................................................... 70
Activating a Site................................................................................................. 70
Associating a Site with a Workcell................................................................... 70
To Associate a Site with a Workcell................................................................. 71
Parameter Visibility ........................................................................................... 71
About Machinability Database.......................................................................... 72
To Set Up MDB Files.......................................................................................... 72
Machinability Database Units ........................................................................... 73
6 Pro/NC
To Use MDB Files .............................................................................................. 73
Good Practice .................................................................................................... 74
MDB Lookup Failure.......................................................................................... 74
About Manufacturing Parameters .................................................................... 74
To Set or Modify NC Sequence Parameters.................................................... 76
To Use Previous Parameters ............................................................................ 77
To Use a Non-Active Site .................................................................................. 77
Common NC Sequence Parameters ................................................................ 78
Milling Parameters............................................................................................. 81
Turning Parameters......................................................................................... 108
Holemaking Parameters.................................................................................. 120
Wire EDM Parameters ..................................................................................... 124
Using Parameters in Relations....................................................................... 129
To Include a Parameter in a Relation............................................................. 130
About Milling NC Sequences.......................................................................... 130
To Select Surfaces........................................................................................... 130
To Perform Gouge Checking .......................................................................... 132
Gouge Checking Defaults ............................................................................... 132
To Perform 4-Axis Milling ............................................................................... 133
To Specify Negative Stock Allowance ........................................................... 133
To Customize the Tool Path in Milling........................................................... 133
About Variable Axis Control ........................................................................... 134
To Define the Axis Orientation Using Points on Surface ............................ 134
Example: Axis Orientation Using Points on Surface ................................... 135
To Define the Axis Orientation Using Points Along Cutlines...................... 135
Pro/NC 7
To Change Axis Definitions ............................................................................ 136
To Define the Axis Orientation Using Pivot Point ........................................ 136
To Define the Axis Orientation Using Pivot Curve ....................................... 136
To Specify Synch Points Along Pivot Curve................................................. 137
About Volume Milling ...................................................................................... 137
To Create a Volume Milling NC Sequence .................................................... 138
Example: Volume Milling ................................................................................ 139
Specifying Approach Walls ............................................................................ 139
High Speed Machining .................................................................................... 140
About Automatic Cut Motions ........................................................................ 140
Example: Automatic Cut Motion Types ......................................................... 141
To Create an Automatic (Default) Cut Motion ............................................... 142
To Create an Upto Depth Cut Motion............................................................. 142
To Create a From-To Depth Cut Motion......................................................... 142
To Create a Slice-By-Slice Cut Motion........................................................... 142
To Specify Depth ............................................................................................. 142
The Build Cut Functionality ............................................................................ 143
To Specify Approach and Exit Motions Using Build Cut ............................. 144
Example: Defining Approach and Exit Motions............................................ 144
About Local Milling.......................................................................................... 145
To Create a Local Milling NC Sequence by Referencing a Previous NC

Sequence.......................................................................................................... 146
To Create a Local Milling NC Sequence Using Corner Edges .................... 147
To Create a Local Milling NC Sequence by Referencing a Previous Tool . 148
About Surface Milling...................................................................................... 148
To Create a Surface Milling NC Sequence .................................................... 149
8 Pro/NC
To Define a Cut Using Straight Cut................................................................ 150
Straight Cut Surface Milling............................................................................ 150
To Define a Cut Using Surface Isolines......................................................... 152
Isolines Surface Milling................................................................................... 152
To Define a Cut Using Cut Lines .................................................................... 153
Cut Line Definition Options in the Cut Definition Dialog Box ..................... 154
Cut Line Surface Milling.................................................................................. 155
Example: Cut Line Machining......................................................................... 155
To Add a Cut Line ............................................................................................ 157
Defining a Cut Line From Edges .................................................................... 157
To Adjust Ends of a Cut Line.......................................................................... 158
To Synchronize Cut Lines............................................................................... 158
Example: Specifying Synch Lines ................................................................. 158
To Define a Cut Using Projected Cuts ........................................................... 159
Example: Surface Milling by Projecting Tool Path ....................................... 160
To Create an Automatic (Default) Cut Motion ............................................... 160
To Create a Pass-By-Pass Cut Motion........................................................... 161
Example: Pass-By-Pass Automatic Cut Motions ......................................... 161
To Specify Entry and Exit Moves ................................................................... 161
The Entry/Exit Move Dialog Box..................................................................... 162
To Define Custom Entry and Exit Strategies ................................................ 164
About Swarf Milling ......................................................................................... 165
To Create a Swarf Milling NC Sequence........................................................ 165
About Face Milling........................................................................................... 166
Using Parameters in Face Milling .................................................................. 166
Pro/NC 9
To Create a Face Milling NC Sequence ......................................................... 169
About Profile Milling........................................................................................ 169
To Create a Profile Milling NC Sequence ...................................................... 171
About Pocket Milling ....................................................................................... 171
Example: Pocket Milling.................................................................................. 172
To Create a Pocket Milling NC Sequence...................................................... 172
About Trajectory Milling.................................................................................. 172
Sketching the Tools for Trajectory Milling .................................................... 172
To Create a Trajectory Milling NC Sequence ................................................ 173
To Create Automatic Cut Motions for Trajectory Milling ............................. 174
To Sketch a Cut Motion................................................................................... 174
To Define a Cut Motion Using Edges or Curves ........................................... 174
To Define a Cut Motion Using Surfaces ........................................................ 175
To Specify Height ............................................................................................ 175
Example: Specifying Height and Surfaces.................................................... 175
Example: Specifying Height and Check Surfaces ........................................ 176
Multi-Step and Multi-Pass Trajectory Milling ................................................ 176
Tip: Fitting the Tool Between the Surfaces................................................... 176
To Create a 5-Axis Cut Motion Using Edges or Curves ............................... 177
To Create a 5-Axis Cut Motion Using Surfaces ............................................ 178
To Create Axis Definitions Along the Trajectory .......................................... 179
Example: Adding Axis Definitions ................................................................. 180
To Create a 5-Axis Cut Motion Using Two Contours ................................... 180
To Adjust Cut Motion Ends............................................................................. 181
Corner Condition Types.................................................................................. 181
10 Pro/NC
To Specify Corner Conditions ........................................................................ 182
About Thread Milling ....................................................................................... 183
Example: Thread Milling ................................................................................. 183
Cutter Compensation in Thread Milling......................................................... 184
To Create a Thread Milling NC Sequence ..................................................... 184
The Thread Mill Dialog Box............................................................................. 185
About Engraving.............................................................................................. 187
To Create an Engraving NC Sequence .......................................................... 187
About Plunge Milling ....................................................................................... 187
Example: Plunge Milling ................................................................................. 188
To Create a Plunge Milling NC Sequence...................................................... 188
Specifying Start Axes...................................................................................... 189
About Mill Geometry........................................................................................ 189
About Mill Window........................................................................................... 189
To Create a Mill Window ................................................................................. 190
To Use Reference Quilts ................................................................................. 191
About Mill Volumes ......................................................................................... 191
To Gather a Mill Volume.................................................................................. 191
To Select Surfaces for a Mill Volume............................................................. 192
Examples: Selecting Surfaces for a Mill Volume.......................................... 193
To Exclude Surfaces and Outer Loops.......................................................... 194
Example: Excluding Outer Loops .................................................................. 194
To Fill Inner Loops........................................................................................... 195
Examples: Filling Inner Loops........................................................................ 195
To Close a Mill Volume.................................................................................... 196
Pro/NC 11
Example: Closing a Volume when Milling a Through Pocket ..................... 197
To Show a Mill Volume Definition After Gathering....................................... 197
Sketching a Mill Volume.................................................................................. 198
To Sketch a Mill Volume.................................................................................. 198
Examples: Combining Sketch and Gather .................................................... 198
Tip: Combining Sketch and Trim ................................................................... 200
To Trim a Mill Volume...................................................................................... 200
Example: Trimming a Mill Volume ................................................................. 201
Offsetting a Mill Volume.................................................................................. 201
To Offset a Mill Volume ................................................................................... 202
Example: Offsetting a Mill Volume................................................................. 202
To Create Rounds on a Mill Volume .............................................................. 202
To Copy a Mill Volume .................................................................................... 202
To Shade a Mill Volume................................................................................... 203
Modifying a Mill Volume.................................................................................. 203
To Modify a Mill Volume.................................................................................. 203
To Rename a Mill Volume ............................................................................... 203
About Mill Surfaces ......................................................................................... 204
To Create a Mill Surface .................................................................................. 204
Adding Surface Patches ................................................................................. 204
Example: Gathering a Mill Surface................................................................. 204
To Create a Sloped Mill Surface ..................................................................... 205
Sloped Mill Surfaces........................................................................................ 206
Example: Creating a Sloped Mill Surface ...................................................... 206
To Define Mill Surface as Machinable Surface ............................................. 208
12 Pro/NC
Machinable Area Mill Surface ......................................................................... 208
To Extend Edges of a Mill Surface ................................................................. 208
To Merge Patches of a Mill Surface ............................................................... 209
To Trim a Mill Surface ..................................................................................... 209
To Shade a Mill Surface .................................................................................. 209
Modifying Mill Surfaces................................................................................... 209
To Modify a Mill Surface.................................................................................. 209
About Turning NC Sequences........................................................................ 209
To Set Up the Coordinate System for Correct CL Output ........................... 210
To Define a Turning Envelope ........................................................................ 211
Using Turning Envelopes ............................................................................... 211
Stock Boundary and Cut Extensions............................................................. 211
Defining the Stock Boundary in Part and Assembly Machining................. 212
To Define the Stock Boundary ....................................................................... 213
Example: Using Stock Boundary for Area Turning ...................................... 213
To Change the Stock Boundary Outline........................................................ 213
To Define the Cut Extensions......................................................................... 214
To Adjust Cut Motion Ends............................................................................. 214
Local Stock Allowance.................................................................................... 216
To Specify Local Stock Allowance................................................................. 216
To Specify the Tool Orientation ..................................................................... 216
To Use Multi-Head Turning ............................................................................. 217
Area Turning .................................................................................................... 217
Pro/NC 13
To Create an Area Turning NC Sequence ..................................................... 218
Example: Face Area Turning .......................................................................... 218
Example: Outside Area Turning ..................................................................... 219
Example: Inside Area Turning ........................................................................ 220
To Create a 4 Axis Area Turning NC Sequence ............................................ 220
Example: 4 Axis Area Turning........................................................................ 221
Profile Turning ................................................................................................. 221
Example: Profile Turning ................................................................................ 221
To Create a Profile Turning NC Sequence .................................................... 222
Groove Turning................................................................................................ 222
To Create a Groove Turning NC Sequence ................................................... 225
Thread Turning ................................................................................................ 226
To Create a Thread Turning NC Sequence.................................................... 226
Examples: Thread Turning ............................................................................. 226
To Create a Facing Thread Turning NC Sequence ....................................... 227
To Perform the Remainder Material Analysis ............................................... 227
About Turn Profile ........................................................................................... 228
To Define a Turn Profile .................................................................................. 228
To Define a Turn Profile by Sketching........................................................... 229
Sketching a Turn Profile ................................................................................. 229
To Define a Turn Profile by Selecting Surfaces............................................ 230
Example: Defining a Turn Profile by Selecting Surfaces............................. 230
To Define a Turn Profile by Selecting Curves............................................... 231
Example: Defining a Turn Profile by Section ................................................ 231
To Define a Turn Profile by Section ............................................................... 231
14 Pro/NC
To Define a Turn Profile by Selecting a Reference Envelope ..................... 232
To Define a Turn Profile by Creating a Reference Envelope....................... 232
To Adjust a Turn Profile .................................................................................. 233
About Holemaking ........................................................................................... 233
To Create a Holemaking NC Sequence.......................................................... 234
Three and Five Axis Holemaking ................................................................... 234
Holemaking Cycle Types ................................................................................ 235
Peck Table ........................................................................................................ 236
To Set Up a Peck Table ................................................................................... 236
Example: Peck Table ....................................................................................... 237
To Define Hole Sets ......................................................................................... 237
Combining Selection Methods ....................................................................... 238
To Define Depth ............................................................................................... 239
To Define the Starting Point for Drilling ........................................................ 239
To Define Depth for Blind Drilling .................................................................. 240
To Select Holes by Axes ................................................................................. 240
To Select Holes by Surfaces........................................................................... 241
To Select Holes by Diameters ........................................................................ 241
To Select Holes by Feature Parameters ........................................................ 241
To Select Holes by Points............................................................................... 242
To Define the Countersink Diameter.............................................................. 242
To Use the Automatic Chamfer Selection ..................................................... 242
Example: Automatic Chamfer Selection ....................................................... 243
To Define Plates for Web Drilling ................................................................... 243
Back Spotting Specifics.................................................................................. 244
Pro/NC 15
Example: Back Spotting.................................................................................. 245
About Drill Groups........................................................................................... 247
To Define a Drill Group.................................................................................... 247
To Modify a Drill Group ................................................................................... 248
Using Drill Groups ........................................................................................... 248
About Customizing Holemaking Cycles........................................................ 248
To Create Custom Cycles ............................................................................... 249
The Customize Cycle Dialog Box................................................................... 249
Example: Creating a Custom Cycle ............................................................... 250
To Define the Cycle References, Variables, and Prompts........................... 252
Defining the Cycle References, Variables, and Prompts............................. 253
To Define the Cycle Statement Syntax .......................................................... 253
Keywords and Parameter Names for Custom Cycle Definition .................. 254
To Define the Tool Motion for the Custom Cycle ......................................... 255
To Build New Expressions.............................................................................. 256
Example: Building an Expression.................................................................. 257
To Modify a Custom Cycle.............................................................................. 257
To Delete a Custom Cycle............................................................................... 257
To Create Holemaking NC Sequences Using Custom Cycles .................... 258
To Assign Values to References and Variables ........................................... 258
Example: Creating a Custom Holemaking NC Sequence ............................ 259
About Auto Drilling.......................................................................................... 260
To Create an Auto Drilling NC Sequence ...................................................... 260
To Select a Coordinate System and Retract Plane ...................................... 261
The Default Coordinate System and Retract Plane ...................................... 261
16 Pro/NC
To Filter Rows .................................................................................................. 261
Filters Available for Auto Drilling................................................................... 262
To Edit Hole Parameters ................................................................................. 262
To Apply Hole Strategies ................................................................................ 262
Defining Your Hole Strategies ........................................................................ 263
To Customize the Table .................................................................................. 263
To Reorder the NC Sequences Created by Auto Drilling............................. 264
About Wire EDM NC Sequences .................................................................... 264
To Create a 2-Axis Wire EDM NC Sequence ................................................. 264
Contouring and No Core Cut Motions ........................................................... 265
To Create Rough, Finish, and Detach Cut Motions ...................................... 265
Example: Rough, Finish, and Detach Cut Motions ...................................... 268
To Specify Thread Point and Approach Point .............................................. 269
Example: Specifying Thread Point and Approach Point ............................. 269
To Specify Taper Angle for 2-Axis Contouring............................................. 269
Example: Corner Conditions .......................................................................... 271
To Create No Core Cut Motions ..................................................................... 272
Specifying a Start Point for No Core Cut Motions........................................ 272
To Use Previous Cut Motions......................................................................... 273
To Mirror Cut Motions ..................................................................................... 273
Example: Mirroring Cut Motions .................................................................... 273
To Create a 4-Axis Wire EDM NC Sequence in Taper Angle Format .......... 274
To Create a 4-Axis Wire EDM NC Sequence in Head1/Head2 Format ........ 274
Pro/NC 17
Automatic Synchronization of Start and End Points ................................... 275
Register Tables ................................................................................................ 276
To Set Up the Register Table(s) ..................................................................... 276
Radius Substitution Tables ............................................................................ 277
To Set Up the Radius Substitution Table(s).................................................. 277
About Auxiliary NC Sequences ...................................................................... 278
To Create an Auxiliary NC Sequence............................................................. 278
About User-Defined NC Sequences............................................................... 278
To Define a Manufacturing UDF ..................................................................... 279
To Place a Previously Defined Group in Another Manufacturing Model ... 279
Example: Manufacturing a Group of Features.............................................. 280
Including Operations, Workcells, and Reference Superfeatures in a

Manufacturing UDF.......................................................................................... 280
Example: Using a Manufacturing UDF with Pro/PROGRAM ....................... 281
About the Customize Dialog Box ................................................................... 283
To Create a Control Point ............................................................................... 284
Offset Control Points....................................................................................... 285
To Create an Offset Control Point.................................................................. 285
To Create an Automatic Cut Motion............................................................... 285
To Redefine a Follow Cut Motion ................................................................... 285
The Follow Cut Dialog Box ............................................................................. 286
To Split a Follow Cut Motion .......................................................................... 286
To Create a Follow Sketch Motion ................................................................. 286
Example: Using Tool Kerf and CL Command ............................................... 287
To Create a GoTo Point Motion ...................................................................... 289
To Create a Go Delta Motion........................................................................... 290
18 Pro/NC
Modifying the Go Delta Increments ............................................................... 290
To Create a Go Home Motion ......................................................................... 290
Plunge Motions ................................................................................................ 291
To Create a Plunge Motion ............................................................................. 291
To Create a Retract Motion ............................................................................. 291
To Create a Tangent Approach Motion.......................................................... 292
To Create a Tangent Exit Motion.................................................................... 292
To Create a Normal Approach Motion ........................................................... 292
To Create a Normal Exit Motion ..................................................................... 292
Lead In and Lead Out Motions ....................................................................... 293
To Create a Lead In Motion............................................................................. 293
To Create a Lead Out Motion.......................................................................... 294
To Create a Helical Approach Motion ............................................................ 294
To Create a Helical Exit Motion ...................................................................... 294
To Create an Approach Motion Along Tool Axis .......................................... 295
To Create an Exit Motion Along Tool Axis .................................................... 295
To Specify Parameters for a Tool Motion...................................................... 295
Implicit Tool Motions....................................................................................... 296
CL Commands ................................................................................................. 296
To Insert a CL Command ................................................................................ 296
Modifying CL Commands ............................................................................... 297
To Create a Follow Sketch Motion in Holemaking ....................................... 297
To Create a Connect Motion ........................................................................... 298
To Redefine the Connect Motions.................................................................. 298
About Customizing the Operation Tool Path ................................................ 299
Pro/NC 19
To Reorder Output of NC Sequence Tool Paths........................................... 299
To Synchronize Output of NC Sequence Tool Paths ................................... 300
To Specify Synch Points................................................................................. 300
Adding CL Commands at the Operation Level ............................................. 300
To Modify a CL Command .............................................................................. 301
To Find a CL Command .................................................................................. 301
To Delete a CL Command ............................................................................... 302
To Copy a CL Command ................................................................................. 302
About CL Data.................................................................................................. 302
To Write CL Data to a File ............................................................................... 302
Default CL File Names..................................................................................... 303
Sets of NC Sequences..................................................................................... 303
To Create a Set of NC Sequences .................................................................. 304
To Output CL Data for a Set of NC Sequences ............................................. 304
To Process CL Data on a Remote Machine................................................... 304
To Input a CL Data File.................................................................................... 305
To Display CL Data for an Operation, NC Sequence, or a Set of NC Sequences

........................................................................................................................... 305
The DISPLAY CL Menu.................................................................................... 305
Example: Translating CL Data........................................................................ 307
To Rotate or Translate CL Data ...................................................................... 307
Example: Mirroring CL Data ........................................................................... 307
To Mirror CL Data ............................................................................................ 307
To Scale CL Data ............................................................................................. 308
To Output CL Data in Different Units ............................................................. 308
20 Pro/NC
To Edit CL Data Files....................................................................................... 308
To Perform Screen Editing of CL Data .......................................................... 309
To Perform Search/Replace............................................................................ 310
To Perform CL Data Gouge Checking ........................................................... 310
NC Aliases ........................................................................................................ 311
To Specify an NC Alias.................................................................................... 312
To Include Pre- and Post-Machining Files .................................................... 312
Converting CL Files......................................................................................... 312
To Convert a CL File........................................................................................ 312
To Display Tool Path for an NC Sequence .................................................... 313
About the PLAY PATH Dialog Box................................................................. 313
To Display the Tool Path................................................................................. 314
To Add a Break Point ...................................................................................... 314
Manipulating Break Points.............................................................................. 314
To Position the Tool ........................................................................................ 315
Using Parameters in CL Commands.............................................................. 315
To Delete a CL Command ............................................................................... 315
To Redefine a CL Command........................................................................... 315
To Save CL Data in a File ................................................................................ 316
About Subroutine Programming .................................................................... 316
To Create a New Subroutine Pattern ............................................................. 316
Limitations........................................................................................................ 318
To Redefine a Subroutine Pattern.................................................................. 318
Examples: Subroutine Programming ............................................................ 318
Pro/NC 21
About NC Post-Processing............................................................................. 318
To Generate a CL File and an MCD File at the Same Time .......................... 319
To Generate an MCD File from an Existing CL File ...................................... 319
About CL Output.............................................................................................. 320
Supported CL Data Commands...................................................................... 320
CL Output for Holemaking Cycles ................................................................. 325
CL Output for Circular Interpolation .............................................................. 328
Synchronized Output for XY-UV 4-Axis Wire EDM ....................................... 329
About NC Check .............................................................................................. 330
About Using Vericut ........................................................................................ 330
About Using Pro/NC-Check ............................................................................ 331
To Access NC Check at the Time of Creating an NC Sequence ................. 331
To Access NC Check at Any Time ................................................................. 331
To Set Up the Display...................................................................................... 331
NC Check Colors ............................................................................................. 331
To Change a Default NC Check Color............................................................ 332
To Store the Color Setup ................................................................................ 332
To Control the Tool Display............................................................................ 332
To Change the Step Size................................................................................. 333
To Change the Resolution .............................................................................. 333
To Run the CL Data ......................................................................................... 333
Clip Planes ....................................................................................................... 333
To Create or Modify a Clip Plane.................................................................... 334
To Change Image............................................................................................. 334
To Refresh the Display.................................................................................... 334
22 Pro/NC
To Access NC Check When Editing CL Data ................................................ 335
To Set Up Trim Planes..................................................................................... 335
To Save an Image ............................................................................................ 335
To Restore an Image ....................................................................................... 335
To Use Shaded Images ................................................................................... 336
About Modifying NC Sequences .................................................................... 336
To Modify an NC Sequence ............................................................................ 336
Modifying Parameters of Multiple Automatic Cut Motions.......................... 337
To Change a Parameter Value for All Cut Motions at Once ........................ 337
To Regenerate the Manufacturing Model ...................................................... 337
To Redefine an NC Sequence......................................................................... 337
To Reorder an NC Sequence .......................................................................... 338
To Suppress or Delete Mill Volumes and Surfaces ...................................... 338
About Patterning NC Sequences ................................................................... 339
Coordinate System Patterns........................................................................... 339
To Create a Coordinate Pattern of an NC Sequence .................................... 339
Using Relations................................................................................................ 340
To Create a Rotary Table Pattern of an NC Sequence ................................. 340
To Modify a Coordinate Pattern of an NC Sequence ................................... 340
Reference Patterns .......................................................................................... 341
To Create a Reference Manufacturing Pattern ............................................. 341
To Reference Pattern a Volume Milling NC Sequence ................................. 341
To Create a Dimension Pattern of an NC Sequence .................................... 341
About Changing Feed Colors ......................................................................... 341
To Change a Feed Color ................................................................................. 342
Pro/NC 23
To Change a Feed Range................................................................................ 342
About Model Tree ............................................................................................ 343
To Display the Manufacturing Features ........................................................ 343
To Select the Features to Display .................................................................. 343
To Display the Manufacturing Parent/Child Relationships ......................... 343
To Add Manufacturing Parameters ................................................................ 343
About Process Information............................................................................. 343
To Output Manufacturing Information ........................................................... 344
To Set Up Filter Configuration........................................................................ 344
Route Sheet...................................................................................................... 344
To Generate a Route Sheet............................................................................. 345
Using Pro/REPORT in Pro/NC ........................................................................ 345
To Create a Customized Report on a Manufacturing Process.................... 346
Examples: Creating a Customized Report on a Manufacturing Process... 346
About Naming Conventions ........................................................................... 347
24 Pro/NC
About Pro/NC
Pro/NC will create the data necessary to drive an NC machine tool to machine a Pro/ENGINEER part. It does
this by providing the tools to let the manufacturing engineer follow a logical sequence of steps to progress from
a design model to ASCII CL data files that can be post-processed into NC machine data. The illustration below
summarizes the Pro/NC process.
1 2
3
4
5 6 7
10
9
11 12
13
14
1 Design Model
2 Workpiece
3 Manufacturing Model
4 Machine Tools (Workcells)
5 Fixture Setups
6 Set Up Manufacturing Database
7 Tool
8 Set Up Operation
9 Pro/NC
10 Define NC Sequences
11 Create CL Data Files (APT)
12 Produce In-Process Model
13 Post-Process
14 Drive NC Machine Tool
Licensing Requirements
Pro/NC is a family of optional modules that can be ordered in any combination, to provide a "custom fit" of the
available functionality to your company’s needs.
The Pro/NC-ADVANCED license covers the complete Pro/NC functionality as described in this Help System.
Pro/NC 25
Other modules provide subsets of this functionality.
The table below lists the functionality available with each of the modules.
If you do not have the appropriate license to perform a specific set of functions, you may need to use a different
command to start Pro/ENGINEER, or you might be able to "float" the necessary options to your working
session.
IF YOU HAVE YOU CAN
Pro/NC-MILL Perform 2.5-Axis Milling with positioning

Perform 3-Axis Milling and Holemaking with positioning
Pro/NC-TURN Perform 2-Axis Turning and centerline drilling
Perform 4-Axis Turning and centerline drilling
Pro/NC-WEDM Perform 2- and 4-Axis Wire EDM NC sequences
Pro/NC-ADVANCED Perform 2.5- to 5-Axis Milling and Holemaking
Perform 2- and 4-Axis Turning and Holemaking
Perform Milling, Turning, and Holemaking NC sequences on
Mill/Turn centers
Perform 2- and 4-Axis Wire EDM NC sequences
Pro/NC Concepts
Design Model
The Pro/ENGINEER design model, representing the finished product, is used as the basis for all manufacturing
operations. Features, surfaces, and edges are selected on the design model as references for each tool path.
Referencing the geometry of the design model sets up an associative link between the design model and the
workpiece. Because of this link, when the design model is changed, all associated manufacturing operations are
updated to reflect the change.
Parts, assemblies, and sheetmetal parts may be used as design models.
The following illustration shows an example of a design model—a valve housing.
1 Holes to be drilled
2 Surfaces to be milled
26 Pro/NC
Workpiece
The workpiece represents the raw stock that is going to be machined by the manufacturing operations. Its use is
optional in Pro/NC. The benefits of using a workpiece include:
· Automatic definition of extents of machining when creating NC sequences.
· Dynamic material removal simulation and gouge checking (available with Pro/NC-CHECK).
· In-process documentation by capturing removed material.
The workpiece can represent any form of raw stock; such as bar stock or casting. It may be created easily by
copying the design model and modifying the dimensions or deleting/suppressing features to represent the real
workpiece.
The following illustration shows an example of a workpiece—a casting.
1 Holes removed - not part of casting

2 Dimensions increased to allow for material removal
3 Dimensions decreased to allow for material removal
If you have a Pro/ASSEMBLY license, the workpiece can also be created directly in Manufacturing mode by
referencing geometry of the design model.
As a Pro/ENGINEER part, the workpiece can be manipulated as any other: it can exist as an instance of a part
family table; it can be modified and redefined.
Manufacturing Model
A regular manufacturing model consists of a design model (also called "reference part" since it is used as a
reference for creating NC sequences) and a workpiece assembled together (see illustration below). As the
manufacturing process is developed, the material removal simulation can be performed on the workpiece.
Generally, at the end of the manufacturing process the workpiece geometry should be coincident with the
geometry of the design model. However, material removal is an optional step.
Pro/NC 27
1
1 Solid lines show design model

2 Dotted lines show workpiece
3 Reference part is assembled inside the workpiece
If you are not concerned with material removal, you do not have to define the workpiece geometry. Use a
workpiece represented by a coordinate system ("workpiece with no geometry"), or no workpiece at all in
Assembly machining.
When a manufacturing model is created, it generally consists of four separate files:
· The design model—filename.prt
· The workpiece—filename.prt
· The manufacturing assembly—manufacturename.asm
· The manufacturing process file—manufacturename.mfg
Part and Assembly Machining

There are two separate types of Pro/NC:
· Part machining—Acts on the assumption that the manufacturing model contains one reference part and one
workpiece (also a part).
· Assembly machining—No assumptions are made by the system as to the manufacturing model
configuration. The manufacturing model can be an assembly of any level of complexity (as with sub-
assemblies), and can contain any number of independent workpieces and/or reference models. It can also
contain other components that may be part of the manufacturing assembly, but have no direct effect on the
actual material removal process (for example, the turntable, or clamps.).
Once the manufacturing model is created, Part and Assembly machining use similar techniques to develop the
manufacturing process. If there are specific techniques for defining an NC sequence they will be described in
the appropriate chapter. Keep in mind that in Part machining the system automatically determines some of the
machining aspects based on the workpiece geometry; therefore, while Assembly machining gives you more
flexibility in building the manufacturing model, it may also require extra steps when creating the NC sequences.
The major difference between Part and Assembly machining is that in Part machining all the components of the
manufacturing process (operations, workcells, or NC sequences) are part features that belong to the workpiece,
while in Assembly machining these are assembly features that belong to the manufacturing assembly.
Note: Use Assembly machining if you do not have the permission to make changes to the workpiece model.
28 Pro/NC
When you create an automatic material removal feature in Assembly machining, the system lets you specify
whether or not the feature should be visible at part level (that is, when you retrieve a workpiece in Part mode).
To Create a Manufacturing Model

1. From the Pro/ENGINEER menu bar, choose File > New (or click the corresponding icon). The system
displays the New dialog box.
2. Choose the Manufacturing option button under Type.
3. Specify the type of the model by selecting an option button under Sub-Type:
- If you are machining a single part with only one workpiece, choose NC Part.
- If you are machining an assembly of reference parts with no, one, or many workpieces, or if you do not
have the permission to make changes to the workpiece model, choose NC Assembly.
4. Type a name for the new manufacturing model in the Name text box, unless you want to accept the default.
5. Click OK.
6. If you have chosen NC Part as the sub-type, the system displays the browser window, listing all the part
files in the current directory. Select the name of the reference part.
7. The system displays the MANUFACTURE menu, the model tree, and, in case of Part machining, the
reference part.
To Retrieve a Manufacturing Model

1. From the Pro/ENGINEER menu bar, choose File > Open (or click the corresponding icon). The system
displays the browser window.
2. By default, all files are listed in the browser window. To narrow down the search, choose Manufacturing
from the Type drop-down list. You can also use one of the following options from the Sub-type list:
- All—Lists all the models in the Manufacturing family of products, that is, all the models that have the
".mfg" extension (including Cast, Mold, Sheet Metal manufacturing, and so on).
- NC Part—Lists only the Part manufacturing models created in Release 18.0 and later.
- NC Assembly—Lists only the Assembly manufacturing models created in Release 18.0 and later.
- Pre-18.0 MFG—Lists all the Part and Assembly manufacturing models created prior to Release 18.0.
Note: Filtering by sub-type applies only to files created in Release 16.0 and later. Use All to retrieve
".mfg" files created prior to Release 16.0.
3. Select the name of the model to retrieve from the browser window.
4. The system displays the manufacturing model, the model tree, and the MANUFACTURE menu.
To Place a Workpiece in Part Machining

When you create a new model for part machining, you are immediately prompted to enter the name of the
design model. This is the base component of the manufacturing assembly. To continue with the manufacturing
assembly:
1. Choose Mfg Model from the MANUFACTURE menu.
2. Choose one of the options:
- Assemble—To assemble the workpiece to the design model. Choose Workpiece and enter the name of
the workpiece. The workpiece will be retrieved for assembling with the design model. Assemble the
workpiece by specifying the proper placement constraints.
- Create—To create the workpiece directly in Manufacturing mode (this option is only available if you
have an appropriate license). Choose Workpiece, enter the name of the workpiece, and create the first
feature of the workpiece referencing geometry of the design model as necessary. To create more
features on the workpiece, use the Mod Work option in the MFG MODIFY menu.
To Manipulate a Workpiece
While there are no manufacturing operations created, you can disassemble the workpiece using the Delete
option in the MFG MDL menu and create or assemble another one. You can also redefine the assembly
Pro/NC 29
constraints of the workpiece using the Redefine option in the MFG MDL menu.
In Assembly machining, you can similarly delete or redefine other components of the manufacturing model.
To Place a "No Geometry" Workpiece in Part

Machining
You do not have to define the raw stock geometry if you are not concerned with the material removal
simulation. Since the manufacturing operations are stored as workpiece features, the workpiece part must be
present in the manufacturing assembly; however, it need not have any geometry. You will be able to create
manufacturing operations and generate the appropriate CL data (no material removal simulation will be
performed).
2. Choose Create, Workpiece, and enter a name for the workpiece.
3. Choose Datum, Coord Sys, and create a coordinate system to represent the workpiece. Return to the
MANUFACTURE menu.
Note: If you do not have the appropriate license and cannot create a workpiece in Manufacturing mode,
create the workpiece containing a coordinate system in Part mode and then assemble it to the reference part.
Part Family Tables in Pro/NC

The Replace option in the MFG MDL menu allows you to replace a design model by a member of the same part
family. You can create NC sequences for one member of the family, and then generate appropriate CL data for
other members by replacing the design model and regenerating the manufacturing model.
When you replace a design model and regenerate the workpiece, the NC sequences and material removal
(where applicable) are updated according to the new model.
Note: This functionality only works if you use the Replace option in the MFG MDL menu. For example, if
you replace a reference part with another family member using Simplified Representations, the NC
sequences will still reference the original reference part.
To Replace a Design Model in Part Machining

2. Choose Replace from the MFG MDL menu.
3. Select the member (design model) to replace.
4. The INSTANCES menu appears with a namelist of instances (including the generic part) and two additional
options Show Table and Edit Table.
5. Select the replacement instance from the menu.
6. Regenerate.
30 Pro/NC
Example: Replacing a Design Model
4
3
5 6
1 Workpiece (shown in dashed lines where different from the design model)
2 Design model
3 Initial manufacturing assembly
4 Create the operations.
5 Replace the design model with another family instance.
6 Regenerate to update the workpiece.
To Build a Manufacturing Model in Assembly

Machining
Assembly machining allows you to define a complex manufacturing assembly using an extensive set of
techniques. You can assemble parts, regular assemblies, or other manufacturing assemblies, and create parts
directly in Manufacturing mode.
When you choose Mfg Model from the MANUFACTURE menu, the MFG MDL menu appears with the
following options:
· Assemble—Assemble a reference model (part or assembly), workpiece (part or assembly), a general
assembly, or another manufacturing assembly.
· Create—Create a reference part or a workpiece (part).
· Redefine—Redefine the assembly constraints of a selected component.
· Delete—Disassemble any of the manufacturing assembly components. If you try to disassemble a
component that is referenced by an existing NC sequence, you will get an error message. You can then
redefine or delete the NC sequence and try again.
You can use the MFG MDL menu options in any combination and as many times as needed.
In order for the assembly machining NC sequences to be created correctly, the system must "know" which
components are reference parts, which are workpieces, and which are "others" (that is, stationary fixtures). As
you assemble or create components, you have to classify them:
· When you choose Assemble from the MFG MDL menu, the following options are available:
- Ref Model—Assemble a reference model (part or assembly). If an assembly is specified, all its
components will be classified as reference parts.
Pro/NC 31
- Workpiece—Assemble a workpiece (part or assembly). If an assembly is specified, all its components
will be classified as workpieces.
- Fixture—Assemble a fixture (part or assembly). If an assembly is specified, all its components will be
classified as fixtures.
- Gen Assem—Assemble a general assembly. In this case, you have to classify the assembly
components. Choose Ref Model from the MFG CLASS menu and select all the components (parts or
subassemblies) to be classified as reference models. Choose Done Sel when finished. Then choose
Workpiece from the MFG CLASS menu and select all the components to be classified as workpieces.
Choose Done Sel when finished. All the components that you have not classified as either reference
model or workpiece will stay in the manufacturing assembly but will have no effect in defining
manufacturing geometry.
- Mfg Assem—Assemble another manufacturing assembly. Its reference model(s) and workpiece(s) will
retain their classification in the new manufacturing model. However, any NC sequences that have
existed in the manufacturing assembly prior to the current manufacturing process will not be accessible
here: you will not be able to display CL data, or modify parameters.
· When you choose Create from the MFG MDL menu, the component will be classified as the reference part
or the workpiece, depending on the option you use (Ref Model or Workpiece).
To Reclassify Components of a Manufacturing

Assembly
This functionality provides you with an easy way to reclassify fixtures, workpieces, and reference parts for
existing assemblies. It will also save time for manufacturing engineers who receive an assembly with fixtures
that may have been created in Assembly mode, and who need to specify which components are the fixtures, and
where are the reference part and the workpiece.
1. On the MANUFACTURE menu, click Mfg Model > Reclassify.
2. Select component(s) that you want to reclassify. Click Done Select when finished.
3. Select the new class for selected components:
- Ref Model—The selected components will be treated as reference models.
- Workpiece—The selected components will be treated as workpieces.
- Fixture—The selected components will be treated as fixtures.
Click Done.
4. Select more components to reclassify, or click Quit Select to finish the reclassification process.
About Manufacturing Process

The Pro/NC process consists of the following basic steps:
1. Set up the manufacturing database. It may contain such items as workcells (machine tools) available,
tooling, fixture configurations, site parameters, or tool tables. This step is optional. If you do not want to set
up all your database up front, you can go directly into the machining process and later define any of the
items above when you actually need them.
2. Define an operation. An operation setup may contain the following elements:
- Operation name
- Workcell (machine tool)
- Coordinate system for CL output
- Operation comments
- Operation parameters
- FROM and HOME points
You have to define a workcell and a coordinate system before you can start creating NC sequences. Other
setup elements are optional.
32 Pro/NC
3. Create NC sequences for the specified operation. Each NC sequence is a series of tool motions with the
addition of specific post-processor words that are not motion-related but required for the correct NC output.
The tool path is automatically generated by the system based on the NC sequence type (such as Volume
Milling, Outside Turning), cut geometry, and manufacturing parameters. You can apply more "low level"
control, if you like, by:
- Defining your own tool motions, that is, approach, exit, and connect motions. Tool motions include
Automatic Cut motions.
- Inserting non-motion CL commands.
4. For each completed NC sequence, you can create a material removal feature, either by making the system
automatically remove material (where applicable), or by manually constructing a regular Pro/ENGINEER
feature on the workpiece (such as Slot or Hole).
Modal Settings
Most of the machining setup elements are modal, that is, all subsequent NC sequences will use this setting until
you explicitly change it. Among those are:
· Operation setup (including the workcell and Machine coordinate system)
· Fixture setup
· Tool (provided the tool type is compatible with the NC sequence type)
· Manufacturing parameters of an activated site
· NC Sequence coordinate system (for the first NC sequence, the Machine Coordinate system specified for
the operation will be implicitly used as the NC sequence coordinate system as well, unless you explicitly
specify another one)
· Retract surface
Walk-Through Menus
Most of Pro/NC menus are designed to "walk" you through the process development. These menus use
checkmarks to select an option; more than one option may be selected at a time. When you choose Done from
such a menu, the system will invoke the appropriate user interface for each selected option in turn.
If some selection is necessary at a particular point, the checkmark will be automatically turned on. For example,
when you first set up an operation, only the Workcell and Mach Csys options will have checkmarks next to
them. You can turn other checkmarks on as well (for example, to specify the FROM and HOME points), but
you are not required to do so. Similarly, when you start defining the first NC sequence, you will have a
checkmark at the Tool option. For the next NC sequence, however, the Tool option will not have a checkmark
next to it (provided the previous tool is applicable). Turn it on only if you want to specify another tool.
Another aspect of the "walk-through" functionality in the process development user interface is that if you omit
a step the system will prompt you for the required information. For example, if you select the NC Sequence
option while the operation has not been set up, the system will bring up the OPERATION menu first (as if you
have selected Operation), and then invoke the user interface for creating an NC sequence.
This allows you to reduce the time and minimize the number of menu selections involved in defining an NC
sequence.
To Get Process Status and Tool Path Information

Once you choose Machining from the MANUFACTURE menu, the Manufacturing Info dialog box (Info Box)
containing the current manufacturing info will appear at the top of the screen. The Info Box has two tabulated
pages: Status and Tool Path Info. Select on the appropriate tab (Status or Tool Path Info) at the top of the Info
Box to toggle between the pages.
The following items are listed in the Status page of the Info Box:
· Operation name
· Workcell name and type
Pro/NC 33
· Machine coordinate system and the model it belongs to
· NC sequence type
· Tool ID and pocket number
· NC Sequence coordinate system and the model it belongs to
If you want to find out more about a particular item, select on the appropriate button in the Info Box, and a
corresponding Info window or subwindow will appear. The following information can be obtained by pressing
the buttons in the Info Box:
· Operation—The current operation data will be displayed in the Info window.
· Workcell—The current workcell data will be displayed in the Info window.
· Machine or NC Sequence coordinate system—Highlights on the screen.
· NC sequence—The current NC sequence info will be displayed in the Info window.
· Tool—The system displays the Tool Setup dialog box, which allows you to set up tooling.
The information in the Info Box updates as you develop the manufacturing process.
When you display the tool path, the appropriate information appears in the Tool Path Info section of the Info
Box, such as the feedrate, the spindle speed, the current XYZ coordinates of the tool, the current IJK
coordinates of the tool axis, and so on. These values update to match the tool’s location.
About Operations
An operation is a series of NC sequences performed at a particular workcell and using a particular coordinate
system for CL data output.
Note: You have to set up an operation before you can start creating NC sequences.
An operation is a workpiece (or assembly) feature that contains the following information:
· Name
· Workcell to be used
· Coordinate system for CL data output
· Retract surface
· Comments (optional)
· A set of manufacturing parameters (optional)
· FROM and HOME points (optional)
When the NC sequences and material removal features are created, they contain a reference to the current
operation name. Operation setting is modal, that is, once an operation is created, it stays current until another
operation is created or activated.
To Create an Operation
You have to create an operation before you can start defining NC sequences. When creating the operation, the
required elements are the machine tool name and the Program Zero coordinate system.
1. On the MANUFACTURE menu, click Machining > Operation (or Mfg Setup > Operation).
The Operation Setup dialog box opens.
Note: If you do not have any operations defined, the system automatically opens the Operation Setup
dialog box and starts creating a new operation when you click Machining or Mfg Setup.
2. If you already have defined some operations for the current manufacturing process, click the New icon at
the top of the dialog box to start creating a new operation.
The Operation Setup dialog box displays the default settings for the operation name and output parameters.
To change the default name, type the new name in the Operation Name text box.
34 Pro/NC
3. Select or create a machine tool (workcell). If you have set up some machine tools prior to creating the
operation, their names appear in the NC Machine drop-down list. To create a machine tool, click
next to the NC Machine drop-down list.
4. Define the Program Zero. Click next to the Machine Zero text box and select or create a coordinate
system. Once the Program Zero is defined, the name of the coordinate system appears in the Machine Zero
text box, and clicking next to it will highlight the coordinate system on the screen.
5. Use any of the other, optional, elements of operation setup, if needed. You can:
- On the General tab, set up the Retract surface. The Retract surface is used for creating Milling and
Holemaking NC sequences. If you do not define it at this time, you will be prompted to do this once
you start creating the first Milling or Holemaking NC sequence. Click See Also for details.
- On the General tab, click to assemble and set up the fixtures. Click See Also for details.
- On the From/Home tab, specify datum points to serve as FROM and HOME locations.
- On the Output tab, change the output parameters or type the operation comments, to be output using
PPRINT.
6. Click OK to finalize creating the operation and close the dialog box.
7. If you want to immediately create another operation, click Apply, and then click the New icon at the top of
the Operation Setup dialog box.
The Operation Setup Dialog Box

The Operation Setup dialog box contains the following elements:
· Operation Name—The operation name identifies the operation within the manufacturing process. The
default operation names have the format OP010, OP020, where the number gets automatically incremented
by the system. You can type any name.
· NC Machine—The name of the machine tool (workcell) used to perform the operation. If you have set up
some machine tools prior to creating the operation, their names appear in the NC Machine drop-down list.
To create or redefine a machine tool, click next to the NC Machine drop-down list.
· Fixture Setup—This section contains the icons for creating, modifying, and deleting fixture setups. The
drop-down list contains the names of all the fixture setups defined for the operation, with the name of the
currently active setup displayed in the list box.
In the lower portion of the Operation Setup dialog box there are three tabs: General, From/Home, and
Output. They contain the following elements:
The General tab
· Machine Zero—Select or create the Program Zero coordinate system, to be used for NC output and for
other machining references.
· Use Rotary Clearance—This option is available for 4-axis machines only. It allows you to define a safe z-
level retract height for cutting tools, to ensure safety of table rotations. The Rotation Clearance value
specifies the minimum distance by which the reference model, workpiece, and fixture components will be
cleared during table rotations. The default value is 2" (in English units) or 50 mm (in metric units). You can
type any positive value. In addition, you can specify a Safe Rotary Point for tools that are too long to be
retracted to the Rotation Clearance level. Type the X, Y, and Z coordinate values in the Safe Rotary Point
text boxes. In order for a tool to use the Safe Rotary Point instead of Rotation Clearance, you have to mark
it as "long" in the Tool Manager, by selecting the Long Tool checkbox on the Settings tabbed page of the
Tool Setup dialog box.
· The Retract group box—Specify how the tool retracts between the cuts:
- Surface—Set up the retract surface.
- Tolerance—Controls maximum deviation of the tool when it moves along a non-planar retract surface.
The default is 0.1" (in English units) or 1 mm (in metric units). You can type any value.
Pro/NC 35
· Stock Material—Select a name of the stock material.
Note: You have to set up the material directory structure up front; otherwise, the only option available in the
Stock Material drop-down list is Unspecified.
The From/Home tab

· FROM Point—Create or select a datum point to serve as the FROM location. Once set, the name of the
datum point appears in the text box. Clicking highlights the datum point on the screen. Clicking
cancels the FROM setting.

· HOME Point—Create or select a datum point to serve as the HOME location. Once set, the name of the
datum point appears in the text box. Clicking highlights the datum point on the screen. Clicking
cancels the HOME setting.

Note: If the workcell associated with the operation has two heads, you can set up separate FROM and HOME
points for the second head. In this case, a From motion will be created between the From point specified for a
head (that is, Head 1 or Head 2) and the first point of the first NC sequence that uses this head; a Home motion
will be created from the last point of the last NC sequence that uses this head to the Home point for the head.
The Output tab
· Output NCL File—The default name for the operation cutter location (CL) data file. You can type any
name. Clicking Use Default sets it back to the system default.
· PARTNO—The part name, output with the PARTNO command, as well as using PPRINT. You can type
any name. Clicking Use Default sets it back to the system default (the name of the workpiece for Part
machining, and the name of the manufacturing assembly for Assembly machining).
· Startup File—Type the name of the file you want to be included at the very beginning of the operation CL
file (after the PARTNO, MACHIN, and UNITS commands). The file must be located in your current
working directory and have the extension ".ncl".
· Shutdown File— Type the name of the file you want to be included at the very end of the operation CL file.
The file must be located in your current working directory and have the extension ".ncl".
· Comments—Type the operation comments in the text box below. These comments can be output using
PPRINT.
To Specify Comments for an Operation

The comments for an operation can be listed in the Manufacturing info; they can also be output in the CL data
files using PPRINT.
1. On the Output tab of the Operation Setup dialog box, type the operation comments in the Comments text
box.
2. Use the following buttons located to the right of the Comments text box, as necessary:
- Open—Read in an exiting text file containing operation comments. The contents of this file will
replace the current operation comments, if any.
- Insert—Insert the contents of an exiting text file containing operation comments at the cursor location,
while preserving the current operation comments, if any.
- Save As—Save current operation comments in a text file.
- Clear—Remove current operation comments.
To Activate an Operation
Once an operation is created, it stays current until another operation is created or activated. All newly created
NC sequences will be included in this operation.
36 Pro/NC
Follow the procedure below if you want to activate one of the previously created operations (to add another NC
sequence to it, or to customize its tool path).
1. Click Operation.
2. The Operation Setup dialog box opens, with the name of the currently active operation displayed in the
Operation Name text box.
3. Select the name of the operation you want to activate from the drop-down list.
4. Click OK to activate the operation and close the dialog box.
About Workcells
A workcell is a workpiece (or assembly) feature that specifies a machine tool using:
· Name
· Type
· Number of axes
· A set of parameters
· Associated tools
· Associated site(s)
Workcell Types
The workcell type determines the types of NC sequences that can be created using it (for example, 4 Axis Lathe
allows you to perform 2- and 4-axis Turning and Holemaking).
Workcell Type Description NC Sequence Types

Available
Lathe 2- or 4-Axis Turning and Turning:

Holemaking. Area
Profile
Groove
Thread
Holemaking:
Drill
Face
Bore
Countersink
Tap
Ream
Mill 3- to 5-Axis Milling and Milling:
Holemaking. Volume
Local Mill
Surface Mill
Face
Profile
Pocketing
Trajectory
Thread
Pro/NC 37
Engraving
Plunge
Holemaking:
Drill
Face
Bore
Countersink
Tap
Ream
Mill/Turn Mill/Turn center (2-Axis Milling:
Turning to 5-Axis Milling and Volume
Holemaking).
Local Mill
Surface Mill
Face
Profile
Pocketing
Trajectory
Thread
Engraving
Plunge
Turning:
Area
Profile
Groove
Thread
Holemaking:
Drill
Face
Bore
Countersink
Tap
Ream
WEDM Wire Electric Discharge WEDM
Machine (2- or 4-Axis), as well
as any other type of 2D
Contouring (for example, flame
cut or laser.).
You can create a workcell at setup time and then use it in an operation, or create a workcell directly when
defining an operation.
To Create a Machine Tool (Workcell)

1. On the MFG SETUP menu, click Workcell. Another way to access this functionality is to click in the
Operation Setup dialog box.
The Machine Tool Settings dialog box opens.
38 Pro/NC
2. If you already have defined some machine tools for the current manufacturing process, click the New icon at
the top of the dialog box to start creating a new machine tool.
The Machine Tool Settings dialog box displays the default settings for the machine name, type, and
parameters. You can click OK or Apply at this point to create a machine tool with default name and
parameters, and no cutting tools associated with it.
3. To change the machine name, type the new name in the Machine Name text box.
4. To change the machine type, use the Machine Type drop-down list.
Click See Also to see a summary of the existing workcell types and the NC sequence types subsequently
available for each of them. The number of axes specified for the workcell will also affect the NC sequence
options; for example, if you set up a 4-Axis Mill workcell, you will have the 3 Axis and 4 Axis options
available when creating NC sequences, but the 5 Axis option will not appear.
Auxiliary NC sequences are available for any type of workcell.
5. To change the number of axes, use the Number of Axes drop-down list.
6. To change the parameters, use the tabs located in the lower portion of the dialog box.
7. To set up the cutting tools for the machine, click the Cutting Tool Setup button located on the Cutting
Tools tab. You can also set up the tools later by clicking NC Setup > Cutting Tool Manager.
8. Click OK to finalize the machine tool creation and close the dialog box.
9. If you want to immediately create another machine tool, click Apply, and then click the New or the Open
icon at the top of the Machine Tool Settings dialog box.
You can save the current machine tool, along with its parameters, by clicking the Save icon at the top of the
Machine Tool Settings dialog box. You can then use the Open icon at the top of the Machine Tool
Settings dialog box to create a new machine tool with the same parameters, whether in this or in another NC
process.
Machine Tool Settings

A machine tool is identified by the following elements:
· Machine Name—The machine name identifies the machine tool within the manufacturing process. The
default machine names have the format MACH01, MACH02, where the number gets automatically
incremented by the system. You can type any name.
When you save the machine tool data on disk, the system uses the Machine Name as a filename (with the
.gph extension).
· Machine Type—The machine type can be Mill, Lathe, Mill/Turn, or Wedm.
· Number of Axes—Depending on the machine type, can be:
- For Mill—3 Axis (default), 4 Axis, or 5 Axis.
- For Lathe—1 Turret (default) or 2 Turrets.
- For Mill/Turn—2 Axis, 3 Axis, 4 Axis, or 5 Axis (default).
- For Wedm—2 Axis (default) or 4 Axis.
· CNC Control—The controller name (optional).
· Location—The location of the machine tool (optional).
· Orientation—(Available only for Lathe or Mill/Turn machine tools.) Specifies the lathe orientation:
Horizontal (default) or Vertical. This option defines the default Sketcher orientation when you later create
Turning NC sequences in this workcell:
- For Horizontal, the z-axis of the NC Sequence coordinate system will point horizontally to the right,
and the x-axis—vertically upward.
- For Vertical, the z-axis of the NC Sequence coordinate system will point vertically upward, and the x-
axis—horizontally to the right.
The tabs on the Machine Tool Settings dialog box enable you to specify the following parameters of a machine
tool.
Pro/NC 39
The Output tab
Post Processor Options
· PP Name—The name of the default post-processor associated with the machine. Type the name in the text
box. The Reset button lets you change the name back to the system default.
· ID—The post-processor ID.
Defaults—Lets you associate a site with the workcell.
PPRINT—Opens the PPRINT menu to let you set up your PPRINT options.
CL Command Output Options
· FROM—Specifies how the FROM statement will be output to an operation CL data file:
- Do Not Output (default)—No FROM statements are output. If a From point is specified, its location is
output as a GOTO statement at positioning feed.
- Only At Start—A FROM statement is output at the beginning of the file. It corresponds to the location
of the From point, if specified, or to the first location on the tool path for the first machining feature.
All other tool paths are added to the operation without a FROM statement.
- At Every Tool Path—FROM statements are output at the beginning of each tool path for a machining
feature. For the first tool path, this FROM statement corresponds to the location of the operation From
point, if specified, or to the first location on the tool path for this machining feature.
· LOADTL—Controls the output of the LOADTL command in the operation CL data file:
- Modal (default)—The LOADTL command is output at the beginning of CL data for a feature tool path
only if a tool change is needed.
- Not Modal—Outputs the LOADTL statement at the beginning of each feature tool path, regardless of
whether the tool is the same or changed.
· COOLNT/OFF—Controls the output of the COOLNT/OFF statement.
- Output (default)—The COOLNT/OFF statement is output at the end of each feature tool path.
- Do Not Output—COOLNT/OFF is output only once, at the end of the file.
· SPINDLE/OFF—Controls the output of the SPINDL /OFF statement.
- Output (default)—The SPINDL /OFF statement is output at the end of each feature tool path.
- Do Not Output—SPINDL /OFF is output only once, at the end of the file.
Multiple Axis Output Options
These options become accessible only for a Mill type machine tool when you set Number of Axes to 4 Axis.
· Use Rotate Output—If this option is not selected (default), all CL data is transformed and output in the
coordinates of the Program Zero coordinate system. When you select this option, the system outputs the
applicable TRANS and ROTABL commands to specify linear and rotational transformations. Only select
this option when indexing to a new table position is desired.
· Rotation Output Mode—Available only when Use Rotate Output is selected. Controls output of
ROTABL statements. The values are: Incremental (default) and Absolute. In Absolute mode, zero position
is defined by the Program Zero.
· Rotation Direction—Available only when Use Rotate Output is selected. Allows you to specify that
rotation is performed in a particular direction (this may occur when there is an obstruction in one rotation
direction but not another). The values are:
- Shortest (default)—Make the shortest possible move to the new position.
- CLW—Always rotate in the clockwise direction.
- CCLW—Always rotate in the counterclockwise direction.
· Rotation Axis—Specify the rotation axis: A-Axis or B-Axis (default).
Milling Capability
These options become accessible only for a Mill/Turn type machine tool.
40 Pro/NC
· Head 1—Specify whether milling is available on Head 1.
· Head 2—Specify whether milling is available on Head 2.
If both Head1 and Head2 are selected, the HEAD1 and HEAD2 options will appear in the MACH AUX menu
when creating Milling NC sequences. Creating a Milling or Holemaking NC sequence using HEAD2 will result
in HEAD2 statement being output in the CL file.
If neither Head1 nor Head2 is selected when defining the workcell, then the SEL MENU with the MILL and
TURN options will not appear when creating NC sequences. That is, once you click NC Sequence on the
MACHINING menu, you will be brought directly into the MACH AUX menu for Turning.
Note: 5-Axis Holemaking will be allowed on a Mill/Turn workcell, even if it is defined as 2- or 3-Axis. Select
the Head1 option, and then select MILL from the SEL MENU when creating the NC sequence.
Cutter Compensation
When you expand this field, the Output cutter position options become available:
· Tool Center—Cutter location (CL) data is output with respect to the tool center.
· Tool Edge—Cutter location (CL) data is output with respect to the cutting edge of the tool. If you select this
option, type the desired value in the Safe Radius text box. This value represents the smallest concave corner
radius that can be safely machined, and must be slightly bigger than the radius (Cutter Diameter/2) of the
biggest tool on the machine. The Adjust Corner drop-down list gives you a choice of corner condition
options for convex corners:
- Straight—When passing a convex corner, the tool path consists of two straight segments extended
until they intersect.
- Fillet—When passing a convex corner, the tool path consists of two straight segments connected with
an arc.
- Automatic—The system adds a fillet corner condition at all the convex corners on the outside contour
of the part, and a loop corner condition at all the convex corners on the inside contour of the part.
The Spindle tab
· Maximum Speed—Maximum allowable spindle speed for the machine tool (optional). Type the maximum
speed value in RPM (revolutions per minute).
· Horsepower—Spindle horsepower (optional).
The Feed tab
· Feed Units—Select the rapid feed rate units from the Rapid Traverse drop-down list. The values are:
- IPM (default)—inches per minute
- MMPM—millimeters per minute
· Feed Limits—Type the value of the feed rate used for rapid traverse in the Rapid Feed Rate text box
(optional).
The Cutting Tools tab
· Tool Change Time—Time needed for changing a tool, in seconds (optional). Type the value in the text
box, or use the UP and DOWN arrows next to the text box to increase or decrease the value, respectively.
· The Cutting Tool Setup button opens the Tool Setup dialog box to let you set up the cutting tools
associated with the machine tool. For 2-turret Lathe and 4- or 5-axis Mill/Turn machines, you get separate
cutting tool setup buttons for Head 1 and Head 2.
The Travel tab
Lets you specify the travel limits for the machine tool: X-Axis Travel, Y-Axis Travel, and Z-Axis Travel.
Specifying these values is optional. Values for the travel limits along the axes should be the actual dimensions
that indicate the extent of the machine tool workspace relative to the Program Zero coordinate system. For
example, if a machine tool is 60 inches wide, and the origin of the Program Zero coordinate system is located
halfway between the ends, specify the travel limits for X-Axis Travel as follows: type -30 in the left text box
and 30 in the text box on the right.
Pro/NC 41
If you display or otherwise output the CL data for a machining feature that exceeds the limitations of the
machine tool where it is defined, the Information Window will appear, listing the values of the limits that have
been exceeded and their corresponding actual values.
The Comments tab
Type the comments associated with the machine tool in the text box (optional).
The Custom Cycles tab
Lets you set up custom cycles for Holemaking.
Saving and Retrieving Workcells

Workcells are saved as user-defined features (groups) containing a single feature (the workcell).
The configuration file option "pro_mf_workcell_dir" allows you to specify a "library" directory for workcells.
There, the workcell files will be available to all users for retrieval into their manufacturing processes. The
option’s value is the path name (absolute path is recommended) of the directory where the workcell files will be
stored.
To Set Up a PPRINT Table

1. On the Output tab of the Machine Tool Setup dialog box, click PPRINT. Another way to access this
functionality is from the MANUFACTURE or MACHINING menu: click Mfg Setup > CL Setup > PPRINT.
The PPRINT menu opens with the following options:
- Create—Create a new PPRINT table.
- Modify—Modify the current PPRINT table.
- Retrieve—Retrieve an existing PPRINT table from the current working directory.
- Save—Save the current PPRINT table for later use. You will be prompted for the name of the file. The
file will have an extension ".ppr" and will be stored in the current working directory.
- Show—Show the current PPRINT settings.
2. If the table has not been set up, the Modify option will be grayed out. Choose Create. If you have
previously set up a PPRINT table, you can either change your former settings using the Modify option, or
start with a clean table using Create.
The Activate PPRINT dialog box opens. It contains all the items that can be output through PPRINT.
Whether an item will be output or not is determined by the flag value. The default flag value for all items is
"NO". Change it to "YES" if you want the item to be output.
3. To change the flag value, highlight the item or items in the PPRINT table by clicking on them once, then
click on the appropriate action button (Yes or No), located in the lower-left portion of the dialog box. To
unselect an item, click on it once more. You can also use the Select All and Unselect All icons located in
the lower-right portion of the dialog box.
4. To supply comments for an item, highlight it and type the comment in the Comments text box. When you
highlight an item with an existing comment, the comment is displayed in the Comments text box. While
editing a comment, you can revert to the previous value by clicking the drop-down arrow next to the
Comments text box.
5. Click OK to finish setting up the PPRINT table.
The PPRINT Table

To output some model information to the CL files, you have to set up a PPRINT table for this model. This table
contains all the items that can be output through PPRINT. Whether an item will be output or not is determined
by the flag value. The default flag value for all items is "NO". Change it to "YES" if you want the item to be
output. You can add an optional comment to be output along with the item.
Note: Comments are limited to 69 characters or less.
42 Pro/NC
Whenever you output CL data to file, the system will check the PPRINT table. If any flag is set to "YES" and
the appropriate information is available, the corresponding PPRINT command will be output to the CL file.
The following items are output once per CL file:
· PART_NAME
· DATE_TIME
· SCALE
· TRANSLATE
· ROTATE
The following items are output once per operation:
· OPERATION_NAME
· OPERATION_COMMENTS
· LAYER_NAME
· UDF_NAME
· TOOL_TABLE
· ONLY_OUTPUT_USED_TOOLS
The following items are output once per NC sequence:
· NC_SEQUENCE_NAME
· NC_SEQUENCE_COMMENTS
· FEATURE_ID
· SEQUENCE_TYPE
· CUTCOM_REGISTER
· SPINDLE_SPEED
· CUT_FEEDRATE_&_UNITS
· ARC_FEEDRATE_&_UNITS
· FREE_FEEDRATE_&_UNITS
· RETRACT_FEEDRATE_&_UNITS
· PLUNGE_FEEDRATE_&_UNITS
· SCAN_TYPE
· RETRACT_HEIGHT
· NUMBER_OF_SLICES
The following items are output once per LOADTL or TURRET statement:
· TOOL_NAME
· TOOL_POSITION_NUMBER
· TOOL_COMMENTS
· TOOL_PARAMETERS
· TOOL_OFFSET_NUMBER
· CHAMFER_LENGTH
· CORNER_RADIUS
· CSINK_ANGLE
· CUTTER_DIAM
· DRILL_DIAMETER
· DRILL_LENGTH
· END_ANGLE
· END_OFFSET
Pro/NC 43
· GAUGE_Z_LENGTH
· GAUGE_X_LENGTH
· HOLDER_TYPE
· INSERT_LENGTH
· LENGTH
· LENGTH_UNITS
· NOSE_RADIUS
· NUM_OF_TEETH
· POINT_ANGLE
· SHANK_DIAMETER
· SIDE_ANGLE
· SIDE_WIDTH
· TOOL_MATERIAL
· TOOL_ORIENTATION
· TOOL_TYPE
About Fixtures
Fixtures are parts or assemblies that help orient and hold the workpiece during a manufacturing operation.
Fixtures can be created and saved in Part or Assembly mode, and retrieved into the Manufacturing mode during
fixture setup. Creating the fixture in Assembly mode is advantageous because fixtures can be created as needed
during the intermediate process steps by referencing the workpiece. It is a simple process, because you can
build the fixture referencing the workpiece with Use Edge.
You do not have to quit out of Manufacturing mode to enter Part or Assembly mode. You can open another
object (part or assembly) between NC sequences.
Note: If you have an appropriate license, you can use the library of manufacturing fixtures (clamps, holding
plates, chucks and jaws) of generic sizes.
To use fixtures in the manufacturing process, you must first define the fixture setups for the manufacturing
model. Each fixture setup has a name and contains information about the fixtures that are to be present in the
model when the setup is active. Only one setup can be active at a time. Setup names can be used to manipulate
fixtures within the manufacturing model. Because fixture setups contain fixture assembly information, each
manufacturing model has to have its fixture setup(s) explicitly defined; unlike sites or tools, you cannot retrieve
a fixture setup from one model into another manufacturing model. Fixture setups can be defined at the time of
setting up an operation or at any time between NC sequences.
To Create a Fixture Setup

1. Click in the Fixture Setup section of the Operation Setup dialog box.
The Fixture Setup dialog box opens. It contains the default name for the fixture setup (for example,
FSETP1). You can change it by typing a different name.
2. Create or assemble components that you want to include in the fixture setup. You can also copy a previously
defined fixture setup by using the Copy icon at the top of the Fixture Setup dialog box.
When you add fixture setup components, you may find that they clutter up the screen and make it difficult to
select surfaces for feature creation. In this case, you can blank the fixture components; that is, erase them
from the display but keep them in the fixture setup. When you blank a component, its visibility status in the
Components list is changed to Invisible.
3. Click OK to finalize the fixture setup creation and close the dialog box. This setup becomes active (that is,
it is used for the newly created NC sequences).
44 Pro/NC
The Fixture Setup Dialog Box
The top portion of the Fixture Setup dialog box contains the following icon:
—Copy a previously defined fixture setup. This brings in all the components from the setup being copied.
You can then remove or redefine placement of some of the components, or add extra components, by using the
action buttons in the lower portion of the Fixture Setup dialog box.
The Fixture Setup Name box contains the name of the fixture setup. You can type any name.
The middle portion of the Fixture Setup dialog box contains two tabbed pages: Components and Comments.
The Components tabbed page lists all the components currently included in the fixture setup, along with their
visibility status. You can type information about the fixture setup in the text box on the Comments tabbed page.
Below the tabbed pages are the following action buttons:
—Create a new fixture component. The user interface is the same as creating a new part in Assembly
mode. After you create the component, its name appears in the list on the Components tabbed page.
—Redefine placement of a fixture component. Select the name of the component to be reassembled in
the list box on the Components tabbed page, then click this button. Specify the new assembly constraints for
the component.
—Assemble a new fixture component. The user interface is the same as assembling a new component in
Assembly mode. After you assemble the component, its name appears in the list on the Components tabbed
page.
—Remove a fixture component. Select the names of the components to be removed in the list box on the
Components tabbed page, then click this button.
—Make a fixture component visible. Select the names of the previously blanked components in the list
box on the Components tabbed page, then click this button. The components are displayed on the screen, and
their status in the Components list is changed to Visible.
—Make a fixture component invisible. Select the names of the components to be blanked in the list box
on the Components tabbed page, then click this button. The components are erased from the screen, and their
status in the Components list is changed to Invisible. Note that making a component invisible does not remove
it from the fixture; you can blank fixture components to remove the clutter from the screen, but the system still
considers them in place for tool path computations. To remove a component from a fixture setup, use the
Remove button.
—Select all the fixture components in the list.
—Cancel the selection of all the fixture components in the list.
—Finalize the fixture setup and close the Fixture Setup dialog box.
—Cancel changes made to the fixture setup.
Pro/NC 45
To Activate a Fixture Setup
Only one fixture setup can be active at a time. This is the setup that is displayed on the screen.
To activate a fixture setup, select its name in the Model Tree, press the right mouse button and click Activate.
Another way to access this functionality is to select the fixture setup name from the drop-down list in the
Fixture Setup section of the Operation Setup dialog box.
To Modify a Fixture Setup

You can modify a fixture setup to add, remove, or change placement of some of the components, or to change
their visibility status.
1. Select the name of the fixture setup in the Model Tree, press the right mouse button and click Redefine.
Another way to access this functionality is to select the fixture name from the drop-down list in the Fixture
Setup section of the Operation Setup dialog box and click .

The Fixture Setup dialog box opens.
2. Use the action buttons in the lower portion of the Fixture Setup dialog box to create or assemble new
components; redefine placement of existing components; or remove components from the fixture setup. You
can also change the visibility status of the fixture components. Note that when you blank a component, it
stays in the fixture setup; you can change its status back to Visible at any time. When you remove a
component from the fixture setup, and then want to bring it back, you will have to specify all the assembly
constraints again.
3. Click OK to finalize the fixture setup creation and close the dialog box.
To Delete a Fixture Setup

Use either of the following ways to delete a fixture setup:
· Select the name of the fixture setup in the Model Tree, press the right mouse button and click Delete.
· Select the fixture name from the drop-down list in the Fixture Setup section of the Operation Setup dialog
box and click .
About Coordinate Systems

Coordinate systems are one of the elements of operation and NC sequence setup in Pro/NC. They define the
orientation of the workpiece on the machine and act as the origin (0, 0, 0) for CL data generation.
Coordinate systems used in Pro/NC can belong to the design model, to the workpiece, or to any other
component of the manufacturing assembly. You can use coordinate systems created prior to bringing a
component into the manufacturing model, or create them in Manufacturing mode.
Machine and NC Sequence Coordinate Systems

There are two types of coordinate systems in Manufacturing:
· Machine—Acts as the default origin for all CL data. This coordinate system is specified at the time of
operation setup using the Program Zero option in the Operation Setup dialog box. All NC sequences
created within a certain operation will use the same Machine coordinate system.
· NC Sequence—Affects all the NC sequence data, such as retract surface and cut feed direction. This
coordinate system is specified at the time of NC sequence setup using the Coord Sys option in the SEQ
SETUP menu. The NC Sequence coordinate system must be oriented in a certain way, as described in the
following sections.
The NC Sequence coordinate system setting is modal, that is, once specified, it will stay for all subsequent NC
sequences until you change it. For the first NC sequence, the Machine coordinate system specified for the
operation will be implicitly used as the NC sequence coordinate system as well.
46 Pro/NC
If the Machine and NC Sequence coordinate systems are different, then, upon creating an NC sequence, all CL
data will be transformed and output in the coordinates of the Machine coordinate system. If the Z axes of the
NC Sequence and Machine coordinate systems are not parallel, the tool orientation vector (i,j,k) or table
rotation will be provided. This functionality allows you to post-process 3-axis operations to be performed on the
5-axis machines. In Turning, it can be used if the post-processor requires X-Y input.
Notes:
- Using the CL_DATA_MODE parameter, you may specify that the linear and rotational transitions
between the NC Sequence and Machine coordinate systems be output in the CL file, instead of
transforming all CL coordinates.
- To output CL data with respect to the NC Sequence coordinate system, use the
COORDINATE_OUTPUT parameter.
Z-Axis Orientation
Pro/NC NC Sequence coordinate systems should be oriented so that the positive Z-axis points away from the
holding fixtures of the machine. For example, on a vertical milling machine, the positive Z-axis points up, away
from the table surface. The following shows the Z-axis orientation for milling.
For turning, remember that the positive Z-axis points away from the lathe headstock. If you create a coordinate
system at the headstock end of the part, make sure the positive Z-axis points towards the rest of the workpiece.
On the other hand, if you create a coordinate system at the tailstock end of the part, the Z-axis should point
away from the workpiece, off into space. In either case, the Z-axis must be colinear with the turning axis. The
following shows the Z-axis orientation for turning.
To Specify a Coordinate System

The Machine and NC Sequence coordinate systems are specified in a similar way, as described in the following
procedure.
1. Click next to the Program Zero text box in the Operation Setup dialog box, or select the Coord Sys
option in the SEQ SETUP menu.
2. The MACH CSYS or the SEQ CSYS menu, respectively, will appear with the following options:
- Create—Select the model that the coordinate system will belong to, then create the coordinate system.
- Select—Select the coordinate system either by selecting on the screen or using the Sel By Menu
option.
Pro/NC 47
- Use Prev—Allows you to select a coordinate system used for an earlier operation or NC sequence.
If you specify separate coordinate systems, the NC Sequence coordinate system is highlighted in magenta, the
Machine coordinate system—in red.
About NC Sequences
An NC sequence is a workpiece (or assembly) feature that represents a single tool path. The tool path consists
of the following components:
· Automatic Cut motions, that is, tool motions while actually cutting the workpiece material.
· Approach, exit, connect moves.
· Additional CL commands and post-processor words (for example, feedrates, PPRINT, OPSTOP).
To Create an NC Sequence
When you choose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu, a namelist menu appears with the names of all
existing NC sequences and the New Sequence option. Selecting an existing NC sequence name allows you to
redefine references for this NC sequence (that is, redefine the sequence setup elements, or change the tool
motions). Selecting New Sequence allows you to create a new NC sequence under the current operation.
You have to set up an operation before creating an NC sequence. The type of workcell defines the types of NC
sequences available. Once you select the type of the NC sequence, define the tool path using the NC SEQUENCE
menu options:
· Seq Setup—Specify geometric references appropriate to the NC sequence type, for example, select surfaces
to mill, or sketch the area of the cut for turning. This option also allows you to change the modal settings,
such as tool, coordinate system, retract, and specify the manufacturing parameters for the NC sequence. For
most NC sequence types, the system will generate the default tool path based on the results of sequence
setup.
· Play Path—Verify the tool path prior to completing the NC sequence.
· Customize—Customize the default tool path, that is, define your own tool motions and insert CL
commands.
· Seq Info—Brings up a checklist menu of all tool motions, along with the NC Sequence option. Select the
motion(s) that you want to display info for (you can use Select All); use the NC Sequence option to display
the NC sequence info. The appropriate info will be displayed in an Info Window.
· Done Seq—Finalize the current NC sequence and return to the MACHINING menu.
· Next Seq—Finalize the current NC sequence and immediately start defining a new NC sequence of the
same type and with the same initial setup (tool, parameters, cut geometry). You are brought directly into the
NC SEQUENCE menu, where you can change any of the setup elements or "tweak" the tool path using the
Customize functionality.
· Quit Seq—Abort defining the NC sequence. You will be prompted for a confirmation.
Elements of NC Sequence Setup

An NC sequence setup consists of the following elements:
· Name (optional)
· Comments (optional)
· Tool
· Manufacturing parameters
· NC Sequence coordinate system
· Retract surface (for Milling and Holemaking NC sequences)
· Geometric references appropriate to the NC sequence type
· Start and End points (optional)
48 Pro/NC
Most of these settings are modal. You usually have to specify cut geometry and adjust the manufacturing
parameters for each specific NC sequence. If you choose Customize prior to completing the sequence setup, the
appropriate interface will be invoked automatically to "walk you through" the required steps.
To Customize a Name of an NC Sequence

As an NC sequence is created, it will be given a default name corresponding to its type (for example, Volume
Milling). The Name option in the SEQ SETUP menu allows you to enter a customized name for the NC
sequence. This name will then be displayed instead of the default NC sequence name in the namelist menus and
messages (for example "Computing tool path for NC_Sequence_name").
To Specify Comments for an NC Sequence

The comments for an NC sequence can be listed in the Manufacturing info; they can also be output in the CL
data files using PPRINT.
1. On the SEQ SETUP menu, click Comments.
2. The NCSQ COMMENT menu appears with the following options:
- Create—A system window will appear to allow you to enter the comments using the system editor.
- Modify—A system window will appear with the current comments. Edit the comments using the
system editor.
To Set Up Start and End Points for an NC Sequence

At the NC sequence level, the start and end points are specified using the Start and End options in the SEQ
SETUP menu. When a new NC sequence is created, it will automatically use the End point of the previous NC
sequence as its Start point.
1. On the SEQ SETUP menu, select the Start and/or End option.
2. The following commands are available:
- Create—Create a datum point to serve as the appropriate start or end point
- Select—Select an existing datum point to serve as the start or end point.
- Remove—(Appears only if a point of the appropriate type has already been specified.) Delete the start
or end point.
To Select an NC Sequence
NC sequence features themselves do not have geometry that you can select on to choose the NC sequence for
modification, CL data output . Whenever an NC sequence is to be selected, the NC Sequence option will
appear in the SELECT FEAT menu. When you choose it, a namelist menu of the NC sequences will appear; each
NC sequence is identified by its number and type, followed by the operation name, for example:
1: Volume Milling, Operation: OP010
2: Profile Milling, Operation: OP010
and so forth.
If you have specified an NC sequence name using the Name option in the SEQ SETUP menu, this name will
appear in the namelist menu instead of the NC sequence type (for example, Volume Milling).
Note: If a line is too long to fit in the namelist menu, place the cursor over it and check the bottom line in
the message window to see the whole entry.
If more than one operation has been defined for the model, the SEL NC SEQ menu controls which NC
sequences are listed in the namelist menu:
· By Cur Oper—Only NC sequences that belong to the current operation will appear in the namelist menu.
· All Operations—All NC sequences existing in the model will appear in the namelist menu.
Another way to select an NC sequence is to choose the corresponding material removal feature (if it has been
Pro/NC 49
created). However, this works only if the material removal feature itself can not be selected for this particular
operation. For example, this method can be used for CL data output, but will not work for suppressing or
reordering.
An NC sequence can also be selected using the Sel By Menu option (as any other feature) by its feature
number, internal ID, or from a Model Tree.
About Retract Surface

The retract surface defines the level to which the tool is retracted after a cut. Depending on your machining
needs, you can specify the retract surface to be a plane, cylinder, sphere, or a custom-made surface.
You can specify the retract surface at the operation level, and then modify it at the NC sequence level, if
needed.
When an operation Retract Surface is defined, the tool will traverse along this surface from the end of one
sequence to the beginning of the next sequence.
The retract surface setting is modal, that is, once specified, it will stay for all subsequent NC sequences until
you change it, as long as it is applicable to the NC sequence type. For example, if you specify a cylinder at the
operation level on a 5-Axis workcell, you will have to define a planar retract surface when creating a 3-Axis NC
sequence.
The following illustration shows various types of retract surfaces.
1 Retract plane
2 Retract cylinder
When you set a non-planar retract surface, you can control the maximum deviation of the tool from this surface,
as shown in the following illustration, by specifying a Tolerance value in the Retract group box, located on the
General tab of the Operation Setup dialog box. The default is 0.1" (1 mm).
2
1
4
3
50 Pro/NC
1 Tolerance
2 Retract surface
3 Tool
4 Tool path
To Set Up a Retract Surface

1. Click next to the Surface text box in Retract group box, located on the General tabbed page of the
Operation Setup dialog box, or select Retract from the SEQ SETUP menu.
The Retract Selection dialog box opens.
2. Select the Surface option and click one of the following buttons:
- Select—Select a datum plane, a planar or revolved surface feature, or a planar surface on the model.
- Create Plane—Create a datum plane.
- Create Surface—Create a revolved surface feature. This option is not available in 3-Axis workcells or
for 3-Axis NC sequences. You do not have to use the Revolve option to create the surface, as long as
the resulting surface is a surface of revolution; for example, you can use Extrude and create a cylinder.
- Along Z Axis—Create a datum plane normal to the Z-axis of either the Machine or the NC Sequence
coordinate system (depending on whether you define retract at the operation or the NC sequence level),
by specifying an offset along this axis. Type the offset value in the Enter Z Depth text box.
3. The Preview button lets you display the retract surface prior to finalizing the setup. Click OK to create the
retract surface, Cancel—to quit.
To Set Up a Retract Sphere

2. Select the Sphere option in the Retract Selection dialog box.
3. By default, the sphere center is either the Machine or the NC Sequence coordinate system (depending on
whether you define retract at the operation or the NC sequence level). To specify a different center, use one
of the following options in the drop-down list in the Set Sphere Center group box:
- Default—Use the default center, that is, the Machine coordinate system if you define retract at the
operation level, or the NC Sequence coordinate system if you define retract at the NC sequence level.
- Select Csys—Select a coordinate system.
- Create Csys—Create a coordinate system.
- Select Datum Point—Select a datum point.
- Create Datum Point—Create a datum point.
The system displays the name of the coordinate system or datum point that is the current center of the
sphere at the bottom of the Set Sphere Center group box. It also shows, in parentheses, the name of the
model that the coordinate system or datum point belongs to.
4. There are two ways to specify the sphere radius:
- Select the Sphere Radius option and type the radius value in the text box to the right.
- Select the Offset From Datum Point option. This activates the Set Offset Reference group box with
the following options in the drop-down list:
Default—Use the sphere center as the offset reference.
Select Point—Select a datum point to be used as the offset reference.
Create Point—Create a datum point to be used as the offset reference.
The system displays the name of the reference datum point, with the model name in parentheses, at the
bottom of the Set Offset Reference group box. Type the offset value with respect to this datum point in the
text box below the Offset From Datum Point option.
Pro/NC 51
To Set Up a Retract Cylinder
2. Select the Cylinder option in the Retract Selection dialog box.
3. By default, the cylinder axis is one of the axes of either the Machine or the NC Sequence coordinate system
(depending on whether you define retract at the operation or the NC sequence level). To specify a different
reference, use one of the following options in the drop-down list at the top of the Set Cylinder Axis group
box:
- Default—Use the default reference, that is, the Machine coordinate system if you define retract at the
operation level, or the NC Sequence coordinate system if you define retract at the NC sequence level.
- Select Axis—Select a datum axis.
- Create Axis—Create a datum axis.
- Select Csys—Select a coordinate system.
- Create Csys—Create a coordinate system.
The system displays the name of the reference (coordinate system or datum axis) in the middle portion of
the Set Cylinder Axis group box. It also shows, in parentheses, the name of the model that the coordinate
system or datum axis belongs to. If the reference is a coordinate system, you can select which axis to use as
the cylinder axis using the drop-down list at the bottom of the Set Cylinder Axis group box.
4. There are two ways to specify the cylinder radius:
- Select the Cylinder Radius option and type the radius value in the text box below.
- Select the Offset From Datum Point option. This activates the Set Offset Reference group box with
the following options in the drop-down list:
Default—Use the sphere center as the offset reference.
Select Point—Select a datum point to be used as the offset reference.
Create Point—Create a datum point to be used as the offset reference.
The system displays the name of the reference datum point, with the model name in parentheses, at the
bottom of the Set Offset Reference group box. Type the offset value with respect to this datum point in the
text box below the Offset From Datum Point option.
To Set Up a Traverse Plane

For Volume milling NC sequences, you can specify an intermediate retract plane, called the traverse plane.
1. On the SEQ SETUP menu of a Volume milling NC sequence, click Retract.
2. Click the Traverse tab.
3. On the Traverse tabbed page, select the Surface option and click one of the following buttons:
- Select—Select a datum plane, a planar surface feature, or a planar surface on the model.
- Create Plane—Create a datum plane.
- Along Z Axis—Create a datum plane normal to the Z-axis of the NC Sequence coordinate system by
specifying an offset along this axis. Type the offset value in the Enter Z Depth text box.
4. To use a traverse plane from a previously defined NC sequence, select the Use Previous option, and then
select the name of the NC sequence in the Previous list box. By default, only the NC sequences in the
current operation are listed. Select the All Operations option to list the NC sequences in other operations.
5. To remove a traverse plane when redefining an NC sequence, select the None option on the Traverse
tabbed page.
6. The Preview button lets you display the retract surface and the traverse plane prior to finalizing the setup.
Click OK to create the traverse plane, Cancel—to quit.
52 Pro/NC
Controlling Retracts in Volume Milling
In Volume milling, you can minimize overall cutting time by minimizing the height of the tool retract at the end
of a cut before traversing to the start of the new cut.
There are two ways of controlling the retract height:
· Specifying an intermediate retract plane, called the traverse plane, by using the Retract Selection dialog
box. If you specify a traverse plane, the tool uses this plane to traverse between cuts while machining a
volume. At the end of the NC sequence, the tool retracts all the way back to the retract plane.
The traverse plane must be normal to the z-axis of the NC sequence coordinate system. Unlike the retract
plane, the traverse plane setting is not modal: you have to explicitly specify a traverse plane for each NC
sequence.
· Setting the RETRACT_OPTION parameter to SMART. For each intermediate retract within the NC
sequence, the system calculates a minimal safe level for the tool to traverse to the new position. This safe
level is determined as the level of the lowest slice with no obstructions on the way of the tool, plus the
PULLOUT_DIST value, if specified. At the end of the NC sequence, the tool retracts all the way back to the
retract plane.
About Automatic Material Removal

Material removal is a workpiece (or assembly) feature that can be created to represent the material removed
from the workpiece by an individual NC sequence. Pro/NC provides two methods of generating material
removal simulation:
· Automatic—The system automatically calculates material to remove based on the geometric references
specified for the NC sequence.
· Construct—Create material removal feature yourself as a regular Pro/ENGINEER feature (Cut, Hole).
To Create a Material Removal Feature

1. Choose Matrl Remove from the MACHINING menu.
2. Choose NC Sequence from the SELECT FEAT menu and select the parent NC sequence from the namelist
menu.
3. Select the method of material removal:
- If you choose Automatic, Pro/NC constructs the appropriate feature.
- If you choose Construct, the feature creation interface is invoked. Create the feature to represent the
removed material.
Automatic material removal may not be available for some NC sequence types. In this case, you are brought
directly into creating a feature.
Material Removal for Assembly Machining

When you create an automatic material removal feature in Assembly machining, the INTRSCT OPER menu will
appear to let you specify the level (part, subassembly, or the top-level assembly) at which the feature should be
visible. If you use the Auto Sel option in the AUTO OPER menu, the volume of material to be removed by the
NC sequence will be automatically intersected with all the affected workpieces and the results displayed. If the
intersection is performed at the part level (that is, it will be visible in Part mode), and the assembly has several
instances of the same part, you will be prompted to select one occurrence of the part to intersect the assembly
feature with; then the material removal will be shown on all parts according to the instance selected for
intersection.
Note: If a workpiece is a family instance, or a generic part with instances in session, automatic material removal
at part level can not be performed on it. You can use the Construct functionality.
Pro/NC 53
Automatic Material Removal in Milling
For Volume and Local milling, the amount of material removed using the Automatic option is defined by the
milling volume and depends on the PROF_STOCK_ALLOW parameter value. All material inside the volume
will be removed, with the offset equal to the PROF_STOCK_ALLOW value left on the sides and bottom.
For Pocketing, the amount of material removed automatically also depends on the PROF_STOCK_ALLOW
parameter value. All material along the surfaces selected for machining will be removed, with the offset equal
to the PROF_STOCK_ALLOW value left on the sides and bottom.
When Automatic material removal is performed for a Conventional or Contouring surface milling NC sequence,
as well as for Plunge milling, the surface(s) are offset by stock allowance (if applicable) and the side walls are
built towards the retract plane. Note that stock allowance is added at all the surface edges as well. This result is
then subtracted from the workpiece.
The following illustration shows the tool path and automatic material removal for Conventional surface milling.
Automatic material removal for Profile milling is defined by the tool geometry and the trajectory of the last
profiling pass, as shown in the next illustartion.
1 NUM_PROF_PASSES 2
2 PROF_STOCK_ALLOW
3 Material removed for the last profiling pass only.
Automatic material removal for Face milling removes all material above the surface(s) selected for facing.
Automatic material removal for an Engraving NC sequence will produce a line corresponding to the reference
groove. Neither the width nor the depth of the cut will be reflected.
Automatic material removal is not available for Trajectory and Thread milling.
Automatic Material Removal in Turning

For Area and Groove turning, the Automatic option will remove material from the whole area of the cut (minus
PROF_STOCK_ALLOW). Convex corners can be either straight or filleted, depending on the
CORNER_FINISH_TYPE parameter value.
54 Pro/NC
For Profile turning, Automatic material removal can be created if the NC sequence uses a single Turn Profile, or
multiple Turn Profiles that form a continuous chain of entities. Tool path for Profile turning NC sequences does
not require definition of cut extensions; for material removal purposes, the system adds extensions to the Turn
Profile endpoints, similar to cut extensions in Area turning. These extensions point in default directions
depending on the type of the NC sequence: Outside, Inside, or Face. You do not have control over the direction
of material removal extensions; if they do not work for your Turn Profile, create the material removal feature
using the Construct option.
The following illustration shows the default material removal extensions for Profile turning.
1 2 3
X X X
Z Z Z
X X X
Z Z Z
1 Outside
2 Inside
3 Face
For Trajectory and Thread turning, Automatic material removal is not applicable.
Automatic Material Removal in Holemaking

When Automatic material removal is performed for a Holemaking NC sequence, the system will produce holes
in the workpiece coaxial with the holes selected for drilling. The diameter and axial cross-section of the holes
are defined by the tool parameters, and the depth of each hole is defined by the depth of drilling.
Automatic Material Removal in Wire EDM

Automatic material removal is available for No Core Wire EDM only. It is not applicable for contouring NC
sequences.
About Elements of Tool Setup

Pro/NC requires the following general categories of information about tools:
· Tool Table information—This set of elements defines the correspondence between a descriptive tool name
(Name) and its location on the machine (Number). You can optionally supply a value for the gauge length
register (Offset) and comments output for the tool (Comments). Each workcell has its own Tool Table.
· Tool Type—One of the predefined tool types available in Pro/NC. Tool types correspond to the types of NC
sequences performed in the workcell; the tool type, in turn, defines the tool’s cross-section and, therefore,
the set of parameters you have to specify for the tool.
· Geometry parameters—Parameters that specify all the dimensions of the tool. These dimension values are
used in calculating the tool path and material removed, and should accurately reflect the actual tool
dimensions and length units. Some of the Geometry parameters are required to define the tool’s cross-
section, others are optional. The actual parameter names in this category depend on the Tool Type.
· Settings—Various parameters, mostly optional, that define tool properties other than geometry:
Pro/NC 55
- Tool Number—Corresponds to the Number field of the Tool Table, which defines the tool's pocket
number.
- Offset Number—Corresponds to the Offset field of the Tool Table, which supplies a value for the
gauge length register.
- Tool gauge lengths (Gauge X Length and Gauge Z Length)—Optional parameters used to create
length qualifiers in the LOADTL or TURRET statements.
- Long Tool—Select this checkbox if the tool is too long to retract to the Rotation Clearance level during
4-axis machining. If you mark the tool as long, the tip of the tool will move to the Safe Rotary Point
(specified in the Operation Setup dialog box) during table rotations.
- Comments—A text string that will be stored along with the tool parameters and output with the tool
table using PPRINT. If you want the tool table to show this comment, click Edit > Table Comments
in the top menu bar of the Tool Setup dialog box, and select the Use TOOL_COMMENT parameter
option. If you want the tool table to show a comment different than the tool Comments parameter
string, click Edit > Table Comments, select New Comment, and type in a new comment string.
· Speeds and feeds—The cutting data (feed, speed, axial and radial depths) for roughing and finishing with
this tool, based on the stock material type and condition. This data is stored in a separate file with the same
file name as the geometry and other tool parameters, but located in the appropriate Materials directory. You
have to set up your Materials directory structure first.
· BOM—Information about the Bill of Materials for the tool.
When you set up the tooling for a workcell or specify a tool to be used for an NC sequence, the system displays
the Tool Setup dialog box. This dialog box enables you to add, modify, and delete the tools, as well as view all
the tools currently defined for the workcell.
Note: When you select a Tool Table entry in the upper portion of the Tool Setup dialog box, the system
updates the lower portion to display this tool’s parameters and section sketch.
Tool Table Elements

Name is a descriptive tool name (for example, BALL125), which uniquely identifies the tool with a certain set
of parameter values. If two tools within a manufacturing process have the same Name, then all of their
parameters (geometry, material, gauge lengths) are also the same. They may, however, be located in different
pockets on the machine, that is, have different Number. When you output CL data for an operation or NC
sequence to a file, the system outputs the pocket number (Number) in the LOADTL or TURRET statement. If
the Tool Table line contains a value for Offset, it will be output as well.
For example, these Tool Table lines:
Number Name Offset Comments
------------------------------------------
1 BALL1
2 FLAT1 4 flat end mill
produce, respectively, the following CL output:

LOADTL / 1
LOADTL / 2, OSETNO, 4
Comments are output with the Tool Table when you use PPRINT. To add comments to a tool, type them in the
Comment field on the Settings tab.
The tool name (Name) is used throughout Pro/NC to identify the tool. You can store the tool’s parameters in a
text file and then retrieve it to use in a different manufacturing process. Name serves as the name for this
parameter file, therefore, all the operating system’s restrictions for file names apply to Name (for example, it
cannot contain spaces or periods). The name must be less than thirty-two alpha-numeric characters long.
Note: The tool name can not contain hyphens ("-"). Underscores ("_"), however, can be used.
Tool Type
When you define a tool within a workcell, tool types available for selection are consistent with the types of NC
56 Pro/NC
sequences performed in the workcell. For example, if you have a Mill type workcell, the tool type selection
includes milling and holemaking tools, but no turning. If you set up a tool at the time of creating an NC
sequence, the tool type selection will be limited to those applicable for the current NC sequence type. For
example, if you are creating a Standard Drill NC sequence, the tool types available for selection will include
DRILLING, MILLING, and so on, while for a Tap NC sequence the only tool type available will be TAPPING.
Tool type is stored with the tool parameters.
To Set Up Tools in Advance

1. Choose Tooling from the MFG SETUP menu and select the name of the workcell where you want to set up
the tooling. Or, at the time of creating or modifying a workcell, you can choose Tooling from the CELL
SETUP menu to set up tooling for this workcell. Another way to access tooling setup is to click the Tool
Setup icon in the Pro/ENGINEER toolbar.
2. The system displays the Tool Setup dialog box, with all the tools defined for the current workcell listed in
the Tool Table section.
3. Add new tools or modify the existing ones using any combination of techniques (click See Also for details).
4. Choose File > Done to exit the Tool Setup dialog box.
To Set Up a Tool when Creating an NC Sequence

1. Check off the Tool option in the SEQ SETUP menu.
2. The system displays the Tool Setup dialog box, with all the tools defined for the current workcell listed in
the Tool Table section.
3. Select an existing tool in the Tool Table, modify it if necessary, or create a new tool (click See Also for
details).
4. Choose File > Done to exit the Tool Setup dialog box.
Saving Tool Parameters

You can save tool parameters in the form of ASCII text files and then reuse these tools in a different
manufacturing process without having to set them up from scratch. When you save a tool, the system stores its
type and parameter values in a text file named <name>.tpm, where <name> is the tool Name.
You can later retrieve a tool parameter file into a different manufacturing process.
Note: Prior to Release 12.0, the default extension for the tool parameter files used to be ".tprm". Old files
with this extension will be recognized by the system as tool parameter files, that is, they will be retrievable.
Whenever a tool parameter file is stored, however, it will now have the ".tpm" extension.
A sample tool parameter file follows.
TOOL_ID BALL125
TOOL_TYPE MILLING
LENGTH_UNITS INCH
CUTTER_DIAM 1.25
CORNER_RADIUS 0.625
SIDE_ANGLE -
LENGTH 4
NUM_OF_TEETH -
TOOL_MATERIAL -
GAUGE_X_LENGTH -
GAUGE_Z_LENGTH -
TOOL_COMMENT -
Pro/NC 57
Note that tool parameter files do not contain pocket number (Number) and Offset information. You have to
specify these in context of the workcell when you set up the tooling or create an NC sequence.
To Save Tool Parameters

1. Select the tool you want to save by highlighting the appropriate Tool Table entry.
2. On the Tool Setup dialog box menu bar, click File > Save tool.
3. The system saves the tool parameters in a text file called <name>.tpm, where <name> is the tool Name,
in the directory defined by the pro_mf_tprm_dir configuration option. If you have supplied the cutting
data, that is, the speeds and feeds for the tool, this data is stored in a <name>.tpm file in the appropriate
Materials subdirectory.
Tool Parameters Library

You can create your own tool library, where all the tool parameter files are to be stored. This way, the tools are
available to all users for retrieval into their manufacturing processes, for modifying, or for setting up new tools.
Use the following configuration file option:
pro_mf_tprm_dir pathname
Always enter the complete pathname to the tool library in the configuration file to avoid problems when
working in different directories with Pro/ENGINEER. Example:
pro_mf_tprm_dir /usr/users/toolcrib
About the Tool Setup Dialog Box

The upper portion of the Tool Setup dialog box contains the Tool Table for the current machine. The Tool
Table defines the correspondence between a descriptive tool name (Name) and its location on the machine, that
is, its pocket number (Number). You can optionally supply a value for the gauge length register (Offset) and
comments output for the tool (Comments). Each machine tool has its own Tool Table.
When you select a Tool Table entry in the upper portion of the Tool Setup dialog box, the system updates the
middle and lower portions to display this tool’s parameters and section sketch.
The middle portion of the Tool Setup dialog box contains the Tool Preview window, with the current tool
section sketch, and the text boxes for defining the following tool elements:
· Name—A descriptive tool name (for example, BALL125), which uniquely identifies the tool with a certain
set of parameter values. The tool name is used throughout Pro/NC to identify the tool. You can store the
tool’s parameters in a text file and then retrieve it to use in a different manufacturing process. The tool
Name serves as the name for this parameter file, therefore, all the operating system’s restrictions for file
names apply to Name (for example, it cannot contain spaces or periods). The name must be less than thirty-
two alphanumeric characters long.
Note: The tool name can not contain hyphens (-). Underscores (_), however, can be used.
· Type—Select one of the predefined tool types available in Pro/NC. Tool types correspond to the types of
NC sequences performed in the workcell; the tool type, in turn, defines the tool’s cross-section and,
therefore, the set of parameters you have to specify for the tool.
· Material—Specify the material from which the tool is made.
· Units—Length units of the tool. The default length units of a tool are those of the stock. If you change the
Units, this affects the actual tool dimensions.
The lower portion of the Tool Setup dialog box contains four tabbed pages: Geometry, Settings, Speeds &
Feeds, and BOM.
The Geometry tabbed page contains the text boxes for defining the Geometry parameters, that is, parameters
that specify all the dimensions of the tool. These dimension values are used in calculating the tool path and
material removed, and should accurately reflect the actual tool dimensions and length units. Some of the
parameters are required for defining the tool's cross section, others are optional. The actual parameter names in
this category depend on the tool Type.
58 Pro/NC
The Settings tabbed page contains the text boxes for defining some of the tool table elements and various
optional parameters that define tool properties other than geometry:
· Tool Number—Corresponds to the Number field of the Tool Table, which defines the tool's pocket
number.
· Offset Number—Corresponds to the Offset field of the Tool Table, which supplies a value for the gauge
length register.
· Tool gauge lengths (Gauge X Length and Gauge Z Length)—Optional parameters used to create length
qualifiers in the LOADTL or TURRET statements.
· Long Tool—Select this checkbox if the tool is too long to retract to the Rotation Clearance level during 4-
axis machining. If you mark the tool as long, the tip of the tool moves to the Safe Rotary Point (specified in
the Operation Setup dialog box) during table rotations.
· Comments—A text string that is stored along with the tool parameters and is output with the tool table
using PPRINT. If you want the tool table to show this comment, click Edit > Table Comments in the top
menu bar of the Tool Setup dialog box, and select the Use TOOL_COMMENT parameter option. If you
want the tool table to show a comment different than the tool Comments parameter string, click Edit >
Table Comments, select New Comment, and type in a new comment string.
The Speeds & Feeds tabbed page lets you supply cutting data (feed, speed, axial and radial depths) for
roughing and finishing with this tool, based on the stock material type and condition.
The BOM tabbed page provides information about the Bill of Materials for the tool.
To Set Up the Material Directory Structure

Pro/NC lets you select the cutting tools and set up feeds and speeds based on the stock material and condition.
To use this functionality, you have to set up a certain directory structure before you start defining your
operations and tooling.
Pro/NC stores all the cutting tool data in a Tooling directory, which is specified by using the
pro_mf_tprm_dir configuration option. For example, you can set this configuration option as follows:
pro_mf_tprm_dir /home/users/toolcrib
Pro/NC then places all the tool parameter files (.tpm files) in the /home/users/toolcrib directory.
To set up the material directory structure, create a subdirectory called materials in your Tooling directory.
Spell the directory name exactly as shown.
Under the materials directory, create subdirectories corresponding to your stock materials and conditions.
For example, you can create subdirectories steel20, steel30, aluminum, and so on. Your material
directory structure setup is now complete.
When you later define an operation or a cutting tool, the system lists the available material subdirectories from
which you can choose.
When you save the cutting tool data, the system stores the tool geometry parameters in a .tpm file in the
Tooling directory, and creates a .tpm file with the same name, containing the feeds and speeds data, in the
appropriate material subdirectory. This feeds and speeds data can be used to specify the manufacturing
parameter values through relations.
Note: If you do not use the pro_mf_tprm_dir configuration option, the system uses your current working
directory as the Tooling directory.
Example: Setting Up the Material Directory Structure

1. Designate your Tooling directory by setting the configuration option:
pro_mf_tprm_dir /home/users/toolcrib
2. In the toolcrib directory, create a subdirectory and name it materials.
3. In the materials directory, create subdirectories for all your materials and conditions. For example,
Pro/NC 59
create three subdirectories: steel20, steel40, and aluminum.
Your Material directory structure is now complete. Now, when you start Pro/ENGINEER, you your three
material subdirectories are listed when you set up an operation (for stock material), and when you set up the
cutting tools. If, for example, you specified your stock material as steel20, and then created a mill tool with
the Name ball25, your directory structure would look as follows:
-home
--users
---toolcrib
----ball25.tpm (the file containing tool geometry parameters)
----materials
-----aluminum
-----steel20
------ball25.tpm (the file containing tool feeds and speeds)
-----steel40
To Add a New Tool

1. On the Tool Setup dialog box menu bar, click File > New.
2. The system fills in the fields in the dialog box with the default values:
- Name is a default name in the format T0001, T0002, and so on.
- Type is the first one in the list of the currently applicable tool types.
- Material has a default value of dash (-).
- Units are the same as the length units of the stock.
- Parameters that appear on the Geometry tab are defined by the tool Type. Required parameter fields
contain a system-supplied default value, optional parameters have a default value of dash (-).
- On the Settings tab: Tool Number is incremented by 1 with respect to the last one currently in the
Tool Table; Offset Number is empty; other, optional, parameters have a default value of dash (-).
- On the Speeds & Feeds tab, the Stock Material value is that of the stock material specified in the
Operation Setup dialog box; the cutting data fields are empty.
- On the BOM tab, the Bill of Materials table is empty.
3. If you want to set up a tool of a different type, click the arrow next to the Type parameter and select the
appropriate value. The system displays the parameter names and default values for the new tool type.
4. Modify the parameter values, if desired. The Revert button restores the initial values.
5. Click Preview to display the tool section based on the current parameter values. The Tool Window button
opens a separate, bigger window displaying the tool section.
6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until satisfied with the tool section.
7. Specify the cutting data and provide the BOM information, if desired.
8. Click Apply to add the new tool to the Tool Table.
9. To save the tool parameters and cutting data, click File > Save tool.
To Specify the Cutting Data for the Tool

Note: In order to be able to specify the cutting data for a tool, you have to first set up the Material directory
structure.
1. Go to the Speeds & Feeds tab of the Tool Setup dialog box.
2. Select stock material. The Stock Material drop-down list corresponds to your Material directory structure.
The value displayed by default is that of the stock material specified in the Operation Setup dialog box.
3. You can supply separate data for Rough and Finish cutting. Select an Application: Roughing or Finishing.
4. Type the desired values in the text boxes for Speed, Feed, Axial Depth, and Radial Depth. The drop-down
list to the right of each text box lets you change the units, as needed. You can also switch between the
English and metric unit systems by selecting the appropriate option in the Properties group; this changes the
options available in the units' drop-down lists.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for the second Application.
6. Save the tool. The system stores the cutting data in the appropriate Material subdirectory, in the
60 Pro/NC
<name>.tpm file, where <name> is the tool Name.
7. If you want to use the tool to cut a different material, repeat Steps 2 through 6.
You can use the cutting data supplied for the tool to set up the manufacturing parameter values through
relations.
Using the Cutting Data Supplied for the Tool

When you use a tool in an NC sequence, the feeds and speeds stored with it are not automatically used as the
NC sequence feeds and speeds. You have to use the following mechanism to utilize the speed and feed data
stored with the tool when creating an NC sequence.
All the cutting data that you specify in the Tool Setup dialog box is stored as tool parameters. For each data
type, there are two separate parameters, one for Roughing and one for Finishing. The following table lists the
tool parameters corresponding to the cutting data supplied for the tool.
Cutting Data Roughing Finishing
Speed (rev per minute) ROUGH_TOOL_SPINDLE_RPM FINISH_TOOL_SPINDLE_RPM
Speed (length units per minute) ROUGH_SURFACE_SPEED FINISH_SURFACE_SPEED
Feed (per minute) ROUGH_TOOL_FEED_RATE FINISH_TOOL_FEED_RATE
Feed (per tooth) ROUGH_FEED_PER_TEETH FINSIH_FEED_PER_TEETH
Axial depth ROUGH_AXIAL_DEPTH FINISH_AXIAL_DEPTH
Radial depth ROUGH_RADIAL_DEPTH FINISH_RADIAL_DEPTH
When you create an NC sequence, you have to assign the values of these tool parameters to the appropriate
manufacturing parameters through relations. For example, you can specify relations like:
CUT_FEED=ROUGH_TOOL_FEED_RATE
These relations can be either specified in a site file or supplied as a parameter value directly in the parameter
tree for the NC sequence. To specify the relation above, for example, type =ROUGH_TOOL_FEED_RATE as a
value for the CUT_FEED parameter.
If you change the tool, or change the cutting data supplied for the tool, the value of the speed or feed parameter
driven by the relation is automatically updated.
Note: If you switch from Rough machining to Finish, you have to update the relations accordingly. Pro/NC
does not automatically switch to Finish parameters from the tool cutting data. The manufacturing parameter
values are driven by whatever relations you specify.
To Provide the Bill of Materials for the Tool

When you retrieve a solid tool model, the system automatically includes all the parts and assemblies used in the
tool model into the Bill of Materials (BOM) for the tool.
If the tool model is used By Reference, the tool BOM information is read-only. If you are using the tool model
By Copy, you can edit the part names, if needed, or change the type; you can also add or remove the BOM
components.
For all other types of tools, you can provide the BOM information by typing the names of the components and
specifying their type and quantity.
1. Go to the BOM tab of the Tool Setup dialog box.
2. Click to insert a new component into the BOM table.

The system inserts a new line in the BOM table. The component has a default name, type GENERAL, and
Pro/NC 61
quantity 1.
3. Place the cursor in the Component Name cell and type the name of the component.
4. Change the component type, if needed. When you place the cursor in the Type cell, it turns into a drop-
down list. Select the desired type: INSERT, ADAPTER, HOLDER, or GENERAL.
5. Change the quantity, if needed, by placing the cursor in the Quantity cell and typing a value.
6. You can also place the cursor in the Comment cell and type a comment.
7. To remove a component from the BOM table, place the cursor in the appropriate row and click . To
remove all the components, click .
To Retrieve Tool Parameters

1. On the Tool Setup dialog box menu bar, click File > Open Tool Parameters File.
2. The system displays the browser window.
The search starts in your current working directory. If you have set the pro_mf_tprm_directory or
pro_library_dir by using the appropriate configuration options, you can quickly jump to these directories by
clicking the button in the top-right corner of the browser window.
By default, the browser displays files with the ".tpm" extension. If you have pre-Release 12.0 tool files with
the extension ".tprm", you can display them in the browser window by clicking the arrow next to the Type
field and selecting *.tprm.
3. Select a file name from the browser window and click Open.
4. The system searches the Tool Table for the Name of the tool being retrieved:
- If not found, the system appends the tool at the end of the Tool Table. Number (pocket number) is
incremented by 1 with respect to the last one currently in the Tool Table. The Offset field is left blank.
- If the system finds a tool in the current Tool Table that has the same name and the same parameters as
the one being retrieved, it highlights the appropriate Tool Table entry and displays its parameter values
and section sketch.
- If the name belongs to a tool that already exists in the current Tool Table but has a different set of
parameters, the system issues a warning and queries whether you want to overwrite an existing tool. If
you confirm, it highlights the appropriate Tool Table entry and displays the tool’s new parameter
values and section sketch.
At the same time, the system looks for a .tpm file with the same name in the Materials subdirectory
corresponding to the stock material (as specified in the Operation Setup dialog box). If found, it retrieves
the cutting data stored in this file into the appropriate Speeds & Feeds tab fields.
Note: When you retrieve a tool parameters’ file, its type must correspond to the Type value in the Tool
Setup dialog box; otherwise, the system issues an error message and the tool is not retrieved.
To Add a Sketched Tool

You can use sketched tools for Trajectory Milling or Trajectory Turning NC sequences.
1. On the Tool Setup dialog box menu bar, click Edit > Sketch.
2. The system increments the pocket Number by 1 with respect to the last one currently in the Tool Table and
generates a default Name for the tool. The Offset field is left blank.
3. Modify Name as desired.
4. Click Sketcher.
5. The system starts the Sketcher user interface and opens a new window. Sketch the tool section.
To Modify an Existing Tool

1. Highlight the appropriate entry in the Tool Table.
2. The system updates the lower portion of the Tool Setup dialog box to display this tool’s parameters and
section sketch.
3. Enter new values for the parameters that you want to modify.
4. Click Preview to display the tool’s section based on the new parameter values.
62 Pro/NC
5. When satisfied, click Apply to update the Tooling database.
To Delete a Tool
1. Highlight the appropriate entry in the Tool Table.
2. On the Tool Setup dialog box menu bar, click Edit > Delete.
3. The system deletes the current table entry.
Standard Tools
System-supported standard tools are available in Pro/NC. They are stored in a system directory as tool
parameter files, based on the tool type, and can be retrieved in a manufacturing process using the Open Std
Size option under the File pull-down menu of the Tool Setup dialog box. Currently, only drills, center drills,
and taps are supported.
You can configure your own standard size tool database. Set the configuration file option "pro_mf_tprm_dir" to
a local directory. Under this directory create a sub-directory "drills" which will contain ".tpm" files for drilling,
a subdirectory "center_drills" which will contain ".tpm" files for center drilling, and a subdirectory "taps"
containing tap tool files.
An example of a directory structure for a standard tools database follows:
/common/mfg_tools
/drills /center_drills /taps
1_8.tpm 3_16.tpm 5_32.tpm 0.tpm 00.tpm 1_2.tpm 1_4.tpm 1_8.tpm
2 3 4
1 set "pro_mf_tprm_dir /common/mfg_tools"

2 Drilling tool parameter files
3 Center drilling tool parameter files
4 Taping tool parameter files
Note: Do not confuse the standard tool parameter files with the standard library of solid tools (available
with Pro/LIBRARY license).
To Use a Standard Tool

1. In the Tool Setup dialog box, choose File > Open Std Size (this option is available only for the following
tool types: DRILLING, CENTER-DRILLING, and TAPPING).
2. Select a file name from the browser window.
3. The system reads in the tool parameter file.
About Solid Tool Models

All Pro/NC needs to know about a tool is its parameters. It creates an NC sequence and displays the default tool
based on the values in the ".tpm" file.
However, you can enhance the CL data display and interactively check for interference by showing a "real"
tool. In order to do this, design your tool as a regular Pro/ENGINEER model (part or assembly), and then
establish associativity between this model’s dimensions and Pro/NC tool parameters. When such a tool is used,
Pro/NC 63
you will have the option to display the default section or the real tool model. This is also another way to create
your tool library.
Standard Library
If you have an appropriate license, you can also use the standard tool library of solid tools. It contains common
tools (mills, taps, and drills) of sizes corresponding to ANSI standards. For more information, refer to the
TOOLING LIBRARY Catalog.
Example: A Solid Tool Model for Milling

A tool model is created as a regular Pro/ENGINEER part or assembly, with a few additional steps to establish
associativity between the tool model and the manufacturing tool.
An example of a milling tool model is shown in the following illustration. Appropriate dimension symbols
correspond to tool parameter names, and the origin coordinate system (1) is named TIP.
RCORNER RADIUS
To Create a Tool Model

1. Create a new Pro/ENGINEER model of type Part, give it the name of the tool. Reproduce the tool geometry
by using the appropriate construction features (protrusions, cuts, and so on).
2. Create a coordinate system to represent the tool origin, i. e., the tool control point. This is the point that will
follow the tool path computed for the NC sequence. Make sure the Z-axis of the coordinate system is
pointing in the upward direction (into the tool) for Milling and Holemaking tools; for Turning, the axes of
the tool coordinate system must be oriented so that they will coincide with the directions of the NC
sequence coordinate system’s axes when the tool is in default orientation. Change the coordinate system’s
name to "TIP" (use Set Up, Name).
3. Establish associativity between the model’s dimensions and tool’s parameters. There are two ways to do
this:
- Modify appropriate dimension symbols to exactly correspond to the parameter names. Choose Modify
from the PART menu, then choose DimCosmetics and Symbol. Select the feature to display
dimensions, then select dimension text and enter the new symbolic name, for example, [Cutter_Diam].
- Add parameters to the model with the names exactly corresponding to the tool parameter names. This
method is convenient when you want to define the tool parameters directly in the tool assembly (for
example, Cutter_Diam for an insert drill vs. a drill bit).
Notes:
- Parameter names are case-insensitive. For example, when modifying a dimension symbol or adding a
model parameter for Cutter_Diam, you can use [Cutter_Diam], [cutter_diam], or
[CUTTER_DIAM]; the system will recognize either of these strings as a tool parameter name.
- If an assembly is to be used as a tool model, you can modify dimension symbols or add parameters to
any of the component parts as well as the assembly itself.
64 Pro/NC
To Assign Tool Material and Number of Teeth
Tool material and number of teeth can be set up while creating a model. Then, when the tool model is retrieved
into a manufacturing process, the tool parameters Num_Of_Teeth and Tool_Material will be initialized, which
will simplify the use of Machinability Database files.
· To specify number of teeth, add a relation:
Num_Of_Teeth = 6 (for example)
· To set up material, choose Set Up from the PART menu, then choose Material, and assign material to the
tool model.
To Use a Tool Model

To use a tool model in Pro/NC, you have to retrieve the tool using the Open Tool Library option. The system
will look up the tool model and read appropriate dimension values into the tool parameter file. When displaying
CL data, you will have an option to display the tool model, or a default tool.
1. On the Tool Setup dialog box menu bar, click File > Open Tool Library.
Note: Make sure to select the correct tool type from the Tool Type drop-down list in the dialog box before
retrieving a solid tool model.
2. Choose By Reference or By Copy:
- By Reference—Direct associativity with the library model will be established. You will not be able to
modify the tool parameters for a particular NC sequence using the Tool Setup dialog box. If the tool
model in the library is later modified, all the manufacturing data will be updated upon regenerating the
manufacturing model.
- By Copy—The tool information will be copied into the manufacturing model. The tool parameters for
the NC sequence can be modified using the Tool Setup dialog box; the library model will not be
changed. If the library model is later modified, it will not affect this NC sequence.
3. Select a tool model name from the browser window.
4. The system reads in the tool parameters from the model (the model name is used as the tool Name). The
system also includes the names of the component parts and assemblies of the tool model in the BOM table,
located on the BOM tab of the Tool Setup dialog box.
Using Assembly as a Tool Model

If an assembly is used as a tool model, the system will search the assembly first, and then all the component
parts in the same order as they were assembled (that is, the first component will be searched first), for the tool
parameters and origin data. Once a parameter is set, all values for the same parameter found later will be
ignored. In other words, the top-level assembly parameters take precedence over component parameters, and
after that the precedence is determined by the order of assembly.
If, after all components are searched, some of the tool parameters are missing, an error message will appear and
you will be asked to select another tool.
Tool Display
If a tool model was used for creating an NC sequence, then whenever you display the path and tool, two
additional options will appear:
· Disp Model—Use the tool model geometry in CL data display.
· No Model—Display the default tool section based on the tool parameter values.
If you have the same manufacturing model displayed in multiple windows, the tool and tool path will update
concurrently in all windows if they are modified.
Note: If the TIP coordinate system is missing in the model, the system will issue an error message and display
the default tool. If multiple coordinate systems named TIP are found in the tool model, a warning will be issued;
the tool origin will be selected by the same rules as the tool parameters are extracted from a tool assembly (for
Pro/NC 65
example, the assembly coordinate system takes precedence).
Solid Tool Capabilities in Turning

Generally, a tool model is used for visual purposes only. However, in Turning you have an option to use the
tool model geometry for calculating the automatic material removal and degouging the tool path. This
functionality allows you to customize the tool outline and designate the cutting edges that correspond to your
particular tool/holder combinations.
When you specify that you want to use the tool outline, the system will use the whole tool profile in computing
the tool path. This option is similar to using a tool model By Reference, because you can modify the tool
section only by modification of the tool model geometry.
The tool model for this functionality is set up according to the general rules of setting up a solid tool model:
· It can be a Pro/ENGINEER part or assembly.
· It must contain a coordinate system named "TIP" to indicate the control point location.
· The only geometric parameter you have to define for the tool model is Nose_Radius, required for
calculating material removal. You can define this parameter by either using a model parameter or a
dimension symbol. You can also add parameters to the model to provide values for non-geometric
parameters (such as Tool_Comment or Gauge_X_Length). If an assembly is used as a tool model, you can
use both Part and Assembly parameters for this purpose, as before. Unlike regular Tool Model functionality,
you do not have to define geometric parameters (such as Tool_Width, Length); the tool outline will be
based directly on the tool model geometry.
Geometry of the tool will be defined by projecting the external profile of all components of the tool model to
the XZ plane of the TIP coordinate system. This projected tool contour will be used to remove material and also
to degouge against the tool contour.
If the tool model is an assembly, you can indicate which portion of the tool will actually be used to remove
material using the Yes_No type parameter "solid_tool_cutting" at the part level. If this parameter is set to "yes"
for a certain part in the tool assembly, the outline of this part will be used as the cutting edges.
All other edges in the assembly will be assumed to be non-cutting. You can specify a clearance value, to avoid
contact between non-cutting tool geometry and the workpiece material, using the NC sequence parameter
TOOL_CLEARANCE. This parameter designates how close the non-cutting edges will be allowed to approach
workpiece material.
66 Pro/NC
Example: Using the Tool Outline in Turning
1 Tool Assembly
2 Set "solid_tool_cutting yes" for this part
3 The system uses tool geometry to generate the tool path and remove material.
To Use Tool Outline in Turning

1. On the Tool Setup dialog box menu bar, click File > Open Tool Library > Use Outline (this option is
available only for the tool types TURNING and TURN-GROOVING).
2. Select a tool model name from the browser window.
3. The system reads in the model parameters and geometry, and generates the tool outline by projecting the
external profile of all components of the tool model to the XZ plane of the TIP coordinate system. When
creating an NC sequence using this tool, the system will use the tool outline for material removal and
degouging purposes, as described above.
Note: If you have trouble generating tool path when using a solid tool outline, try increasing the value of the
NC sequence parameter BACK_CLEAR_ANGLE.
To Use Customized Tools in Holemaking

If you want to use a tool model By Reference, you generally have to define all the parameters required by
Pro/NC for the appropriate tool type. In Holemaking, however, you may want to use customized tools that are
not easily described by the tool section parameters of either of the Holemaking tool types. Pro/NC allows you to
use a simplified parameters’ set for a solid Holemaking tool.
In Holemaking, Pro/NC needs the following information about your tool to generate the tool path and the proper
CL data:
· Cutter_Diam—The cutter diameter of the tool, used for Auto depth computations.
· Tip_Offset—The distance from the tool control point (tip) to the shoulder (where Cutter_Diam starts).
Pro/NC 67
· Length
· Csink_Angle—For countersink tools, defines the resulting chamfer angle.
When you retrieve a Holemaking tool model, if the system finds the Tip_Offset parameter it will use this
simplified parameters’ set for tool representation. Therefore, when defining a solid model for a Holemaking
tool, you can specify just the parameters listed above, and the TIP coordinate system, and use this model By
Reference for Holemaking NC sequences.
Example: A Solid Tool Model for Holemaking
1 Dimension symbols correspond to tool parameter names.

2 Origin coordinate system
About Sites
The Site option in the PARAM SETUP menu allows you to set up NC sequence specific or generic sites that can
be later used to specify parameters for NC sequences.
Warning: When you start using a new release of Pro/NC, make sure to update your existing site files whenever
there is a change in the way the system interprets a parameter value. Parameter values in site files are not
updated automatically.
Manipulating Sites
The following options are available for site setup:
· Create—Create a new site file.
· Modify—Modify parameters of a site. Select a site name from the menu. The editor window comes up with
the current site parameters.
· Retrieve—Retrieve an existing site file from disk. Select a site name from the menu, or choose Names and
enter the path and name of the site file.
· Save—Save a site file to disk. Select a site name from the menu. You have to save a site in order to use it in
other manufacturing models.
· Delete—Delete a site. Select a site name from the menu, then confirm that you really want to delete the site.
If the site has been used by an NC sequence, the system will issue a warning. If you delete such a site, all
NC sequence parameters inherited from this site will be treated as customized (non-inherited).
· Where Used—Provide information about the NC sequences that inherit parameters from the specified site.
· Activate—Activate a site file. Parameters of an activated site will automatically be substituted as the system
defaults for new NC sequences of the appropriate type. Another way of activating sites is associating them
with the workcell.
· Show—Display information about an existing site. Select a site name from the menu.
68 Pro/NC
To Create a New Site File
1. From the MANUFACTURE or MACHINING menu, choose Mfg Setup > Param Setup > Site > Create.
2. Enter the name for the site. The system will automatically add a suffix corresponding to the site type and
extension ".sit" (for example, "mach1_mil.sit").
3. Select a site type.
4. A Pro/TABLE window comes up with all the manufacturing parameters required for this type of NC
sequence (for a generic site, all the parameters will be present). Supply values for the parameters. Each
parameter must have either a default value, or low and high range, or both, specified. If omitting the default
value, enter a dash (-). If both are specified, the default value must be within the range boundaries. You can
also specify visibility and add optional comments for any parameters.
When specifying a parameter value, you can enter relations, similar to modifying the parameters of an NC
sequence. However, when an NC sequence inherits the site parameters, it will inherit the evaluated value of
this relation, not the relation itself.
To Activate a Site
The Activate option in the SITE SETUP menu allows you to make a site active. Before being activated, the site
must be added to the manufacturing model using the Create or Retrieve option. Only one site of a particular
type can be active at a time.
1. Choose Activate.
2. Choose one of:
- Cur Workcell—Activate the site(s) associated with the current workcell. Use this option to quickly
revert to the default sites for the workcell after activating some other site.
- In Session—Select a site other than the default site(s). Only the sites that have been created or retrieved
in the current session will be available. Select a site name (or several names) from the namelist menu.
Sites of the same type are mutually exclusive.
Activating a Site
When you create an NC sequence, the parameters of the active site will be the default parameters. The system
will look for an NC sequence specific active site first (for example, Milling), then for a generic active site. If
neither is found, the system default parameters will be used.
Note: When you activate an operation, the site(s) associated with the operation’s workcell are activated
automatically.
Associating a Site with a Workcell

If you associate a site with a workcell, all NC sequences created in this workcell will inherit the parameters of
this site. You can then modify individual NC sequence parameters on a case-by-case basis. If you modify a site
associated with a workcell, or replace it with another site, all the NC sequence parameters inherited from this
site (that is, those that have not been modified) will update automatically.
You can associate more than one site with a workcell, because different types of NC sequences created on a
workcell may require different parameter settings. However, only one site of a particular type can be associated
with the workcell. The table below lists the site types that may be associated with the each workcell type.
Workcell Type Site Types

Lathe Generic
Turning
Holemaking
Mill Generic
Milling
Pro/NC 69
Holemaking
Mill/Turn Generic
Milling
Turning
Holemaking
WEDM Generic
WEDM
If both a sequence-specific and a generic site are associated with a workcell, the system will use the sequence-
specific site for parameter inheritance.
To Associate a Site with a Workcell

1. When creating a machine tool (workcell), click Defaults on the Output tab of the Machine Tool Setup
dialog box. To associate a site with an existing workcell, on the MANUFACTURE or MACHINING menu,
click Mfg Setup > Workcell, select the machine tool name, then click Defaults on the Output tab of the
Machine Tool Setup dialog box.
2. Choose one of:
- Current Dir—Retrieve site files from the current directory.
- In Session—Use site files that have been created or retrieved in the current session.
3. Select a site type. Only the site types that are appropriate for the current workcell type will be listed.
4. The list of sites of the selected type appears in the menu. Select a site name.
5. Repeat the steps above to select more than one site, if needed, then select Done.
Parameter Visibility
Some of the manufacturing parameters need not be changed at the NC sequence level. You can set them up in a
site file, and then remove them from display when you are modifying the NC sequence parameters. Similarly,
you can specify which parameters are to be listed when you output the Manufacturing Info.
Parameter visibility can be specified using the following means:
· When you set up site parameters, two columns are available for each parameter:
- NC SEQ VISIBLE—Specifies if the parameter should appear in the NC sequence parameter list when
creating or redefining NC sequences.
- MFG INFO VISIBLE—Specifies if the parameter should be listed when you display Manufacturing
Info.
The default values for all parameters are YES for both columns. If you set a value to NO, this parameter will
not be visible.
If you specify that a parameter is invisible in NC sequences, it must have a set default value before the site
may be accepted by Pro/NC. If you set a parameter with a "-1" value to be invisible, the system will issue an
error message and allow you to re-edit the site table.
· The Visibility option in the MFG PARAMS menu allows you to modify parameter visibility:
- When setting parameters at the operation level.
- At the time of creating or redefining an NC sequence.
When you select this option, a Pro/TABLE window appears with the list of all parameters and the two
visibility columns, as described above.
About Machinability Database

Feed rate and spindle speed parameters for milling, turning, and holemaking can be initialized using the
Machinability Database (MDB) files.
MDB files can be created through the Mach DB option in the PARAM SETUP menu, or as ASCII files outside
70 Pro/NC
of Pro/ENGINEER. The expected format of these files is dependent on the NC sequence type.
You can set up a machinability database directory using the configuration option:
pro_mdb_dir pathname
Always enter in the configuration file the complete pathname to avoid problems when working in different
directories with Pro/ENGINEER. Example:
pro_mdb_dir /usr/users/mach_db
The MDB files for milling, turning, and holemaking must be placed under the machinability database directory
(or under the working directory if the machinability database directory is not set up) in subdirectories named
"mill_db", "turn_db", and "drill_db", respectively. You will not be able to create an MDB file using the Mach
DB option if the default subdirectory for it does not exist.
To Set Up MDB Files

1. Choose Mach DB from the PARAM SETUP menu.
2. The MDB SETUP menu appears with the following options:
- Create—Create a new MDB file.
- Modify—Modify an existing MDB file.
- Show—Display the selected MDB file in the Information Window.
3. After selecting an option from the MDB SETUP menu, specify an NC sequence type: Milling, Turning, or
Drilling.
4. The UNITS INFO menu then appears with the options:
- Units—Set, modify, or show units for the MDB values.
- File—Create, modify, or show an MDB file. If you are creating a new file, the Pro/TABLE window
will appear. For Modify and Show, the menu-driven search will be initiated in the appropriate directory
("mill_db", "turn_db", or "drill_db").
When you create a new file, the Pro/TABLE window appears with the default file headers. Fill in the
appropriate values. If you want to specify the same value as in the previous entry, leave the cell blank or put in a
dash (-). If this parameter is to be ignored for a particular entry, type n/a.
When you modify an existing file, it is also retrieved in a Pro/TABLE window. All the cells that were left
empty will contain a dash (-). Modify the values as desired and exit Pro/TABLE. The new version of the MDB
file will be saved.
Although MDB files are created through model setup, they can eventually be used in any manufacturing model.
When you create an NC sequence, you will have an option to look up an MDB file. This will initialize the feed
and speed parameters based on the tool size, tool and workpiece material, cut depth.
Machinability Database Units

If you check off Units when creating or modifying MDB files, the MDB UNITS menu will appear with the
following options:
· Feed—Specify the feed units. The options are:
- For Milling—Inch/tooth, Foot/tooth, Millimeter/tooth, Centimeter/tooth, Meter/tooth. The system
default is Inch/tooth.
- For Turning and Drilling—Inch/rev, Foot/rev, Millimeter/rev, Centimeter/rev, Meter/rev. The
system default is Inch/rev.
· Speed—Specify the speed units. The options are: Inch/min, Foot/min, Millimeter/min, Centimeter/min,
Meter/min. The system default is Foot/min.
· Cut Depth—Specify the cut depth units (applicable for Milling and Turning). The options are: Inch, Foot,
Millimeter, Centimeter, Meter. The system default is Inch.
· TL Width—Specify the tool width units (applicable for Turning only). The options are: Inch, Foot,
Pro/NC 71
· TL Diam—Specify the tool diameter units (applicable for Drilling only). The options are: Inch, Foot,
Note: Conversion of existing MDB files is not provided. that is, if you modify units of an existing
MDB file, the values will stay the same.
Default Units for the MDB files

UNITS FEED SPEED CUT DEPTH TOOL WIDTH TOOL DIAM HARDNESS
Milling inch/toot foot/min inch n/a n/a Bhn
h
Turning inch/rev inch n/a
Drilling n/a n/a inch
At the beginning of a Pro/ENGINEER session, the MDB units are set to system defaults (listed above). Once
you change the units, this value will become the current default, that is, all the new MDB files will use this
value.
If you modify an MDB file whose units differ from the current MDB units, the system will issue a warning and
prompt you to reset the current units to those of the file. If you confirm, the current defaults for MDB units will
be reset. If you cancel, the units in the current MDB file will be changed to match the default units. The values
will stay the same!
If you select Show from the MDB SETUP menu and then check off Units, the Information Window will appear
with the current default units for the appropriate MDB type (Milling, Turning, or Drilling).
During an MDB file lookup, the proper conversion will be provided, if necessary, depending on the parameter
units specified for the NC sequence (for example, MMPM), length units of the tool and workpiece (for example,
mm), number of teeth, and so on.
To Use MDB Files

You can use an MDB library file ("*.mdb") to set CUT_FEED and SPINDLE_SPEED for a milling, turning, or
holemaking NC sequence. The file must already exist in the corresponding subdirectory ("mill_db", "turn_db",
or "drill_db") of the machinability database directory, or of your working directory if the machinability database
directory has not been set up.
1. Choose Retrieve from the MFG PARAMS menu.
2. Choose MDB Library.
You will be prompted to supply necessary data about the cut and tool, using a Pro/TABLE window. Supply
the values for all listed parameters.
3. Select an MDB file from a namelist menu.
4. If the table lookup is successful, the CUT_FEED and SPINDLE_SPEED parameters will be set to values
derived from the table, either directly or by linear (one- or two-dimensional) interpolation. At the same time:
- For Milling, STEP_DEPTH will be set to AXIAL_CUT_DEPTH, STEP_OVER—to
RADIAL_CUT_DEPTH
- For Turning, STEP_DEPTH will be set to CUT_DEPTH
Notes:
- You have to set up the tool before using the MDB Library.
- If you change any of the values on which the parameter selection depends, the parameters will not be
updated automatically. You will have to go through the parameter retrieval process again to reflect the
changes.
Good Practice
To minimize the number of parameters to initialize during an MDB file lookup, you can:
· Assign workpiece material in Part mode using Set Up, Material. Workpiece hardness and condition will be
72 Pro/NC
automatically looked up in the material file.
· Provide values for the tool parameters Num_Of_Teeth (for milling) and Tool_Material. If using a tool
model, set up tool material and number of teeth.
· Specify parameters STEP_DEPTH and STEP_OVER before using MDB library.
MDB Lookup Failure

If an MDB table lookup fails during NC sequence parameters retrieval, the MACH DB FAIL menu will appear
with the following options:
· Modify Input—Edit the input parameters.
· Show Input—Examine the current input parameters.
· Show Error—Display the most recent error message produced by MDB lookup.
· Show Mach DB—Examine the MDB table currently in use.
About Manufacturing Parameters

Manufacturing parameters are accessed by choosing options from the MFG PARAMS menu. These can be
selected when creating, modifying, or redefining an NC sequence. To access the MFG PARAMS menu, choose
Seq Setup from the NC SEQUENCE menu, and then Parameters from the SEQ SETUP menu.
Note: You can also access the manufacturing parameters for the current NC sequence by clicking the
Manufacturing Parameters icon in the Pro/ENGINEER toolbar. This is equivalent to selecting Seq Setup,
Parameters, Set. The Param Tree dialog box will appear.
You can either set all the parameters for an NC sequence manually, one-by-one, or initialize the parameters file
from database.
Initializing the NC Sequence Parameters

There are several ways to initialize the NC sequence parameters:
· If a site corresponding to the type of the NC sequence has been activated (whether by associating it to the
workcell or by using the Activate option), it will be automatically used to initialize the parameters. You can
retrieve parameters of another site appropriate for the current NC sequence using the Site option in the MFG
PARAMS menu. Note that retrieving site parameters does not activate the site for subsequent NC sequences.
· Retrieve an existing NC sequence specific parameters file. Choose Retrieve from the MFG PARAMS menu,
then choose Param Files and select a file name from the DATA FILES menu. This menu will contain all the
appropriate type files in the current directory, or in the library directory, if set. If the file resides in another
directory, select Names and enter path and name for the file to be retrieved. You can also enter a question
mark (?) after selecting Names, which will open the browser window. The search will be started in the
"pro_mf_param_dir" directory, if set; otherwise, in your current working directory.
Note: If the retrieved file contains some parameters inapplicable for the current NC sequence, these
parameters will be listed in the Information Window.
· Retrieve the set of parameters used for a previous NC sequence. The Use Prev option is only available after
at least one NC sequence has been created.
· For a milling, turning, or holemaking NC sequence, feed and speed parameters can be initialized using the
Machinability Database (MDB) files. The rest of the parameters will have to be filled in using the Set
option.
Note: You can use the Set option at any time to modify the parameter values.
Parameter Inheritance
All levels of manufacturing features automatically inherit their parameters from an upper-level feature, unless
you explicitly modify (customize) a parameter at the current level. That is, Tool Motions inherit their
parameters from the parent NC sequence, while NC sequences may (under certain circumstances) inherit their
parameters from sites.
Pro/NC 73
The following are the rules for the NC sequence parameter inheritance:
· If, at the time of creating an NC sequence, a site of appropriate type is associated with the current workcell,
the NC sequence will inherit the parameters of this site. This is called implicit inheritance. If you later
modify the parameters of the site, the NC sequence parameter values will update accordingly. Also, if you
later replace the associated site with another one (of the same type) the NC sequence parameters will update
to the values in the new site associated with the workcell.
Note: If you disassociate a site from the workcell (without replacing it with another site of the same type),
existing NC sequences that implicitly inherit their parameters from this site will keep the inheritance link.
· If you initialize the NC sequence parameters using a site other than the one associated with the workcell (by
activating another site or by using the Site option in the MFG PARAMS menu), then the NC sequence will
inherit the parameters of this site. This is called explicit inheritance. If you later modify the parameters of
the site, the NC sequence parameter values will update accordingly. However, changing the site associated
with the workcell, or the workcell itself, will not affect the parameters of this NC sequence.
· If you initialize the NC sequence parameters using the Retrieve option in the MFG PARAMS menu, these
parameters will be marked as customized.
· If you initialize the NC sequence parameters using the Use Prev option in the MFG PARAMS menu, and the
previous NC sequence inherits its parameters from a site, the current NC sequence will not automatically
inherit from the same site. The following situations are possible:
- If both the previous and the current NC sequence implicitly inherit from the same site, the inherited
(non-customized) parameters used from the previous NC sequence will also be marked as inherited in
the current NC sequence.
- If the previous NC sequence explicitly inherits from a site, and you want the new NC sequence inherit
from the same site, use the Site option first to initialize the NC sequence parameters, then use the Use
Prev option. In this case, all the inherited parameters used from the previous NC sequence will also be
marked as inherited in the current NC sequence.
- If the previous and current NC sequences inherit from different sites, or if one of them does not have an
inheritance source, then all the parameters used from the previous NC sequence will be marked as
customized.
· If you initialize the NC sequence parameters using an MDB file, these parameters will be marked as
customized.
· If you modify parameter values using the Set option in the MFG PARAMS menu, these parameters will be
marked as customized.
Parameters marked as inherited will automatically update all the way down if you change a parameter value at
the upper level. However, if you have explicitly modified a parameter value at a certain level, this parameter
will be marked as customized and will not change when you modify parameters at an upper level. Customized
parameters can also be inherited by the lower-level features. In other words, if you modify CUT_FEED at the
NC sequence level, it will no longer change if you later modify CUT_FEED in the parent site file, but the
Automatic Cut motion CUT_FEED will update to the new NC sequence value (unless you explicitly customize
it at the Tool Motion level, too).
When you look at the parameters of an NC sequence or Tool Motion, the inherited parameter values appear in
parentheses. However, if you save a parameters file to disk (using the Save option in the MFG PARAMS menu),
this file will list all the parameters without parentheses (because when you retrieve this file into another NC
sequence, these parameters will be marked as customized).
To Set or Modify NC Sequence Parameters

The Set option allows you to set or modify parameters for the NC sequence. If you have initialized the
parameters, all or some of the parameters values will be filled out. You can then modify them to suit this
specific NC sequence. If it is a new file, you will have to replace every "-1" with a value.
Note: Only parameters visible at the NC sequence level will appear for modification. Use the Visibility
option to modify the parameters’ visibility.
1. Choose Set from the MFG PARAMS menu.
74 Pro/NC
2. A Param Tree dialog box appears with a "simplified" set of parameters, corresponding to the NC sequence
type. These parameters are the most commonly modified; they provide a quick and simple way of creating
and modifying the tool path.
If you want to modify a parameter not in the Simplified set, press the Advanced button in the upper-right
corner of the dialog box (this button allows you to toggle between the Advanced and Simplified parameters’
presentations). The complete set of NC sequence parameters is displayed in the Param Tree dialog box.
They are listed under the following categories, or branches:
- Name—Machine and NC data file names.
- Feeds—Feed parameters.
- Cut Options—Parameters that define the type of the cut, such as scan type, cycle type.
- Cut Params—Cut parameters, such as step depth, stock allowance.
- Machine—Machine-related parameters, such as speeds, registers, coolant.
- Entry/Exit—Parameters that define the entry and exit path for the tool, such as plunge angle, lead-in,
approach and exit path.
- Thread—Parameters specific to a lathe Thread NC sequence. This branch will not appear for any other
type NC sequences.
Double-clicking on the name of the branch will collapse or expand it.
3. To modify a parameter, use the mouse to highlight the cell with the parameter value. The value will appear
in the input panel at the top of the dialog box. Then, depending on the parameter type, do the following:
- When modifying a parameter that has a numeric value, type in a new value and press<CR>.
You can enter a mathematical expression, which may contain other parameters in the same NC
sequence, or tool parameters. For example, if you enter:
STEP_OVER CUTTER_DIAM / 2
the STEP_OVER distance will be based on the cutter diameter of the current tool (if the tool is later
changed, STEP_OVER will also be updated).
You can also include model dimension symbols (in assembly format, for example, d12:0) and user-
defined parameters which are already defined in relations for the model.
When you enter a relation in the input panel, the system evaluates the relation and places the value in
the appropriate cell. If you later highlight this cell for modification, the input panel will display the
relation used.
- When modifying a parameter that has a string value, such as SCAN_TYPE, press the down arrow to
the right of the input panel (or press <F4>). A drop-down list will appear with all possible values for
this parameter. Scroll to the value you want (to display it in the input panel), then press <CR>.
4. The Edit button in the menu bar of the dialog box allows you to copy a parameter value (in a cell, not in the
input box) and then paste it into other cells, or in all cells within a row. This is especially helpful when
modifying parameters of an NC sequence which has multiple Automatic Cut motions.
5. To finish modifying the parameters, choose File > Exit.
6. Choose Save from the MFG PARAMS menu if you want to save this file to disk (you will have to save the
parameters if you want to retrieve them for another NC sequence), and enter a file name. The file will be
saved with a file extension corresponding to the type of NC sequence you are creating. These are:
.mil—Milling NC sequences
.trn—Turning NC sequences
.drl—Holemaking NC sequences
.edm—Wire EDM NC sequences
.aux—Auxiliary NC sequences
7. Choose Done to return to the NC SEQUENCE menu.
To Use Previous Parameters

The Use Prev option in the MFG PARAMS menu allows you to create initial parameter value settings for the
current sequence by making a one-time copy of those parameter values from a previous NC sequence. This is
especially convenient when you perform several NC sequences in a row with parameters just slightly varying.
After retrieving the parameters, use Set to make any variations, if necessary.
Pro/NC 75
When you choose Use Prev, a run-time menu of all previous NC sequences whose parameters are compatible
with the current one will appear (if none of the previous NC sequences’ parameters are applicable, the system
will issue a message). Select the NC sequence to use. It does not have to be of exactly the same type as the
current one. The system will read in the applicable parameters and ignore those that are not valid for the current
NC sequence type. However, the system will not check for the appropriate parameter values. For example,
TYPE_3 is a valid SCAN_TYPE for Milling, but is invalid for Holemaking. If the value retrieved is not
applicable for this NC sequence type, the system will issue a warning and automatically reset the parameter to
its default value.
To Use a Non-Active Site

If there is a site associated with the workcell or an activated site of the appropriate type, its parameters will be
automatically retrieved. You can also initialize the NC sequence parameters by explicitly selecting a pre-
defined site.
1. Choose Site from the MFG PARAMS menu. You will have the following options:
- Cur Workcell—Use the site(s) associated with the current workcel. Use this option to use the default
sites for the workcell after activating some other site.
- Current Dir—Retrieve site files from the current directory. Select a site type. Only the site types that
are appropriate for the current workcell type will be listed.
- In Session—Use site files that have been created or retrieved in the current session.
2. Appropriate sites will be listed in a namelist menu. Select a name of the site to use.
3. The ".sit" file will be read in, its default values initializing the NC sequence parameters. If some of the
default values are missing, supply them using the Set option.
Common NC Sequence Parameters

The parameters that are common to all NC sequences are listed below. They are listed under a heading
corresponding to the name of the branch when you set up the parameters. Click See Also to access the topics
describing the NC sequence-specific parameters.
Notes:
- You must supply a value for all parameters that have a default of –1 (this means that the default value is
not set by the system).
- Some parameters may have a value of dash (-), that is, "ignore". This means that the parameter will not
be used. Usually a system default or another parameter will be used instead. The "-" value is only
acceptable for those parameters that have it as a default.
- Length units for NC sequence parameters (where applicable) are the same as the units of the workpiece.
If you change the workpiece units using the Same Size option (so that the dimension values are
changed), the system also scales all the appropriate parameters of the currently existing NC sequences.
Names
MACH_NAME
The machine name as required in post-processing. The default MACH_NAME is TURN for turning, MILL for
all other NC sequences.
MACH_ID
The machine ID as required in post-processing. The default MACH_ID is 01.
NCL_FILE
The default name of the CL file for the NC sequence. The default is a dash (-), in which case the system
generates a default name.
PRE_MACHINING_FILE
Enter name of the file you want to be included at the very beginning of the CL file. The file must be located in
76 Pro/NC
your current working directory and have extension ".ncl". The default is a dash (-), that is, none.
POST_MACHINING_FILE
Enter name of the file you want to be included at the very end of the CL file. The file must be located in your
current working directory and have extension ".ncl". The default is a dash (-), that is, none.
Cut Param
TOLERANCE
The tool path approximates curved geometry by moving in small straight line increments, as shown in the
following drawing. The maximum distance that the straight line path deviates from the curved geometry is set
by TOLERANCE. The default TOLERANCE is 0.001" (0.025 mm).
2
1
3
4
5
1 TOLERANCE
2 Design Surface
3 Machined Surface
4 Tool Centerline path
5 Tool
Feed
CUT_FEED
The feed rate used for cutting motion. The default CUT_FEED is not set (displayed as "–1").
CUT_UNITS
IPM (inches per minute—default), FPM (feet per minute), MMPM (millimeters per minute), FPR (feet per
revolution), IPR (inches per revolution), MMPR (millimeters per revolution).
RETRACT_FEED
The rate at which the tool moves away from the workpiece. The default RETRACT_FEED is a dash (-), in
which case the CUT_FEED will be used.
RETRACT_UNITS
IPM (default), FPM, MMPM, FPR, IPR, MMPR.
FREE_FEED
The feed rate used for rapid traverse (RETRACT_UNITS are used for rapid feed rate units). The default
FREE_FEED is a dash (-), in which case the RAPID command will be output to the CL file. The same happens
if FREE_FEED is set to 0.
PLUNGE_FEED
The rate at which the tool approaches and plunges into the workpiece (in Milling and Turning). The default
PLUNGE_FEED is a dash (-), in which case the CUT_FEED will be used.
PLUNGE_UNITS
IPM (default), FPM, MMPM, FPR, IPR, MMPR.
Pro/NC 77
Machine
LINTOL
Allows you to specify the linear tolerance interpolation used by post-processor, for multi-axis milling and
Mill/Turn rotary linearization. Outputs the "LINTOL / r" statement at the beginning of the CL file. The default
LINTOL is a dash (-), in which case the LINTOL statement will not be output.
CIRC_INTERPOLATION
Specifies the format in which the tool motion along an arc or circle will be output to the CL file. The options
are:
· POINTS_ONLY—Use this format for machines that have no circular interpolation capabilities. Arcs are
approximated by a series of straight line moves affected by tolerance (as shown in the illustration above).
· ARC_ONLY (default)—Use this format for machines that have full circular interpolation. Only the
CIRCLE statement and the minimum number of points necessary for post-processing will be output to the
CL file. The number of points is defined by the NUMBER_OF_ARC_PTS parameter.
· POINTS_&_ARC—The CIRCLE statement and the maximum number of points according to the tolerance
value will be output to the CL file.
· APT_FORMAT—Use it if your post-processor expects the circular motions to be in the APT format.
Note: The CIRC_INTERPOLATION parameter specifies only the format for CL data output. The actual
tool path along curved geometry is always generated according to the TOLERANCE parameter value, as
described above.
NUMBER_OF_ARC_PTS
Specifies the number of points to be output to the CL file if CIRC_INTERPOLATION is set to ARC_ONLY.
The default is 3.
COOLANT_OPTION
ON, OFF (default), FLOOD, MIST, TAP, THRU.
COOLANT_PRESSURE
NONE (default), LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH.
COORDINATE_OUTPUT
Specifies which coordinate system, MACHINE_CSYS or SEQUENCE_CSYS, is used as the CL data origin
(the default is MACHINE_CSYS).
FIXT_OFFSET_REG
Allows you to specify the fixture transformation offset register used on your machine. The default
FIXT_OFFSET_REG is a dash (-), that is, none. If you specify another value ("n") for FIXT_OFFSET_REG,
the "SET / OFSETL, n" and "SET / OFSETL, OFF" statements will be output.
END_STOP_CONDITION
Specifies the stop command to be issued at the end of the CL data output for an NC sequence:
· NONE (default)—No command.
· OPSTOP—The OPSTOP command will be issued.
· PROGRAM_STOP—The STOP command will be issued.
· GOHOME—The GOHOME command will be issued. If you specify a Home point for the operation, the
tool appears in the Home location. If you do not specify the Home point, the system outputs the GOHOME
command anyway, but it does not move the tool, and issues a warning.
Entry/Exit
START_MOTION
Defines how the tool will move from the Start point of the NC sequence to the beginning of the cut motion. If
78 Pro/NC
you do not specify the Start point (using the Start option in the SEQ SETUP menu), this parameter will be
ignored. The values are:
DIRECT (default)—The approach motion will be a straight line from the Start point of the NC sequence to
the start of the cut.
Z_FIRST—The tool will first move in the direction parallel to the z-axis of the NC Sequence coordinate
system, then move in the direction normal to the z-axis and start cutting.
Z_LAST—The tool will first move in the direction normal to the z-axis of the NC Sequence coordinate
system, then move along the z-axis and start cutting.
Not applicable for Wire EDM.
END_MOTION
Defines how the tool will move from the end of the cut to the End point of the NC sequence. If you do not
specify the End point (using the End option in the SEQ SETUP menu), this parameter will be ignored. The
values are:
· DIRECT (default)—The exit motion will be a straight line from the end of the cut to the End point of the
NC sequence.
· Z_FIRST—The tool will first move in the direction parallel to the z-axis of the NC Sequence coordinate
system until it reaches the Z coordinate of the End point, then move to the End point in the direction normal
to the z-axis.
· Z_LAST—The tool will first move in the direction normal to the z-axis until it reaches the XY coordinates
of the End point, then move to the End point along the z-axis.
Not applicable for Wire EDM.
Milling Parameters
The following parameters are specific to milling NC sequences. They are listed under a heading corresponding
to the name of the branch when you set up the parameters.
For description of the common manufacturing parameters, available for all the NC sequence types, see the topic
Common NC Sequence Parameters. Click See Also to access this topic.
Notes:
- Length units for the NC sequence parameters (where applicable) are the same as the units of the
workpiece.
Cut Option
SCAN_TYPE
Applicable for Volume, Surface, Face, Pocket, and Plunge milling.
For Volume milling, refers to the way a milling tool scans the horizontal cross-section of a milling volume and
avoids islands. The options are:
· TYPE_1—The tool continuously machines the volume, retracts upon encountering islands.
· TYPE_2—The tool continuously machines the volume without retract, moving around the islands upon
encountering them.
· TYPE_3—The tool removes material from continuous zones defined by the island geometry, machining
them in turn and moving around the islands. Upon completing one zone, the tool may retract to mill the
remaining zones. It is recommended that ROUGH_OPTION for TYPE_3 is set to ROUGH_&_PROF.
· TYPE_SPIRAL—Generates a spiral cutter path.
· TYPE_ONE_DIR—The tool cuts in one direction only. At the end of each cutting pass it retracts and
returns to the opposite side of the workpiece, to start the next cut in the same direction. Avoiding islands is
the same as in TYPE_1.
Pro/NC 79
· TYPE_1_CONNECT—The tool cuts in one direction only. At the end of each cutting pass it retracts, rapids
back to the start point of the current pass, plunges, and then moves to the start of the next pass. If there is an
adjacent wall at the start of the cutting passes, the connection motion follows the profile of the wall to avoid
gouging.
· CONSTANT_LOAD—Perform high speed roughing (with ROUGH_OPTION set to ROUGH_ONLY) or
profiling (with ROUGH_OPTION set to PROF_ONLY).
· SPIRAL_MAINTAIN_CUT_TYPE—Generates a spiral cutter path with reverse arc connections between
cuts. When a cut is finished, the tool arcs into the next cut, reversing cutting direction to maintain the cut
type with respect to remaining material (CLIMB or CONVENTIONAL). This is a high speed machining
option, which minimizes retracts.
· SPIRAL_MAINTAIN_CUT_DIRECTION—Generates a spiral cutter path with S-shape connections
between cuts. When a cut is finished, the tool S-connects into the next cut, maintaining cutting direction,
which results in the cut type with respect to remaining material changing between cuts (from CLIMB to
CONVENTIONAL and back). This is a high speed machining option, which minimizes retracts.
· FOLLOW_HARDWALLS—The shape of each cut follows the shape of the walls of the volume,
maintaining fixed offset between the respective points of two successive cuts. If the cuts are closed, there
are S-shape connections between the cuts.
The following illustration shows the scan types for Volume milling.
1 2
3 4
5 6
1 TYPE_1
2 TYPE_SPIRAL
3 TYPE_2
4 TYPE_3
5 TYPE_ONE_DIR
6 TYPE_1_CONNECT
For Straight Cut Surface milling:
80 Pro/NC
· TYPE_1—The tool continuously machines the selected surfaces, retracts upon encountering islands.
· TYPE_3—If selected surfaces are divided into zones, the tool will completely machine one zone before
moving to the next.
For Isolines Surface milling:
· TYPE_1—The tool continuously machines the selected surfaces, retracts upon encountering islands.
· TYPE_2—The tool continuously machines the selected surfaces, moving around the islands upon
encountering them.
moving to the next.
· TYPE_ONE_DIR—The tool cuts in one direction only. At the end of each cutting pass it will retract and
return to the opposite side of the workpiece, to start the next cut in the same direction.
For Cut Line Surface milling:
· TYPE_1—The tool moves back and forth along the generated cut lines.
moving to the next.
· TYPE_SPIRAL—The tool makes the first cutting pass halfway between the start and end cutlines. The
following passes will be made alternately to the right and to the left of the first pass.
returns to the opposite side of the workpiece, to start the next cut in the same direction.
· TYPE_HELICAL—(Available only if the CUTLINE_TYPE parameter is set to FLOWLINES.) The tool
moves along a helix. Valid for Closed Cut Line machining only. The resulting tool path is shown in the
following illustration.
1
1 Start cutline (the top surface boundary)

2 End cutline (the bottom surface boundary)
For Projected Cuts Surface milling, the scan types are the same as for Volume milling (with the exception of
TYPE_1_CONNECT and CONSTANT_LOAD). They refer to the way the flat pattern of the tool path is
created.
For Swarf milling:
· TYPE_1—The tool moves back and forth across the surfaces being machined.
· TYPE_HELICAL—The tool moves along a helix. Valid for a closed loop of surfaces only.
For Face milling:

· TYPE_1—The tool makes parallel cutting passes, moving back and forth along the selected face. If the
selected face consists of multiple zones, the tool ignores them and moves across the whole length of the
workpiece.
Pro/NC 81
· TYPE_3—If the selected face consists of multiple zones, the tool machines one zone, moving back and
forth in parallel cutting passes, then retracts and moves to the next zone.
· TYPE_SPIRAL—The tool makes the first cutting pass in the middle of the surface. The following passes
will be made alternately to the right and to the left of the first pass.
1 2
1 TYPE_1
2 TYPE_3
For Pocketing, the scan types are the same as for Volume milling (with the exception of TYPE_1_CONNECT
and CONSTANT_LOAD). They refer to the way the tool scans the bottom of the pocket.
For Plunge milling, you can not change the scan type when the tool has Insert_Width smaller than
Cutter_Diam/2. For a regular flat tool the following scan types are available:
· TYPE_3—Completely machines one region before moving to the next.
· TYPE_SPIRAL—Generates a spiral cutting path.
· TYPE_ONE_DIR—Cuts in one direction only. At the end of each cutting pass the tool returns to the
opposite side of the region, to start the next cut in the same direction.
ROUGH_OPTION
Controls whether a profiling pass occurs during a Volume milling NC sequence. The options are:
· ROUGH_ONLY—Creates an NC sequence with no profiling.
· ROUGH_&_PROF—Creates an NC sequence that rough cuts the milling volume, then profiles the volume
surfaces.
· PROF_&_ROUGH—Profiles the volume surfaces first, then rough cuts the volume.
· PROF_ONLY—Only profiling is done.
· ROUGH_&_CLEAN_UP—Cleans up the walls of the volume without creating a profiling pass. If
SCAN_TYPE is set to TYPE_3, the horizontal connect moves within each slice will follow the walls of the
volume. If SCAN_TYPE is set to TYPE_ONE_DIR, the tool will follow the walls of the volume vertically,
when plunging and retracting. For TYPE_ONE_DIR, the tool retracts to the level of the previous slice;
however, it will not move sideways by more than (STEP_DEPTH + CUTTER_DIAM/2), with respect to the
current slice.
· POCKETING—Profiles the walls of the volume and finish mills all the planar surfaces inside the volume
that are parallel to the retract plane (island tops and bottom of the volume). The open edges of the planar
faces are milled according to the value of the POCKET_EXTEND parameter.
· FACES_ONLY—Finish mills only the planar surfaces inside the volume that are parallel to the retract plane
(island tops and bottom of the volume). The open edges of the planar faces are milled according to the value
of the POCKET_EXTEND parameter.
Note: A tool path similar to ROUGH_&_CLEAN_UP with TYPE_ONE_DIR can be obtained by using 3-
Axis Straight Cut Surface milling with ROUGH_STEP_DEPTH.
82 Pro/NC
The following illustration shows the cutter path depending on the ROUGH_OPTION.
1 2
3 4
5 6
1 ROUGH_ONLY
2 PROF_ONLY
3 Profiling after rough cut
4 Profiling first
5 ROUGH_&_PROF
6 PROF_&_ROUGH
1 2
1 ROUGH_&_CLEAN_UP with TYPE_3

2 ROUGH_&_CLEAN_UP with TYPE_ONE_DIR
Pro/NC 83
1 2
3
4
1 Tool path
2 STEP_DEPTH
3 Mill volume walls (side view)
4 STEP_DEPTH + CUTTER_DIAM/2
5 ROUGH_&_CLEAN_UP with TYPE_ONE_DIR
POCKET_EXTEND
Defines the positioning of the tool when machining the open edges of the planar faces inside a volume (for
example, island tops). The values are:
· TOOL_ON (default)—The tool stops when its center touches the boundary of the face.
· TOOL_TO—The tool stops when its leading edge touches the boundary of the face.
· TOOL_PAST—The tool stops when its heel touches the boundary of the face.
This parameter is used when ROUGH_OPTION is set to POCKETING or FACES_ONLY.
TRIM_TO_WORKPIECE
In Volume milling, if set to YES, confines the milling volume to that inside the workpiece boundaries, in order
to avoid air machining. If set to NO (default), trimming will be done only in the Z direction.
Notes:
· Do not set TRIM_TO_WORKPIECE to YES if the workpiece has undercuts.
· When you intentionally offset or sketch the volume past the workpiece boundaries (as shown in the
following illustration), make sure to set this parameter to NO.
1
1 Milling volume (with offset)

2 Specify TRIM_TO_WORKPIECE NO to make the offset work.
In 3-Axis Straight Cut Surface and Face milling, if set to YES (the default is NO), makes the tool machine one
zone of the workpiece before going to the next. The actual tool path depends on the SCAN_TYPE parameter
value. The following illustration shows Face milling with SCAN_TYPE set to TYPE_ONE_DIR.
84 Pro/NC
1 2
1 TRIM_TO_WORKPIECE NO
2 TRIM_TO_WORKPIECE YES
CUT_DIRECTION
For Volume milling, allows you to reverse direction of tool motion within a slice. The values are STANDARD
and REVERSE.
For Profile milling, STANDARD (the default) machines selected surfaces from top to bottom, that is, starting
with the top slice; REVERSE machines from bottom to top, that is, starting with the lowest slice.
STEPOVER_ADJUST
If set to YES (the default), adjusts the step-over distance (defined by the STEP_OVER and NUMBER_PASSES
parameters) to make both the beginning and the end of the cutter path for one pass close to the edges. The
adjusted step-over distance does not exceed the original one. If set to NO, the step-over distance will be exactly
as defined by the combination of the STEP_OVER and NUMBER_PASSES parameters.
2 3
1 STEPOVER_ADJUST
2 NO
3 YES
CUT_TYPE
Combined with SPINDLE_SENSE, controls where material is relative to the tool when it is removing material
during profiling NC sequences or slices; bottom slices, such as in pocket milling, are not affected by this
parameter. The options are CLIMB, UPCUT, and ZIG_ZAG. The possible combinations and the resulting tool
path are:
· CLIMB and CW—Cutter to the left (default).
UPCUT and CW—Cutter to the right.
· UPCUT and CCW—Cutter to the left.
CLIMB and CCW—Cutter to the right.
· ZIG_ZAG—Cut direction changes on every slice.
Note: CUT_TYPE parameter for Volume milling can be specified when ROUGH_OPTION is specified as
ROUGH_&_PROF, PROF_&_ROUGH, or PROF_ONLY or when the SCAN_TYPE is TYPE_SPIRAL.
Pro/NC 85
For Local milling, there is an additional option NONE, which makes the tool move back and forth when
cleaning up material.
For Profile milling, the ZIG_ZAG option can be used when profiling open contours. It provides lace-type
connection between slices, while CLIMB and UPCUT make the tool retract and rapidly traverse to the
beginning of the next slice.
2 3
1 CUT_TYPE
2 CLIMB
3 ZIG_ZAG
For 3-Axis Straight Cut Surface milling, CUT_TYPE, combined with SPINDLE_SENSE and
CUT_DIRECTION, controls the start point and direction of machining the surface. The LACE_OPTION
parameter must be set to NO.
PLUNGE_PREVIOUS
For Volume milling with SCAN_TYPE TYPE_3, determines where the tool plunges when starting to machine a
new zone:
YES—The tool plunges within a previously machined zone and then moves to the new zone.
NO (default)—The tool plunges within the new zone.
FIX_SKIPPED_SLICES
By default (NO), if Pro/NC cannot create a slice at a certain Z depth when milling a volume (for example,
because of geometry problems), this slice will be skipped and the tool will go to the next slice. If this parameter
is set to YES, then, whenever a slice cannot be created, Pro/NC will generate the next slice and repeat it at the
level of the skipped slice. In other words, if a slice can not be created, the next slice will be repeated twice: at
the Z level of the skipped slice and at its own Z level. The system will issue a warning every time a slice cannot
be generated.
LACE_OPTION
For Straight Cut Surface milling and for Cut Line machining, controls whether the tool retracts at the end of a
cutting pass (as shown in the following illustration). If set to NO (which is the default for Straight Cut Surface
milling), the tool retracts after each cut, so that all cuts are in the same direction. Other values cause the tool to
cut back and forth, and specify the shape of connection between the endpoints of neighboring cuts:
· If set to LINE_CONNECT, the neighboring endpoints are connected by straight line segments.
LINE_CONNECT is the default for Cut Line machining.
· The CURVE_CONNECT option, available for Straight Cut Surface milling only, uses a more complex (and
slower-working) algorithm, which takes into account the reference part geometry. If LACE_OPTION is set
to CURVE_CONNECT, the tool will follow geometry of the obstacles that would otherwise interrupt the
cutting pass. Use CURVE_CONNECT only if LINE_CONNECT causes gouging.
· The ARC_CONNECT option, available for 3-Axis Straight Cut Surface milling only, results in the system
providing smooth, arc-like connections between the neighboring cutting passes. The cutting passes are
shortened, as necessary, to accommodate the connecting motions, so that the tool stays within surface
boundaries. The connections are automatically degouged. Use this option for high-speed machining.
86 Pro/NC
· If set to LOOP_CONNECT, the neighboring endpoints are connected by vertical loops, with the tool
leaving and entering material tangent to the surface being machined.
Note: If you set LACE_OPTION to LINE_CONNECT for 3-Axis Straight Cut Surface milling, the system
automatically degouges connecting motions and switches to CURVE_CONNECT if LINE_CONNECT
causes gouging. In 4- and 5-Axis NC sequences, if LINE_CONNECT causes gouging, the tool will retract.
To avoid such retracts, use CURVE_CONNECT.
1 2
1 LACE_OPTION NO
2 LACE_OPTION LINE_CONNECT
ALLOW_NEG_Z_MOVES
If set to NO, eliminates negative Z moves for 3-Axis Straight Cut Surface milling NC sequences. The default is
YES. If you set ALLOW_NEG_Z_MOVES to NO, you have to also set SCAN_TYPE to TYPE_1 and
LACE_OPTION to NO.
1 ALLOW_NEG_Z_MOVES NO
RETRACT_OPTION
Controls the number and level of retracts in Volume milling. The values are:
OPTIMIZE (default)—Minimizes the number of retracts without minimizing the height. The tool retracts to
the level of the Traverse plane, if specified for the NC sequence, otherwise to the Retract plane level.
NOT_OPTIMIZE—The cutter retracts between two slices if the second slice does not start directly below
the cutter’s current location. It also retracts between the rough and the profile pass within a slice if
ROUGH_OPTION is ROUGH_&_PROF or PROF_&_ROUGH. Specify NOT_OPTIMIZE if OPTIMIZE
causes gouging. The tool retracts to the level of Traverse or Retract plane.
SMART—Minimizes the number and the height of retracts. For each intermediate retract within the NC
sequence, the system calculates a safe level for the tool to traverse to the new position. This safe level is
determined as the level of the lowest slice with no obstructions on the way of the tool, plus the
PULLOUT_DIST value, if specified.
Note: If Approach or Exit path is specified for each slice using Build Cut, the RETRACT_OPTION
parameter will be ignored.
Pro/NC 87
GOUGE_AVOID_OPTION
In Swarf milling, specifies whether the tool will retract to avoid gouging:
RETRACT_TOOL—The tool may retract between cuts.
LIFT_TOOL—Number of retracts between cuts will be minimized.
GOUGE_AVOID_TYPE
For 3-Axis Profiling: TIP_&_SIDES (the default) will make the system detect undercuts when degouging the
tool path. If you want to be able to machine an undercut, set GOUGE_AVOID_TYPE to TIP_ONLY.
For 5-Axis Profiling: if set to TIP_&_SIDES, the system degouges with respect to the whole tool (as defined by
the tool parameters). The tool will retract if an undercut is detected. The default is TIP_ONLY, in which case
the system does not detect undercuts.
Note: GOUGE_AVOID_TYPE setting cannot be changed when modifying parameters. Use Redefine.
REMAINDER_SURFACE
Applicable for Straight Cut Surface milling and 3-Axis Isolines and Cut Line Surface milling NC sequences. If
it is set to YES (the default is NO), the system will generate a surface representing the leftover material (to be
removed by a subsequent Local Mill NC sequence). This surface will belong to the current NC sequence, and
will be regenerated upon regenerating the tool path.
Note: The remainder surface will be generated based on the SCALLOP_HGT parameter value.
AUTO_SYNCHRONIZE
Applicable for Cut Line Surface milling only. If set to YES (the default), the system will attempt to use edges
crossing all the selected cut lines as synch lines. If this is not satisfactory, set AUTO_SYNCHRONIZE to NO
and specify the synch lines or synch points manually.
AUTO_INNER_CUTLINE
Applicable for Cut Line Surface milling only. If set to YES, the system will attempt to use edges crossing all the
specified synch lines as inner cut lines. The default is NO.
CUTLINE_TYPE
Applicable for Cut Line Surface milling only. Allows you to select which algorithm the system uses when it
calculates cut line distribution. The values are:
BLEND—The system uses a surface boundary blend to generate cut lines.
FLOWLINES (default)—The system uses a Finite Element Analysis method to process the surfaces
selected for milling and generate cut lines.
CUTLINE_EXT_TYPE
Applicable for Cut Line Surface milling only. Specifies how the system handles the case when a cut line does
not extend the whole length of the surface selected for machining. The values are:
BOUNDARY (default)—The system will attempt to extend the cut lines up to the boundary of the surface.
NONE—Machining will be limited to the length of the specified cut lines.
88 Pro/NC
1
2 4
5 6
1 CUTLINE_EXT_TYPE
2 End cut line
3 Start cut line
4 Surface selected for machining
5 BOUNDARY
6 NONE
AXIS_DEF_CONTROL
Applicable for 5-Axis Cut Line Surface and Trajectory milling, and for Swarf milling.
For 5-Axis Cut Line Surface milling and Swarf milling, the values are:
· USE_SURF_NORMS (the default)—The surface normal is used in determining the tool axis orientation,
that is, any user-specified axis definition provides a localized lead and tilt angle that is applied to the normal
of the surface being machined.
· IGNORE_SURF_NORMS—The surface normal is disregarded, and the tool axis orientation is a strict
interpolation of the user-specified axis definitions. Not available for Swarf milling From Surface Isolines.
For 5-Axis Trajectory milling, this parameter is used for Automatic Cut motions created using the Surfaces
option. Another way to specify axis definitons is to use the Axis Control option in the CUTMOTION SETUP
menu. The AXIS_DEF_CONTROL parameter specifies the approximation type between the explicit axes
definitions. The values are:
· RELATIVE_TO_DRIVE_SURFACE (default)—Preserves the lead and tilt of the tool axis relative to the
surface normal for each explicit axis defined at locations on the surface. As the tool moves between explicit
axis definitions, the system computes an average lead/tilt angle by linearly interpolating between the last
explicit axis definition and the next explicit axis definition. This average is then applied relative to the
surface normal at the current location. This method can be used to generate variable lead / tilt tool paths
when precise axis control is necessary. An example would be to apply this control to make sure the tool and
holder can pass through a narrow channel of part geometry.
· PROJECT_ON_DRIVE_SURFACE—Preserves the lead angle of the tool axis relative to the surface
normal for each explicit axis defined at locations on the surface. As the tool moves between explicit axis
definitions, the system computes an average lead angle by linearly interpolating between the last explicit
axis definition and the next explicit axis definition. This average is then applied at the current location and
the tool axis is projected onto the surface making the tilt component 0. This method can be used to generate
tool paths that have a variable user-controlled lead angle, but maintain cutting with the side of the tool.
· FROM_AXES_AND_DRIVE_SURFACE—This method is appropriate when a set of surfaces have some
surfaces that are nondevelopable. In these nondevelopable areas, the tool path can be unpredictable, so you
may want to override the system defaults by specifying explicit axis definitions. The system will derive all
Pro/NC 89
other tool vectors from the surface boundary. Tool axes will be interpolated using the same rule as for
RELATIVE_TO_DRIVE_SURFACE.
· AXIS_LINEAR_APPROXIMATION—The tool orientation is a linear approximation of explicit axis
definitions.
· AXIS_LEAD_ANGLE_APPROXIMATION—The tool orientation is an interpolation of lead angles along
the trajectory.
USE_VARIABLE_TILT
If set to YES (the default is NO), the tool will tilt to avoid gouging. Available for Swarf milling only.
IGNORE_RULINGS
If set to NO (the default), the tool will be parallel to the ruling lines when machining ruled surfaces. If set to
YES, the tool will ignore the ruling lines of the ruled surfaces. Available for Swarf milling only.
4X_LEAD_RANGE_OPT
If set to YES (the default is NO), the system will attempt to use variable lead angle to avoid gouging. That is, if
gouging occurs with the specified 4X_LEAD_ANGLE, the system will try to use another angle in the range
between 4X_MIN_LEAD_ANGLE and 4X_MAX_LEAD_ANGLE. Applicable for 4-axis milling only.
CUSTOMIZE_AUTO_RETRACT
If set to NO (the default is YES), the tool will not perform the automatic retract when following the default tool
path.
SLICE_PATH_SCAN
Defines the order of machining multiple passes within multiple step depths (slices). The values are:
PASS_BY_PASS—After completing the first pass for the first slice, go to the first pass for the second slice,
and so on. After completing the first pass for the last slice, go to the second pass for the first slice; proceed
until completing the last pass for the last slice.
SLICE_BY_SLICE—Complete all the passes within a slice before going to the next slice.
MACHINING_ORDER
For Local milling by previous tool, specifies the order of removing the leftover material in the corners and on
the surfaces. The values are:
CORNERS_FIRST (default)—Remove the leftover material in the corners, then proceed to cleaning up
surfaces.
SURFACES_FIRST—Clean up the surfaces, them remove the leftover material in the corners.
CORNERS_ONLY—Remove the leftover material in the corners and do not machine the surfaces.
SURFACES_ONLY—Clean up the surfaces and do not machine the corners.
SURFACE_CLEANUP
For Local milling by previous tool, specifies whether cleaning up the surfaces is done in a single pass or in step
depth increments. The values are:
SINGLE_DEPTH (default)—The tool makes one cutting pass at the bottom of the surface.
MULTI_DEPTH—The tool makes multiple cutting passes, removing material in step depth increments.
You have to specify a value for the STEP_DEPTH parameter.
CORNER_CLEANUP
For Local milling by previous tool, specifies how the corners are machined. The values are:
Z_PLANE_CUTS (default)—Remove the material in the corners using 2.5-axis machining.
CONTOUR—Remove the material in the corners using a series of vertical cuts.
RETRACT_TRANSITION
For high-speed Volume milling, specifies how the tool transitions between a vertical retract move and a traverse
move (a horizontal move at the retract plane or intermediate traverse plane level), and then between the traverse
move and a vertical plunge move.
90 Pro/NC
The values are:
CORNER_TRANSITION (default)—The vertical and horizontal moves are at an angle to each other.
ARC_TRANSITION—The vertical and horizontal moves are connected by a tangent arc. This way, the tool
does not have to slow down or stop when it changes direction in high-speed machining. The radius of the
transition arc is defined by the RETRACT_RADIUS parameter value. The arc starts above the level of the
safe traverse plane, therefore, the horizontal traverse moves will be at RETRACT_RADIUS above the
retract plane or the intermediate traverse plane level.
RETRACT_RADIUS
Specifies the radius of the transition arc (if the RETRACT_TRANSITION parameter is set to
ARC_TRANSITION). The default is a dash (-). If you set RETRACT_TRANSITION to ARC_TRANSITION,
you have to specify a RETRACT_RADIUS value.
Cut Param
STEP_DEPTH
The incremental depth of each pass during rough cut NC sequences. The STEP_DEPTH must be greater than
zero. The default is not set (displayed as "–1").
MIN_STEP_DEPTH
For Volume and Profile milling, specifies the minimum acceptable distance between slices. By default, all
planar surfaces that are normal to the Z-axis of the NC Sequence coordinate system produce additional slices. A
slice along such a planar surface will be skipped if the distance between it and the previous slice is less than the
value of MIN_STEP_DEPTH.
NUMBER_CUTS
For Face milling, gives you additional control over the number of cuts to depth (also controlled by the
STEP_DEPTH parameter). The system will compute number of cuts using the STEP_DEPTH parameter value,
compare it with the NUMBER_CUTS value, and use the greater one. The default is a dash (-), that is, not used.
For Cutline machining, allows you to perform milling in step depth increments. This has to be used together
with the next parameter OFFSET_INCREMENT. The default is a dash (-), that is, not used.
OFFSET_INCREMENT
Together with NUMBER_CUTS, allows you to perform Cut Line machining in step depth increments. The tool
will make the first slice at (OFFSET_INCREMENT * (NUMBER_CUTS–1) + PROF_STOCK_ALLOW)
above the selected surfaces and perform NUMBER_CUTS slices at OFFSET_INCREMENT distance from
each other, so that the last slice is at PROF_STOCK_ALLOW above the selected surfaces. If SCALLOP_HGT
is specified, it will affect the last slice only. At the end of each slice, the tool will retract, move to the beginning
of the next slice, and plunge. If LACE_OPTION is set to NO, the tool will additionally retract after each cutting
pass across the surface(s) being machined. The default is a dash (-), that is, not used.
ROUGH_STEP_DEPTH
Available for 3-Axis Straight Cut Surface milling only. The default is a dash (-). If you specify a value other
than the default, the system performs surface milling in depth increments, defined by the appropriate horizontal
slices. This allows you to create Volume-like tool paths without actually defining a Mill Volume, which is
especially helpful when machining imported (nonsolid) surfaces. The NC sequence removes the same material
and has the same automatic degouging capabilities as the regular 3-Axis Straight Cut Surface milling sequences.
Pro/NC 91
The following illustration shows 3-Axis Straight Cut Surface milling in depth increments.
1 Select this surface.
WALL_SCALLOP_HGT
Controls the step depth for Volume milling. The WALL_SCALLOP_HGT (wsh) must be less than or equal to
the cutter radius, that is, wsh <= d/2. The default is 0.
BOTTOM_SCALLOP_HGT
Similarly used to control step-over distance for Volume milling.
SCALLOP_HGT
Similarly used to control step-over distance for Surface milling and Local milling By Previous Tool.
The STEP_DEPTH and the WALL_SCALLOP_HGT parameters are illustrated in the following graphic,
STEP_DEPTH and WALL_SCALLOP_HGT. Pro/NC handles these parameters as follows:
1. If you specify WALL_SCALLOP_HGT as zero (wsh = 0), a scallop height is calculated using
STEP_DEPTH.
2. If you specify wsh > 0, a step depth is calculated using wsh. This calculated value is compared to the
STEP_DEPTH you defined. Pro/NC uses the lesser of the two.
The same is true for STEP_OVER and BOTTOM_SCALLOP_HGT (for Volume milling) or SCALLOP_HGT
(for Surface milling).
STEP_DEPTH and WALL_SCALLOP_HGT
2
3
1 STEP_OVER
2 Tool path
3 WALL_SCALLOP_HGT
4 STEP_OVER
92 Pro/NC
ROUGH_STOCK_ALLOW
and
PROF_STOCK_ALLOW
The amount of stock left after the rough cut for the finish cut. Both parameters are used for Rough Cut NC
sequences only, and specify different stock allowances for roughing and profiling cuts in a Volume NC
sequence. PROF_STOCK_ALLOW must be set to a value less than or equal to ROUGH_STOCK_ALLOW.
When geometry is displayed after Automatic material removal, it will use PROF_STOCK_ALLOW.
3
1
1 PROF_STOCK_ALLOW
2 ROUGH_STOCK_ALLOW
3 Pocket
BOTTOM_STOCK_ALLOW
For Volume milling, the amount of stock left after a rough NC sequence on planar surfaces parallel to the retract
plane. The default is a dash (-), in which case the BOTTOM_STOCK_ALLOW parameter will be ignored and
PROF_STOCK_ALLOW will be used instead.
For Facing, specifies the amount of stock left on the selected face. The default, a dash (-), sets the stock
allowance to 0.
WALL_TOLERANCE
Lets you specify the amount of material that can be left along the walls after the previous NC sequence, without
the Local Mill NC sequence cleaning it up. The default is 0. Applicable for Local milling NC sequences
referencing a previous Volume NC sequence.
STEP_OVER
Controls the lateral depth of cut of either type of endmill. The STEP_OVER must be a positive value less than
or equal to the cutter diameter. The default is not set (displayed as "–1").
TOOL_OVERLAP
An alternative to STEP_OVER. Indicates the amount that the tool should overlap the region machined during
the previous pass. If TOOL_OVERLAP is specified and STEP_OVER is not, STEP_OVER will be calculated
as
(CUTTER_DIAM – TOOL_OVERLAP).
PLUNGE_STEP
Controls the distance between successive plunges of the tool. The default is a dash (-), in which case:
· If you are using a Plunge Mill tool, this distance is equal to the tool parameter Insert_Cut_Width.
· If you are using a regular milling tool, the system calculates the maximum plunge step, based on the
Cutter_Diam of the tool, that results in removing all the material between the plunges.
Applicable for Plunge milling only.
Pro/NC 93
CORNER_ROUND_RADIUS
Specifies the minimum radius allowed for concave corners in high speed machining. Available for Volume
milling only. The default is 0.
NUMBER_PASSES
Gives you additional control over the number of tool passes per slice (also controlled by the STEP_OVER
parameter). The system will compute step-over distance using the NUMBER_PASSES parameter value (if
other than 0), compare it with the STEP_OVER value, and use the one that is smaller. Applicable for Volume
milling and Facing. For Facing, if NUMBER_PASSES is set to 1, it will override the STEP_OVER value, so
that only one pass per slice will be made.
ONE_PASS_OFFSET
Allows you to offset the tool path for a one-pass Face milling NC sequence (that is, when NUMBER_PASSES
is 1). The positive value offsets the pass to the left with respect to the cut direction, the negative—to the right.
The default is 0.
INITIAL_EDGE_OFFSET
Allows you to offset the first pass for Face milling with respect to the edge of the surface being milled. The
default is 0, in which case the tip trajectory at first pass will coincide with the surface edge; the positive value
offsets the first pass into the surface, the negative—off the surface. Cannot be greater than the STEP_OVER
value.
FINAL_EDGE_OFFSET
Allows you to offset the last pass for Face milling with respect to the edge of the surface being milled. The
default is 0, in which case the tip trajectory at last pass will coincide with the surface edge; the positive value
offsets the last pass into the surface, the negative—off the surface. Cannot be greater than the STEP_OVER
value.
CUT_ANGLE
The angle between the cut direction and the X-axis of the NC Sequence coordinate system. The default
CUT_ANGLE is 0, which is parallel to the X-axis. Valid for Volume and Plunge milling, Pocketing, Facing,
Straight Cut Surface milling, and Projected Cuts Surface milling. CUT_ANGLE will be ignored for Volume
and Plunge milling, Pocketing, and Projected Cuts Surface milling if SCAN_TYPE is TYPE_SPIRAL.
1 2
1 CUT_ANGLE 0
2 CUT_ANGLE 90
LEAD_ANGLE
Together with TILT_ANGLE, defines the tool orientation with respect to the surface normal for 5-Axis Surface
milling NC sequences. LEAD_ANGLE is specified in degrees from the surface normal with respect to the tool
travel direction: positive value tilts the tool forward, negative—backward.
TILT_ANGLE
Together with LEAD_ANGLE, defines the tool orientation with respect to the surface normal for 5-Axis
Surface milling NC sequences. TILT_ANGLE is specified in degrees from the surface normal with respect to
the tool travel direction: positive value tilts the tool to the right, negative—to the left.
94 Pro/NC
AXIS_SHIFT
Allows you to shift the CL data along the tool axis. If set to a positive value, will shift all CL data down along
the tool axis; a negative value will shift the CL data up. The default is 0.
Note: AXIS_SHIFT is applied after gouge checking has been performed. Use the Gouge Check
functionality to make sure there is no gouging.
1 2
1 Tool
2 Model
3 AXIS_SHIFT
NUM_PROF_PASSES
Together with PROF_INCREMENT, allows you to create multiple profiling or trajectory passes horizontally
offset from each other. NUM_PROF_PASSES specifies the amount of passes that will be generated (the default
is 1). Applicable for Volume milling when ROUGH_OPTION is set to PROF_ONLY, for Profiling, and for
Trajectory milling. If another value of the ROUGH_OPTION parameter is specified for Volume milling,
NUM_PROF_PASSES will be ignored.
PROF_INCREMENT
Specifies the horizontal distance between the passes generated according to NUM_PROF_PASSES, which
means that the first pass will be offset from the final pass by:
(NUM_PROF_PASSES–1)*PROF_INCREMENT.
The default is 0. Applicable for Volume milling when ROUGH_OPTION is set to PROF_ONLY, for Profiling,
and for Trajectory milling. If another value of the ROUGH_OPTION parameter is specified for Volume
milling, NUM_PROF_PASSES will be ignored.
2 3
4 5
1 NUM_PROF_PASSES and PROF_INCREMENT

2 NUM_PROF_PASSES = 1
4 PROF_INCREMENT
Pro/NC 95
5 First pass
6 Final pass
CORNER_OFFSET
Specifies the amount of material to be removed by a Local Mill NC sequence using Corner Edges. The default
is 0.
SLOPE_ANGLE
In Local Milling, the angular value with respect to the XY plane that divides the material to be removed into
vertical and horizontal regions. For example, if you are removing material left over in a pocket with slanted
walls, specifying the value of the SLOPE_ANGLE less than the wall slope will make the tool machine the
bottom edges of the pocket first, and then remove the material in the corners between the walls. The default
SLOPE_ANGLE for newly created NC sequences is 30 degrees. For NC sequences created prior to Release
2000i2, the default value is 90 degrees.
START_OVERTRAVEL
Specifies the distance from the tool to the surface outline for all passes except the first one for each slice (see
also APPROACH_DISTANCE). The default is 0. Applicable for Facing only.
END_OVERTRAVEL
Specifies the distance that the tool overtravels past the surface outline on all passes except the last one for each
slice (see also EXIT_DISTANCE). The default is 0. Applicable for Facing only.
GROOVE_DEPTH
The depth of the groove. The default is not set (displayed as "–1"). Applicable for Engraving only.
4X_TILT_ANGLE
Specifies the angle (in degrees) between the tool axis and the 4 Axis Plane. Normally, the tool axis is parallel
to this plane (the default 4X_TILT_ANGLE is 0). Applicable for 4-axis milling only.
4X_LEAD_ANGLE
Specifies the angle (in degrees) between the tool axis and the projection of the surface normal on the 4 Axis
Plane (the default is 0). Applicable for 4-axis milling only.
4X_MAX_LEAD_ANGLE
Specifies the maximum lead angle allowed when trying to avoid gouging. The default is a dash (-), but you have
to specify a value if 4X_LEAD_RANGE_OPT is set to YES. Applicable for 4-axis milling only.
4X_MIN_LEAD_ANGLE
Specifies the minimum lead angle allowed when trying to avoid gouging. The default is a dash (-), but you have
to specify a value if 4X_LEAD_RANGE_OPT is set to YES. Applicable for 4-axis milling only.
CHK_SRF_STOCK_ALLOW
Allows you to specify stock allowance to be used with check surfaces. The default is a dash (-), that is, ignore.
This parameter is available for Milling NC sequences that utilize the Check Surfs functionality (that is, Surface,
Trajectory, Profile milling, and for Local Milling referencing a Surface milling NC sequence).
Note: Be careful when specifying CHK_SRF_STOCK_ALLOW for NC sequences where all the reference
part surfaces are selected as check surfaces.
Feed
ARC_FEED
Allows you to control the cut feed around arcs. The default is a dash (-), in which case the CUT_FEED will be
used. If set to 0, the RAPID statement will be output before the CIRCLE statement.
96 Pro/NC
ARC_FEED_CONTROL
Determines how the value for cut feed around arcs is calculated. The options are:
TOOL_CENTER (default)—The feed rate that is output for CIRCLE statements is always equal to the value
specified for ARC_FEED.
TOOL_PERIMETER—The feed rate that is output for CIRCLE statements is adjusted to insure that the
contact point between the tool and the material moves with a speed equal to the value specified for
ARC_FEED. This means the value for ARC_FEED will have to be calculated for each CIRCLE statement
according to the following rules:
For internal radii:
feed = ARC_FEED * (circle radius / (circle radius + CUTTER_DIAM/2))
For external radii:
feed = ARC_FEED * (circle radius / (circle radius – CUTTER_DIAM/2))
TRAVERSE_FEED
Allows you to set a feed rate for all traverse tool motions. The default is a dash (-), in which case the RAPID
command will be output to the CL file.
WALL_PROFILE_CUT_FEED
For certain types of high-speed Volume milling (when SCAN_TYPE is set to
SPIRAL_MAINTAIN_CUT_TYPE or SPIRAL_MAINTAIN_CUT_DIRECTION), allows you to set a lower
feed rate for the first cut, when the tool is cutting the material on both sides. The default is a dash (-), in which
case the CUT_FEED value will be used.
INVERSE_FEED
Enables you to specify the inverse time feed rate, or the rate of rotation, for machines with rotary axes.
Available for 4- and 5-Axis NC sequences only. If you set INVERSE_FEED to YES (the default is NO), the
system outputs the following line in the CL data file before the first cutting feed statement:
FEDRAT / INVERS, AUTO
At the end of the CL data file, the system outputs the following line:
FEDRAT / INVERS, OFF
RAMP_FEED
See Entry/Exit parameters.
APPROACH_FEED
See Entry/Exit parameters.
THREAD_FEED
Defines the thread pitch. Applicable for Thread milling only.
THREAD_FEED_UNITS
TPI (default), MMPR, IPR. Applicable for Thread milling only.
Machine
SPINDLE_SPEED
The rate at which the machine spindle rotates (RPM). The default is -1.
WALL_PROFILE_SPINDLE_SPEED
For certain types of high-speed Volume milling (when SCAN_TYPE is set to
SPIRAL_MAINTAIN_CUT_TYPE or SPIRAL_MAINTAIN_CUT_DIRECTION), allows you to set a lower
Pro/NC 97
spindle speed for the first cut, when the tool is cutting the material on both sides. The default is a dash (-), in
which case the SPINDLE_SPEED value will be used.
SPINDLE_SENSE
The direction of spindle rotation. CW (clockwise—default), CCW (counterclockwise).
SPINDLE_RANGE
NO_RANGE (default), LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH, NUMBER. If a value other than NO_RANGE is set, range
will be included in the SPINDL command in the CL file (for example, "RANGE, LOW"). If set to NUMBER,
the RANGE_NUMBER parameter value will be used in the SPINDL command (for example, "RANGE, 4",
where 4 is the RANGE_NUMBER parameter value).
RANGE_NUMBER
Will be output in the SPINDL command if SPINDLE_RANGE is set to NUMBER. The default is 0.
MAX_SPINDLE_RPM
If set to a value other than a dash (-) (which is the default), the MAXRPM attribute will be added to the
SPINDL command.
SPEED_CONTROL
The default SPEED_CONTROL is CONST_RPM (constant revolutions per minute). CONST_SFM (constant
surface feet per minute) and CONST_SMM (constant surface meters per minute) allow you to apply feed rate
control to the contact surface between the tool and the workpiece, to create good surface finish.
CUTCOM
Controls tool compensation. The options are:
ON—Turns on the cutter compensation in the CL file. The compensation is Right or Left, depending on
CUT_TYPE and SPINDLE_SENSE.
OFF (the default)—No tool compensation provided.
CUTCOM statements are not output for cut motions.
CUTCOM_REGISTER
Specifies the number of the register of the machine controller that holds the tool compensation data. The default
is 0.
NUMBER_CUTCOM_PTS
Specifies if colinear points in approach and exit motions should be stripped or added. The values are:
0—Strip colinear points.
1—Do not strip colinear points, to allow proper implementation of Cutcom.
n (where n is an integer)—The Approach, Exit, or Cutcom move will be divided into n equal segments by
adding extra GOTO points.
98 Pro/NC
3
6
4
1 7
8
2 5
9
10 13 16
11
14 17
12 15 18
19 20 21
22
1 1st GOTO point

2 2nd GOTO point
3 1st GOTO point
4 2nd GOTO point
5 3rd GOTO point
6 1st GOTO point
7 2nd GOTO point
8 3rd GOTO point
9 4th GOTO point
10 Approach move
11 Part
12 Cut motion
13 Approach move
14 Part
15 Cut motion
16 Approach move
17 Part
18 Cut motion
19 NUMBER_CUTCOM_PTS 0
22 (Colinear points stripped)
CUTCOM_LOC_APPR
Specifies location of CUTCOM statement on the approach motion if multiple cutcom points are specified.
Cutcom points are numbered from 0 to n, where n is the value of NUMBER_CUTCOM_PTS. The default is 1.
CUTCOM_LOC_EXIT
Specifies location of CUTCOM statement on the exit motion if multiple cutcom points are specified. Cutcom
points are numbered from 0 to n, where n is the value of NUMBER_CUTCOM_PTS. The default is 0.
Pro/NC 99
1
2
3
13 5
12
6
11 7
8
9
10
1 1st GOTO point (cutcom point 0)

2 2nd GOTO point (cutcom point 1)
3 3rd GOTO point (cutcom point 2)
4 4th GOTO point
5 Part
6 5th GOTO point
7 Cut motion
8 6th GOTO point (cutcom point 0)
12 Approach move
13 Exit move
CUTCOM_ON_SPIRAL
Specifies whether cutter compensation is on or off for Volume NC sequences with SCAN_TYPE set to
TYPE_SPIRAL. The default is NO. If you set it to YES, you must also set the CUTCOM parameter to ON, and
have an approach and exit motion defined in Build Cut.
HOLDER_DIAMETER
Along with HOLDER_LENGTH, allows you to use holder dimensions for automatic gouge avoidance. The
default is a dash (-). If specified, will also be reflected when displaying CL data and when the tool is displayed
in the Preview window of the Tool Setup dialog box. Applicable for Trajectory, Straight Cut and Isolines
Surface milling.
HOLDER_LENGTH
Along with HOLDER_DIAMETER, allows you to use holder dimensions for automatic gouge avoidance. The
default is a dash (-). If specified, will also be reflected when displaying CL data and when the tool is displayed
in the Preview window of the Tool Setup dialog box. Applicable for Trajectory, Straight Cut and Isolines
Surface milling.
OSETNO_VAL
Specifies the tool gauge length register. The default is a dash (-), in which case the Offset value from the Tool
Table is used.
100 Pro/NC
Z_GAUGE_OFFSET
Shifts CL output by a specified value along the tool axis. If you specify a positive value, CL data is shifted in
the positive Z-direction of the tool coordinate system; a negative value shifts CL data in the opposite direction.
The default is a dash (-).
Entry/Exit
RAMP_ANGLE
The angle at which the tool enters the workpiece during a plunge cut. The default RAMP_ANGLE is 90, which
enters the workpiece parallel to the Z-axis. Not applicable for Facing or Trajectory NC sequences.
RAMP_FEED
The rate at which the tool moves upon entering the workpiece during a plunge cut. The default is a dash (-), in
which case the CUT_FEED will be used. Not applicable for Facing or Trajectory NC sequences.
CLEAR_DIST
The clearance distance above the surface to be milled (for example, the previous slice level) at which the rapid
motion ends and the PLUNGE_FEED begins. The default is not set (displayed as "–1").
PULLOUT_DIST
Specifies the height above the level of the cut (for example, the slice just milled) up to which the tip of the tool
will retract at CUT_FEED and then change to RETRACT_FEED. The default is a dash (-), that is, 0.
INTER_RET_HEIGHT
Specifies the distance that the cutter will retract above the level of the cut to perform intermediate rapid
motions. The default is a dash (-), in which case the cutter will retract all the way to the retract surface.
Applicable for Facing only.
LEAD_IN
If set to YES, makes the tool enter the workpiece along a tangent circular path when profiling. The arc radius is
set by LEAD_RADIUS, the arc angle—by ENTRY_ANGLE. You can also specify the length of the adjacent
straight portion of Lead In trajectory using TANGENT_LEAD_STEP, and the length of a straight segment
normal to it using NORMAL_LEAD_STEP.
For closed contours, if start point is not set, the tool will enter at a location determined by the system. If not
satisfied with this location, specify your own Start Point axis. The tool will enter at the point along the profile
which is closest to the start point axis.
LEAD_IN and LEAD_OUT
7
6 6
5 5
8
4
3
2 9
10
1
11 12
1 ENTRY_ANGLE
Pro/NC 101
2 LEAD_RADIUS
3 LEAD_IN
4 LEAD_OUT
5 NORMAL_LEAD_STEP
6 TANGENT_LEAD_STEP
7 EXIT_ANGLE
8 LEAD_IN
9 Start point
10 LEAD_OUT
11 Open profile
12 Closed profile
If a closed contour contains multiple loops, LEAD_IN and LEAD_OUT will be applied to each loop.
If LEAD_IN is set to YES with a zero radius, the tool will go directly to the point closest to the Start Point
specified and start cutting. When LEAD_IN is set to NO, cutting will begin at the default point of the contour
determined by the system.
1 2 4
3 5
6 7
1 Default start of the contour

2 Start Point axis
3 Tool path
4 Start point axis
5 Tool path
6 LEAD_IN NO
7 LEAD_IN YES LEAD_RADIUS 0
LEAD_OUT
Makes the tool exit the workpiece along a tangent circular path when profiling. Works similarly to LEAD_IN.
102 Pro/NC
If the end point is specified it will be used for LEAD_OUT, otherwise the default 90 arc (and the default exit
point for closed contours) will be used.
LEAD_RADIUS
The radius of the tangential circular movement of the tool when leading in or out. The default is 0.
TANGENT_LEAD_STEP
The length of the linear movement that is tangent to the circular lead-in or lead-out motion. The default is 0.
NORMAL_LEAD_STEP
The length of the linear movement that is normal to the tangent portion of the lead-in or lead-out motion. The
default is 0.
HELICAL_DIAMETER
Allows you to replace the plunge motion between the slices for Rough Volume milling with a helical entry
motion. The helical diameter will be formed by the outside of the tool as it approaches the beginning of a Rough
slice; the angle of descent is defined by the RAMP_ANGLE parameter value. If a Start Point axis is specified,
the helix center will be at the axis location; if the helical motion violates the Mill Volume, the system will issue
a warning and stop machining. If a Start Point axis is not specified,the helix will be created as close to the start
point of the lower slice as possible. To move from the end of the previous slice, the tool will lift off the surface
by PULLOUT_DIST and horizontally move at RETRACT_FEED to the start of the helical entry into the lower
slice. If you have specified Approach Walls for the NC sequence, the helical motion will not be created when
the tool moves down outside the Approach Walls; however, if the tool moves down inside the Mill Volume, the
system will use the helical entry. The default HELICAL_DIAMETER is a dash (-), in which case the helical
motion will not be performed.
APPR_EXIT_EXT
Applicable for Volume milling only. Defines the maximum distance between the periphery of the tool and the
Approach Wall of the mill volume for approach and exit motions within a slice.
APPR_EXIT_PATH
Applicable for Profiling and for the profiling pass of Volume milling NC sequences. Allows you to trim the
sketched approach or exit path by the outline of the profiling tool motion. For approach path, only the first
portion (from the start point up to the first intersection with the profiling outline) will be kept. For exit path,
only the last portion (from the last intersection with the profiling outline to the end point) will be kept. If the
approach/exit path is set to not be trimmed, the tool will follow the whole path as sketched. The values are:
TRIM_BOTH (default)—Both the approach and exit path will be trimmed.
TRIM_APPROACH—Trim only the approach path.
TRIM_EXIT—Trim only the exit path.
TRIM_NONE—Do not trim.
1
2 3
1 APPR_EXIT_PATH
2 Approach path
3 Approach path (trimmed)
Pro/NC 103
APPR_EXIT_HEIGHT
Applicable for Volume, Local, Profile milling, and Engraving. Allows you to control the depth of the approach
and exit path specified during Build Slice. The options are:
DEPTH_OF_CUT (the default)—The approach/exit path for each pass (including the first/last) will be at the
depth of the start/end point of the pass.
RETRACT_PLANE—Approach/exit movements will be at the level of the retract plane.
OVERTRAVEL_DISTANCE
For 3-Axis Straight Cut Surface milling, specifies the distance that the tool travels past the surface outline, both
at the beginning and end of each cutting pass.
APPROACH_DISTANCE
Specifies the length of approach motions. For Facing, also specifies the additional (with respect to
START_OVERTRAVEL) distance from the tool to the surface outline for the first pass in each slice. The
default is a dash (-), that is, 0.
EXIT_DISTANCE
Specifies the length of exit motions. For Facing, also specifies the additional (with respect to
END_OVERTRAVEL) distance that the tool overtravels past the surface outline for the last pass in each slice.
The default is a dash (-), that is, 0.
APPROACH_FEED
The rate at which the tool approaches the surface during a Facing NC sequence. The default is a dash (-), in
which case CUT_FEED will be used.
EXIT_FEED
The rate at which the tool overtravels past the surface edge during a Facing NC sequence. The default is a dash
(-), in which case CUT_FEED will be used.
CLEARANCE_EDGE
Specifies which point of the tool is to be used for measuring the exit motions and the overtravel motions when
the tool leaves the material:
HEEL (default)—The heel of the tool.
CENTER—The center of the tool.
LEADING_EDGE—The leading edge of the tool.
ENTRY_EDGE
Specifies which point of the tool is to be used for measuring the approach motions and the overtravel motions
when the tool approaches the material:
LEADING_EDGE (default)—The leading edge of the tool.
CENTER—The center of the tool.
HEEL—The heel of the tool.
APPROACH_TYPE
Allows you to automatically create an approach motion in Thread milling and Local milling By Previous Tool.
In Thread milling, the values are:
RADIAL—The approach motion will be a straight line normal to the cut motion, controlled by the
APPROACH_DISTANCE parameter.
HELICAL—The tool will approach the start of the cut motion in a helical motion controlled by the
104 Pro/NC
ENTRY_ANGLE and the APPROACH_DISTANCE parameters.
NONE—No approach motion will be generated.
In Local milling By Previous Tool, the values are:

HELICAL (default)—The tool approaches the machining surface following a helical trajectory, tangent to
the start point of the cutting tool path. The helical pitch value is controlled by the RAMP_ANGLE
parameter (the default value for RAMP_ANGLE in this case is 30). The lead-in radius is equal to the radius
of the previous tool minus the radius of the cutting tool. If the CLEAR_DIST parameter value is greater
than 0, the helical approach will start at the CLEAR_DIST height; otherwise, at retract plane.
CIRCULAR—The tool approaches the machining surface following a circular trajectory, tangent to the start
point of the cutting tool path. The lead-in radius is equal to the radius of the previous tool minus the radius
of the cutting tool.
NONE—The tool plunges to the start point of the tool path.
EXIT_TYPE
Allows you to automatically create an exit motion in Thread milling and Local milling By Previous Tool.
In Thread milling, the values are:
RADIAL—The exit motion will be a straight line normal to the cut motion, controlled by the
EXIT_DISTANCE parameter.
HELICAL—The tool will exit the cut motion in a helical motion controlled by the EXIT_ANGLE and the
EXIT_DISTANCE parameters.
NONE—No exit motion will be generated.
In Local milling By Previous Tool, the values are:
HELICAL (default)—The tool exits by following a helical trajectory, tangent to the end point of the cutting
tool path. The helical pitch value is controlled by the RAMP_ANGLE parameter (the default value for
RAMP_ANGLE in this case is 30). The lead-out radius is equal to the radius of the previous tool minus the
radius of the cutting tool. If the PULLOUT_DIST parameter value is greater than 0, the helical exit will end
at the PULLOUT_DIST height; otherwise, at retract plane.
CIRCULAR—The tool exits by following a circular trajectory, tangent to the end point of the cutting tool
path. The lead-out radius is equal to the radius of the previous tool minus the radius of the cutting tool.
NONE—The tool retracts to the pullout distance or to the retract plane.
ENTRY_ANGLE
The angle of the arc created by the circular movement of the tool when leading in. Used when creating Lead In
motions. The default is 90.
In Thread milling, defines the angle of the helical approach motion. If the angle is 0, the helical motion will still
be created, but it will only contain one point. However, you will be able to modify the motion parameters in
order to change this.
EXIT_ANGLE
The angle of the arc created by the circular movement of the tool when leading out. Used when creating Lead
Out motions. The default is 90.
In Thread milling, defines the angle of the helical exit motion. If the angle is 0, the helical motion will still be
created, but it will only contain one point. However, you will be able to modify the motion parameters in order
to change this.
CUT_ENTRY_EXT
For Surface and Swarf milling, specifies the default entry move type for intermediate cuts. The values
correspond to the Each Cut entry move types available in the Entry/Exit Move dialog box.
CUT_EXIT_EXT
For Surface and Swarf milling, specifies the default exit move type for intermediate cuts. The values correspond
to the Each Cut exit move types available in the Entry/Exit Move dialog box.
Pro/NC 105
INITIAL_ENTRY_EXT
For Surface and Swarf milling, specifies the default entry move type for the first cut. The values correspond to
the First Cut entry move types available in the Entry/Exit Move dialog box.
FINAL_EXIT_EXT
For Surface and Swarf milling, specifies the default exit move type for the last cut. The values correspond to the
Last Cut exit move types available in the Entry/Exit Move dialog box.
Thread
THREAD_DIAMETER
Defines the minor diameter for an External thread or the major diameter for an Internal thread. Applicable for
Thread milling only.
Turning Parameters
The following parameters are specific to turning NC sequences. They are listed under a heading corresponding
to the name of the branch when you set up the parameters.
Notes:
workpiece.
Cut Option
SCAN_TYPE
For Area turning, specifies the type of tool movement and the way the tool scans multi-step profiles:
· TYPE_1—The tool will cut in one direction only, then retract to the beginning of the cut. If there are
multiple hollows, the tool will complete the first hollow and go to the next one.
· TYPE_2—The tool will cut back and forth along the whole length of the cut.
· TYPE_3—The tool will cut back and forth. If there are multiple hollows, the tool will complete the first
hollow and go to the next one.
· TYPE_1_CONNECT—Works the same as TYPE_1, except the tool will move from one pass to the next by
profiling the workpiece between the end point of the first pass and the start point of the following pass.
The following illustration shows the difference between TYPE_1 and TYPE_1_CONNECT.
1 2
1 SCAN_TYPE TYPE_1
2 SCAN_TYPE TYPE_1_CONNECT
106 Pro/NC
For Groove turning, SCAN_TYPE specifies if the tool cuts from the middle to the sides of the groove, or from
one side to the other:
· TYPE_1 (the default)—Starts in the middle and makes alternating passes on each side in turn.
· TYPE_ONE_DIR—Starts at one side of the groove and moves to the other side.
· TYPE_1_CONNECT—Assures uniform stock allowance on the sides of the groove after the rough pass.
Starts on the deepest portion of the groove, as close to the middle of the groove as possible, and makes
alternating passes on each side in turn; continues making passes on the longer side, if necessary, until the
wall is reached. Makes connecting motions between the plunge passes by moving along the profile of the
groove (similar to TYPE_1_CONNECT in Area turning, described above).
If ROUGH_OPTION for Groove turning is PROF_ONLY, the SCAN_TYPE parameter is ignored.
ROUGH_OPTION
Specifies if there is a profiling pass during an Area or Groove NC sequence:
· ROUGH_ONLY—No profiling is done. The tool cuts by horizontal rough passes for Area turning, by
vertical passes for Groove turning.
· ROUGH_&_PROF—The profiling pass is performed after the rough turning is completed.
· PROF_ONLY—Only the profiling pass will be performed.
· ROUGH_&_CLEAN_UP—Similar to ROUGH_ONLY, except that for ROUGH_ONLY the tool retracts
immediately upon completing rough turning. ROUGH_&_CLEAN_UP makes the tool follow along the
profile up to its end before retracting.
2
3
4 5
1 ROUGH_OPTION
2 ROUGH_ONLY
3 ROUGH_&_PROF
4 ROUGH_&_CLEAN_UP
5 PROF_ONLY
Pro/NC 107
TRIM_TO_WORKPIECE
Allows you to extend the tool path past the workpiece boundaries as sketched. If TRIM_TO_WORKPIECE is
NO (the default), the machining zone will be formed by the whole sketch of the cut; the system will add a
vertical line as the right boundary and a horizontal line as the left boundary. If TRIM_TO_WORKPIECE is set
to YES, the machining zone will be defined on the outside by the workpiece boundaries, with a small extension
past these boundaries determined by the system.
2 3
1 Section sketch extends past the workpiece.

2 TRIM_TO_WORKPIECE YES
3 TRIM_TO_WORKPIECE NO
CUT_DIRECTION
Allows you to reverse the default cutting direction for turning NC sequences (right-to-left for Outside and
Inside turning, downward for Facing). The values are:
· STANDARD (default)—Use the default direction.
· REVERSE—Reverse the cut direction. The tool will cut left-to-right for Outside and Inside turning, and
from the center upward for Facing.
OUTPUT_POINT
Allows you to choose which point of the tool will be used as the control point for CL output:
· CENTER (default)—The center of the nose radius (the default control point).
· TIP—The output point will be offset downwards and to the left from the default control point by the
NOSE_RADIUS value.
· X_OFFSET—The output point will be offset downwards from the default control point by the
NOSE_RADIUS value.
· Z_OFFSET—The output point will be offset to the left from the default control point by the
NOSE_RADIUS value.
· CENTER_RIGHT—Same as CENTER, but on the right side of the tool (for Groove turning only).
· TIP_RIGHT—Same as TIP, but on the right side of the tool (for Groove turning only).
· X_OFFSET_RIGHT—Same as X_OFFSET, but on the right side of the tool (for Groove turning only).
· Z_OFFSET_RIGHT—Same as Z_OFFSET, but on the right side of the tool (for Groove turning only).
All the offsets are determined with respect to the default tool section orientation (as appears using the Show
option). The same point will be used for Outside, Inside, or Face turning. Applicable for Area, Profile, and
Groove turning only.
108 Pro/NC
1
2 3
4 5
1 OUTPUT_POINT
2 CENTER
3 TIP
4 X_OFFSET
5 Z_OFFSET
GOUGE_AVOID_TYPE
Allows you to specify the type of gouge checking for turning NC sequences. TIP_ONLY (the default)
calculates gouge avoidance with respect to the tip of the tool only. TIP_&_SIDES calculates gouge avoidance
with respect to the tip and both cutting sides of the tool. The tool path will be changed to avoid gouging, and
material removal simulation will reflect the tool geometry. Applicable for Area and Profile turning only.
1 GOUGE_AVOID_TYPE TIPE_ONLY
2 GOUGE_AVOID_TYPE TIP_&_SIDES
CORNER_FINISH_TYPE
Reflects the two ways of generating the tool path when passing a convex corner during a profiling pass of an
Area NC Sequence:
· FILLET (default)—The tool path consists of two straight segments connected with an arc.
· STRAIGHT—The tool path consists of two straight segments extended until they intersect.
Pro/NC 109
1
2 3
4 6
5 7
1 CORNER_FINISH_TYPE
2 Tool path
3 Tool path
4 Part
5 FILLET
6 Part
7 STRAIGHT
Note: STRAIGHT may not work if the tool size is too big to enter a cavity in the part.
1
2 5 6
3
4 7
8
1 Tool
2 Tool path
3 Part
4 FILLET
5 Tool
6 Tool path cannot be generated
7 Part
8 STRAIGHT
STEPOVER_ADJUST
YES (the default) allows you to uniformly distribute cutting passes across the area of the cut or along the
groove width during a Rough NC sequence. If set to NO, the distance will be determined by either
STEP_DEPTH (for Area turning) or STEP_OVER (for Groove turning).
GROOVE_FINISH_TYPE
Allows you to specify an intermediate retract for the profiling pass of Groove turning NC sequences:
· NO_BACKCUT (the default)—The tool will enter the groove on one side, retract at some intermediate
point along the groove profile, enter on the other side and complete the cut.
· CONTINUOUS—The tool will enter the groove on one side, cut across, and exit on the other side.
ALTERNATE_SIDE_OUTPUT
If set to YES (the default is NO), allows you to generate CL output for Groove turning NC sequences based on
the side of the tool cutting material. For scan types TYPE_1 and TYPE_1_CONNECT, the initial plunge is
created with output point specified by the OUTPUT_POINT parameter. The tool retracts back to the starting
110 Pro/NC
height. The system then issues a new TURRET statement with OSETNO defined by the ALT_OSETNO_VAL
parameter, and the tool moves to beginning of the next plunge with the X, Y, Z output based on the side of the
tool entering material. This pattern is repeated for all rough passes.
For profiling passes with GROOVE_FINISH_TYPE set to NO_BACKCUT, the first output point, specified by
the OUTPUT_POINT parameter, is active until the retract which occurs at the intermediate point along the
groove. Once the tool returns to starting height, the system issues a new TURRET statement with OSETNO
defined by the ALT_OSETNO_VAL parameter, and the rest of the groove is cut with the other side of the tool
and the new offset register.
DEEP_GROOVE_OPTION
Provides two options for machining deep grooves:
· BY_DEPTH (the default)—The tool will cut to the bottom of the groove in PECK_DEPTH increments,
retracting at FULL_RETRACT_DEPTH, if specified, before stepping over to the next pass.
· BY_WIDTH—The tool will completely machine the whole width of the groove at each PECK_DEPTH.
Applicable for Groove turning NC sequences only.
Cut Param
TOOL_CLEARANCE
The distance used to degouge the tool holder when solid tool outline is used.
STEP_DEPTH
The incremental depth of each pass during rough cut NC sequences. The STEP_DEPTH must be greater than
zero. The default is not set (displayed as "–1"). Applicable for Area Turning only.
END_STEP_DEPTH
If the value of END_STEP_DEPTH is different than that of STEP_DEPTH, then the step depth of the NC
sequence will start at the value of STEP_DEPTH and gradually increase/decrease with each additional slice
until the final slice, when it will become the value of END_STEP_DEPTH. Applicable for Area Turning only.
MIN_STEP_DEPTH
Controls how the intermediate reference part diameters are machined. The default is a dash (-), which means
that all diameters will be machined to stock allowance. Applicable for Area Turning only.
ROUGH_STOCK_ALLOW
and
PROF_STOCK_ALLOW
The amount of stock left after the rough cut for the finish cut. Both parameters are used for Rough Cut NC
sequences only, and specify different stock allowances for roughing and profiling cuts in Area and Groove NC
sequences. PROF_STOCK_ALLOW must be set to a value less than or equal to ROUGH_STOCK_ALLOW.
When geometry is displayed after Automatic material removal, it will use PROF_STOCK_ALLOW. The
defaults are 0.
1 2
5
3 4
Pro/NC 111
1 ROUGH_STOCK_ALLOW
2 PROF_STOCK_ALLOW
3 ROUGH_ONLY
4 profiling pass
5 ROUGH_&_PROF
STOCK_ALLOW
Determines the stock allowance for Profile turning NC sequences and final programmed thread depth for
Thread turning. The default is 0.
Z_STOCK_ALLOW
Specifies the stock allowance in the Z direction, enabling you to leave different amounts of stock on the
diameters and faces of a workpiece. The default value is a dash (-), in which case the
ROUGH_STOCK_ALLOW or PROF_STOCK_ALLOW value will be used as applicable.
Step Depth and Stock Allowance
1 3 4
CSYS z
1 STEP_DEPTH
2 Z_STOCK_ALLOW (or ROUGH_STOCK_ALLOW if Z_STOCK_ALLOW is "-")
3 Z_STOCK_ALLOW
4 PROF_STOCK_ALLOW
NUMBER_PASSES
Gives you additional control over the number of tool passes during an Area or Groove NC sequence (also
controlled by the STEP_DEPTH parameter for Area turning, or STEP_OVER for Groove turning). The system
will compute step depth using the NUMBER_PASSES parameter value (if other than 0), compare it with the
STEP_DEPTH (or STEP_OVER) value, and use the one that is smaller.
CUT_ANGLE
Allows you to cut at an angle. For Outside and Inside Turning the angle is measured with respect to the Z axis,
for Facing—with respect to the X axis. The default is 0. Applicable for Area turning only.
1 CUT_ANGLE 165
112 Pro/NC
NUM_PROF_PASSES
Specifies the amount of profiling passes. Applicable for Area and Groove turning when ROUGH_OPTION is
ROUGH_&_PROF or PROF_ONLY. The default is 1.
PROF_INCREMENT
Specifies the offset between the profiling passes. The final pass will always be the same, which means that the
first pass will be offset from the final pass by: (NUM_PROF_PASSES–1)*PROF_INCREMENT.
The default is 0. If NUM_PROF_PASSES is greater than 1, you must specify a positive value for
PROF_INCREMENT.
2 PROF_INCREMENT
CONCAVE_RADIUS
Defines the radius for a Round corner condition at a concave corner.
CONVEX_RADIUS
Defines the radius for a Round corner condition at a convex corner.
CHAMFER_DIM
Defines the size of the 45 chamfer when a Chamfer corner condition is added.
START_OVERTARVEL
and
END_OVERTRAVEL
These two parameters specify the distance that the tool travels outside the workpiece in the beginning and the
end of each pass, respectively. Applicable for Area and Profile turning. The default value is 0. For Area turning,
START_OVERTRAVEL and END_OVERTRAVEL will only be applied if the cut extension is parallel to the
direction of the cut motion.
Pro/NC 113
1
1 END_OVERTRAVEL not applied

2 START_OVERTRAVEL applied
BACK_CLEAR_ANGLE
The minimum angle by which the back end of the tool will clear the workpiece as it enters an area of smaller
diameter than was previously being machined. The default is 5.
STEP_OVER
The distance between two neighboring cuts. The default is not set (displayed as "–1"). Applicable for rough
Groove turning (that is, with ROUGH_OPTION other than PROF_ONLY).
SIDEWALL_OFFSET
Allows you to control the intermediate retract point for the profiling pass in Groove turning (when
ROUGH_OPTION is PROF_ONLY or ROUGH_&_PROF, and GROOVE_FINISH_TYPE is
NO_BACKCUT). SIDEWALL_OFFSET specifies the length of the second portion of the cut, that is, the
distance between the point of retract and the end of the bottom of the groove. The default is a dash (-), in which
case the tool will retract at the midpoint of the bottom entity.
PECK_DEPTH
If set to a value other than 0, the peck cycle will be performed. The default is 0. Applicable only for rough
Groove turning (that is, with ROUGH_OPTION other than PROF_ONLY).
ALT_OSETNO_VAL
Specifies the alternative offset register value for Groove turning NC sequences when the
ALTERNATE_SIDE_OUTPUT parameter is set to YES. The default value is a dash (-), that is, not used.
Machine
SPINDLE_SPEED
The rate at which the machine spindle rotates (RPM). The default SPINDLE_SPEED is not set (displayed as "–
1").
SPINDLE_SENSE
SPINDLE_RANGE
114 Pro/NC
RANGE_NUMBER
MAX_SPINDLE_RPM
SPINDL command.
SPEED_CONTROL
CONST_RPM (constant revolutions per minute), CONST_SFM (constant surface feet per minute),
CONST_SMM (constant surface meters per minute).
The default SPEED_CONTROL is CONST_RPM.
CUTCOM
Controls tool compensation. The options are:
ON—Turns on the tool compensation in the CL file.
OFF (the default)—No tool compensation provided.
CUTCOM statements are not output for cut motions.
CUTCOM_REGISTER
Specifies the number of the register of the machine controller that holds the tool compensation data. The default
is 0.
TOOL_ORIENTATION
Allows you to control the tool orientation. It represents the angle (in degrees) from the tool axis clockwise to the
Z-axis of the NC Sequence coordinate system. TOOL_ORIENTATION can be any value between 0 and 360.
The default is 0.
Note: For Head 2, the angle is measured counterclockwise. That is, if TOOL_ORIENTATION is 90, for Head
1 the tool shank is oriented along the positive X-axis of the NC Sequence coordinate system, while for
Head 2 the tool shank is along the negative X-axis.
DELAY
The duration in seconds of a period of tool dwelling at the bottom of the groove. The default is 0, in which case
the "DELAY / t" statement will not be output in the CL file. Applicable for Groove turning only.
OSETNO_VAL
Specifies the tool gauge length register. The default is a dash (-), in which case the Offset value from the Tool
Table is used.
X_GAUGE_OFFSET
Shifts CL output by a specified value. If you specify a positive value, CL data is shifted in the positive X-
direction of the tool coordinate system; a negative value shifts CL data in the opposite direction. The default is a
dash (-).
Z_GAUGE_OFFSET
Shifts CL output by a specified value. If you specify a positive value, CL data is shifted in the positive Z-
direction of the tool coordinate system; a negative value shifts CL data in the opposite direction. The default is a
dash (-).
Entry/Exit
PLUNGE_ANGLE
The angle at which the tool approaches the workpiece. The default is 0. Applicable for Area and Groove
turning.
Pro/NC 115
PULLOUT_ANGLE
The angle at which the tool is pulled away from the workpiece. The default is 0. Applicable for Area and
Groove turning.
1 2
3 4
1 PLUNGE_ANGLE 45
2 PLUNGE_ANGLE 0
3 PULLOUT_ANGLE 0
4 PULLOUT_ANGLE 45
RETRACT_RATIO
Controls the depth of the tool retracting motion during an Area turning NC sequence. This depth is specified as
a ratio of STEP_DEPTH. The default is 1.1.
1 Retracting depth
2 STEP_DEPTH
3 Retracting depth = STEP_DEPTH * RETRACT_RATIO
PULLOUT_DIST
Used for the final retract of the tool. The default is 0, in which case the system default value for retract will be
used. Applicable for Groove turning only.
FULL_RETRACT_DEPTH
Applicable for peck cycle Groove turning only. If other than 0 (the default), the tool will retract all the way back
to CLEAR_DIST upon reaching this depth below the top of the groove.
CLEAR_DIST
For Groove NC sequences, the clearance distance above the workpiece surface at which the PLUNGE_FEED
ends and the CUT_FEED begins. For Thread NC sequences, the clearance distance from the workpiece
(corresponds to "d" in the AI parameter "FEDTO, d"). The default is -1.
APPROACH_DISTANCE
In Area turning, will be used for the initial entry into rough turning, as well as for the entry into the profiling
motion. Also specifies the length of approach Tool Motions for all NC sequence types. The default is 0.
116 Pro/NC
EXIT_DISTANCE
In Area turning, will be used for the final exit from rough turning, as well as for the exit from the profiling
motion. Also specifies the length of exit Tool Motions for all NC sequence types. The default is a dash (-), that
is, 0.
LEAD_RADIUS
The radius of the tangential circular movement of the tool when leading in or out. Used when creating Lead
In and Lead Out Tool Motions, and in Build Cut for Profile turning. The default is 0.
TANGENT_LEAD_STEP
The length of the linear movement that is tangent to the circular lead-in or lead-out motion. Used when
creating Lead In and Lead Out motions in Build Cut for Profile turning. The default is 0.
NORMAL_LEAD_STEP
The length of the linear movement that is normal to the tangent portion of the lead-in or lead-out motion. Used
when creating Lead In and Lead Out motions in Build Cut for Profile turning. The default is 0.
ENTRY_ANGLE
The angle of the arc created by the circular movement of the tool when leading in. Used when creating Lead In
and Lead Out motions in Build Cut for Profile turning. The default is 90.
EXIT_ANGLE
The angle of the arc created by the circular movement of the tool when leading out. Used when creating Lead In
and Lead Out motions in Build Cut for Profile turning. The default is 90.
1
2 6
4
5
7
3
1 NORMAL_LEAD_STEP
2 TANGENT_LEAD_STEP
3 ENTRY_ANGLE
4 LEAD_RADIUS
5 cut motion
6 TANGENT_LEAD_STEP
7 EXIT_ANGLE
Thread
THREAD_FEED
Number of threads per inch. The default value is not set (displayed as "–1").
THREAD_FEED_UNITS
TPI (default), MMPR, IPR. Allows alternate pitch designations.
PERCENT_DEPTH
A decimal number between 0 and 1 that indicates the percentage of remaining material to be removed with each
pass.
Note: This option is valid only for AI macros, not for ISO standard CL Data.
NUMBER_FIN_PASSES
Sets the number of passes to be made after the final thread depth (determined by STOCK_ALLOW) is reached.
Pro/NC 117
The default is 1.
NUMBER_STARTS
The number of threading starts in multiple start threading (corresponds to the AI parameter "TIMES,t" and to
the ISO parameter "MULTRD,t"). For example, if NUMBER_STARTS is set to 4, there will be four threading
starts spaced at equal intervals around the part.
NUMBER_CUTS
For ISO threads, the number of times the tool will be positioned to a multiple cut (corresponds to the ISO
parameter "CUTS,c").
NUM_TRANSVERSE_CUTS
For AI threads, the number of times the tool will be positioned to a multiple cut (corresponds to "n" in the AI
parameter "OFSETL,n,o").
CUT_OFFSET
For AI threads, the offset distance between the cuts in multiple cut threading (corresponds to "o" in the AI
parameter "OFSETL,n,o").
The graphic below illustrates the NUM_TRANSVERSE_CUTS and CUT_OFFSET parameters.
2
1
3
4
1 thread
2 tool
3 NUM_TRANSVERSE_CUTS = 4
4 CUT_OFFSET
OUTPUT_THRD_PNTS
If set to YES (the default), outputs GOTO statements for the first and last points of the thread into CL file,
before and after the THREAD/AUTO command, respectively. If set to NO, does not output these GOTO
statements.
INFEED_ANGLE
Angle at which the tool begins the cut. The default value is 0.
THREAD_DEPTH
Thread depth (for General thread type only). The default value is not set (displayed as "–1").
Holemaking Parameters
The following parameters are specific to Holemaking NC sequences. They are listed under a heading
corresponding to the name of the branch when you set up the parameters.
118 Pro/NC
Notes:
workpiece.
Cut Option
SCAN_TYPE
There are several algorithms for automatically creating the Holemaking tool path:
TYPE_1—By incrementing the Y coordinate and going back and forth in the X direction.
TYPE_SPIRAL—Clockwise starting from the hole nearest to the coordinate system.
TYPE_ONE_DIR—By incrementing the X coordinate and decrementing the Y.
PICK_ORDER—The holes will be drilled in the same order as they are selected. If one choice results in
more than one hole being selected (for example, All Holes or Pattern selection), these holes will be drilled
according to TYPE_1. Then the PICK_ORDER drilling will be resumed.
SHORTEST (default)—The system determines which order of holes results in the shortest machine motion
time.
1
y y y
x x x
2 3 4
1 SCAN_TYPE
2 TYPE_1
3 TYPE_SPIRAL
4 TYPE_ONE_DIR
CUT_DIRECTION
Enables you to reverse the order in which the holes are machined. The values are: STANDARD (default) or
REVERSE. REVERSE will make the system start with the last hole and go back to the first one. This
functionality is helpful when you have to create multiple NC sequences on a large hole set: alternating direction
of tool path for successive NC sequences lets you save time for repositioning the tool. If your tool path was
created using the Customize functionality, CUT_DIRECTION will affect the Use Sketch segments, but not the
Connect segments.
CYCLE_FORMAT
Specifies the output format for CL data of a Holemaking NC sequence. For all newly created NC sequences the
default is COUPLET. The other option is FIXED (this is the default for NC sequences created prior to Release
12.0). Not applicable for BORE, REAM, and BREAKCHIP cycles (these are always output in COUPLET
format).
CYCLE_OUTPUT
Specifies the order of drilling for an automatically created Holemaking tool path when multiple Hole Sets are
included in the NC sequence:
BY_HOLE (default)—The SCAN_TYPE algorithm will be applied to all the selected holes, without
considering which Hole Set they belong to. This results in a shorter traversal path of the tool.
BY_HOLESET—The SCAN_TYPE algorithm will be applied to holes in each Hole Set separately. This
will somewhat reduce the size of the CL file, because each Hole Set will only have one CYCLE / ... and
Pro/NC 119
CYCLE / OFF statement associated with it, instead of turning the cycle on and off every time the tool
moves to a hole in a different Hole Set.
Cut Param
BREAKOUT_DISTANCE
The system adds the BREAKOUT_DISTANCE value to the Z depth in the CYCLE statements associated with
holes drilled Thru All, and with through holes drilled using the Auto depth option. You can use it for Blind
holes, if you select Use breakout distance when defining a Hole Set. The default is 0.
CHK_SRF_STOCK_ALLOW
Allows you to specify stock allowance to be used with check surfaces. The default is a dash (-), that is, ignore.
This parameter is available for all 3-Axis Holemaking NC sequences except Back boring.
PECK_DEPTH
Depth increment for each drilling pass. Default value is 0. If you select DEEP drilling, you have to specify non-
zero PECK_DEPTH. Not available for Countersink drilling.
Feed
THREAD_FEED
Used for TAP cycles only (instead of CUT_FEED) to specify feed rate. The default is not set (displayed as "–
1").
THREAD_FEED_UNITS
TPI (default), MMPR, IPR. Applicable for TAP cycles only. Allows alternate pitch designations.
FLOAT_TAP_FACTOR
Used for the floating TAP cycle only. The feed rate is calculated as the THREAD_FEED value multiplied by
FLOAT_TAP_FACTOR. The default is 1.
Machine
SPINDLE_SPEED
The rate at which the machine spindle rotates. The default is not set (displayed as "–1").
SPINDLE_STATUS
ON (default), OFF.
SPINDLE_SENSE
SPINDLE_RANGE
RANGE_NUMBER
MAX_SPINDLE_RPM
SPINDL command.
120 Pro/NC
SPEED_CONTROL
CONST_RPM (constant revolutions per minute), CONST_SFM (constant surface feet per minute),
CONST_SMM (constant surface meters per minute).
The default SPEED_CONTROL is CONST_RPM. CONST_SFM and CONST_SMM allow you to apply feed
rate control to the contact surface between the tool and the workpiece, to create good surface finish.
DELAY
Duration of dwelling at depth. The default is a dash (-), in which case there will be no delay. Not applicable for
TAP and DEEP cycles.
DELAY_UNITS
SECONDS (default) or REV.
Entry/Exit
CLEAR_DIST
The clearance distance above the top of the hole at which the PLUNGE_FEED ends and the CUT_FEED
begins. The default is not set (displayed as "–1").
CLEARANCE_OFFSET
The clearance distance above the top of the hole at which the tool is positioned for 5-Axis Holemaking. Also
defines how far the tool will retract after drilling a hole and before traversing to the next hole. The default value
for CLEARANCE_OFFSET is a dash (-), in which case CLEAR_DIST will be used. Applicable for 5-Axis
Holemaking only.
PULLOUT_DIST
Allows for the tool to return to a point other than that defined by CLEAR_DIST. The default is a dash (-), in
which case this parameter is not used.
If the default value is used, then the tool will return to the clearance distance (CLEAR_DIST) when moving to
the next hole, and the cycle statement will not include the RETURN option.
If the value of PULLOUT_DIST is set to 0, then the tool will return to the retract plane when moving to the
next hole.
RAPTO_DIST
Allows for further rapid advance from CLEAR_DIST towards the top of the hole. The default is a dash (-), in
which case this parameter is not used.
FULL_RETRACT_DEPTH
If set to a value other than 0 (the default), specifies full retraction out of the hole for BREAKCHIP cycle after a
certain number of incremental steps. This number of steps is calculated as FULL_RETRACT_DEPTH /
PECK_DEPTH.
ORIENT_ANGLE
Allows you to specify orientation of an asymmetric tool before backing it away from the hole wall before
retracting. Applicable for BORE cycle and for back spotting only. The default is a dash (-), in which case this
parameter is not used.
JOG_DIST
Allows you to specify the distance of backing an asymmetric tool away from the hole wall before retracting.
Applicable for BORE cycle and for back spotting only. The default is a dash (-), in which case this parameter is
not used.
BACK_BORE_CLEARANCE
Minimum distance between tool and hole cylinder. Applicable for back spotting only.
Pro/NC 121
Wire EDM Parameters
The following parameters are specific to Wire EDM NC sequences. They are listed under a heading
corresponding to the name of the branch when you set up the parameters.
Notes:
workpiece.
Cut Option
AUTO_CORNER_TYPE
Specify the default option for automatically created corner conditions:
RADIUS—Create round corner motions for concave and convex corners. This is the default.
STRAIGHT—Create a corner by extending straight segments until they intersect.
CHAMFER—Chamfer the corners.
BISECT— Bisect the corners.
CORNER_PASSES
Specify on which passes to create the automatic corner conditions:
ALL_PASSES—On all passes.
FIRST_PASS—On the first pass only.
LAST_PASS—On the last pass only.
APPROXIMATE_SPLINES
Indicate whether you want to approximate spline edges with arcs when creating CL data output. The default
value is NO; if you specify a value of YES, the spline edges will be approximated.
AUTOSYNCH_START_END
Enables automatic synchronization of the start and end points of a 4-Axis Wire EDM cut motion:
YES—The two heads will be automatically synchronized at the beginning and the end of each cut.
NO—The start and end points of the upper and lower contours will be mapped by cut entities; therefore, the
upper and lower contours will have different start and end points in XY.
Cut Param
STOCK_ALLOW
The amount of stock left after the NC sequence. The default is not set (displayed as "–1").
CORNER_LENGTH
Defines the size (the side length) of the parallelograms added to the tool path when corner condition is
specified. The default is 0.
CORNER_ANGLE
For a sharp corner, the angle of the parallelogram equals the angle between the adjoining entities, and the
CORNER_ANGLE value is ignored. However, if you add a corner condition between two tangent entities, the
angle of the parallelogram will be defined by the CORNER_ANGLE parameter. The default is 0.
CONCAVE_RADIUS
Specifies the radius for a concave corner condition.
122 Pro/NC
CONVEX_RADIUS
Specifies the radius for a convex corner condition.
ATTACH_WIDTH
Specifies a distance along a Contouring cut motion that is not to be cut, leaving the two sides of the cut attached
by a small tab of material.
STOP_DIST
Distance before the end of the cut motion where the system will place a CL stop command (STOP or OPSTOP,
depending on the END_STOP_CONDITION parameter value). This enables the operator to clamp the part
before it is cut free and falls away. After the clamp is in place, the tool completes the trajectory. If the tool path
consists of more than one pass, the stop point is located on the first pass only.
DETACH_STOP_DIST
Distance before the end of the Detach move where the system will place a CL stop command (STOP or
OPSTOP, depending on the END_STOP_CONDITION parameter value).
END_OVERTRAVEL
Overtravel distance past the end of the cut motion. If the cut motion consists of more than one pass, the
overtravel distance is applied according to the END_OVERTRAVEL_PASS parameter value.
REVERSE_DIST
Distance from end to reverse for multiple passes.
NUM_PROFILE_PASSES
Number of passes for a Finish cut motion.
PROF_INCREMENT
Increment for each Finish pass (unless this data is specified in the register table).
STEP_OVER
Controls the lateral depth of cut for No Core Wire EDM. The STEP_OVER must be a positive value less than
the cutter diameter. The default is not set (displayed as "–1").
TOOL_OVERLAP
Another way to control the lateral depth of cut for No Core Wire EDM. TOOL_OVERLAP indicates the
amount that the tool should overlap the region machined during the previous pass. The default is a dash (-).
TOOL_OVERLAP must be less than the tool diameter. If TOOL_OVERLAP is specified and STEP_OVER is
not, the lateral depth of cut will be calculated as
(CUTTER_DIAM –TOOL_OVERLAP).
Feed
ARC_FEED
Allows you to control the cut feed around arcs. If set to a dash (-) (which is the default), the CUT_FEED value
will be used. If set to 0, the RAPID statement will be output before the CIRCLE statement.
Machine
SPARK_ALLOW
Together with STOCK_ALLOW and the tool parameter CUTTER_DIAM, defines the trajectory of the center
of the tool with respect to desired geometry. The default is 0.
CL_DIST
Value to be output to the CL_DIST command in the CL data.
Pro/NC 123
TAPER_ANGLE
Value of the machine controlled taper angle (applicable for 2-Axis Wire EDM only).
CL_OUTPUT_MODE
Defines the CL output format for the tool axis (applicable for 4-Axis Wire EDM only):
MULTAX_DATA (default)—The CL output will be in XYZ / IJK format.
TAPER—The CL output will use the STAN statement.
CUT_MOTION_CONNECT
Controls the Connect moves between multiple cut motions:
CUT_WIRE (default)—The wire is cut at the end of the cut motion. If the wire is disengaged between cut
motions, the tool moves at RAPID feed.
CONTINIOUS—Do not unload wire at the end of cut motion. If the wire is engaged between cut motions,
the tool moves at CUT_FEED.
CUTCOM_MOVE
If this parameter is set to a non-zero value, it will allow the tool to move away from the specified tool path by
this distance in the direction of the tool offset or Cutcom offset (whichever is applicable). Before each Cutcom
move, the CUTCOM / OFF statement will be output. Then there will be new GENRTR, FLUSH, and
CUTCOM statements for the next tool pass. At the end of a cut motion there will be a CUTCOM / OFF
statement followed by exit motion for closed contours or by Cutcom move for open ones.
CUTCOM_MOVE_APPROACH
Specifies the length of linear move used to turn cutter compensation on or off for the first pass of a Contouring
NC sequence (similar to CUTCOM_MOVE, described above).
NUMBER_CUTCOM_PTS
Specifies if colinear points in approach and exit motions should be stripped or added. The values are:
0—Strip colinear points.
1—Do not strip colinear points, to allow proper implementation of Cutcom.
n (where n is an integer)—The Approach, Exit, or Cutcom move will be divided into n equal segments by
adding extra GOTO points.
8 15
16
9
2 17
3 10 18
4 11 19
5 12 20
6 13
21
1 7 14
2 1st GOTO point
3 2nd GOTO point
4 Approach move
124 Pro/NC
5 Part
6 Cut motion
8 1st GOTO point
9 2nd GOTO point
10 3rd GOTO point
11 Approach move
12 Part
13 Cut motion
14 NUMBER_CUTCOM_PTS 2 (colinear points stripped)
15 1st GOTO point
16 2nd GOTO point
17 3rd GOTO point
18 4th GOTO point
19 Approach move
20 Part
21 Cut motion
CUTCOM_LOC_APPR
Specifies location of CUTCOM statement on the approach motion if multiple cutcom points are specified.
Cutcom points are numbered from 0 to n, where n is the value of NUMBER_CUTCOM_PTS. The default is 1.
Note: For bisect angles, the motion towards the cut is considered an approach motion.
CUTCOM_LOC_EXIT
Specifies location of CUTCOM statement on the exit motion if multiple cutcom points are specified. Cutcom
points are numbered from 0 to n, where n is the value of NUMBER_CUTCOM_PTS. The default is 0.
Note: For bisect angles, the motion away from the cut is considered an exit motion.
3
4
12 13 5
11 7 6
8
9
10
1 1st GOTO point (cutcom point 0)

2 2nd GOTO point (cutcom point 1)
3 3rd GOTO point (cutcom point 2)
4 4th GOTO point
Pro/NC 125
5 Part
6 5th GOTO point
7 Cut motion
12 Approach move
13 Exit move
CUTCOM_REG_START
Initial cutter compensation controller register number.
CUTCOM_REG_INCR
Increment of cutcom register for a multi-pass tool path.
FLUSH_REG_START
Initial flush register number.
FLUSH_REG_INCR
Increment of flush register for a multi-pass tool path.
FLUSH_REG_APPROACH
Number of flush register for the approach move.
FLUSH_REG_DETACH
Number of flush register for the detach move.
GENRTR_ROUGH
Power setting of the machine for the rough pass.
GENRTR_APPROACH
Power setting of the machine for the approach motion.
GENRTR_DETACH
Power setting of the machine for the detach motion.
GENRTR_FINISH
Initial power setting of the first finish pass.
GENRTR_REG_INCR
Increment of GENRTR command for subsequent finish passes.
REGISTER_TABLE
Specify the name of the register table to be used. The default is a dash (-), in which case cutcom and generator
will be determined using the appropriate parameters above.
Entry/Exit
APPROACH_DISTANCE
Specifies the length of approach motions for Customize. The default is 0.
126 Pro/NC
EXIT_DISTANCE
Specifies the length of exit motions for Customize. The default is a dash (-), that is, 0.
APPROACH_MOVE
Allows you to specify if the Approach move will be created automatically. The default is YES. In order for the
Approach move to be created, you have to also specify a Thread Point for the cut motion.
RETURN_TO_START
If set to YES (the default is NO), the wire will return to the start point upon completing the cut motion.
Applicable to No Core cut motions only.
LEAD_IN
If set to YES, the system will create a Lead In motion automatically on all passes of a multi-pass cut motion.
The default is NO.
LEAD_OUT
If set to YES, the system will create a Lead Out motion automatically on all passes of a multi-pass cut motion.
The default is NO.
LEAD_RADIUS
The radius of the tangential circular movement of the tool when leading in or out. The default is 0.
TANGENT_LEAD_STEP
The length of the linear movement that is tangent to the circular lead-in or lead-out motion. The default is 0.
NORMAL_LEAD_STEP
The length of the linear movement that is normal to the tangent portion of the lead-in or lead-out motion. The
default is 0.
END_OVERTRAVEL_PASS
Specifies on which passes of a multi-pass motion to create an overtravel motion:
NO—No overtravel motion is created (the default).
ALL_PASSES—On all passes.
LAST_PASS—On the last pass only.
Using Parameters in Relations

You can drive NC sequence and tool parameters by other parameters or part dimensions using relations. Both
the parameters with numeric and string values can be included in relations.
The NC sequence parameter syntax is:
PARAM_NAME:FID_#
where:
PARAM_NAME—the parameter name,
#—the internal feature ID of the NC sequence.
Example:
STEP_OVER:FID_22 = d6:1 * 0.1
The tool parameter syntax is:
PARAM_NAME:TID_ID
where:
PARAM_NAME—the parameter name,
ID—the TOOL_ID.
Pro/NC 127
Example:
STEP_OVER:FID_22 = CUTTER_DIAM:TID_RMIL1 * 0.4
If a parameter is driven by relation, the system puts a note next to it in the parameters file. If you modify a
relation-driven parameter, its value will be reset upon regeneration.
Options Tool Info and NC Seq Info in the RELATIONS menu, accessible in Manufacture mode only, facilitate
using tool and NC sequence parameters in relations. They display parameters (including ID) for a selected tool
or NC sequence, respectively.
To Include a Parameter in a Relation

1. Choose Relations from the MANUFACTURE menu.
2. Choose Assem Rel.
Note: You can use Part Rel for the workpiece in Part manufacturing if the relation contains only the NC
sequence (not tool) parameters and workpiece dimensions.
3. Choose Tool Info or NC Seq Info if necessary to check on the parameter exact names and current values.
NC Seq Info gives you the feature internal ID for the NC sequence.
4. Select the reference part and/or the workpiece to display dimensions in symbolic form.
5. Choose Add and enter the relation. Enter parameters using the syntax above.
About Milling NC Sequences

To access Mill type NC sequences, you must be in a Mill or Mill/Turn workcell (if the latter, choose MILL
when starting to create an NC sequence). The following NC sequence types are available:
· Volume—2.5-Axis slice-by-slice milling used to remove material from a specified volume.
· Local Mill—Used to remove material left after a Volume, Profile, Conventional or Contour Surface, or
another Local milling NC sequence (usually with a smaller tool). Can also be used to clean up material in
specified corners.
· Surface Mill—3- to 5-Axis milling of horizontal or slanted surfaces. You are given a choice of several
methods for defining the cut.
· Swarf Mill—5-Axis milling of a series horizontal or slanted surfaces by cutting with the side of the tool.
· Face—Facing down the workpiece.
· Profile—3- to 5-Axis milling of vertical or slanted surfaces.
· Pocketing—2.5-Axis milling of horizontal, vertical, or slanted surfaces. The walls of the pocket will be
milled as with Profiling, the bottom—as the bottom surfaces in Volume milling.
· Trajectory—3- to 5-Axis milling, with the tool moving along a specified trajectory.
· Holemaking—Drilling, boring, tapping.
· Thread—3-Axis helical milling.
· Engraving—3- to 5-Axis milling, with the tool moving along a Groove cosmetic feature.
· Plunge—2.5-Axis rough milling of deep cavities by a series of overlapping plunges into the material, using
a flat-bottom tool.
To Select Surfaces
There are several NC sequence types that require selecting surfaces to be milled in order to define cut geometry:
Conventional and Contour Surface, Facing, Profiling, and Pocketing. These types will be jointly referred to as
Surface Milling NC sequences.
Surfaces to be milled are selected using the Surfaces option in the SEQ SETUP menu. They can be selected
from:
· Model—Select continuous surfaces from the reference part.
· Workpiece—Select continuous surfaces from the workpiece.
128 Pro/NC
· Mill Volume—Create or select a Mill Volume, then select all or some surfaces from this volume.
· Mill Surface—Create or select a Mill Surface. Specify which side of the surface to mill using Flip and
Okay options (arrow shows the side). Select all or some patches from the milling surface.
Note: In Assembly machining, the Workpiece option does not appear. The Model option enables you to
select surfaces from any part in the manufacturing assembly.
After you have specified from where the surfaces are to be selected, the SELECT SRFS menu appears:
· Add—Select surfaces to mill. If selecting from a Mill Volume or Mill Surface, you have a choice of:
- Select—Select surfaces to be milled. You can either select individual surfaces, or use the Pick Many
option in the GET SELECT menu and draw a rectangular box on the screen by selecting its two
diagonal points; all surfaces completely covered by this box will be selected.
- Select All—All surfaces included in the Mill Volume/Mill Surface definition will be milled.
· Remove—Unselect previously added surfaces. You have a choice of:
- Remove Single—Unselect individual surfaces.
- Remove All—Unselect all previously added surfaces.
· Show—When you choose this option, all currently selected surfaces are highlighted in cyan.
· Change—Appears only when selecting from a Mill Volume or Mill Surface. Allows you to select or create
another Mill Volume/Mill Surface, or modify the current one. You can then proceed adding and removing
surfaces using the options above.
Selecting a Loop of Surfaces

When selecting surfaces for a Profile NC sequence, the following additional options are available:
· Surface—Select surfaces by choosing each one individually.
· Loop—Select a closed loop of surfaces by choosing a face they surround. If there is more than one loop of
edges (for example, there is a hole in the selected surface), you will be prompted to select an edge to use.
This option is especially helpful for Profiling.
These options will also be available when you use Remove Single for Profiling.
The following illustration shows selecting a loop of surfaces.
1 2
1 Select this surface

2 Select this edge
3 All side surfaces are selected
Note: Selecting by Loop does not parametrically gather surfaces. For example, if you want to be able to
replace the reference part with another family instance that has more, or fewer, surfaces than the original
one, and have the tool path automatically update, use a Mill Surface created by Gather, Surf & Bnd.
Selecting Surfaces from a Quilt

When you select surfaces from a quilt, whether to machine or to use as check surfaces, you will have the means
to specify which side of the quilt you wish to reference:
· When selecting surfaces to be milled using Model or Workpiece, you can only select surfaces from one
quilt. You will then be prompted to specify which side to use by flipping an arrow.
Pro/NC 129
· When selecting check surfaces, you can select as many entire quilts and individual quilt surfaces as needed.
Upon selecting Done Sel, these selections are highlighted one-by-one and you are prompted to specify the
side by flipping an arrow. When an entire quilt is selected, it is considered to be a single selection, and you
will only have to specify the side just once.
To Perform Gouge Checking

Pro/NC provides automatic gouge avoidance for all NC sequence types against the geometric references
selected for cut geometry. For Volume milling using Mill Window, automatic gouge checking is performed
against all the surfaces of the reference part.
Notes:
- If the HOLDER_DIAMETER and HOLDER_LENGTH parameter values have been supplied, holder
dimensions will be used for gouge avoidance.
- Automatic gouge avoidance is not implemented for Mill type tools with Side_Angle > 0. Use Taper
Mill tools for automatic degouging.
The Check Surfs option in the SEQ SETUP menu, available for Conventional, Contour Surface, Trajectory, and
Profile milling (and for Local Milling referencing a Conventional or Contour milling NC sequence), allows you
to select additional surfaces against which gouge checking will be performed, or unselect some of the surfaces
selected automatically. Selecting this option brings up the SRF PRT SEL menu with the following options:
· Add Ref Prts—A checkmark next to this option means that all surfaces of the reference part (or, in case of
Assembly machining, of all reference parts) will be included as Check Surfaces.
· Sel Surf—Select or unselect individual surfaces using the SELECT SRFS menu, which allows you to add,
remove, and show surfaces that will be used for gouge checking. Additional options will be available when
adding surfaces or removing them using the Remove Single option:
- Surface—Select individual surfaces to add or remove. If you choose a surface that belongs to a quilt,
the entire quilt will be selected. Use Query Sel to select just one patch of a quilt.
- Part—Add or remove all surfaces of a selected part.
Note: If you use a Mill Window, the system automatically performs gouge checking against all the surfaces
of the reference part(s); therefore, the Add Ref Prts option is not available, and when you add surfaces
using the Sel Surf option, reference parts are not selectable.
Gouge Checking Defaults

The system automatically includes all surfaces of the reference part (or, in case of Assembly machining, of all
reference parts) as Check Surfaces for the following types of NC sequences:
· 3- to 5-Axis Conventional Surface milling
· 3- to 5-Axis Contouring Surface-by-Surface
· 3- to 5-Axis Cutline machining
· 3- to 5-Axis Surface milling by Projecting Tool Path
· 5-Axis Trajectory milling
· Local Milling By Previous Tool
You can override this default by unselecting Add Ref Prts in the SRF PRT SEL menu.
You can also use the following configuration options:
· mfg_auto_ref_prt_as_chk_srf no—To disable automatically including all reference part surfaces as Check
Surfaces for the NC sequence types listed above (the default is "yes").
· chk_part_surfs_profpock yes—To automatically include all reference part surfaces as Check Surfaces for
Profiling and Pocketing NC sequences (the default is "no").
130 Pro/NC
To Perform 4-Axis Milling
When you create a 4-Axis milling NC sequence, the 4 Axis Plane option will appear in the SEQ SETUP menu in
addition to all the other options appropriate for this particular NC sequence type. This is a plane to which the
tool axis will be parallel. You can select a planar surface or select or create a datum plane. You can also specify
values for lead angle and tilt angle of the tool axis with respect to the 4 Axis Plane, as well as enable variable
lead angle control using the 4X_LEAD_RANGE_OPT parameter.
The system will generate CL data as if for 5-Axis milling and then automatically recompute it so that the tool
axis is always parallel to the specified plane. The following illustration shows the difference in CL output
between a 5-Axis and a 4-Axis Conventional Surface milling NC sequence.
3 2
1 4-Axis Plane
2 4-Axis
3 5-Axis
To Specify Negative Stock Allowance

Specifying negative stock allowance may be required in special cases, such as milling of electrodes. Negative
stock allowance can be specified for the following NC sequence types:
· For Volume, Local, Conventional, Contour, and Pocket milling, negative stock allowance value must be less
than Corner_Radius of the tool.
· For Profile and Trajectory milling, any negative value may be specified.
To Customize the Tool Path in Milling

Generally, the system automatically generates a default tool path based on the cut geometry and manufacturing
parameters. For more low-level control over the tool path, you can use the Customize option in the NC
SEQUENCE menu.
For all Milling NC sequence types, except Trajectory Milling, the system automatically generates an Auto
Plunge and the default Automatuc Cut motion. You can either accept the motions automatically generated by
the system (and supplement them with the Approach and Exit Tool Motions, if needed), or delete them and
generate your own Automatic Cut motions, as well as Approach and Exit Tool Motions. For Trajectory Milling,
cut geometry is not specified at the time of NC sequence setup; you have to use the Customize functionality to
generate the Automatic Cut, Approach, and Exit Tool Motions.
Build Cut at the NC Sequence Level

When you create Automatic Cut motions, the Build Cut functionality lets you add or remove slices or cutting
passes, specify approach and exit path, and so on. However, if you are satisfied with the default tool path
Pro/NC 131
generated by the system (which is based on the sequence parameters and geometric references), you can use the
Build Cut option in the SEQ SETUP menu to access the Build Cut functionality at the NC sequence level,
without having to go through the Customize user interface.
This option is available only if the NC sequence’s tool path has not been customized. If you define Build Cut
items at the NC sequence level, and then attempt to customize the tool path, the system prompts you first to
delete the items defined at the NC sequence level. An Info Window opens with a list of items you must delete.
The Build Cut functionality at the NC sequence level is available for Volume, Local, Profile milling,
Conventional Surface milling, Contour Surface milling (including Surf/Surf, Cutline, and ProjToolPath), Face
milling, and Pocketing.
The Build Cut functionality at the NC sequence level is identical to that at the Automatic Cut motion level.
About Variable Axis Control

The Axis Def option in the SEQ SETUP menu enables you to control the orientation of the tool axis for 5-axis
Contouring and Conventional surface milling NC sequences, including Cut Line machining.
There are three ways to control axis orientation:
· Points on Surface—Select points at which to define the orientation of the tool axis; in the regions between
selected points, Pro/NC will gradually interpolate the correct axis orientation for the tool. Axis orientation is
interpolated using a weighted average of the tool axis orientations specified at the nearest selected points. If
values have been specified for the parameters LEAD_ANGLE and TILT_ANGLE, these values will not be
taken into consideration when interpolating the default axis orientation, but will be added/subtracted to/from
that value after it has been calculated. For Cutline machining, you can also define tool axis orientation along
the cutlines.
· Pivot Point—Select or create a datum point to be used as pivot point for the tool. The tool axis will always
pass through this point while machining the surface(s).
· Pivot Curve—Select an open or closed loop of edges or curves that will be used to guide the tool axis. The
tool axis will always pass through some point of the pivot curve while machining the surface(s). All entities
that form the pivot curve must be tangent to each other. You can have the system automatically synchronize
tool path with pivot curve or define your own synchronization.
Point on Surface and Pivot Curve axis definitions can be used in 4-Axis Milling. For Points on Surface,
specified tool axes will be projected onto the 4-Axis Plane and then interpolated.
To Define the Axis Orientation Using Points on

Surface
1. When choosing the references that you need to define for the NC sequence, choose Axis Def from the SEQ
SETUP menu.
2. Choose Pnts on Srf from the AXIS OPT menu.
3. Choose Add from the AXIS DEF menu. The AXIS DEF OPT menu appears with the following options:
- Along Cutline—(Available for Cutline Machining only) Specify the tool axis orientation along the
cutlines.
- Edge—Specify the tool axis orientation along an edge or chain of edges.
- Location—Specify the tool axis orientation at a datum point. The datum point may be located
anywhere on the surface being machined. Select or create a datum point at which to define the tool axis
orientation.
- Drive Surf—Select a surface (or multiple surfaces) to adjust the tool axis orientation for the selected
edges (optional).
4. Choose Edge and select edges for axis control. The edges must form a continuous chain.
You will then be prompted to specify the tool axis orientation at the start and end of each edge using the
AXIS DEF TYPE menu described following. If you selected a drive surface, the tool orientation along the
edge will be the average of the two endpoint orientations adjusted by the shape of the drive surface. If you
132 Pro/NC
did not specify a drive surface, you will have to create additional control points along the edge using the
Location option.
5. Choose a command from the AXIS DEF TYPE menu to indicate the tool’s orientation at the specified point:
- Along Z Dir—Specify the tool axis along the Z direction of the NC sequence coordinate system.
- Datum Axis—Select or create a datum axis to specify the orientation of the tool axis.
6. If you chose Datum Axis, select or create a datum axis to indicate the tool’s orientation at that location.
7. The DIRECTION menu appears. Choose Flip or Okay to indicate the direction of the tool axis. The axis
orientation definition will be displayed as a magenta arrow originating at the specified location.
8. Repeat Steps 3 through 7 for every point at which you want to define the tool axis orientation.
Example: Axis Orientation Using Points on Surface

Refer to the following graphic for an illustration of axis orientation definitions.
1 Axis definition created using Edge and Along Z Dir

2 Axis definition created using Location and Datum Axis
To Define the Axis Orientation Using Points Along

Cutlines
SETUP menu.
2. Choose Pnts on Srf from the AXIS OPT menu.
3. Choose Add from the AXIS DEF menu.
4. Choose Along Cutline and Done/Return from the AXIS DEF OPT menu.
5. The system highlights all the existing cutlines. Select a point along a cutline.
6. The ENTER VAL menu appears to let you specify this position as a parameter along the entire length of the
cutline (that is, 0.00 is the start point of the cutline and 1.00 is the end of the entire cutline). The system also
presents the parameter value corresponding to the selected point and displays it as an option in the ENTER
VAL menu. You can either select this option, or choose Enter and type in another parameter value along the
cutline.
7. After you specify the location along the cutline, choose a command from the AXIS DEF TYPE menu to
indicate the tool’s orientation at the specified point.
8. Choose Add from the AXIS DEF menu and repeat Steps 4 through 7 for every point at which you want to
define the tool axis orientation, then choose Done Sel.
You can specify Drive Surfaces and apply them to axis definitions along cutlines, as you do for axis definitions
along edges.
Note: Because two different algorithms exist for interpolating axis definitions using Points on Surface, you
must choose either Along Cutline or a combination of Edge and Location. If you want to change from one
algorithm to the other, you must first remove all axis definitions of the current type.
Pro/NC 133
To Change Axis Definitions
The following options in the AXIS DEF menu allow you to manipulate existing Points on Surface axis
definitions:
· Remove—Delete an existing axis definition.
· Redefine—Redefine an existing axis definition.
· Show—Display all previously defined axis definitions.
If you choose Remove, Redefine, or Show from the AXIS DEF menu, you will get a namelist menu of all the
existing axis definitions (for example, AXIS DEF BY EDGE #1, DRIVE SURFACES #1, and so on). As you
place the cursor over a name in the menu, the complete name appears at the bottom of the message window
(this is useful if the name is too long to fit inside the menu), and the system highlights the corresponding
geometry on the screen. Axis definitions appear as magenta arrows. Cutlines and chains of edges appear in
magenta. Drive surfaces appear in cyan, with the corresponding edges or cutlines that reference them
highlighted in magenta.
If you choose Redefine and select an axis definition along the cutline, the AXIS DEF REFS menu appears with
the following options:
· Location—Select another point along the cutline and enter the new parameter value.
· Orientation—Change the tool axis orientation by using the AXIS DEF TYPE menu options.
If you choose Redefine and select a Drive Surface definition, the DRV SRF REFS menu appears with the
following options:
· Surfaces—Reselect the drive surfaces.
· Axis Def Set—Modify the list of axis definitions that reference these drive surfaces. A checkmark menu
appears with all the applicable axis definitions; select additional definitions by checking them off, or
unselect some of the ones currently selected. Choose Done Sel when you are finished.
To Define the Axis Orientation Using Pivot Point

SETUP menu.
2. Choose Pivot Pnt from the AXIS OPT menu.
3. The PIVOT PNT menu appears with the following options:
- Define—Brings up the CR/SEL PVT menu to allow you to select or create a datum point to serve as a
pivot point.
- Remove—Delete the existing pivot point.
- Show—Display the existing pivot point.
To Define the Axis Orientation Using Pivot Curve

SETUP menu.
2. Choose Pivot Curve from the AXIS OPT menu.
3. The PIVOT CRV menu appears with the options:
- Define—Brings up the CHAIN menu to let you select entities to define the pivot curve. All entities of
the pivot curve must be tangent to each other.
- Remove—Delete the existing pivot curve.
- Show—Display the existing pivot curve.
- Adjust Tool—(Appears for Cut Line machining only.) Adjust the tool axis positions along the pivot
curve by specifying synchronization points (synch points). Click See Also for details.
134 Pro/NC
To Specify Synch Points Along Pivot Curve
1. Define the pivot curve.
2. Choose Adjust Tool.
3. Check off the Preview option, if desired. If this option is checked off, the system will display the tool axis
positions as you add synch points.
4. Choose Set Axis. The SYNCH menu appears with the following options:
- Add—Select pairs of synch points along the pivot curve and the cutlines.
- Remove—Remove a pair of synch points.
- Show—Show the pairs of synch points currently defined and the corresponding tool axis positions in
cyan. You can either display them in turn by using the Next and Previous options, or use Show All.
- Redefine—Modify a pair of synch points. Select a synch line (that is, tool axis position) to change, by
selecting anywhere on the line. Then specify new locations for the synch points, similar to when adding
a new pair.
5. Choose Add. The system highlights the pivot curve.
6. Select a point on the pivot curve.
7. The system highlights a cutline and prompts you to select a point on that cutline. If the Preview option is
on, the tool axis position appears as a red line after you select a point on the cutline.
8. Specify other pairs of synch points by repeating the two steps above. Choose Done Sel when finished.
About Volume Milling

A Volume milling NC sequence removes the material inside a Milling Volume slice-by-slice. All slices are
parallel to the retract plane; the axial depth of cut (slice depth) is defined by the combination of STEP_DEPTH
and WALL_SCALLOP_HGT parameters. The first slice is generated at slice depth below the top of the mill
volume. In case the mill volume extends above the top of the workpiece, the first slice is generated at slice
depth below the top of the workpiece, to avoid air machining. All planar surfaces inside the volume that are
normal to the Z-axis of the NC Sequence coordinate system produce additional slices across the whole volume;
use the MIN_STEP_DEPTH parameter to control the minimum acceptable distance between slices. The step-
over distance inside a slice can be controlled by the following parameters: STEP_OVER, NUMBER_PASSES,
BOTTOM_SCALLOP_HGT, and STEPOVER_ADJUST.
Note: If a nonzero PROF_STOCK_ALLOW is specified (or a BOTTOM_STOCK_ALLOW value is
supplied), it will affect the depth of the last slice and of all the slices over horizontal surfaces.
The following graphic illustrates the depth of the first slice for Volume milling.
4
1
5
2
2
1 First slice is at slice depth below the top of mill volume

2 Mill volume
3 No workpiece geometry
4 First slice is at slice depth below the top of the workpiece
Pro/NC 135
5 Workpiece
Some typical applications for Volume milling are:

· Facing down the workpiece
· General material removal on the outside of the workpiece
· Rough milling of a vertical slot or cut, or a blind slot with islands
· Pocket finishing by using the ROUGH_OPTION parameter value PROF_ONLY
To Create a Volume Milling NC Sequence

1. Choose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu. You must be in a Mill or Mill/Turn workcell.
2. Choose Volume and Done from the MILL SEQ menu.
3. Choose Seq Setup from the NC SEQUENCE menu.
4. In addition to the common options, available for all the NC sequence types, the SEQ SETUP menu will
contain the following specific options:
- Volume—Create or select the milling volume.
- Window—Create or select a Mill Window. This option and Volume are mutually exclusive. If you
check off the Window option, then the checkmark next to the Volume option is automatically turned
off, and the DEFINE WIND menu appears with the following options:
Select Wind—Select a predefined Mill Window from a namelist menu.
Redef Wind—Redefine the Mill Window used by the NC sequence. This option is only available if
the window is created or selected.
Create Wind—Create a new Mill Window.
- ScallopSrf—Select surfaces that will be excluded from scallop computation if
WALL_SCALLOP_HGT or BOTTOM_SCALLOP_HGT is specified.
- Excld Surfs—Specify volume surfaces to exclude from profiling. If Mill Window is used, select
surfaces from the reference part.
- Top Surfaces—Explicitly define the "top" surfaces, that is, surfaces of a mill volume that can be
penetrated by the tool when creating the tool path. This option has to be used only if some of the top
surfaces of the volume are not parallel to the retract plane. If Mill Window is used, this option is not
available. The window start plane will be used as the top surface.
- Appr Walls—Select side surfaces of a mill volume, or sides of the Mill Window, that can be violated
during tool approach and exit.
- Build Cut—Access the Build Cut functionality.
The required options are checked off automatically. Select additional options, if desired, and choose Done.
The system will start the user interface for all selected options in turn.
5. Choose Play Path to verify the tool path automatically generated by the system. If not satisfied, you can
either modify the parameters, or use the Customize functionality to adjust the tool path.
6. Choose Done Seq or Next Seq from the NC SEQUENCE menu when satisfied.
Example: Volume Milling

The following illustration shows a Mill Volume and corresponding tool path for a Volume NC sequence.
136 Pro/NC
Specifying Approach Walls
For Volume milling, the tool is supposed to always be inside the milling volume. In some cases, however, you
may want to perform cutting by the side of the tool only, that is, to make tool plunge outside the material. The
Appr Walls option in the SEQ SETUP menu allows you to select side surfaces of a mill volume that can be
violated during tool approach and exit. The user interface for selecting these surfaces is the same as for other
types of surface selection in Milling.
If a Mill Window is used, then you will be prompted to select entities from the window curve (that is, the
window outline in the start plane) rather than surfaces from the Mill Volume. Selected entities will be used as
sides of the tool approach.
If Approach Walls have been defined, the system will attempt to make an approach and exit for every slice
through these walls and plunge outside material, as shown in the following illustration. The length of
approach/exit extension is defined by the APPR_EXIT_EXT parameter plus tool radius.
If the Approach Walls have been specified, the datum point, axis, or sketch used for approach or exit in Build
Cut can be outside the milling volume.
Profiling passes will not be created along the surfaces selected as Approach Walls.
The following illustration shows specifying Approach Walls for Volume milling.
1 Select this wall of the volume using the Appr Walls option
2 APPR_EXIT_EXT + CUTTER/DIAM / 2
High Speed Machining

High speed machining (both roughing and profiling) is available for 2.5-axis Volume sequences.
To perform high speed roughing in Volume milling, set the ROUGH_OPTION parameter to ROUGH_ONLY
and SCAN_TYPE to CONSTANT_LOAD. High speed roughing is based on the following principles:
· Constant cutting condition
· Constant chip load
· Approach from outside material
· Continuous tool engagement
· Minimization of sudden tool direction changes
· Reduction of repositioning moves
Pro/NC 137
To perform high speed profiling in Volume milling, set the ROUGH_OPTION parameter to PROF_ONLY and
SCAN_TYPE to CONSTANT_LOAD. High speed profiling is based on the following principles:
· Continuous tool engagement
· Minimization of sudden tool direction changes
· Reduction of repositioning moves
· User-specified minimum radius parameter for concave corners (the CORNER_ROUND_RADIUS
parameter)
· Entry and exit moves using an arc or helical move
About Automatic Cut Motions

The following Automatic Cut motion types are available for Volume, Local, and Profile milling:
· Automatic (Default)—Use all the slices generated by the system.
· Upto Depth—Use slices up to a certain depth only.
· From-To Depth—Use slices in a certain range of depths.
· Slice/Slice—Generate Automatic Cut motions by specifying depth of each slice.
The first three options produce a single Automatic Cut motion each, no matter how many slices are generated.
In Slice/Slice, each slice represents a separate Automatic Cut motion. You can use more than one option per an
NC sequence; every time a new Automatic Cut motion will be added.
138 Pro/NC
Example: Automatic Cut Motion Types
The following illustration shows Automatic Cut motion types for Volume, Local, and Profile milling.
2 3
6
5
4 7
9
8
10
11
12 13
1 Depth
2 Automatic (default)
3 Upto depth
4 From depth
5 First slice
6 First depth
7 Second slice
8 To Depth
9 Second depth
10 Third slice
11 Third depth (select bottom plane)
12 From-To depth
13 Slice/Slice
Pro/NC 139
To Create an Automatic (Default) Cut Motion
This is a default Automatic Cut motion: it includes all the slices automatically generated by the system. The
number and depths of the slices are defined by the manufacturing parameters. When you choose Automatic, the
following options are available:
· Parameters—Modify manufacturing parameters for the current cut motion.
· Build Cut—Add or remove slices and specify approach and exit motions for each slice in the cut motion.
Also allows you to perform region-by-region milling.
· Play Cut—Show the cut motion as it is currently defined.
· Info—Brings up the INFO ITEMS menu which provides the following information:
- Cut Motion—Displays the feature ID of the current cut motion and the cut motion parameters in the
INFO window.
- NC Sequence—Displays feature info for the current NC sequence (feature ID, NC sequence type,
reference coordinate systems, parameters) in the INFO window.
- Tool—Displays the tool ID, type, and parameters in the Information Window; a subwindow also
appears, displaying the tool.
When satisfied with the cut motion, choose Done.
To Create an Upto Depth Cut Motion

This Automatic Cut motion will include slices from the system start and up to a specified depth. The same
options will be available as for the default Automatic Cut motion, but you also have to specify the final depth.
To Create a From-To Depth Cut Motion

This Automatic Cut motion will include slices in a specified range of depths. The same options will be available
as for the default Automatic Cut motion, but you also have to specify the "From" and "To" depths.
To Create a Slice-By-Slice Cut Motion

This option allows you to explicitly specify the depth of each slice. Note that each slice will represent a separate
Automatic Cut motion.
1. Choose Slice/Slice and Done.
2. Choose Depth and specify the depth of the slice. You can also use the Parameters option to modify
parameters for this particular slice.
3. Choose Play Cut to display the slice.
Note: If at this point you choose Depth again, you will modify the depth of the current slice, not create a
new one.
4. Choose Done when satisfied with the current slice.
5. Choose Next Slice from the NEXT SLICED menu, and repeat steps 2 through 4 to define another slice. The
Play Cut option always shows the current slice only.
6. When the desired number of slices has been generated, choose Done/Return from the NEXT SLICED menu.
The Build Slice option, which replaces the Build Cut option for this cut motion type, allows you to define
approach and exit motions for the current slice.
To Specify Depth
Depending on the cut motion type, you have to determine:
· For Upto Depth motion—the depth of the last slice.
· For From-To Depth motion: From Depth—the depth of the first slice, To Depth—the depth of the last
slice.
140 Pro/NC
· For Slice/Slice motion—individual depth of each slice.
The following options are available for specifying slice depth:
· Specify Plane—Select a planar surface or datum plane parallel to the retract plane. You will also have an
option to make a datum plane "on the fly".
· Z Depth—Enter depth as a Z-axis coordinate with respect to the NC Sequence coordinate system.
The Play Cut option allows you to display the cut motion as it is currently defined. You can then specify
different depth value(s) if desired.
The Build Cut Functionality

The Build Cut option allows you to add or remove slices and specify approach and exit motions for each slice
in the cut motion. It also allows you to specify whether you want to machine across the whole milling volume at
a particular Z depth, or to completely machine a pocket before going to the next one (region-by-region milling).
This functionality is available for Automatic, Upto Depth, and From-To Depth cut motion types, for Volume
and Local milling.
The following illustration shows an example of volume regions.
4
1
1 Top basin
When you choose Build Cut, the BUILD CUT menu appears with the following options:
· By Slice—Slices will be generated by intersecting the whole volume at a particular Z depth.
· By Region—The volume will be automatically broken into regions. Each region will be completely
machined upto depth before going to the next region. Separate approach and exit paths can be specified for
each region.
· Show Slices—Display the slices by marking their corners in cyan. You can either use the Show All option,
all step through the slices using the Next and Previous options.
· Add Slice—Specify depth for a new slice using the Specify Plane and Z Depth options. Use the Update
Slices option after adding slices.
· Remove Slice—Slice boundaries are displayed in cyan. Select a slice to remove by selecting on its
boundary. Use the Update Slices option after removing slices.
· Update Slices—Recalculate the slices after adding or removing a slice.
· Show Regions—(Available only if By Region is checked off.) Show the volume regions by displaying their
critical slices. You can either use the Show All option, or step through the regions using the Next and
Previous options.
· Order Regions—(Available only if By Region is checked off.) Specify order of milling the regions using
the Next Region and Done Order options. You do not have to order all the regions explicitly. The system
will mill those you have ordered first, them mill all the leftover ones in the default order.
· Skip Region—(Available only if By Region is checked off.) Select regions that will not be milled.
Pro/NC 141
· Approach—Specify the approach motions for each slice.
· Exit—Specify the exit motions for each slice.
· Undo—Delete a Build Cut action. A menu with all the actions created so far will appear; select an action to
delete.
· Redo—Redefine a Build Cut action. A menu with all the actions created so far will appear; select an action
to redefine, then respecify the action references (such as depth, sketch).
· Info—Brings up the INFO ITEMS menu.
To Specify Approach and Exit Motions Using Build

Cut
1. Choose Approach (Exit) from the BUILD CUT menu.
2. If By Region is checked off, the APPR EXIT TYPE menu will appear:
- Whole Volume—The approach (exit) motion will apply to all slices in all regions.
- Select Region—The approach (exit) motion will apply to the slices of a selected region only. Select the
region by selecting on the appropriate slice boundary.
3. Select an option from the APPR EXIT OPT menu:
- Datum Point—Create or select a datum point to be used as a start (end) point. The point will be
projected normal to the retract plane on all applicable slices; these projections will be used as a start
(end) point for each slice.
- Axis—Create or select an axis to be used as a start (end) point. The axis can belong either to the
workpiece or to the design model, and must be normal to the retract plane.
- Sketch—Sketch the approach (exit) path for the tool in the XY plane of the NC Sequence coordinate
system. The approach path must finish (and the exit path—start) so that the tool lies completely inside
the area of the cut.
- None—Cancel previous approach (exit) instructions.
Example: Defining Approach and Exit Motions

The following illustration shows defining approach and exit using the Axis option.
1 This axis is selected for approach and exit point
142 Pro/NC
The following illustration shows sketching approach and exit for Build Cut.
1 Approach sketch
2 Exit sketch
About Local Milling

There are three types of Local milling:
· Prev NC Seq—Remove material left after a Volume, Profile, Surface, or another Local milling NC
sequence, usually with a smaller tool. When you create a Local milling NC sequence, you will be prompted
to select a reference NC sequence. The system will then compute the material left by the reference NC
sequence and machine away this material only. After a Volume or Profile NC sequence, you can do region-
by-region milling. If a Surface milling NC sequence is used as a reference sequence, a remainder surface,
representing the leftover material, will be generated for this NC sequence. You can generate this remainder
surface at the time of creating the parent NC sequence by setting the REMAINDER_SURFACE parameter
to YES. The following illustration shows Local milling by reference.
1 2
1 Volume milling performed with a large tool

2 Local milling removes the leftover material
· Corner Edges—Specify corner(s) to clean up by selecting edges. The amount of material to remove will be
calculated by the system based on the value of the CORNER_OFFSET parameter, or the "previous tool
radius", that you supply. The following illustration shows Local milling using Corner Edges.
Pro/NC 143
1 2
1 Select corner
2 This material will be removed
3 Previous radius (CORNER_OFFSET)
· By Prev Tool—Calculates the remainder material on specified surfaces after being machined by a larger
tool; then removes this material by the current (smaller) tool. The previous tool must be a ball end mill. You
can either explicitly select surfaces to be machined, or use a Mill Window for surface selection. After the
system calculates the default tool path, you can select a subset of surfaces to be machined, or customize the
order of machining these surfaces. You can also define various types of approach and exit motions by using
the APPROACH_TYPE and EXIT_TYPE parameters.
Local milling is always performed using a spiral scanning algorithm, therefore, the ROUGH_OPTION and
SCAN_TYPE parameters are inapplicable for this NC sequence type.
If CUT_TYPE is set to UPCUT or CLIMB, one-direction milling will be performed. If CUT_TYPE is NONE
(this value is applicable to Local milling only), the tool will clean up material by moving back and forth, as
shown in the following illustration.
1 2 3
1 UPCUT
2 CLIMB
3 NONE
To Create a Local Milling NC Sequence by

Referencing a Previous NC Sequence
2. Choose Local Mill and Done from the MILL SEQ menu.
3. Choose Prev NC Seq and Done from the LOCAL OPT menu.
- Ref Sequence—Select a reference NC sequence, that is, the NC sequence to clean up after.
- Order—This option can be used to reorder patches of the remainder surface if the reference sequence
is an Isolines Surface Milling NC sequence.
- Check Surfs—Select additional surfaces against which gouge checking will be performed. This option
is applicable only if the reference sequence is a Surface Milling NC sequence.
144 Pro/NC
6. If a Volume, Profile, or Local Mill NC sequence is selected as reference sequence, select an Automatic Cut
motion to be used. Only one cut motion can be selected.
7. If a Surface Milling NC sequence is selected as reference sequence, the LOCAL TYPE menu will appear with
the options:
- CntrSrfLocal—The cut motions will be performed along the u-v surface lines. If the leftover surface
consists of multiple patches, you will have control over the order of machining.
- Cnvnl Local—The cut motions will be parallel to the X-axis of the NC Sequence coordinate system. If
the leftover surface consists of multiple patches, the system will completely machine each of the
patches before going to the next one (similar to SCAN_TYPE TYPE_3 in Straight Cut Surface
milling). The patches will be machined in a default order.
8. If the sequence type is CntrSrfLocal, and the leftover surface consists of multiple patches, you will be able
to reorder them using the Order option in the SEQ SETUP menu. The ORDER PATCH menu will appear
with the options:
- Define Order—Specify the order of machining by using the Next Surface option in the CNTR ORDER
menu and selecting the next surface to machine. Choose Done Order when finished. You do not have
to order all surfaces. Those surfaces that were not explicitly ordered (or defined as skipped, see the next
option) will be machined at the end in some default order.
- Skip Patch—Select surfaces to be omitted from machining.
- Undo Skip—Select a surface previously specified as skipped to restore it in the machining sequence.
- Show—Display the current order of machining the surfaces. The first surface to be machined will be
highlighted. Choose Next from the SHOW ORDER menu to highlight the next surface to be machined.
Choose Done/Return to quit.
To Create a Local Milling NC Sequence Using

Corner Edges
3. Choose Corner Edges and Done from the LOCAL OPT menu.
- Surfaces—Select surfaces to be milled during this NC sequence.
- Corner Edges—Specify corner(s) to clean up.
6. Make sure the CORNER_OFFSET parameter is set to an appropriate value.
7. Selecting Corner Edges from the SEQ REFS menu will bring up the CORNER EDG menu:
- Suggest—Show possible corners based on the surface selection in the previous step. This option is for
information purposes only: the corners to be milled have to be explicitly defined using the Define
option below.
- Define—Define corners by either selecting surfaces that form a corner using the Surfaces option, or
selecting the corner edges themselves using the Edges option.
- Redo—Reselect edges to define a corner.
- Remove—Remove corner definitions:
Pro/NC 145
Remove Single—Allows you to step through the specified corners using the Next and Previous
options. Unselect a corner using the Accept option.
Remove All—Unselects all corners defined so far.
- Show—Show all the currently defined corner edges.
8. After defining the corners, choose Play Path to verify the tool path automatically generated by the system.
If not satisfied, you can either modify the parameters, or use the Customize functionality to adjust the tool
path.
To Create a Local Milling NC Sequence by

Referencing a Previous Tool
3. Choose By Prev Tool and Done from the LOCAL OPT menu.
- Prev Tool—Specify the "previous" (larger) tool, which will be used for calculating the remainder
material. The user interface for specifying the "previous" tool is the same as for specifying the current
tool.
Note: If you perform Local Milling by previous tool immediately after machining with a large tool, the
previous tool is automatically selected by the system; use the Tool option in the SEQ SETUP menu to
specify a smaller current tool.
- Surfaces—Select surfaces to be milled during this NC sequence.
- Window—Create or select a Mill Window. This option and Surfaces are mutually exclusive. If you
use the Window option, then all the surfaces within the specified Mill Window will be selected.
- Check Surfs—Select additional surfaces against which gouge checking will be performed.
- MachiningArea—View the area to be machined. When you select this option, the MACHINE SRFS
menu opens. Click Preview to show the regions that will be machined.
About Surface Milling

Use Surface Milling to mill horizontal or slanted surfaces. The selected surfaces must allow for a continuous
tool path. There are several methods of defining the cut and generating the tool path:
· Straight Cut—Mill the selected surfaces by a series of straight cuts. For 3-Axis NC sequences, you can
also remove material in depth increments.
· From Surface Isolines—Mill the selected surfaces by following the surface u-v lines.
· Cut Line—Mill the selected surfaces by defining the shape of the first, last, and some intermediate cuts.
When the system generates the tool path, it gradually changes the shape of the cuts according to surface
topology.
· Projected Cuts—Mill the selected surfaces by projecting their contours on the retract plane, creating a
"flat" tool path in this plane (using the appropriate scan type), and then projecting this tool path back on the
original surface(s). This method is available for 3-Axis Surface Milling only.
Depending on the selected method, you have to define the cut by specifying appropriate parameters and
geometric references.
146 Pro/NC
When you redefine a Surface Milling NC sequence, you can change the Cut Type (that is, select a different
method of defining the cut and specify the new parameters and references) and produce a different tool path.
Certain manufacturing parameters have different values available for different Cut Types. If you change the Cut
Type and the parameter value that you have previously specified is not available for the new Cut Type, the
system sets this parameter to a value that is the default for the new Cut Type. If, however, a parameter value is
available for both the old and the new Cut Type, the system does not change it. For example, if you redefine
from Cut Line to Straight Cut and the SCAN_TYPE value is TYPE_SPIRAL, the system changes it to
TYPE_1 because TYPE_SPIRAL is not available for Straight Cut. If, however, the SCAN_TYPE value is
TYPE_ONE_DIR, the system retains this value.
To Create a Surface Milling NC Sequence

When you create a Surface Milling NC sequence, you are given a choice of several methods for defining the
cut. Depending on the selected method, the tool path will be different. You can change the Cut Type (that is,
select a different method of defining the cut and specify the new parameters and references) at any time when
you redefine a Surface Milling NC sequence.
1. On the MACHINING menu, click NC Sequence. You must be in a Mill or Mill/Turn workcell.
2. Click Surface Mill. Select 3 Axis, 4 Axis, or 5 Axis if applicable. Click Done.
In addition to the common options, available for all the NC sequence types, the SEQ SETUP menu will
- Surfaces—Select surfaces to be machined.
- Window—Create or select a Mill Window. Appears for 3-Axis NC sequences only. This option and
Surfaces are mutually exclusive. If you use the Window option, then all the surfaces within the
specified Mill Window will be selected.
- Close Loops—Specify loops to close for Window machining. Appears for 3-Axis NC sequences only.
- ScallopSrf—Select surfaces that will be excluded from scallop computation if SCALLOP_HGT is
specified.
- Define Cut—Define the method of surface milling and specify the appropriate parameters.
- Axis Def—Control the orientation of the tool axis. Appears for 4- and 5-axis NC sequences only.
- Approach/Exit—Specify the approach and exit moves.
The required options are selected automatically. Select additional options, if desired, and choose Done. The
system will start the user interface for all selected options in turn.
3. Select the surfaces to be milled (or define a Mill Window).
4. When you start to define the cut, the system opens the Cut Definition dialog box. Specify a method of
defining the cut by selecting one of the following options:
- Straight Cut—Mill the selected surfaces by a series of straight cuts.
- From Surface Isolines—Mill the selected surfaces by following the surface u-v lines.
- Cut Line—Mill the selected surfaces by defining the shape of the first, last, and some intermediate
cuts. When generating other cuts, the system gradually changes their shape to accommodate surface
topology.
- Projected Cuts—Mill the selected surfaces by projecting their contours on the retract plane, creating a
"flat" tool path in this plane (using the appropriate scan type), and then projecting this tool path back on
the original surface(s). This option is available for 3-Axis Surface Milling only.
Depending on the selected method, the system displays the appropriate options in the lower portion of the
Cut Definition dialog box.
5. Select the appropriate options in the Cut Definition dialog box and specify geometric references to define
the cut according to the selected method. Click See Also for details. When satisfied with the cut definition,
click OK to close the Cut Definition dialog box and generate the tool path.
6. On the NC SEQUENCE menu, click Play Path to verify the tool path automatically generated by the
system. Use the Customize functionality, if needed, to adjust the tool path.
Pro/NC 147
7. Click Done Seq or Next Seq when satisfied.
To Define a Cut Using Straight Cut

Use this method to mill surfaces of a relatively simple shape.
1. In the top portion of the Cut Definition dialog box, select Straight Cut.
2. Select an option to define the direction of cuts:
- Relative to X-Axis—The direction of the cuts is defined by an angle from the x-axis of the NC
Sequence coordinate system. The initial value in the Cut Angle text box corresponds to that of the
CUT_ANGLE parameter. You can change the direction by typing a different value.
- By Surface—The cuts are parallel to a plane. Select a planar surface or datum plane.
- By Edge—The cuts are parallel to a straight edge. Select an edge.
3. Click to preview the cut direction.

4. Click , if necessary, to reverse the cut direction.
5. When satisfied with the cut direction, click OK.
Straight Cut Surface Milling

Straight Cut surface milling NC sequences generate the tool path which will:
· Completely machine the selected surface(s). If a surface is not bounded by walls on the outside, the tool will
"straddle", that is, overrun the surface boundary by a half diameter.
· Any inner protrusions, as well as the outer walls extending up from the surface, will be avoided
automatically. The stock allowance, if any, will apply to the side walls as well.
· If a surface is selected from model, any slots or holes on the surface will be "patched": the tool path will be
generated as if they were not there.
· If you want to eliminate negative Z moves of the tool (for example, when machining hard materials), use the
ALLOW_NEG_Z_MOVES parameter. It is applicable for 3-Axis NC sequences only.
· If you want to remove material in depth increments, use the ROUGH_STEP_DEPTH parameter. It is
applicable for 3-Axis NC sequences only.
The following illustration shows handling inner loops and outer walls for Straight Cut surface milling.
1
2
3
5
4
1 Inner slot will be ignored

2 Inner protrusion will be avoided
3 Outer walls will be avoided
5 "Free" outer edges will be straddled
Note: If an inner protrusion is surrounded by a slot, it will not be avoided automatically. Use Check Surfs
to generate the correct tool path.
148 Pro/NC
For 3-Axis Straight Cut milling, you can control the start point and direction of machining the surface by using
a combination of CUT_TYPE, SPINDLE_SENSE, and CUT_DIRECTION parameters (see the following table
). The LACE_OPTION parameter must be set to NO.
Parameter Settings Tool Path
CUT_TYPE CLIMB
SPINDLE_SENSE CW
CUT_DIRECTION STANDARD
CUT_TYPE UPCUT
SPINDLE_SENSE CCW
CUT_TYPE UPCUT
SPINDLE_SENSE CW
CUT_TYPE CLIMB
SPINDLE_SENSE CCW
CUT_TYPE CLIMB
SPINDLE_SENSE CW
CUT_DIRECTION REVERSE
CUT_TYPE UPCUT
SPINDLE_SENSE CCW
CUT_TYPE UPCUT
SPINDLE_SENSE CW
CUT_TYPE CLIMB
SPINDLE_SENSE CCW
You can select any type of end mill, including flat and radius end mills, for Straight Cut surface milling of
convex surfaces. The gouge avoidance will be calculated automatically.
Pro/NC 149
To Define a Cut Using Surface Isolines
Use this method to mill a single surface, or several continuous surfaces. The machining direction is defined by
the natural u-v contour of the surface to be milled. If multiple surfaces are selected, the machining direction is
determined separately for each surface.
1. In the top portion of the Cut Definition dialog box, select From Surface Isolines.
The system displays the names of the surfaces selected for milling in the Surface List list box.
2. Select a surface name in the list box to preview the cut direction.
3. For each selected surface, you are given a choice of two directions, determined by the u-v lines of the
surface. Click , if necessary, to toggle between these directions.
4. If more than one surface is being machined, they will be milled in the same order as they are listed in the list
box. You can reorder the surfaces using the following methods:
- Select a surface name in the list box, then click the Up Arrow and Down Arrow icons to move it up or
down in the list.
- Click to reorder the surfaces by selecting them on the screen.
5. If you click , the CNTR ORDER menu appears with the options:
- Next Surface—Select the first surface to be milled. This option will highlight automatically after each
selection allowing you to select surfaces in the order you want them to be milled.
- Done Order—Select this option when you have specified all the surfaces you want to be milled in a
specific order. You do not have to order all the surfaces selected for milling: when computing the CL
data, the system will mill the ordered surfaces first, and then mill any leftover surfaces.
6. When satisfied with the cut direction and the surface order, click OK.
Isolines Surface Milling

For Surface Milling From Surface Isolines, the machining direction is defined by the natural u-v contour of the
surface to be milled. If the surface to machine is at an angle with the coordinate system axes, you may want to
use the From Surface Isolines option rather than Straight Cut.
Isolines Surface Milling NC sequences generate the tool path which will:
· Completely machine the selected surface(s). If a surface is not bounded by walls on the outside, the tool will
"straddle", that is, overrun the surface boundary by a half diameter.
· Any inner protrusions, as well as the outer walls extending up from the surface, will be avoided
automatically. The stock allowance, if any, will apply to the side walls as well.
· Internal holes and slots will not be "patched". For 3-Axis milling, the tool will move over internal slots or
holes at a constant Z level, plunging or retracting at the lower edge as necessary. For 4- and 5-Axis milling,
the tool will retract at all inner edges. If you don’t want this to happen, use a Mill Surface, or select a
surface from a Mill Volume.
The following illustration shows using a Mill Surface for Isolines Surface Milling.
1 2
150 Pro/NC
1 Select part surface
2 Select a Mill Surface created using Copy and Fill All
If you select more than one surface, the surfaces must allow for a continuous tool path. Each surface will be
machined separately. You will be able to specify the machining direction independently for each of the selected
surfaces. You will also be able to specify the order in which the surfaces will be milled.
The following illustration shows specifying machining direction for multiple surfaces.
1 These surfaces were selected to change machining direction
To Define a Cut Using Cut Lines

Use Cut Line Surface Milling to produce cuts shaped according to the surface topology. This option gives you
more control over the actual shape of the cuts than the From Surface Isolines option.
1. In the top portion of the Cut Definition dialog box, select Cut Line.
The system displays two tabbed pages, Cut Lines and Options, in the lower portion of the Cut Definition
dialog box.
2. Select a Cut Line Style option to define whether you are machining an open or closed loop of surfaces.
3. Add cut lines by clicking the Plus (+) icon in the Setup Cut Lines area of the Cut Lines tabbed page. You
can define cut lines by selecting edges or datum curves, as well as by sketching the cut lines and projecting
on the surfaces to be machined.
Once you define a cut line, its name and type are listed in the list box above the action buttons.
4. To delete a cut line, select it in the list box and click the Minus (-) icon.
5. To redefine a cut line, select it in the list box and click .

6. To reorder cut lines:
- Select a cut line name in the list box, then click the Up Arrow and Down Arrow icons to move it up or
down in the list.
- Click to reorder the cut lines by selecting them on the screen. All the cut lines are highlighted in
cyan. Select the cut line to machine first. You can proceed selecting the cut lines in the order you want
them to be machined, or click Done Sel. The rest of cut lines will be machined in default order.
7. To change the cutting direction, click . The system displays a red arrow to indicate the current cutting
direction. Use the Flip and Okay options to specify the direction.
8. Click OK when satisfied with the cut line definitions.
Pro/NC 151
Cut Line Definition Options in the Cut Definition
Dialog Box
When you select Cut Line as the Cut Type option, the system displays two tabbed pages, Cut Lines and
Options, in the lower portion of the Cut Definition dialog box.
The Cut Lines tabbed page contains the following options:
· Machined Surfaces—Define the cut lines by selecting edges or curves that belong to the surfaces to be
machined.
· Retract Plane—Define the cut lines in the Retract plane.
· Tool Extent—The system will generate a surface feature representing the zone of the selected surfaces that
can be machined using the current tool and parameters. You will then be able to define the cut lines using
the edges of this surface. The surface belongs to the NC sequence. This option is available for 3-Axis
milling only, and it will not be available if a Side Mill tool is used.
· Alternate Surfaces—Select surfaces, other than surfaces to be machined, to be used for defining the cut
lines. Once you select the entities to define the cut lines from these alternate surfaces, these entities will be
projected in the direction normal to the alternate surface on the surfaces to be machined to form the cut
lines. This option is available for 3-Axis milling only.
The Toolpath Method options specify the mechanism for computing the tool motion:
· Automatic—The method is determined automatically.
· Tool Contact—A Cut Line represents the trajectory of the tool contact point.
· Tool Centerline— A Cut Line represents the trajectory of the tool center.
Use the Setup Cut Lines area of the Cut Lines tabbed page to add, remove, redefine, or reorder cut lines.
The proper Cut Line Style option depends on whether you are machining an open or closed loop of surfaces:
· Open Ends—Machine an open surface loop. In this case, the system will expect all cut lines to be open
chains of edges, curves, or sketched entities. You will be able to adjust the ends of the chain if you use
curves or sketched entities to create a cut line.
· Closed Loops—Machine a closed surface loop. In this case, the system will expect all cut lines to be closed
loops of edges or curves. If the cut line is sketched, its projection on the selected surfaces must also form a
closed loop. You will have to specify a start point for the cut motion by selecting on the cut line.
The Options tabbed page contains the following options:
· Auto Inner Cutlines—If this check box is selected, the system will attempt to use edges crossing all the
specified synch lines as inner cut lines.
· Extend Cutlines to Boundary—If this check box is selected, the system will attempt to extend the cut lines
up to the boundary of the surface. Use this functionality when a cut line does not extend the whole length of
the surface selected for machining.
· Tool Center Curve—Calculate Machinable Area surface by based on the tool center locations when
generating the tool path.
The Synchronize Cut Lines area of the Options tabbed page contains the tools for synchronizing cut lines:
· Plus (+) icon—Define the synch lines between the cut lines. Once you add a Synchronizer, its name and
type are listed in the Synchronize Cut Lines list box.
· —Redefine the Synchronizer selected in the Synchronize Cut Lines list box.
· Minus (-) icon—Delete the Synchronizer selected in the Synchronize Cut Lines list box.
· Auto Synchronize—If there are edges crossing all the selected cut lines, the system will attempt to
automatically determine if they should be used as the synch lines. It will highlight all the synch lines when
displaying the intermediate mesh for the tool path. If you are not satisfied with the automatically selected
synch lines, clear the Auto Synchronize check box and select the appropriate synch lines manually, by
using the Plus (+) icon in the Synchronize Cut Lines area of the Options tab.
152 Pro/NC
Cut Line Surface Milling
Use Cut Line Surface Milling to machine a region between open or closed boundaries, called "cut lines". The
"cut lines" that you select or sketch determine the shape of the first and last passes in the tool path; passes will
first mimic the shape of the edge or entity specified as the cut line, then gradually change shape as necessary to
accommodate different surface topology.
Notes:
· You can perform Cut Line Surface Milling in step depth increments by using the OFFSET_INCREMENT
and NUMBER_CUTS parameters.
· You can machine undercuts in a 3-Axis NC sequence using a Side Mill tool. The gouge avoidance for the
entire tool with respect to cut surfaces will be calculated automatically. The retract motions generated by
the system will be checked for gouging, with problem areas highlighted. Specify appropriate Approach and
Exit motions if gouging is detected.
Example: Cut Line Machining

The following illustration shows Cut Line machining with Open Ends cut lines.
1 2 3
1 Select this chain as the end cut line

2 Select this chain as the start cut line
Pro/NC 153
The following illustration shows Cut Line machining with Closed Loops cut lines.
1
2 3
1 part to machine
2 Select this contour as the start cut line (use Bndry Chain)
3 Select this contour as the end cut line (use Bndry Chain)
4 Select all the top surfaces
In some cases, when the surface topology changes abruptly at some point between the start and end cut lines,
you may need to specify intermediate cut lines. In some cases, inner cut lines can also be selected automatically
by using the Auto Inner Cutlines option.
The following illustration shows specifying intermediate cut lines.
1 2
1 End cut line

2 Inner cut lines
3 Start cut line
154 Pro/NC
To Add a Cut Line
1. In the Setup Cut Lines area, on the Cut Lines tabbed page of the Cut Definition dialog box, select a Cut
Line Style option (Open Ends or Closed Loops) and click Add.
The Add/Redefine Cutline dialog box opens.
2. Select a Cut Line Type option:
- From Edges—Define the cut line by selecting edges either on the surfaces selected for milling, or on
some other surfaces (specified using the Tool Extent or the Alternate Surfaces option).
- From Curves—Define the cut line by selecting preexisting datum curves.
- Projected—Sketch the cut lines in the retract plane (or specify another sketching plane). The system
will project the sketched cut lines onto the surfaces to be machined. The projection direction is parallel
to the z-axis of the NC Sequence coordinate system.
- From Surfaces—Define the cut lines using surface boundaries. You will be prompted to select the
surfaces using the SELECT SRFS menu options and then enter the offset value for the surface
boundaries. This option appears for 4- and 5-Axis machining only.
3. Depending on the selected Cut Line Type option, select the edges, datum curves, surfaces, or sketch the cut
lines.
4. For Open Ends cut lines, if you use From Curves or Projected, you can adjust the endpoints of the cut line
by clicking Specify Ends.
5. For Closed Loops cut lines, click the Select Start Point button and select on the cut line to specify the start
point for machining. If you select somewhere along a cut line entity (other than at an endpoint), you will be
prompted to specify the placement of the point as a length ratio along the selected entity. The options in the
ENTER VAL menu are:
- 0.000000 (corresponding to the first endpoint)
- 1.000000 (corresponding to the second endpoint)
- a value corresponding to the selected point
- Enter, which allows you to enter any length ratio along the entity
6. Click Preview to verify the cut line.
7. When satisfied, click OK. The system lists the name and the type of the newly defined cut line in the list
box in the Setup Cut Lines area on the Cut Lines tabbed page of the Cut Definition dialog box.
Defining a Cut Line From Edges

One of the methods of defining a cut line is using the edges of either the surfaces selected for milling, or of
some other surfaces (specified using the Tool Extent or the Alternate Surfaces option).
When you define a cut line From Edges, the CHAIN menu appears, providing the following methods of edge
selection:
· One By One—Select individual edges from the specified surfaces.
· Tangnt Chain—Select a chain of tangent edges by selecting an edge that is a part of a tangent chain. The
edge must belong to the specified surfaces.
· Bndry Chain—Select boundaries of the specified surfaces. When you choose this option, the whole
boundary of the specified surfaces highlights in cyan. The CHAIN OPT menu appears with the following
options:
- Select All—Include all the highlighted edges.
- From-To—Select a start vertex (curve end), then an end vertex (curve end). One of the chains
connecting these vertices highlights. Specify which chain you want to include using the Next and
Accept options.
· Surf Chain—Select a chain of edges that belong to the same surface. You will be prompted to select a
surface, and then specify which edges to include using either the Select All or From-To options in the
CHAIN OPT menu.
· Intent Chain—Select an edge. Based on this selection and the design intent criteria, the system selects a
Pro/NC 155
chain of edges.
The Unselect option in the CHAIN menu allows you to cancel the previous set of selections.
To Adjust Ends of a Cut Line

For Open Ends cut lines, if you create them as From Curves or Projected, you may need to adjust the ends of
the cut line to make it meet an edge correctly, especially for 4- and 5-Axis machining.
1. Click Specify Ends.
2. Use the following commands on the CUT ENDS menu:
- Start—Specify the end condition for the beginning of the cut motion.
- End—Specify the end condition for the end of the cut motion.
3. Use the following commands on the CUT START or the CUT END menu:
- On—Use the default start point or end point for the cut motion.
- Specify—Manually relocate the start point or end point for the cut motion. You can move the mouse
and extend the starting segment, displayed in green. When you select a new location for the point, use
the commands on the END DIM TYPE menu (Ext Length, Offset Plane, or Offset Csys) to specify the
dimension type for the end.
4. When satisfied, click Done/Return on the CUT ENDS menu.
To Synchronize Cut Lines

You can customize synchronization between the cut lines (u-lines) by specifying synch lines (v-lines). If no
synch lines are specified, the points on u-lines are matched according to the length ratio. If there are edges
crossing all the selected cut lines, the system will attempt to automatically determine if they should be used as
the synch lines. It will highlight all the synch lines when displaying the intermediate mesh for the tool path. If
you are not satisfied with the automatically selected synch lines, clear the Auto Synchronize check box on the
Options tab of the Cut Definition dialog box and select the appropriate synch lines manually, as described
below.
1. Go to the Options tab of the Cut Definition dialog box and click the Plus (+) icon in the Synchronize Cut
Lines area.
The Synchronization dialog box opens.
2. Select an option to define synch lines:
- From Edges—Select edges to be used as a synch line.
- From Curves—Select preexisting datum curves to be used as a synch line.
- Projected—Sketch a synch line in the retract plane (or specify another sketching plane). The system
will project the sketched synch line onto the surfaces to be machined. The projection direction is
parallel to the z-axis of the NC Sequence coordinate system.
- From Points—Specify synchronization points on the cut lines. Each cut line is in turn highlighted in
red. Select a location on the cut line to place a synch point. Repeat for all the other cut lines. The
system will create the synch line by connecting the synch points with straight linear segments.
3. Click OK. The system lists the name and the type of the newly defined synch line in the list box in the
Synchronize Cut Lines list box on the Options tab of the Cut Definition dialog box.
Example: Specifying Synch Lines

Select the edges shown below as synch lines. It is recommended to specify synch lines, rather than synch points,
when a straight line connecting the synch points would not correspond to the natural flow of surfaces being
machined.
156 Pro/NC
To Define a Cut Using Projected Cuts
Use Projected Cuts Surface Milling when you need more control over the way you scan the surfaces (for
example, if you need to generate a spiral tool path).
1. In the top portion of the Cut Definition dialog box, select Projected Cuts.
The system redisplays the lower portion of the Cut Definition dialog box to contain the Plus (+) and
Minus (-) icons and a list box for defining the contours to be machined, as well as the following options for
defining the contour offsets:
- On—The contour to be machined will coincide with the projected contour of the selected surfaces.
- Left—The contour to be machined will be constructed by offsetting the projected contour to the inside
by the offset value (Cutter_Diameter/2 plus the Boundary Offset Value).
- Right—The contour to be machined will be constructed by offsetting the projected contour to the
outside by the offset value (Cutter_Diameter/2 plus the Boundary Offset Value).
- Boundary Offset Value—The default offset is Cutter_Diameter/2. You can specify additional offset
by typing a value in the Boundary Offset Value text box.
2. Click the Plus (+) icon to add the projected contours.
The ADD CONTRS menu opens with the following options:
- Def Contrs—Select the contours to machine either by using the Select option and selecting the
contours (all selectable contours are highlighted in cyan), or using the Select All option. Once a contour
is selected, it is projected to the retract plane (the projected contour is displayed in magenta).
- Def Offsets—If you select this option, you can define the contour offsets by scrolling through all the
contours being created.
The CNTR OFFSET menu opens. Use the Next and Prev commands to scroll through the contours.
Other commands on the CNTR OFFSET menu correspond to the options for specifying offset in the Cut
Definition dialog box. As you choose Next and Prev, the current projected contour is highlighted in
cyan (instead of magenta). As you choose Left, Right, or change offset, the projection is redisplayed
to reflect the change.
Once you define a contour, its name and offset are listed in the list box.
3. To delete a contour, select it in the list box and click the Minus (-) icon.
4. To redefine the offset of a contour, select it in the list box and use the On, Left, Right, and Boundary
Offset Value options to change the offset.
5. When you have defined all the contours, click OK.
Pro/NC 157
Example: Surface Milling by Projecting Tool Path
The following illustration shows surface milling using projected tool path.
1 2
1 Flat tool path pattern in retract plane

2 Tool path projected back onto the surfaces
To Create an Automatic (Default) Cut Motion

This Automatic Cut motion will consist of a series of interconnected parallel passes, resulting from cross-
sectioning the selected surface(s) with a set of datum planes. The distance between the sectioning planes is
determined by the combination of the STEP_OVER and SCALLOP_HGT parameters, the direction—by the
CUT_ANGLE parameter. The tool will follow along the intersection of the surface with a datum plane;
automatic gouge avoidance will be taken into account, if necessary. After making one pass, the tool will
automatically retract, go to the beginning of the next pass at the retract plane level, plunge and continue.
The following illustration shows the default Automatic Cut motion for Straight Cut surface milling.
When you choose Automatic, the following options are available:

· Parameters—Modify manufacturing parameters for the current cut motion.
· Build Cut—Specify approach and exit motions or an entry point for the cut motion.
· Info—Brings up the INFO ITEMS menu.
When satisfied with the cut motion, choose Done.
The Build Cut option allows you to specify approach and exit motions or entry point for the cut motion. When
you select Approach or Exit, the following options are available:
· Point—Create or select an axis to be used as a start (end) point. The axis can belong either to the workpiece
or to the design model, and must be normal to the retract plane. The approach (exit) path will lie at the depth
of the start (end) of the cut motion.
158 Pro/NC
· Sketch—Sketch the approach (exit) path for the tool in the XY-plane of the Operation coordinate system.
The path will lie at the retract plane level. The tool will plunge at the end of the approach path and move in
a straight horizontal line to the start of the cut motion. At the end of the cut motion, the tool will move in a
straight horizontal line to the start of the sketched exit path, retract to the retract plane level, and follow the
exit motion. Use the Tool Motion functionality to specify other types of approach and exit motions.
· None—Cancel previous approach (exit) instructions.
The Entry Point option allows you to select the corner to start machining from. The corners available as an
entry point are displayed, with one of them highlighted. Select the corner desired using Next, Previous, and
Accept.
To Create a Pass-By-Pass Cut Motion

This option allows you to explicitly specify each pass by creating a cross-sectioning datum plane. The tool will
follow along the intersection of the surface with the datum plane; automatic gouge avoidance will be taken into
account, if necessary. Note that each pass will represent a separate Automatic Cut motion.
1. Choose Pass/Pass and Done.
2. Choose Plane and select or create a datum plane.
3. Choose Play Cut to display the pass.
Note: If at this point you choose Plane again, you will modify the current pass, not create a new one.
4. Choose Done when satisfied with the current pass.
5. Choose Next Pass from the NEXT SLICED menu, and repeat steps 2 through 4 to define another pass. The
Play Cut option always shows the current pass only.
6. When the desired number of passes has been generated, choose Done/Return from the NEXT SLICED
menu.
The passes can later be connected using the Tool Motion functionality.
Example: Pass-By-Pass Automatic Cut Motions

The following illustration shows pass-by-pass Automatic Cut motions for Straight Cut surface milling.
1
2
3 4
1 Plane 3
2 Cut motion 3
3 Plane 1
4 Cut motion 1
To Specify Entry and Exit Moves

You can define automatic Entry and Exit moves for all types of Surface Milling NC sequences and for Swarf
Milling.
1. When defining a Surface or Swarf milling NC sequence, select the Approach/Exit checkbox on the SEQ
SETUP menu and click Done.
The Entry/Exit Move dialog box opens.
2. Specify the Entry moves for First Cut and Each Cut, and Exit moves for Each Cut and Last Cut, by
Pro/NC 159
selecting options from respective drop-down lists. Click See Also for details. If you select
CUSTOM_ENTRY or CUSTOM_EXIT, you can define Main, First Alternate, and Second Alternate
custom strategies for this move using the tabbed pages in the right half of the Entry/Exit Move dialog box.
3. You can save your Entry and Exit strategies by clicking the Save icon at the top of the Entry/Exit Move
dialog box. By default, the file is saved in your working directory with the .apx extension. When defining
Entry and Exit moves for a different NC sequence, you can retrieve a previously saved strategy file by
clicking the Open icon at the top of the Entry/Exit Move dialog box.
4. When satisfied with your Entry and Exit move definitions, click OK.
The Entry/Exit Move Dialog Box

The Entry/Exit Move dialog box contains two group boxes:
· Entry/Exit Type—Lets you select standard strategies for entry and exit. You can specify different entry
strategies for
· Custom Strategies—Lets you define custom strategies for entry and exit.
Above the group boxes there are the Open and Save icons, for saving and retrieving your Entry and Exit
strategies. The OK and Cancel buttons are located below the group boxes.
The Entry/Exit Type group box contains the following drop-down lists.
Under Cut Entry Move:
· First Cut—Select an entry move type for the first cut (approach move). The options are:
- NONE—No entry move.
- CUSTOM_ENTRY—Enter using the custom strategies, specified in the Custom Strategies group
box for this cut type. If the Main strategy causes gouging, then the system uses the First Alternate
strategy, and so on. If all the custom strategies cause gouging, then no entry move is created.
- AUTOMATIC—The system automatically determines the entry move type based on the surrounding
geometry of the feature being machined. The entry moves are automatically degouged. If the first
selected move type gouges the part, the system tries the next logical move type. If all the move types
gouge the part, then no entry move is created.
- LINE_TANGENT—The tool enters in a line tangent to the cut. The length of the line is defined by the
- HELIX—The tool enters along a helix. The geometry of the helix is defined by the
HELICAL_DIAMETER and RAMP_ANGLE parameters.
- RAMP—The tool enters at an angle. The move is defined by the RAMP_ANGLE and CLEAR_DIST
parameters.
- ARC_ENTRY—The tool enters along a horizontal arc tangent to the cut (that is, the arc is located in a
plane parallel to the XY plane of the NC Sequence coordinate system). The radius of the arc is defined
by the LEAD_RADIUS parameter. The angle of the arc is 180 degrees.
- ARC_TANGENT—The tool enters along a vertical arc tangent to the cut (that is, the arc is located in
a plane tangent to the cut and normal to the XY plane of the NC Sequence coordinate system). The
move is defined by the LEAD_RADIUS and ENTRY_ANGLE parameters.
- LEAD_IN—The tool leads into the cut. The move is defined by the TANGENT_LEAD_STEP,
NORMAL_LEAD_STEP, LEAD_RADIUS, and ENTRY_ANGLE parameters.
· Each Cut—Select an entry move type for each intermediate cut. The options are:
- NONE—No entry move.
- CUSTOM_ENTRY—Enter using the custom strategies, specified in the Custom Strategies group
box for this cut type. If the Main strategy causes gouging, then the system uses the First Alternate
strategy, and so on. If all the custom strategies cause gouging, then no entry move is created.
- AUTOMATIC—The system automatically determines the entry move type based on the surrounding
geometry of the feature being machined. The entry moves are automatically degouged. If the first
160 Pro/NC
gouge the part, then no entry move is created.
- LINE_TANGENT—The tool enters in a line tangent to the cut. The length of the line is defined by the
- HELIX—The tool enters along a helix. The geometry of the helix is defined by the
HELICAL_DIAMETER and RAMP_ANGLE parameters.
- ARC_ENTRY—The tool enters along a horizontal arc tangent to the cut (that is, the arc is located in a
- ARC_TANGENT—The tool enters along a vertical arc tangent to the cut (that is, the arc is located in
a plane tangent to the cut and normal to the XY plane of the NC Sequence coordinate system). The
move is defined by the LEAD_RADIUS and ENTRY_ANGLE parameters.
- LEAD_IN—The tool leads into the cut. The move is defined by the TANGENT_LEAD_STEP,
NORMAL_LEAD_STEP, LEAD_RADIUS, and ENTRY_ANGLE parameters.
Under Cut Exit Move:
· Each Cut—Select an exit move type for each intermediate cut. The options are:
- NONE—No exit move.
- CUSTOM_EXIT—Exit using the custom strategies, specified in the Custom Strategies group box for
this cut type. If the Main strategy causes gouging, then the system uses the First Alternate strategy,
and so on. If all the custom strategies cause gouging, then no exit move is created.
- AUTOMATIC—The system automatically determines the exit move type based on the surrounding
geometry of the feature being machined. The exit moves are automatically degouged. If the first
gouge the part, then no exit move is created.
- LINE_TANGENT—The tool exits in a line tangent to the cut. The length of the line is defined by the
- HELIX—The tool exits along a helix. The geometry of the helix is defined by the
HELICAL_DIAMETER, RAMP_ANGLE, and PULLOUT_DIST parameters. The tool leaves the
surface in a helical motion at CUT_SPEED until it reaches PULLOUT_DIST, then it retracts at
RETRACT_SPEED. If you want the tool to exit completely by a helical motion, set the configuration
option use_old_helical_exit to yes (the default is no).
- ARC_EXIT—The tool exits along a horizontal arc tangent to the cut (that is, the arc is located in a
- ARC_TANGENT—The tool exits along a vertical arc tangent to the cut (that is, the arc is located in a
plane tangent to the cut and normal to the XY plane of the NC Sequence coordinate system). The move
is defined by the LEAD_RADIUS and EXIT_ANGLE parameters.
- LEAD_OUT—The tool leads out of the cut. The move is defined by the TANGENT_LEAD_STEP,
NORMAL_LEAD_STEP, LEAD_RADIUS, and EXIT_ANGLE parameters.
· Last Cut— Select an exit move type for the last cut (exit move). The options are:
- NONE—No exit move.
- CUSTOM_EXIT—Exit using the custom strategies, specified in the Custom Strategies group box for
this cut type. If the Main strategy causes gouging, then the system uses the First Alternate strategy,
and so on. If all the custom strategies cause gouging, then no exit move is created.
- AUTOMATIC—The system automatically determines the exit move type based on the surrounding
geometry of the feature being machined. The exit moves are automatically degouged. If the first
gouge the part, then no exit move is created.
- LINE_TANGENT—The tool exits in a line tangent to the cut. The length of the line is defined by the
- HELIX—The tool exits along a helix. The geometry of the helix is defined by the
HELICAL_DIAMETER, RAMP_ANGLE, and PULLOUT_DIST parameters. The tool leaves the
Pro/NC 161
surface in a helical motion at CUT_SPEED until it reaches PULLOUT_DIST, then it retracts at
RETRACT_SPEED. If you want the tool to exit completely by a helical motion, set the configuration
option use_old_helical_exit to yes (the default is no).
- ARC_EXIT—The tool exits along a horizontal arc tangent to the cut (that is, the arc is located in a
- ARC_TANGENT—The tool exits along a vertical arc tangent to the cut (that is, the arc is located in a
plane tangent to the cut and normal to the XY plane of the NC Sequence coordinate system). The move
is defined by the LEAD_RADIUS and EXIT_ANGLE parameters.
- LEAD_OUT—The tool leads out of the cut. The move is defined by the TANGENT_LEAD_STEP,
NORMAL_LEAD_STEP, LEAD_RADIUS, and EXIT_ANGLE parameters.
The Custom Strategies group box contains three tabbed pages, Main, First Alternate, and Second Alternate,
for defining the custom strategies for each cut type.
To Define Custom Entry and Exit Strategies

You can define Main, First Alternate, and Second Alternate custom strategies for any cut using the tabbed
pages in the right half of the Entry/Exit Move dialog box.
Note: You can only define custom strategies for a cut if you have selected CUSTOM_ENTRY or
CUSTOM_EXIT for this cut type in the Entry/Exit Type group box in the left half of the Entry/Exit Move
dialog box.
1. Select the text box next to the appropriate cut type (for example, First Cut) on the Main, First Alternate,
or Second Alternate tabbed page. Click Change.
The A/E Strategies dialog box opens.
2. To define a new strategy, click New.
The system displays the default strategy name, such as strategy 1, in the Name text box in the
Strategy Definition group box. You can type a different name.
3. Build the custom strategy by selecting a segment type from the Type drop-down list in the Segment
Definition group box, specifying the appropriate parameter values, and clicking Insert. The following
segment types are available:
- Helix—The tool moves along a helix. You have to specify the following parameters: Radius, Ramp
Angle, Height, and Direction (Left or Right).
- Line—The tool makes a linear move. You have to specify the following parameters: Length and
Slope.
- Arc—The tool moves along an arc. You have to specify the following parameters: Radius and Angle.
4. As you insert segments, their names are displayed in appropriate order in the list box in the Strategy
Definition group box. If you select a segment name in the list box, the segment definition is displayed in the
Segment Definition group box below. You can:
- Change the segment definition. To do this, change the segment type or parameter values and click again
on the selected segment name in the list box.
- Insert another segment before the selected one by defining the segment type and parameters and
clicking Insert.
- Delete the segment by clicking Remove.
5. The Available Strategies list box at the top of the dialog box lists all the custom strategies defined for this
or any other move type. If you select a strategy name in this list box, the strategy definition is displayed in
the Strategy Definition group box below. You can:
- Change the strategy definition by inserting or removing segments.
- Copy the strategy by clicking Duplicate (the strategy is copied with the default name such as
strategy 1 copy), then change the strategy name and definition as needed.
- Delete the strategy by clicking Delete.
6. When satisfied with the custom strategy definitions, click OK to close the A/E Strategies dialog box and
162 Pro/NC
return to the Entry/Exit Move dialog box.
About Swarf Milling

Swarf Milling is a different type of Surface Milling, which lets you machine a series of surfaces by cutting with
the side of the tool. By default, Swarf Milling produces a slice-by-slice tool path, with the slice shape
corresponding to the 5-axis geometry being machined. You can define other shape for the slices, if desired.
At any point on the tool path, the tool is positioned tangent to the surface being machined. You can change the
default axis definitions, as desired, by specifying a series of axis directions at a number of points selected. The
default axis directions correspond to the machined geometry (the axes follow the boundary edges of the
surfaces) or follow the ruling lines of the surfaces that are ruled. If you want to ignore the ruling lines of the
ruled surfaces, set the IGNORE_RULINGS parameter to YES (the default is NO). You can also choose
between two algorithms for the axis interpolation between the surfaces to be machined by using the
AXIS_DEF_CONTROL parameter.
Swarf Milling supports tapered tools, as well as the regular (cylindrical) ones.
To Create a Swarf Milling NC Sequence

When you create a Swarf Milling NC sequence, you are given a choice of several methods for defining the cut.
Depending on the selected method, the tool path will be different. You can change the Cut Type (that is, select a
different method of defining the cut and specify the new parameters and references) at any time when you
redefine a Swarf Milling NC sequence.
1. On the MACHINING menu, click NC Sequence. You must be in a 5-Axis Mill or Mill/Turn workcell.
2. Click Swarf Mill | Done.
In addition to the common options, available for all the NC sequence types, the SEQ SETUP menu will
- Surfaces—Select surfaces to be machined.
- ScallopSrf—Select surfaces that will be excluded from scallop computation if SCALLOP_HGT is
specified.
- Height—Specify a plane or surface for the tool tip to follow.
- Define Cut—Define the method of surface milling and specify the appropriate parameters.
- Axis Def—Control the orientation of the tool axis.
- Approach/Exit—Specify the approach and exit moves.
3. Select the surfaces to be milled.
4. When you start to define the cut, the system opens the Cut Definition dialog box. Specify a method of
defining the cut by selecting one of the following options:
- Straight Cut—Mill the selected surfaces by a series of straight cuts parallel to the XY plane of the NC
Sequence coordinate system. The cuts are spaced evenly along the z-axis in STEP_DEPTH increments.
- From Surface Isolines—Mill the selected surfaces by following the surface u-v lines. The user
interface is similar to defining the cut for a Surface Milling NC sequence.
- Cut Line—Mill the selected surfaces by defining the shape of the first, last, and some intermediate
cuts. When generating other cuts, the system gradually changes their shape to accommodate surface
topology. The user interface is similar to defining the cut for a Surface Milling NC sequence.
Depending on the selected method, the system displays the appropriate options in the lower portion of the
Cut Definition dialog box.
5. Select the appropriate options in the Cut Definition dialog box and specify geometric references to define
the cut according to the selected method. When satisfied with the cut definition, click OK to close the Cut
Definition dialog box and generate the tool path.
Pro/NC 163
system. Use the Customize functionality, if needed, to adjust the tool path.
About Face Milling

The Face option allows you to face down the workpiece with a flat or radius end mill. You can select a planar
surface, or coplanar surfaces, parallel to the retract plane. All inner contours in the selected faces (holes, slots)
will be automatically excluded. The system will generate the appropriate tool path based on the selected
surface(s).
Using Parameters in Face Milling

You can specify multiple cuts to depth using the STEP_DEPTH and NUMBER_CUTS parameters. The system
will compute the number of cuts according to STEP_DEPTH, compare with NUMBER_CUTS, and use the
greater value. If you want just one cut at full depth, you can set NUMBER_CUTS to 1 and STEP_DEPTH to a
relatively large value (greater than thickness of the stock to be removed).
The following illustration shows facing down the workpiece.
3
4
1 STEP_DEPTH = 10 (greater than part thickness) NUMBER_CUTS = 2

2 Exit motion
3 STEP_OVER
4 Overtravel motions
5 Approach motion
Note: For Assembly machining, or workpiece with no geometry, these parameters will be interpreted
differently: NUMBER_CUTS will determine the amount of slices, and STEP_DEPTH—the offset between
slices, that is, the first slice will be offset from the selected face by
(NUMBER_CUTS-1)*STEP_DEPTH.
The number of cuts per slice is determined in a similar way using the combination of the STEP_OVER and
NUMBER_PASSES parameters. However, if NUMBER_PASSES is set to 1, the STEP_OVER value will be
ignored and only one pass per slice will be made. This is helpful and meaningful only when a large enough tool
is used.
164 Pro/NC
1
2
3
1 APPROACH_DISTANCE + START_OVERTRAVEL + tool radius (for ENTRY_EDGE =

LEADING_EDGE)
2 NUMBER_PASSES = 1
3 EXIT_DISTANCE + END_OVERTRAVEL + tool radius (for CLEARANCE_EDGE = HEEL)
The BOTTOM_STOCK_ALLOW parameter specifies the stock allowance on the surface being faced. The
default, "-", sets the bottom stock allowance to 0.
The tool path can be extended past the selected surface edges using the START_OVERTRAVEL and
END_OVERTRAVEL parameters. The APPROACH_DISTANCE and EXIT_DISTANCE parameters apply to
the first approach into a slice and the last exit from a slice, respectively. The APPROACH_FEED and
EXIT_FEED can be specified for these motions if desired, otherwise, CUT_FEED will be used. All these
parameters are measured with respect to a certain point of the tool, defined by the ENTRY_EDGE and
CLEARANCE_EDGE parameter values, described following.
The following graphic illustrates the approach, exit, and overtravel motions based on the parameter values.
1
2
5
6
7
1 EXIT_DISTANCE + END_OVERTRAVEL
2 START_OVERTRAVEL
3 END_OVERTRAVEL
4 tool
Pro/NC 165
5 END_OVERTRAVEL
6 Reference part (selected face)
7 APPROACH_DISTANCE + START_OVERTRAVEL
8 ENTRY_EDGE = HEEL CLEARANCE_EDGE=LEADING_EDGE
The CLEARANCE_EDGE parameter specifies which point of the tool is to be used for measuring the exit
motions and the overtravel motions when the tool leaves the material:
· HEEL (default)—The heel of the tool.
· CENTER—The center of the tool.
· LEADING_EDGE—The leading edge of the tool.
The ENTRY_EDGE parameter is similarly used to measure the motions where the tool approaches material. It
has the same values as CLEARANCE_EDGE (LEADING_EDGE is the default).
The following illustration shows the overtravel motion depending on CLEARANCE_EDGE.
1
2
3
4 5
6
7
8
9
1 Reference part (selected face)

2 Tool
3 Workpiece
4 CLEARANCE_EDGE = HEEL
5 END_OVERTRAVEL
6 CLEARANCE_EDGE = CENTER
7 END_OVERTRAVEL
8 CLEARANCE_EDGE = LEADING_EDGE
9 END_OVERTRAVEL
The entire part is used to calculate tool clearance. That is, when ENTRY_EDGE is LEADING_EDGE or
CLEARANCE_EDGE is HEEL, the tool is tangent to the entire section of the part (as shown in the following
illustration).
166 Pro/NC
1 2
3
1 Tool
2 Part outline
3 Cut motion
This NC sequence is intended to be used for facing down the workpiece; therefore, no gouge avoidance
checking for internal islands or adjacent walls, will be performed.
To Create a Face Milling NC Sequence

2. Choose Face and Done from the MILL SEQ menu.
- Surfaces—Select a plane or several coplanar faces parallel to the retract plane.
- Start Point—Allows you to start machining at a specified corner of the selected face. The following
options are available:
Define—Select a datum point or vertex to override the system-defined start point. The corner closest to
the selected datum point or vertex will be used.
Remove—Revert to the system-defined start point.
Show—Highlight the current start point (available only if a user-defined start point is specified).
About Profile Milling

Profile milling is used to rough or finish mill vertical or slanted surfaces. The surfaces selected must allow for a
continuous tool path. The depth of the cut is defined by the depth of the selected surfaces. You can also use the
AXIS_SHIFT parameter.
Notes:
- To just make one profile pass around the part at full depth, make STEP_DEPTH greater than part
thickness.
- To create a succession of profiling passes with horizontal offset, use the NUM_PROF_PASSES and
PROF_INCREMENT parameters.
Pro/NC 167
The following illustration shows 3-Axis Profiling.
1 Select all the side surfaces

By default, the system will detect undercuts when degouging a 3-Axis profiling tool path. If you want to be able
to machine an undercut, set GOUGE_AVOID_TYPE to TIP_ONLY. The following illustration shows
machining an undercut.
1
2
1 part
2 tool
3 GOUGE_AVOID_TYPE TIP_ONLY
3-Axis profiling will clean up the top horizontal edges of selected surfaces, as shown in the following figure. If
there is another surface bounding the top edge, select it as a Check Surface to avoid gouging.
1 2
1 Topmost tool position (to clean up the edge)

2 Select these surfaces for gouge checking
3 Surface being profiled (side view)
5-Axis surface profiling can be used for swarf cutting, as shown in the following illustration. The tool axis will
stay tangent to the surface being machined. Set the AXIS_SHIFT parameter to a positive value.
168 Pro/NC
1
1 AXIS_SHIFT
To Create a Profile Milling NC Sequence

2. Choose Profile from the MILL SEQ menu. Select 3 Axis, 4 Axis, or 5 Axis if applicable (the options
available depend on the number of axes specified for the workcell). Choose Done.
- Surfaces—Select surfaces to mill.
- ScallopSrf—Allows you to select surfaces that will be excluded from scallop computation if
SCALLOP_HGT is specified.
About Pocket Milling

Pocketing can be used to finish mill after a Rough Volume operation, or for direct finishing. The surfaces
selected must allow for a continuous tool path. The pocket may include horizontal, vertical, or slanted surfaces.
The walls of the pocket will be milled as with Profiling, the bottom—as the bottom surfaces in Volume milling.
Pro/NC 169
Example: Pocket Milling
1 2
1 Material left after Volume milling

2 Select all surfaces in the pocket (use Mill Volume)
To Create a Pocket Milling NC Sequence

2. Choose Pocketing and Done from the MILL SEQ menu.
The system will start user interface for all selected options in turn.
About Trajectory Milling

Trajectory milling allows you to sweep a tool along any user-defined trajectory. It can be used for milling
horizontal slots: the shape of the tool must correspond to that of the slot. To define the tool path, you must
interactively specify the trajectory of the control point of the tool using the Customize functionality.
Sketching the Tools for Trajectory Milling

For 3-Axis Trajectory milling, you can either use standard tools, or sketch your own tool for the NC sequence.
The tool is sketched as a revolved protrusion:
· The sketch represents half of the tool cross-section. The whole sketch must lie on one side of the axis of
symmetry. The axis of symmetry must be vertical, with the sketch lying on the right.
· The section must be closed.
For a sketched tool, you can specify a control point other than its tip by adding a coordinate system to the tool
section sketch, as shown in the following illustration. The tool will then be swept so that its control point
follows the specified trajectory.
For standard (edited) tools, and for sketched tools with no control point specified, the tip of the tool will be
used. The tip of a standard tool is determined by the tool’s control point. The tip of a sketched tool is
170 Pro/NC
determined as the lowest point of the tool section sketch (the lower-left if there are several equally low
vertices).
Note: Make sure to specify the tool offset option correctly when using a control point. For example, if you
select side edges of the slot and place your control point on the periphery of the tool, choose None for the
tool offset direction. Also make sure to select the cut direction depending on the orientation of the
coordinate system used as the tool control point: when the tool travels along the trajectory, the X-axis must
point towards the trajectory while the Y-axis is pointing up.
The following illustration shows specifying a control point for a sketched tool.
1 Select these edges

2 Tool control point
3 Sketch this tool
To Create a Trajectory Milling NC Sequence

2. Choose Trajectory from the MILL SEQ menu. Select 3 Axis, 4 Axis, or 5 Axis if applicable (the options
available depend on the number of axes specified for the workcell). Choose Done.
3. If you have specified the tool, site, coordinate systems, and retract surface at setup time, you do not have to
select Seq Setup at this point, and can proceed directly to step 4. If you choose Seq Setup, the SEQ SETUP
menu will contain the common options, available for all the NC sequence types, and the following specific
option:
Check Surfs—Select surfaces against which gouge checking will be performed. If the tool comes in contact
with a Check Surface, it will retract to avoid this surface, and then proceed to the next millable portion of
the specified trajectory.
Select the desired options and choose Done. The system will start the user interface for all selected options
in turn.
When specifying the tool for 3-Axis Trajectory milling, selecting Set brings you the following options:
- Edit—Edit parameters file for a standard tool.
- Sketch—Sketch the tool section.
4. Choose Customize and interactively specify the Automatic Cut motions. Connect the Automatic Cut
motions using the Approach and Exit Tool Motions.
5. Choose Play Path to verify the tool path generated by the system.
To Create Automatic Cut Motions for Trajectory

Milling
The way cut motion is created depends on the cut motion type. The following procedure lists the steps common
to creating all types of cut motions. For information on specific aspects of creating a cut motion, refer to the
following procedures.
Pro/NC 171
1. Choose Customize from the NC SEQUENCE menu.
2. Choose Automatic Cut from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click Insert.
3. Select the type of cut motion from the INTERACT PATH menu (Sketch, Edge) and Done.
4. The Cut option in the INT CUT menu is selected automatically. Select the appropriate options in the CUT
ALONG menu, depending on the cut motion type, and create a cut motion.
5. Choose Ends if you want to adjust the ends of the cut motion.
6. Choose Corners if you want to apply corner conditions.
7. You can use the Check Surfs option to select surfaces against which gouge checking will be performed.
8. Choose Play Cut to display the cut motion as it is currently defined. The Info option brings up the INFO
ITEMS menu. You can use the Parameters option in the INT CUT menu, if needed, to modify the cut motion
parameters.
9. When satisfied with the cut motion, choose Done Cut.
10. If you want to define another cut motion, choose Next Cut from the NEXT SLICED menu, and repeat steps 3
through 9. When finished, choose Done/Return from the NEXT SLICED menu.
If you use the same type of cut motion for a subsequent slice, the CUT ALONG menu settings will be modal. For
example, to mill a horizontal slot in step depth increments, you can define the edges, direction, and offset for
the first cut motion only, and then just change the height for each subsequent cut motion. Note, however, that
whenever you select Edge or Curve from the CUT ALONG menu, the Direction and Offset options will be
selected automatically.
To Sketch a Cut Motion

1. Choose Sketch and Done from the INTERACT PATH menu.
2. The Sketch option in the CUT ALONG menu is automatically selected. Choose Done.
3. Set up the sketching plane and the sketcher reference plane. If Height is not specified, the cut motion will be
located in the sketching plane.
4. Sketch the cut motion. Dimension and regenerate the sketch. Choose Done.
To Define a Cut Motion Using Edges or Curves

1. Choose Edge (Curve) and Done from the INTERACT PATH menu.
2. If you use Edge, select one of the following options:
- On/Offset—Drive the tool along selected edges.
- Fit—Fit the tool between surfaces adjacent to specified edges. This option is only applicable when
using a ball endmill.
3. The Edge (Curve), Direction, and Offset options in the CUT ALONG menu are automatically selected.
Choose Done.
4. The CHAIN menu appears with the options One By One, Tangnt Chain, Bndry Chain, Surf Chain,
Select, and Unselect. Select edges to follow using the CHAIN menu options. All selected edges must form a
continuous tool path.
5. Specify direction of trajectory using Flip and Okay, according to the red arrow.
6. Another red arrow appears. Specify the tool offset:
- None—The tool will follow the selected edges.
- Left—The cut motion will be offset to the left.
- Right—The cut motion will be offset to the right.
The offset distance is half of the CUTTER_DIAM value. The direction of the offset is with respect to
direction of trajectory, selected in the previous step; when you select an offset option, the red arrow will
show the offset direction. Choose Done when satisfied.
To Define a Cut Motion Using Surfaces

1. Choose Surface and Done from the INTERACT PATH menu.
2. The Surface, Direction, and Height options in the CUT ALONG menu are selected automatically. Choose
Done.
3. Select surfaces to follow. The surfaces must allow for a continuous tool path.
172 Pro/NC
4. Specify direction of cutting motion using Flip and Okay, according to the red arrow.
5. Specify height.
6. The cut motion will be created along the selected surfaces at the specified height.
To Specify Height
You can specify the height of the cut motion using the Height option in the CUT ALONG menu. The height
specification is mandatory if you use surfaces to define the cut motion; for other types it is optional.
When you choose Height, the HEIGHT menu appears with the options:
· Add—Brings up the CTM DEPTH menu, containing the commands Specify Plane, Select, and Z Depth. To
specify the height or depth of the cut motion, create or select a plane, select nonplanar surfaces, or enter a
value for height with respect to the NC sequence coordinate system. The tool trajectory, when defined, will
then be projected in the level of the selected surface or plane.
· Remove—Remove the currently used height reference. You will have a choice of selecting the reference(s)
to delete using Remove Single, or deleting all references using Remove All.
· Show—Show the plane or surface that is currently used for height reference. If Z depth is used, the
appropriate depth will be marked by a cyan rectangle enclosing the contour of the manufacturing model.
Example: Specifying Height and Surfaces

1 2
1 Select bottom surface for Height

2 Cut motion
3 Select all the inside surfaces (use Loop, select the bottom surface)
You can select nonplanar surfaces of the part for Height specification. These are the surfaces that will be
machined by the end portion of the tool, rather than its side. The following shows an example of selecting
surfaces to create the desired cut motion for 3-Axis Trajectory milling.
Note: A Height plane will always override the location of CSYS in a Sketched Tool.
Pro/NC 173
Example: Specifying Height and Check Surfaces
1 2
3
4 5
1 Check surface
2 Height surface
3 Cut motion
4 Select this surface to create the cut motion
5 The tool fits within the selected surfaces
Multi-Step and Multi-Pass Trajectory Milling

Multi-Step Trajectory Milling
Multi-step Trajectory milling can be performed by specifying either the desired STEP_DEPTH (in which case
the cuts will be repeated in these step depth increments), or the desired NUMBER_CUTS. If both are specified,
the higher of the two numbers of cuts will be used. The last pass will coincide with the specified trajectory.
The Start Height option in the CUT ALONG menu allows you to specify the height of the first pass. If Start
Height is not specified, the top of the workpiece will be used. For Assembly machining, or workpiece with no
geometry, you have to either specify the Start Height, or specify both the STEP_DEPTH and
NUMBER_CUTS. In this last case, the parameters are interpreted differently: NUMBER_CUTS will determine
the number of passes, and STEP_DEPTH—the offset between the passes, that is, the first pass will be offset
from the specified trajectory by (NUMBER_CUTS-1)*STEP_DEPTH.
Note: The Start Height option is grayed out if neither STEP_DEPTH nor NUMBER_CUTS has been
specified for the NC sequence.
The user interface for specifying Start Height is the same as specifying Height.
Multi-Pass Trajectory Milling

Multi-pass Trajectory milling (a succession of trajectory passes with horizontal offset) can be performed by
using the NUM_PROF_PASSES and PROF_INCREMENT parameters. The last pass will coincide with the
specified trajectory.
Tip: Fitting the Tool Between the Surfaces

When you use a ball endmill in a 3-Axis Trajectory milling NC sequence, and create a cut motion using Edges,
you can use the Fit option to fit the tool between surfaces adjacent to specified edges. Another way to produce a
similar tool path (for any type of Mill tool) is to use Cut Line machining with Tool Extent.
174 Pro/NC
The following illustration shows fitting the tool between the surfaces when milling along an edge.
1 Select this edge using the Fit option and indicate Right for offset direction
The following illustration shows fitting the tool between the surfaces using Cut Line machining.
1
2
1 Select this surface to machine

2 Select this surface as Check Surface for Cut Line machining
3 Select the edge of the surface generated by Tool Extent both as the Start and the End cut line
To Create a 5-Axis Cut Motion Using Edges or

Curves
3. Choose Curve from the DRIVE ALNG menu.
4. The CUT MTN menu will appear with Define Cut already chosen, causing the CUTMOTION SETUP menu to
appear as well. The following commands will be listed:
- Parameters—Modify manufacturing parameters for the current cut motion.
- Curve—Define the trajectory by selecting edges or datum curves to follow. The CHAIN menu appears
with the options One By One, Tangnt Chain, Bndry Chain, Surf Chain, Select, and Unselect.
Select edges or curves to follow using the CHAIN menu options. All selected edges or curves must form
a continuous tool path.
- Height—Specify the height of the cut.
Pro/NC 175
- Start Height—Specify the height of the first pass for multi-step Trajectory milling.
- Direction—Specify direction of trajectory using Flip and Okay, according to the red arrow.
- Check Surfs—Select surfaces against which gouge checking will be performed.
- Axis Control—Apply additional control to tool axis orientation. Activates the AXIS CNTRL menu with
the following options:
Along Z—The tool axis will be parallel to the Z-axis of the NC Sequence coordinate system.
Axis Def—Displays the AXIS DEF menu, which lets you add, remove, redefine, and show axis
definitions at selected locations along the trajectory.
Norm to Part—Select a control surface, which must be adjacent to one of the selected edges. The tool
axis will be normal to the control surface.
- Corners—Specify the corner conditions.
- Offset—Specify the direction in which the cut motion will be offset (None, Left, or Right). The offset
distance is half of the CUTTER_DIAM value. The direction of the offset is with respect to direction of
trajectory; when you select an offset option, the red arrow will show the offset direction. Choose Done
when satisfied.
- Matrl Side—Specify the material side using the Left and Right options in the MATRL SIDE menu.
- Ends—Adjust the cut motion ends.
5. Choose Done from the CUTMOTION SETUP menu to begin specifying the cut. The system will start the user
interface for all selected options in turn.
To Create a 5-Axis Cut Motion Using Surfaces

3. Choose Surface from the DRIVE ALNG menu.
- Drive Surfaces—Define the trajectory by selecting surfaces that the tool will follow with its side. The
surfaces must allow for a continuous tool path.
- From/To Control—If you do not want to machine all the selected surfaces, select edges to machine.
The CHAIN menu appears with the options One By One, Tangnt Chain, Bndry Chain, Surf Chain,
Select, and Unselect. Using the CHAIN menu options, select edges on drive surfaces. All selected edges
must form a continuous tool path. The following illustration shows an example of using From/To
Control.
176 Pro/NC
1
2 3
4 5
6
1 Select these two surfaces as drive surfaces

2 This portion of the second surface is also selected. To avoid machining it, use From/To Control
3 Retract
4 Auto Plunge
5 Automatic Cut
6 Choose From/To Control and select these two edges
- Height—Specify the height of the cut.
- Start Height—Specify the height of the first pass for multi-step Trajectory milling.
- Axis Control—Apply additional control to tool axis orientation. Another way to control to the tool axis
orientation is by using the AXIS_DEF_CONTROL parameter.
5. Choose Done from the CUTMOTION SETUP menu to begin specifying the cut. The system will start the user
interface for all selected options in turn.
6. Once you have specified the cut, the system displays the TRAJ PREVIEW menu with the following opitons:
- Preview—The system shows the edges on surfaces to be machined, and displys the tool axis
orientation as vectors along these edges.
- From/To Control—Reselect edges on surfaces to machine, as described in Step 4.
- Axis Control—Apply additional control to tool axis orientation.
If a drive surface can not be machined without gouging, the system outputs the estimated value of possible
gouge in the message area at the same time as the TRAJ PREVIEW menu appears. The surfaces being
gouged are highlighted and the points of possible gouge are indicated.
Note: Another way to call up the TRAJ PREVIEW menu is to select Preview from the CUT MTN menu.
To Create Axis Definitions Along the Trajectory

1. Select the Axis Control option in the CUTMOTION SETUP menu. If defining the cut motion using edges or
curves, choose Axis Def from the AXIS CNTRL menu. The system displays the AXIS DEF menu, which lets
you add, remove, redefine, and show axis definitions.
2. Choose Add.
Pro/NC 177
3. Select a point on a trajectory segment to place the axis definition.
4. Specify a parameter value along this segment to place the point, with 0 corresponding to the beginning of
the segment and 1 to its end. The ENTER VAL menu will contain the value corresponding to your select
point, as well as 0, 1, and the Enter option, which allows you to type a value you want.
5. Specify the tool axis orientation at selected point using one of the following options in the AXIS DEF TYPE
menu:
- Along Z Dir—The tool axis will be parallel to the Z-axis of the NC Sequence coordinate system.
- Datum Axis—Select or create a datum axis to define the tool axis.
- Enter Value—Type the i, j, k values in the appropriate text boxes of the Axis Direction dialog box and
click OK.
Example: Adding Axis Definitions

The following illustration shows an example of using the parameter AXIS_DEF_CONTROL in combination
with adding axis definitions along the trajectory, to avoid gouging a nondevelopable surface.
1 Select all these surfaces as Drive Surfaces

2 To avoid gouging this nondevelopable surface, set AXIS_DEF_CONTROL to
FROM_AXES_AND_DRIVE_SURFACE and add these axis definitions
To Create a 5-Axis Cut Motion Using Two Contours

3. Choose Two Contour from the DRIVE ALNG menu.
- Contour1—Sketch or select the first contour in the cut.
178 Pro/NC
- Contour2—Sketch or select the second contour in the cut.
- Side Surfs—Indicate the contours of the cut by selecting side surfaces. This command is used in place
of the Contour1 and Contour2 commands.
- Synch—Brings up the SYNCH menu for specifying points to synchronize the positions on Contour1
and Contour2.
- Offset—Specify the direction in which the cut motion will be offset (None, Left, or Right). The offset
distance is half of the CUTTER_DIAM value. The direction of the offset is with respect to direction of
trajectory; when you select an offset option, the red arrow will show the offset direction. Choose Done
when satisfied.
5. Choose Done from the CUT ALONG menu to begin specifying the cut.
6. The TRAJ OPT menu will appear in turn for Contour1 and Contour2; choose Sketch or Select to indicate the
contour.
7. If you are creating synch points, the SYNCH menu appears with the following commands:
- Add—Select a location on a contour to place a synch point.
- Remove—Choose an existing synch point to delete.
- Show—Display existing synch points.
- Done/Return—Quit the SYNCH menu and return to defining the cut motion.
8. Choose Play Cut from the CUT MTN menu to display the cut motion.
Note: If you get an error message "Cut motion cannot be created" try adding more synch points.
To Adjust Cut Motion Ends

After an Automatic Cut motion is created, its ends can be extended or trimmed using the following procedure.
1. Choose Ends from the INT CUT menu.
2. Choose Start from the CUT ENDS menu to adjust the start point.
3. Choose one of:
- On—Place the start point of the cut motion at the start of the defined trajectory (the default).
- Specify—Move the start point along the defined trajectory. When you select this option, the start point
of the cut motion starts following the mouse (along the cut motion, if trimmed, and tangent to the first
segment, if extended). The new cut motion definition is temporary highlighted in green for better
visibility.
4. If the cut motion is adjusted using Specify, select the dimensioning type:
- Arc Length—Enter arc length along the chain, i.e, length ratio of the added or subtracted segment to
the original length of the cut motion. Positive value corresponds to extended cut motion, negative—to a
trimmed one.
- Offset Plane—Select a plane to measure offset from, then enter the offset value. Positive value means
that the offset is to the positive side of the surface (away from the solid material).
- Offset Csys—Select a coordinate system to measure offset from. Select axis along which to measure
the offset, then enter the offset value. Positive value means the positive axis direction.
5. Choose End from the CUT ENDS menu to adjust the end point and repeat Steps 3 and 4.
Corner Condition Types

Corner conditions can be specified for the vertices of the cut motion created using the Edge or Curve option, to
avoid gouging sharp corners. Wherever a corner condition is added, a small parallelogram will be incorporated
in the cut motion: the tool will continue moving along the first entity, then return to enter tangent to the second
entity. The size of the parallelogram is defined by the path parameter CORNER_LENGTH.
Pro/NC 179
If you add a corner condition along an entity or between two tangent entities, the angle of the parallelogram will
be defined by the CORNER_ANGLE parameter; if the condition is at a vertex and the corner is sharp, the
CORNER_ANGLE value will be ignored and the sides of the parallelogram will be formed as a continuation of
the adjoining entities.
The following graphic illustrates the CORNER_LENGTH and CORNER_ANGLE parameters.
1 CORNER_LENGTH
2 CORNER_ANGLE
The following corner condition types are available:
· Straight—Create a straight corner condition.
· Concave—Create a round corner motion for a corner that is concave.
· Convex—Create a round corner motion for a corner that is convex.
· Chamfer—A chamfer whose size is defined by the CHAMFER_DIM parameter, which represents the
distance cut on each side of the corner.
· Fillet—Create a fillet corner motion.
· Loop—Create a loop corner motion. Available for convex corner conditions only.
To Specify Corner Conditions

1. Choose Corners from the INT CUT menu.
2. The CORNER COND menu appears with the following options:
- Add—Select corners to add corner conditions.
- Redefine—Respecify a corner condition.
- Delete—Allows you to select a corner condition to delete.
- Delete Last—Deletes the corner condition that has been added last. You can use this option more than
once; when there are no more corner conditions left, the Delete Last option becomes inaccessible.
- Delete All—Deletes all the corner conditions.
3. When you choose Add from the CORNER COND menu, the CORNER ADD menu appears with the following
options:
- Specify—Select points on the cut motion and specify type by selecting the appropriate option. After
each selection, the corner condition will be added at the selected point. Choose Done Sel when
finished.
- Automatic—Corner conditions will be automatically added at all the corners. Corner conditions will
be added according to the following rules:
All concave corners will be filleted.
All convex corners on an outside contour of a part will be filleted.
All convex corners on an inside contour of a part will be looped.
If the system is unable to determine the type of the contour, you will be prompted to specify if this is in
inside or an outside contour using the following options:
- Female Part—Inside contour.
- Male Part—Outside contour.
180 Pro/NC
After the corner conditions are automatically added, you can review and change them using the AUTO
SELECT menu:
- Next—Display the next assigned corner condition.
- Prev—Display the previous corner condition.
- Change Type—Specify a different corner condition type for the highlighted corner.
- Remove—Delete corner condition at the highlighted corner.
- Show All—Display all the currently added corner conditions. Straight corner conditions will be
highlighted in yellow, convex—in red, and concave—in cyan.
- Info—List information about the highlighted corner condition type in the Message Window.
About Thread Milling

Thread (helical) milling allows you to cut internal and external threads on cylindrical surfaces.
When creating a Thread milling NC sequence, you will have to:
· Use a tool of type THREAD_MILL instead of a regular milling tool.
· When setting parameters, specify THREAD_FEED, THREAD_FEED_UNITS, and
THREAD_DIAMETER (optional).
· Define the thread by specifying whether it is external or internal, specifying the major or minor thread
diameter, selecting cylindrical surface(s) to create the thread on, and specifying the machining and entry/exit
parameters.
Example: Thread Milling

The following illustration shows a Thread milling tool path.
1
2 3
6 5
1 Minor Diameter
2 Helical tool path
3 Tool
4 Start plane
5 Thread cylinder
6 End plane
Pro/NC 181
The following illustration shows Approach and Exit motions for thread milling.
1
2
3
1 Radial exit motion

2 Helical approach motion
3 Entry Angle
4 Exit Distance
Cutter Compensation in Thread Milling

To provide cutter compensation output in Thread milling, set the CUTCOM parameter to ON and specify a
value for CUTCOM_REGISTER. The system will determine the cutcom direction (LEFT or RIGHT) based on
the material side, which you specify using the Internal or External option in the Thread Mill dialog box, and the
direction of the tool movement.
In order to invoke cutter compensation, a linear motion in the XY-plane is required:
· When APPROACH_TYPE or EXIT_TYPE is set to HELICAL or NONE, use the NORMAL_LEAD_STEP
and TANGENT_LEAD_STEP parameters to specify the length of this linear motion. The linear motion will
be created at the Z level of the initial (for approach) or final (for exit) point of the thread motion. The
segment defined by TANGENT_LEAD_STEP will be tangent to projection of tool path at this point. If
TANGENT_LEAD_STEP is not defined, the segment defined by NORMAL_LEAD_STEP will be normal
to projection of tool path at this initial/final point; otherwise it will be normal to the tangent linear segment
and attached to its end. Cutcom is invoked on the first linear move, and turned off on the last linear move.
· When APPROACH_TYPE or EXIT_TYPE is set to RADIAL, the CUTCOM statement will be placed on
the radial approach or exit motion. The distance is determined by the APPROACH_DIST/EXIT_DIST
value.
To Create a Thread Milling NC Sequence

1. On the MACHINING menu, click NC Sequence > Thread | Done. You must be in a Mill or Mill/Turn
workcell.
2. On the NC SEQUENCE menu, click Seq Setup.
In addition to the common options, available for all the NC sequence types, the SEQ SETUP menu contains
the following specific option:
Define Cut—Specify the thread parameters and placement references by using the Thread Mill dialog
box.
3. Click Play Path to verify the tool path automatically generated by the system. If not satisfied, you can either
modify the parameters, or use the Customize functionality to adjust the tool path.
182 Pro/NC
The Thread Mill Dialog Box
The top portion of the Thread Mill dialog box contains the following icons and options:
—Copy rules from a previously defined Thread Milling NC sequence.
—Show the currently used rules.

Thread Style—Specify the thread orientation:
· Internal—For internal threads, you have to specify Major Diameter, located on the Define Thread tabbed
page.
· External—For external threads, you have to specify Minor Diameter, located on the Define Thread
tabbed page.
The middle portion of the Thread Mill dialog box contains four tabbed pages: Define Thread, Place Thread,
Mill Thread, and Thread Entry & Exit.
The Define Thread tabbed page contains the following options:
· Thread Hand—Specifies the thread hand: Righthand or Lefthand.
· Major Diameter—If the Thread Style is specified as Internal, type a value for the thread's major
diameter. If you have specified a value for the manufacturing parameter THREAD_DIAMETER, this value
appears as the default in the Major Diameter text box.
· Minor Diameter—If the Thread Style is specified as External, type a value for the thread's minor
diameter. If you have specified a value for the manufacturing parameter THREAD_DIAMETER, this value
appears as the default in the Minor Diameter text box.
· Thread Series—The possible values are: UNC, UNF, M_COARSE, M_FINE.
· Pitch—The thread pitch. Corresponds to the manufacturing parameter THREAD_FEED.
· Pitch Units—Corresponds to the manufacturing parameter THREAD_FEED_UNITS. The possible values
are TPI (threads per inch), MM (millimeter per revolution), and INCH (inch per revolution).
· Thread Depth—Defines the thread depth:
- Auto—The system automatically determines the thread depth based on its placement references, and
taking into consideration the tool parameters Insert_Length and End_Offset.
- Blind—Specify the initial and final depth for the thread by selecting planar surfaces or creating datum
planes parallel to the retract plane.
The Place Thread tabbed page contains the options for thread placement. You can also set the order of
machining for multiple threads.
You can use the following methods of thread placement:
· Diameter—Place threads on all the cylindrical surfaces (Internal or External) of a specified diameter.
· Collect On Surface—Place threads on all the holes or cylindrical bosses on a specified surface.
· Feature Parameter—Place threads on features that have certain parameter values. When you select this
method, the Feature Parameter list box contains a list of all feature parameters associated with Hole and
Cosmetic Thread features in the model. When you select a parameter name in the list, the Value text box
below will contain a drop-down list of all the currently present values for this parameter. Select an operator
(such as "=") and a value. The system displays the selected parameter and its value in the list box below and
selects all features with the appropriate parameter value.
· Datum Axes—Select the datum axes that belong to the holes or cylindrical protrusions where you want to
place the threads.
Placing threads by Diameter, Collect On Surface, and Feature Parameter implies specifying a rule for the
placement surface selection. For example, if you cut an Internal thread and specify a diameter value, the system
will search the model for the holes of this diameter. If you select a surface, the system will include all holes on
this surface. If you specify a combination of rules, the system will look for holes that satisfy all of them; that is,
Pro/NC 183
if you specify a diameter value and select a surface, the system will include only the holes of the specified
diameter that are located on the selected surface. The Datum Axes method lets you explicitly select and
unselect datum axes, regardless of other rules used in thread placement.
Once you have selected a thread placement method, click the Plus (+) icon to add references of the appropriate
type (for example, select the diameters or datum axes). All the selected references are listed in the list box in the
middle of the Place Thread tabbed page. To remove a reference, click the Minus (-) icon and select the
reference to remove in the list box.
If you place threads by Datum Axes, selecting the Thread patterned features checkbox and selecting an axis
belonging to a pattern of features will place threads on all the features in this pattern.
The lower portion of the Place Thread tabbed page contains the options for setting the order of machining for
multiple threads:
· Closest—The system determines which order results in the shortest machine motion time. You can click the
Start hole/boss for scan selection arrow and select the first hole or boss to be machined.
· Pick Order—The threads are cut in the same order as the holes or bosses are selected. If one choice results
in more than one hole or boss being selected (for example, Collect On Surface selection), these features are
scanned by incrementing the Y coordinate and going back and forth in the X direction. Then the pick order
is resumed.
The Mill Thread tabbed page describes the cut motion:
· Continuous—The thread is machined by one continuous cut motion, regardless of the number of inserts on
the thread tool.
· Interrupted—For multiple insert threads, the thread is machined by a series of cut motions. A single full
thread (plus the overlap value) covers the entire length of the tool. You can specify the overlap values:
- Thread Overlap—Type a value (in degrees) for thread overlap. If a value is other than 0 (the default),
the start and end of the cut for each tooth are not coincident.
- Pickup Overlap— Type a value (in threads or degrees) for pickup overlap. If a value is other than 0
(the default), the next cut will start earlier than the coincident position.
These options control where the material is relative to the tool:
· Climb— The tool is to the left of material (assuming clockwise spindle rotation). Corresponds to the
CLIMB value of the CUT_TYPE manufacturing parameter.
· Conventional—The tool is to the right of material (assuming clockwise spindle rotation). Corresponds to
the UPCUT value of the CUT_TYPE manufacturing parameter.
The following options define the beginning and end of the cut motion:
· Start Overtravel—Specifies the initial height of the tool above the start surface at the beginning of the tool
path.
· End Overtravel— Specifies the height at the end of the tool path that the tool overtravels below the end
surface.
· Thread Start Angle—Specifies the angle in the XY plane that determines where the thread mill starts to
cut the thread.
The Thread Entry & Exit tabbed page contains the options and parameters for defining the Entry and Exit
moves:
· Entry—Specify the type of the entry move. The values are:
- None—No entry move is generated.
- Helical—The tool approaches the start of the cut motion in a helical motion.
- Normal to Thread—The entry motion is a straight line normal to the cut motion.
· Exit—Specify the type of the exit move. The values are:
- None—No exit move is generated.
- Helical— The tool exits the cut motion in a helical motion.
184 Pro/NC
- Normal to Thread—The exit motion is a straight line normal to the cut motion.
The following parameters define the Entry and Exit moves (the initial values correspond to those specified
when defining the manufacturing parameters for the NC sequence):
· Approach Distance—Specifies the length of the entry move.
· Exit Distance—Specifies the length of the exit move.
· Lead Radius—The radius of the tangential circular movement of the tool when leading in or out.
· Entry Angle—Defines the angle of the helical entry motion.
· Exit Angle—Defines the angle of the helical exit motion.
· Normal Lead Step—The length of the linear movement that is normal to the tangent portion of the lead-in
or lead-out motion.
· Tangent Lead Step—The length of the linear movement that is tangent to the circular lead-in or lead-out
motion.
The lower portion of the Thread Mill dialog box contains the OK, Cancel and Preview buttons.
About Engraving
Engraving NC sequences are generally created by the tool following a Groove cosmetic feature. The tool
diameter determines the width of cut, and the GROOVE_DEPTH parameter determines the depth of cut.
Engraving can be specified as 3- or 5-Axis.
For 5-Axis Engraving, there are two ways to specify the tool trajectory:
· By selecting a reference Groove feature to follow. The tool axis will be normal to the surface that the
reference Groove feature is projected onto.
· By selecting a set of edges for the tool to follow. In this case, you will have to select a control surface, that
is, a surface that the tool axis will be normal to. The control surface must be a surface adjacent to one of the
edges selected for the tool trajectory. For all other edges, the surface to the same side of the edge will be
used as control surface.
To Create an Engraving NC Sequence

2. Choose Engraving and Done from the MILL SEQ menu.
- Groove Feat—Select a reference Groove feature.
- Edges—Select the edges for the tool to follow. Available for 5-Axis Engraving only. Must be used
together with the following Norm Surf option.
- Norm Surf—Select a surface that the tool axis will be normal to. Available for 5-Axis Engraving only.
Must be used together with the Edges option above.
About Plunge Milling

Plunge milling lets you roughly machine deep cavities by a series of overlapping plunges into the material. The
tool makes its first plunge into the material along a predrilled axis, parallel to the Z-axis of the NC Sequence
coordinate system, then retracts to the level specified by CLEAR_DISTANCE, moves over in the XY-plane and
Pro/NC 185
makes the next plunge. Distance between the successive plunges is controlled by the PLUNGE_STEP
parameter.
You can use flat and radius end mills, as well as plunge milling tools, to create Plunge milling NC sequences.
Note: Ball end mills can not be used for Plunge milling.
Example: Plunge Milling
1 Select these surfaces

2 Select these axes as Start Axes
3 CUT_ANGLE 90 PLUNGE_STEP
To Create a Plunge Milling NC Sequence

2. Choose Plunge and Done from the MILL SEQ menu.
- Window—Create or select a Mill Window. This option and Surfaces are mutually exclusive. If you
use the Window option, then all the surfaces within the specified Mill Window will be selected.
- Start Axes—Specify predrilled axes to define the start point for every plunge region.
186 Pro/NC
Specifying Start Axes

Plunge milling tools can not cut with their centers. Therefore, in Plunge milling the tool makes its first plunge
within a region along a predrilled axis, which must be located at the deepest point of the region.
When you choose Start Axes from the SEQ SETUP menu, the system displays the START AXES menu with the
following options:
· Add—Select or create a datum axis to serve as a predrilled axis.
· Remove—Select a previously defined Start Axis to remove.
· Remove All—Remove all Start Axis definitions.
· Show—The system highlights all Start Axes in cyan.
You have to specify a Start Axis for each milling region. The system will then compute the tool path for the
region based on the SCAN_TYPE and using the Start Axis as a start point.
About Mill Geometry

To create a milling NC sequence, you have to define geometry that you want to mill. Pro/NC provides several
tools that let you define mill geometry as a separate feature, and then use this definition repeatedly for various
NC sequences within the manufacturing model.
The simplest way to define geometry for a Volume or a 3-Axis Conventional Surface milling NC sequence is by
using a Mill Window, that is, by sketching or selecting a closed contour in the retract plane. All surfaces visible
within the contour will be milled. Mill Windows are separate features that can be created at setup time, as well
as at the time of defining an NC sequence.
Another way to define a Volume NC sequence is a Mill Volume. This is the volume to be removed during an
NC sequence. The tool will always be within the Mill Volume, that is, by default the tool can not penetrate any
surfaces of the volume, except its top surfaces (at the time of creating an NC sequence, you can also explicitly
specify side surfaces of a Mill Volume that can be violated during tool approach and exit). To define the Mill
Volume, you can reference geometry of design model, sketch volume to be machined or excluded, intersect the
volume with the workpiece or reference model, offset surfaces (for example, by tool radius). This set of tools
can be used in any combinations to define a single Mill Volume.
You can also select surfaces from a Mill Volume when defining Surface milling NC sequences (Conventional
or Contour Surface milling, Facing, Profiling, and Pocketing).
Another tool for defining a milling NC sequence is creating a Mill Surface. This is a user-defined surface quilt
that can be referenced by Surface milling NC sequences or by Mill Volumes.
About Mill Window

A Mill Window can either be defined during the time of creating an NC sequence, or predefined using the MFG
GEOMETRY menu option Mill Window. To access this option, choose Mfg Setup from the MANUFACTURE
or MACHINING menu, then Mfg Geometry.
When you choose Mill Window from the MFG GEOMETRY menu, the DEFINE WIND menu appears with the
options:
· Redef Wind—Redefine a pre-existing Mill Window. Select the window to redefine from a namelist menu.
· Create Wind—Create a new Mill Window.
Pro/NC 187
To Create a Mill Window
1. Choose Create Wind from the DEFINE WIND menu.
2. Enter a name for the window.
3. The feature creation dialog box appears. The elements are:
- Csys—Specify the coordinate system. When you create an NC sequence, the NC Sequence coordinate
system is the default.
- Plane—Specify the start plane, parallel to the XY plane of the coordinate system. When you create an
NC sequence, the retract plane is the default.
- Window—Sketch or select a closed contour to define the window.
- Tool Side (Optional)—Specify how far the tool will go with respect to the window outline. The default
is Tool In.
- Depth (Optional)—Specify the depth of the window. If you do not specify this, the system performs
milling up to the surfaces visible from the Mill Window; through-all vertical and slanted surfaces will
be milled up to the bottom of the reference part.
4. When you start defining Window, the MILL WIND menu appears with the following options:
- Sketch—Define the window by sketching a closed contour. The system uses the start plane as the
sketching plane and orients the sketch so that the X-axis of the coordinate system points to the right,
and the Y-axis points up.
- Select—Define the window by selecting edges or curves that form a closed contour. This contour is
then projected on the start plane to form the window outline.
5. If you choose to redefine the Tool Side, the TOOL SIDE menu appears with the following options:
- To—The tool will always be completely within the window outline. The corresponding value in the
dialog box is Tool In.
- On—The tool axis will reach the window outline. The corresponding value in the dialog box is Tool
On.
- Past—The tool will go completely past the window outline. The corresponding value in the dialog box
is Tool Past.
1 2 3
1 Tool In
2 Tool On
3 Tool Past
6. If you choose to define Depth, the WND DEPTH menu appears with the following options:
- Define—Specify the window depth either by selecting a plane parallel to the start plane (Specify
Plane), or by entering a Z value with respect to the window coordinate system (Z Depth).
- Remove—Remove the depth definition, that is, revert to the default depth.
- Show—Show the current depth definition. The system will display a cyan rectangle at the level of the
current window depth.
188 Pro/NC
To Use Reference Quilts
You can specify reference quilts to define the depth of your Mill Window. Use this functionality if the surfaces
below the window contain multiple small patches at different depths (for example, geometry created as a result
of IGES import).
1. On the MANUFACTURE menu, click Machining > Mfg Setup > Ref Quilts.
2. Use the following options:
- Add—Select quilts (surface features) to use as machining references.
- Remove—Remove previously selected quilts.
- Show—Show selected quilts.
3. Click Done/Return when finished.
About Mill Volumes

A Mill Volume can either be defined during the time of creating an NC sequence, or predefined using the MFG
GEOMETRY menu option Mill Volume. To access this option, choose Mfg Setup from the MANUFACTURE or
MACHINING menu, then Mfg Geometry.
If defining the volume at setup time, you have to specify the upward direction:
1. Select a planar surface, or create/select a datum plane that will be parallel to the XY coordinate plane of the
NC Sequence coordinate system.
2. A red arrow appears showing the current upward direction. Set the desired upward direction using Flip and
Okay options.
To Gather a Mill Volume

Gathering allows you to reference surfaces and edges of the design model.
Generally, the gathering process includes several steps:
1. Select surfaces to be machined. The Select option provides multiple ways of surface selection, which are
described below. All surfaces included in the volume definition will be "sewn" together to form a single
quilt, and the system will "close" the volume automatically by extruding the boundaries of this quilt
vertically up to the retract plane (or, if defining the volume at setup time, the plane selected for upward
direction).
2. If selected surfaces contain inner loops (holes, slots), that you want to ignore, use the Fill option. You can
fill loops by individually selecting them, or by selecting a surface to fill all internal loops on it.
3. If you want to ignore some outer loops or exclude some of the selected surfaces from the volume, use the
Exclude option.
4. If you want to specify ways of "closing" the volume, other than the default way described above, use the
Close option.
As you modify the surface quilt and closing instructions, the volume is recalculated. It can be displayed at any
time using the Show Volume option.
You can repeatedly redefine the volume by adding more references of a certain type, or removing certain
references. Whenever you select references for gathering, the FEATURE REFS menu appears with the options:
· Add—Select additional references (this is the only option available when you start defining the volume).
· Remove—Unselect some of the references. select surfaces or loops you want to unselect.
· Remove All—Unselect all references of the current type. For example, if the Bndry Srfs option is
highlighted, choosing Remove All will clear the definition of bounding surfaces.
Pro/NC 189
To Select Surfaces for a Mill Volume
When you choose Select for the first time and start selecting surfaces to be included in a volume definition, the
following options are available:
· Surf & Bnd—Select one of the surfaces to be machined ("seed" surface), and the bounding surfaces. The
system will include the selected surface and all its neighboring surfaces until the ones selected as bounding.
You will be prompted to select the seed surface immediately after you choose Surf & Bnd for the first time.
Then use the following options:
- Seed Surface—Change the seed surface, if needed.
- Bndry Srfs—Select bounding surfaces.
- Bndry Loops—Add outer loops of edges to boundary.
· Surfaces—Select continuous surfaces to be machined. All the selected surfaces will be included in the
volume definition.
· Features—Select features to be machined. All the surfaces of selected features will be included in the
volume definition.
· Mill Surf—Select a pre-defined Mill Surface from a namelist menu.
Repeatedly choosing Select will bring up the GATHER SPEC menu with the options:
· Type—Respecify the type (for example, Surf & Bnd instead of Surfaces). If you change the type, all
previous selections will be discarded. Therefore, whenever you attempt to change the type, the system will
prompt for confirmation.
· References—Reselect the feature references. This will bring up the SURF BND menu if the gather type is
Surf & Bnd, and the FEATURE REFS menu in all other cases.
Once the surfaces are selected, the other options in the GATHER menu become available. You can unselect
surfaces, fill or exclude loops of edges, and otherwise enhance the volume definition created in the first step.
The ways to do it depend on the option which you have used for surface selection: volumes gathered using
Surf & Bnd follow different rules than those created using one of the other options.
At any point, you can display the currently selected surfaces using the Show Select option. Outer (bounding)
edges of selected surfaces will be displayed in yellow; inner (two-sided) and silhouette edges—in magenta.
190 Pro/NC
Examples: Selecting Surfaces for a Mill Volume
The following illustration shows using Surfaces vs. Surf & Bnd when gathering a Mill Volume:
1 2
Hidden
hidden
5 6
1 Select seed
2 Mill Volume
3 Select bounding surfaces (use Query Sel for hidden surfaces)
4 Surf & Bnd
6 Mill Volume
7 Surface
The following illustration shows using the Features option when gathering a Mill Volume. Select feature (1).
Pro/NC 191
The following illustration shows using the Mill Surf option when gathering a Mill Volume. All the surfaces (1)
are included in the Mill Surface. Select any one.
To Exclude Surfaces and Outer Loops

The Exclude option is available only if you gather using an option other than Surf & Bnd (for example,
Surfaces). It allows you to:
· Surfaces—Exclude some of the chosen surfaces by selecting each of them individually. This is especially
convenient when gathering using Features or Mill Surf.
· Loops—Exclude outer loops. Use this option to delete unwanted portions of surfaces selected for gathering.
Example: Excluding Outer Loops

The following illustration shows excluding outer loops:
2 3
1 Selecting this surface creates an unwanted portion of volume on the left, because its bottom is part of the
same surface
2 Mill Volume
3 Mill Volume
4 Exclude this loop
192 Pro/NC
To Fill Inner Loops
When you fill an inner loop of edges on a surface selected for gathering it is equivalent to "patching" the base
quilt of the Mill Volume. The volume will be built as if there was a smooth surface with no perforations. The
Fill option brings up the GATHER FILL menu:
· All—Fill all loops on a selected surface. Select a surface. All inner loops on this surface will be filled,
whether they belong to bounding surfaces or not.
· Loops—Select loops to be filled. For each loop to be filled, you have to select only one edge. If you gather
using Surf & Bnd, the edges must lie on the bounding surfaces. Select additional bounding surfaces if
necessary.
Examples: Filling Inner Loops

The following illustration shows filling loops when gathering using Surf & Bnd:
4
1 6 5
3
2
1 Select seed surface.

2 Select four side surfaces as bounding.
3 Select surfaces of the hole (both halves) as bounding surfaces.
4 Fill this loop (Select edge of the hole).
5 The hole will not be milled.
6 Mill Volume
Pro/NC 193
The following illustration shows filling loops when gathering using Surfaces:
1 2 3
5
4
1 Select this surface using Surfaces.

2 This volume will not be milled.
3 Mill Volume
4 The whole volume will be milled
5 Edges of the internal loop are also extended upward.
6 Fill this loop.
7 The internal loop will not be considered when building the Mill Volume.
Note: A loop can not be filled if it belongs to more than two adjoining surfaces.
1 2
1 This loop can be filled.

2 This loop cannot be filled (suppress the feature before creating the volume).
To Close a Mill Volume

The system will close the volume automatically, by extruding the boundaries of the selected surface quilt
vertically up to the retract plane (or, if defining the volume at setup time, the plane selected for upward
194 Pro/NC
direction). If you want to specify a different way to close the volume, select Close. The following options are
available:
· Define—Create a closure definition to replace the one supplied by the system.
· Delete—Remove the current closure definition (revert to the system-supplied one).
· Redefine—Respecify the closure definition references when a user definition already exists.
· Show—Display the current closure definition.
When you choose Define or Redefine, the following options are available:
· Cap Plane—Select a planar surface or datum plane to be used for closing the volume.
· All Loops—All boundary loops in the current quilt will be extended to the cap plane.
· Sel Loops—Select loops to be extended to the cap plane. You have to select only one edge in each loop.
Example: Closing a Volume when Milling a Through

Pocket
When milling through pockets, you have to extend the edges at the bottom of the pocket downward, to indicate
that the tool must go through, as shown in the following illustration:
1
2
4 6
5
1 Select top of workpiece as Cap Plane, then select top edge using Sel Loops.
2 Select seed surface.
3 Hidden
4 Select bounding surfaces (top and bottom).
5 Select bottom of workpiece as Cap Plane, then select bottom edge using Sel Loops.
6 The pocket is extended down.
To Show a Mill Volume Definition After Gathering

The Show Volume option allows you to check the current volume definition, to see if you need to exclude more
loops, close differently. The Mill Volume will be displayed in magenta. As you gather more references, the
volume display will change. To view the changes, repaint the screen and select Show Volume again.
After you choose Done from the VOL GATHER menu, the Mill Volume you have defined will be displayed in
magenta. You can add and remove volumes to mill using Sketch, offset the sides, round some edges.
Pro/NC 195
Sketching a Mill Volume
Mill Volume can be defined by sketching, very much like you create regular features (protrusions and cuts) in
Pro/ENGINEER. If Sketch is selected as the first option from the CREATE VOL menu, the sketched volume
will be automatically added. If a volume is already present in the current definition, you will have to specify if
you wish to Add or Remove the volume you are about to sketch.
Do not confuse removing volume by sketch, and removing workpiece material by machining. Since you are
defining a volume to be machined, that is, subtracted from the workpiece, adding to this volume will increase
the amount of material to be removed, and vice versa.
To Sketch a Mill Volume

1. Choose Sketch from the CREATE VOL menu.
2. If a volume is already present in the current definition, choose Add or Remove. Add will add a "protrusion"
to the current volume, Remove will subtract the sketched volume from the current volume (as a "cut"). If no
volume is present, a volume "protrusion" will be automatically created.
Note: Think of Sketch as creating a protrusion or cut in a part that consists of just the Mill Volume itself.
3. Choose options from the SOLID OPTS menu:
- Extrude—Creates a feature that is formed by projecting the section straight away from the sketching
plane.
- Revolve—Creates a feature by revolving the sketched section around a centerline from the sketching
plane into the part.
- Sweep—Creates a feature by sketching a trajectory and then sweeping a cross section along it.
- Blend—Creates a feature that consists of a set of planar sections that are connected by transition
surfaces to form a solid.
- Use Quilt—Creates a feature by referencing a surface feature.
- Advanced—Creates a complex shape feature, for example, using datum curves or multiple trajectories.
- Solid—Default for the above forms; creates solid geometry.
- Thin—Creates a thin feature.
4. Choose attributes appropriate for the selected form, such as depth option, degrees of rotation.
5. Set up the Sketcher: select or create the sketching plane, choose the feature direction, specify the sketcher
reference plane.
6. Sketch the section. Volume sections are sketched the same as for regular features (protrusions and cuts).
Sketched entities can be aligned and dimensioned both to part geometry and to the entities of other volume
"chunks".
7. Regenerate and choose Done. The volume is added or subtracted.
The Sketch option can be used as many times as you like within a single volume definition.
Examples: Combining Sketch and Gather

Sketch can be used after gathering part references to extend the Mill Volume, or to exclude some areas from
milling.
196 Pro/NC
The following illustration shows an example of adding a sketched volume:
1 3
5
6
1 Use Gather, Surfaces, and select this surface.

2 Section sketch (Use Edge)
3 Resulting volume
4 Use Sketch, Add.
5 Mill Volume
6 Milling NC sequence completed.
The following illustration shows an example of removing a sketched volume:
1
2
3
4 5
7
6
Pro/NC 197
1 Gather, Surf & Bnd
2 Seed surface
3 Bounding surfaces
4 Bottom edge
5 Mill Volume goes all the way through
6 Sketch, Remove
7 Final Mill Volume
8 Section sketch
Tip: Combining Sketch and Trim

A sketched section does not have to correspond exactly to the desired Mill Volume. It can be sketched larger
than needed, and then "trimmed to size" using:
· The Trim option—To subtract the reference model from the sketched volume.
· The TRIM_TO_WORKPIECE parameter—To confine the volume to be milled to that inside the workpiece
boundaries, in order to avoid air machining.
To Trim a Mill Volume

A sketched volume can be trimmed by the reference model using the Trim option in the CREATE VOL menu.
When you select Trim, the system will automatically subtract the reference model from the current volume
definition. Only the remaining volume will be machined.
To make sure there will be no gouging, this option can also be used after offsetting all surfaces.
Note: Using Trim after defining the volume by gathering only does not make sense: Trim will use the same
references as Gather does, so nothing will change.
198 Pro/NC
Example: Trimming a Mill Volume
1
2
3
area to
remove
5
1 Step 1: Sketch extruded Thru All volume. Make sure it is deeper than the pockets to mill.
2 Section sketch
3 Step 2: Remove extra volume outside the workpiece by sketching. This step can be omitted if
TRIM_TO_WORKPIECE is set to YES.
4 Section sketch
5 Step 3: Select Trim from the CREATE VOL menu. The reference part is subtracted from the volume to mill.
6 Milling volume
7 The top surface and all three pockets will be machined in a single NC sequence, as shown.
Offsetting a Mill Volume

Gathered or sketched volume can be extended by offset. Because the tool is always inside the defined volume,
this option can be used, for example, to clean the border edges of the workpiece.
Note: In this case, make sure to set the parameter TRIM_TO_WORKPIECE to NO.
Pro/NC 199
1
1 Machined volume
2 Tool
3 If the volume is offset by the tool radius, the border edge will be cleaned.
To Offset a Mill Volume

The options for offset are:
· Walls—All the side surfaces will be offset.
· Surfaces—Select surfaces to offset.
· Tool Radius—The offset distance will be equal to the tool radius.
· Value—The offset distance will be user-defined. Enter the offset value.
Note: In order to offset by tool radius, you have to create the volume at the time of creating the NC
sequence, after the tool is specified.
· Horizontal—The bottom surface edges will be offset parallel to the XY plane.
· Tangential—The bottom surface edges will be offset tangent to the surface.
Example: Offsetting a Mill Volume
1 2
1 Horizontal
2 Tangential
To Create Rounds on a Mill Volume

As a refining touch, you can create rounds on some of the volume edges. This is another way to simulate the
tool geometry as it cuts the material.
To Copy a Mill Volume

The Copy Volume option in the CREATE VOL menu allows you to copy an existing volume definition as the
"start point" for defining a new volume, to avoid time-consuming repetitions.
200 Pro/NC
To Shade a Mill Volume
In order to see a Mill Volume definition better, you can shade the volume. This functionality is available only at
setup time (you cannot shade a volume when creating an NC sequence).
1. Choose Mfg Setup from the MANUFACTURE or MACHINING menu, then Mfg Geometry.
2. Choose Mill Volume from the MFG GEOMETRY menu.
3. Choose Shade from the MILL VOLUME menu.
4. Select the name of the volume to shade.
The screen is repainted to display only the shaded image of the selected volume.
5. Choose Continue from the CntVolSel menu to select another volume for shading, or choose Done/Return
to finish.
Modifying a Mill Volume

Mill Volume is not a single feature: it is a set of features that will be referenced by a milling NC sequence. All
"chunks" of volume will be machined by generating a continuous tool path, but each "chunk" of Mill Volume is
considered as a separate feature. For example, if you gather references, add a sketched volume, and offset walls,
three features will be added to the workpiece. After an NC sequence is created, one more feature is added to the
workpiece.
Mill Volumes, or their portions, can be deleted or suppressed by deleting/suppressing the appropriate feature(s)
on the workpiece. Volume "chunks" can be chosen by selecting on them (use Query Sel if necessary), or by
feature number.
Note: There is a special technique of reordering Mill Volumes. Click See Also for details.
You can modify any volume using the Modify Vol option under the MILL VOLUME menu.
You can also modify dimensions of a volume (such as sketch dimensions, offsets, round radii), using the
Modify Dim option. Select volume features as you would select regular part features (the volume must be
unblanked first).
When not needed, volume display can be turned off using the Blank option. After you choose it, the namelist
menu of displayed volumes and Mill Surfaces appears; select the volume name. Blanked volumes can later be
displayed again using the Unblank option.
To Modify a Mill Volume

1. Choose Mfg Setup > Mfg Geometry > Mill Volume > Modify Vol.
2. Select the name of the volume from the namelist menu. The current volume definition is displayed in
magenta.
3. Use options from the CREATE VOL menu to change the volume as desired: add and remove pieces, offset.
During the time of creating an NC sequence, you can similarly modify a volume using the Modify Vol option in
the DEFINE VOL menu.
To Rename a Mill Volume

1. Choose Set Up from the MANUFACTURE menu.
2. Choose Name, then Other.
3. Choose the volume by clicking on the screen (the volume must be unblanked). To select by menu, choose
Quilt from the SELN OPTION menu, then select the volume name.
4. Enter the new name. The volume is renamed.
About Mill Surfaces

A Mill Surface is a special surface feature, created by the set of techniques described below, which can be used
in Surface milling NC sequences. Mill Surfaces can also be used to define Mill Volumes. You can use any
combination of the tools in the SURF DEFINE menu to create a single Mill Surface.
Pro/NC 201
Note: Milling surfaces are a good tool for defining complex Mill Volumes.
To Create a Mill Surface

1. Choose Mfg Setup from the MANUFACTURE or MACHINING menu, then choose Mfg Geometry.
2. Choose Mill Surface from the MFG GEOMETRY menu.
3. Choose Create and enter a name for the surface.
4. When the SURF DEFINE menu comes up for the first time, the only option available is Add. It allows you to
create the base patch of the Mill Surface.
5. Once the first surface patch is created, you can use other SURF DEFINE options: extend its edges, trim it, or
add other patches and include them in the Mill Surface definition by merging.
Note: Mill Surface can also be created "on the fly" when defining a Surface milling NC sequence. The
techniques are the same.
Adding Surface Patches

The Add option in the SURF DEFINE menu brings up the SRF OPTS menu with the following options:
· Extrude—Create the surface by extruding the sketched section to a specified depth in the direction normal
to the sketching plane.
· Revolve—Create the surface by rotating the sketched section by a specified angle around the first centerline
sketched when sketching the section.
· Sweep—Create the surface as a result of sweeping a sketched section along a specified trajectory.
· Blend—Create a smooth surface connecting several sketched sections.
· Flat—Create a planar datum surface by sketching its boundaries.
· Copy—Create a datum surface by copying surfaces of the reference part.
· Fillet—Create a surface-to-surface round between the surfaces of the reference part or between other
patches of the Mill Surface.
· Advanced—Create a complex surface, for example, using datum curves, multiple trajectories.
The Copy option is especially instrumental in Pro/NC, since it allows you to reference geometry of the design
model.
Example: Gathering a Mill Surface

The following illustration shows an example of gathering a Mill Surface using Surf & Bnd.
1 2
4
3
1 Select seed surface

2 Resulting Mill Surface
202 Pro/NC
3 Select bounding surface
4 NOTE: Surfaces are meshed for better visibility. You will not see the Mill Surface like this: it will be
indicated by "open" edges displayed in yellow, and silhouette and intersection lines—in magenta.
To Create a Sloped Mill Surface

1. On the MFG GEOMETRY menu, click Mill Surface > Create and type a name for the Mill Surface.
2. On the SURF DEFINE menu, click Add > Advanced | Done > Sloped | Done.
The Mill Surface for Slope Control dialog box opens with the following elements:
- Surfaces—Specify the set of surfaces to be initially included in the Mill Surface definition.
- Direction—Specify a direction for measuring the slope angle.
- Angle—Specify the slope angle.
- Steep/Shallow—Specify whether you want to keep the steep or the shallow side.
3. Define the Surfaces element. You can include the surfaces using any combination of the following options:
- Indiv Surfs—Select individual surfaces one-by-one.
- Surf & Bnd—Gather surfaces to be included by selecting the seed surface and the bounding surfaces.
- Loop Surfs—Include a closed loop of surfaces by selecting a face they surround.
- Quilt Surfs—Select a Surface feature (for example, an existing Mill Surface) to include all of its
patches.
- Solid Surfs—Select a part to include all of its surfaces.
On the SURF SELECT menu, click Done when finished.
4. Define the Direction element using one of the following options:
- Plane—Select a plane. The system displays a red arrow normal to the plane. Finalize the direction by
using the Flip and Okay options.
- Crv/Edg/Axis—Select a straight edge, curve segment, or a datum axis. The system displays a red
arrow along the selected entity. Finalize the direction by using the Flip and Okay options.
- Csys—Select a coordinate system; then specify which of its axes to use. The system displays a red
arrow along the selected axis. Finalize the direction by using the Flip and Okay options.
5. Define the Angle element by typing a value at the prompt.
6. Define the Steep/Shallow element using one of the following options:
- Keep Steep Side—The system keeps only those portions of the selected surfaces where the angle
between the surface normal and the Direction vector is greater than the specified Angle value.
- Keep Shallow Side—The system keeps only those portions of the selected surfaces where the angle
between the surface normal and the Direction vector is less than the specified Angle value.
7. Click Preview to view the Mill Surface. If satisfied, click OK.
Sloped Mill Surfaces

With Sloped Mill Surfaces you can easily adjust machining strategy for finish milling based on the orientation
of the surface.
When you need to machine a cavity, you may want to use Conventional Surface milling on the bottom of the
cavity and other near-horizontal surfaces, and profile surfaces that are near-vertical, such as cavity walls.
To automate surface selection for each of these machining strategies, use a Sloped Mill Surface. Indicate all the
surfaces that you want to consider for machining (for example, all the surfaces inside a cavity, or even all the
surfaces of the part), and specify a direction vector and the desired slope angle. The system filters selected
surfaces based on the angular orientation of the surface normal with respect to the direction vector. You can
then specify whether you want to keep the "shallow" portion of the surfaces (for Conventional Surface milling),
or the "steep" portion (for Profiling).
You can use similar technique when machining the outside of a part.
Pro/NC 203
Example: Creating a Sloped Mill Surface
1. Create a parent Mill Surface by gathering all surfaces in the pocket, as shown below. Select surface (1) as
the seed surface, and the top and front surfaces (2) as bounding surfaces.
The resulting Mill Surface is shown in blue in the next illustration.

2. Create a new Mill Surface using the Sloped option. To define the Surfaces element, use the Quilt Surfs
option and select the parent Mill Surface. Use the Z-axis of the coordinate system to define Direction (the
direction vector is shown in red) and type 45 to specify Angle.
204 Pro/NC
3. Choose Keep Shallow Side. The resulting Mill Surface is shown in blue in the following illustration.
4. To define a complementary Mill Surface for Profiling, repeat Step 2 and then choose Keep Steep Side. The
resulting Mill Surface is shown in blue in the following illustration.
5. Create the NC sequences using the appropriate Sloped Mill Surface.
To Define Mill Surface as Machinable Surface

1. Choose Mfg Setup from the MANUFACTURE or MACHINING menu, then choose Mfg Geometry.
3. Choose Create and enter a name for the surface.
Pro/NC 205
4. When the SURF DEFINE menu comes up for the first time, the only option available is Add. It allows you to
create the base patch of the Mill Surface.
Once the first surface patch is created, you can use other SURF DEFINE options: extend its edges, trim it, or
add other patches and include them in the Mill Surface definition by merging.
Note: Mill Surface can also be created "on the fly" when defining a Surface milling NC sequence. The
techniques are the same.
5. From SRF OPTIONS choose Advanced, and from ADV FEAT OPT, choose Machinable Area. The
SURFACES: Machinable Area Dialog Box will open.
6. Define the following elements: Machine Srf, Check Srf, Tool Radius, Tool Axis. Note that Srf Option is
already defined.
7. After all elements have been defined you can examine the created surface by clicking the Preview button.
Click the OK button to confirm that the surface has been created successfully.
Machinable Area Mill Surface

There are cases where you may wish to add your own toolpath strategies to the internal surface model, An
advanced mill surface type "by tool contact" will give you access to the mechanisms that create explicit surface
representations of the local machining remainder area and to the cutline milling machinable area. This mill
surface is made available under the Advanced option of the mill surface definition. Elements defined that you
define include: Selected Surface, Check Surface, Tool Radius, and Tool Orientation.
To Extend Edges of a Mill Surface

The Extend option allows you to extend all or specified edges of the current Mill Surface by a specified
distance or up to a selected planar surface or datum plane.
To Merge Patches of a Mill Surface

When you create additional patches using the Add option, they are not automatically included into the Mill
Surface definition. You have to connect them with the base quilt (the one that includes the first added surface)
by joining or intersecting.
To Trim a Mill Surface

The Trim option allows you to access the Surface Trim functionality.
To Shade a Mill Surface

In order to better see a Mill Surface definition, you can shade the surface. This functionality is available only at
setup time (you cannot shade a surface when creating an NC sequence).
1. Choose Mfg Setup from the MANUFACTURE or MACHINING menu, then Mfg Geometry.
3. Choose Shade from the MILL SURFACE menu.
4. Select the name of the surface to shade.
The screen is repainted to display only the shaded image of the selected surface.
5. Choose Continue to select another surface for shading, or choose Done/Return to finish.
Modifying Mill Surfaces

A Mill Surface is not a single feature: rather, it is a name of a set of features which will be referenced by a Mill
Volume or by a milling NC sequence. Each action used in creating a Mill Surface (adding, merging, extending)
will produce a separate feature (similar to Mill Volumes). For example, if you add a surface, silhouette trim it,
and then extend the edges, three features will be added to the workpiece.
206 Pro/NC
Mill Surfaces, or their portions, can be deleted or suppressed by deleting/suppressing the appropriate feature(s)
on the workpiece. Features can be selected by clicking on the patches (use Query Sel if necessary), or by
feature number. Dimensions of a Mill Surface can be modified using the Modify Dim option.
Note: There is a special technique of reordering Mill Surfaces. Click See Also for details.
You can modify any Mill Surface using the Modify Surf option in the MILL SURFACE menu.
To Modify a Mill Surface

1. Choose Mfg Setup > Mfg Geometry > Mill Surface > Modify Surf.
2. Select the name of the Mill Surface from the namelist menu. The current surface definition is displayed.
3. Use options from the SURF DEFINE menu to change the surface definition.
Note: A Mill Surface created or selected for a Surface milling NC sequence can be modified "on the fly"
using the Modify Srf option in the DEFINE SRF menu. All changes made at this time will stay after the NC
sequence is completed.
You can turn off the Mill Surface display using the Blank option. After you choose it, the namelist menu of
displayed Mill Surfaces and volumes appears; select the surface name. A blanked Mill Surface can later be
displayed using the Unblank option.
Mill Surfaces can be renamed using the same procedure as Mill Volumes.
About Turning NC Sequences

To access Turn type NC sequences, you must be in a Lathe or Mill/Turn workcell (if Mill/Turn, choose TURN
when starting to create an NC sequence). The following NC sequence types are available:
· Area—Define the area in the model cross section where you want the material to be removed. The tool path
will be generated by scanning this area to remove material in step depth increments. Use for rough cut
turning.
· 4 Axis Area—(Appears in 4-Axis workcells only.) Define the NC sequence the same as regular Area
turning, above. The system will automatically generate the tool path for two synchronized heads.
· Profile—Interactively define the cut motion(s) by either sketching or using surfaces or datum curves.
· Groove—Turn narrow grooves using a tool with cutting edges on both sides and a peck-type motion.
· Thread—Cut threads on a lathe.
· Holemaking—Drill, bore, and so on.
For each of the turning NC sequences, you define the cut geometry by creating or selecting a Turn Profile. The
system will attempt to automatically determine the location of the area of the cut with respect to the Turn
Profile; in case of ambiguity, it will prompt you to select the material side by flipping an arrow. The cut will be
created on the opposite side of the Turn Profile. Depending on the type of NC sequence, you may then have to
further define the cut by specifying the stock boundary and cut extensions.
To Set Up the Coordinate System for Correct CL

Output
In Pro/NC, the NC Sequence coordinate system must have the Z-axis colinear with the turning axis; thus the
turning cut is sketched in the ZX plane. If your post-processor requires XY input, set up separate Machine and
NC Sequence coordinate systems, with the Machine coordinate system axes pointing in the desired directions
for correct post-processing. In this case the system will output CL data in the XY coordinates without the
transformation vector (i,j,k).
Pro/NC 207
The following illustration shows setting coordinate systems for XY output.
1 NC Sequence coordinate system orientation

2 Machine coordinate system orientation
The Machine coordinate system can be created at any location and using any option, as long as its axes point in
the appropriate directions. An easy way to create a Machine coordinate system by referencing the NC Sequence
coordinate system is described below.
1. Orient the NC Sequence coordinate system so that the Z-axis is colinear with the turning axis and points
away from the lathe headstock.
2. Create another coordinate system using the Offset option and select the NC Sequence coordinate system.
3. Choose Rotate from the MOVE menu.
4. Choose Y Axis and enter [-90].
5. Choose Z Axis and enter [-90].
6. Choose Done Move from the MOVE menu. The coordinate system is created.
Note: If there is no translational offset, the NC Sequence coordinate system will not be visible after the
Machine coordinate system is created. Use Sel By Menu for coordinate system selection.
To Define a Turning Envelope

1. On the MANUFACTURE menu, click Mfg Model > Turning Envelope.
The ROT ENVLP menu opens with the following commands:
- Create Envelope—Create a Turning Envelope of the reference part or the workpiece.
- Redefine Envelope—Redefine an existing Turning Envelope. You can either change the name of the
envelope or redefine the envelope itself by using a different coordinate system.
- Delete Envelope—Delete an existing Turning Envelope.
2. Click Create Envelope.
3. Select what type of envelope you want to create:
- Ref Envlp—Create a Turning Envelope of the reference part.
- Stock Envlp—Create a Turning Envelope of the workpiece.
Click Done.
The CURVE: Turn Profile dialog box opens. It contains the following elements:
- Name—The Turning Envelope is created with a default name, such as REF_ENVLP_00 or
STOCK_ENVLP_00. To change the default name, select the Name element, click Define, and type the
new name.
- Csys—Specify the coordinate system.
208 Pro/NC
4. Select or create the coordinate system.
The system generates the Turning Envelope by intersecting the rotational outline of the specified model
with the XZ plane of the selected coordinate system.
5. Click Preview to view the Turning Envelope.
6. Click OK.
Using Turning Envelopes

Turning Envelopes are intended for use primarily when machining parts with a non-circular cross section. The
system generates a Turning Envelope by rotating the reference part or the workpiece about the turning axis (that
is, about the z-axis of the Turning Envelope coordinate system), and then intersecting the outside perimeter of
the rotated shape with the XZ plane of this coordinate system. The resulting chain of entities can be used to
define a Turn Profile or a Stock Boundary.
You can also use the Turning Envelope functionality if you are machining a circular part with a very complex
profile. To simplify defining the Turn Profiles for such a part, you can create a Reference Envelope and then
define the Turn Profiles by using the Select Ref Envlp command and selecting the appropriate chains on the
Reference Envelope.
Stock Boundary and Cut Extensions

The Turn Profile for Area and Groove turning is defined by specifying the final stock outline. The system then
determines the area of the cut by extending the two endpoints of this outline in the specified direction up to the
boundaries of the workpiece cross section. However, if the workpiece has no geometry, or in case of assembly
machining, the system cannot make any assumptions as to the current workpiece outline. Therefore, you will
have to explicitly define the stock boundary, that is, the outward boundaries of the cut, by using the Stock
Bound option in the INT CUT menu. The graphic below illustrates how the cut area is determined.
Note: Turning NC sequences intersecting workpiece boundaries can not be created on a manufacturing
model with multiple workpieces, unless you define a stock boundary section. However, if a manufacturing
model has multiple reference parts and a single workpiece, turning NC sequences can be created without
sketching a stock boundary.
6
3
4
1
5
2
7 9
8
10 11
1 Cut extensions
2 Cut sketch
3 Workpiece
Pro/NC 209
4 Cut extensions
5 Cut sketch
6 Stock boundary sketch
7 Reference part
8 Cut area
9 Reference part
10 Regular part manufacturing: the workpiece cross section is automatically used as stock boundary
11 Workpiece has no geometry: you have to sketch the stock boundary
Defining the Stock Boundary in Part and Assembly

Machining
With the Stock Bound option, you can sketch the outward boundaries of the cut for an Area or Groove turning
NC sequence. In Assembly machining, you also have an option to select a workpiece whose cross section will
define the stock boundary. For Assembly machining, or if the workpiece has no geometry, the Stock Bound
option is selected automatically. It can also be used in regular part manufacturing if you don’t want to use the
workpiece cross section to determine the area of the cut.
Note: Since the area of the cut is determined using the workpiece cross section, it is recommended that you
perform material removal for each NC sequence right after it is created, to avoid air machining in
subsequent NC sequences. If you do not want to perform material removal, use the Stock Bound option to
define the new stock outline.
To Define the Stock Boundary

1. On the INT CUT menu, click Stock Bound.
2. The ADD BOUND menu opens with the following commands:
- Select—(Available for Assembly machining only.) Select a workpiece whose cross section will define
the stock boundary. If only one workpiece is present in the manufacturing model, it will be selected
automatically.
- Sketch—Sketch the stock boundary. Pro/NC reorients the model so that the XZ plane of the NC
Sequence coordinate system is parallel to the screen and displays the Sketcher side bar. Select the
Sketcher references, sketch the outward boundaries of the cut, dimension as necessary, then click
on the Sketcher side bar.
- Stock Envelope—Create a rotational envelope of the workpiece and use it as the stock boundary.
Pro/NC will automatically use the NC Sequence coordinate system as the Turning Envelope coordinate
system. Click See Also for details.
210 Pro/NC
Example: Using Stock Boundary for Area Turning
3
1
1 Cut extensions
2 Cut sketch
3 Stock boundary sketch
4 Reference part
To Change the Stock Boundary Outline

You can change the stock boundary outline at any time; however, it will automatically cause the cut definition
to be regenerated. The system will issue a warning and prompt if you want to continue. If you answer "yes", the
STOCK BOUND menu will appear:
· Add—Modify the stock boundary definition. You will have a choice of Select (for Assembly machining
only), Sketch, and Stock Envelope options. If you use Sketch and the current stock boundary is sketched,
the old sketch will be retrieved for you to modify (if you want to start a new sketch, use the Remove option
first). Note that only one stock boundary definition can exist at a time; therefore, choosing Add actually
replaces the old definition with a new one.
· Remove—Remove the stock boundary definition. In regular Part machining (when the workpiece has
geometry), the system will the use the workpiece cross section as a stock boundary. In assembly machining,
or if the workpiece does not have geometry, you have to supply another definition using the Add option.
· Show—Display the current stock boundary definition.
· Done—The system recalculates the cut area using the new stock boundary definition.
To Define the Cut Extensions

Cut extensions have to be specified for Area and Groove turning NC sequences. They define the area of the cut
and the approach of the tool. After you define the cut by either creating or selecting a Turn Profile, endpoints of
the cut are highlighted, an arrow shows the default cut extension direction, and you are prompted to specify the
cut extensions. You can do this by selecting options from the EXT DIR menu:
· Positive Z—Extend the cut at the highlighted endpoint parallel to the turning axis, in the direction of the Z-
axis of the NC sequence coordinate system.
· Negative Z—Extend the cut at the highlighted endpoint parallel to the turning axis, in the direction opposite
to that of the Z-axis of the NC sequence coordinate system.
· Positive X—Extend the cut at the highlighted endpoint perpendicular to the turning axis, in the direction of
the X-axis of the NC sequence coordinate system.
· Negative X—Extend the cut at the highlighted endpoint perpendicular to the turning axis, in the direction
opposite to that of the X-axis of the NC sequence coordinate system.
Pro/NC 211
· None—Do not extend the cut at the highlighted endpoint. None is generally used with facing NC sequences
to specify no cut extension at the endpoint closest to the turning axis. The tool retracts once the cut reaches
this endpoint.
Note: If the cut endpoint for a facing NC sequence is located on the turning axis, you have to specify None
for cut extension at this point.
To Adjust Cut Motion Ends

You can extend or trim the ends of a cut motion after selecting or creating the Turn Profile using the following
procedure.
1. On the INT CUT menu, click Ends.
2. Click Start to adjust the start point.
3. Choose one of:
- On—Place the start point of the cut motion at the start of the defined trajectory (the default).
- Specify—Move the start point along the defined trajectory. When you select this option, the start point
of the cut motion starts following the mouse (along the cut motion, if trimmed, and tangent to the first
segment, if extended).
4. If the cut motion is adjusted using Specify, select the dimensioning type:
- Ext Length—Type the extension length along the chain, that is, length ratio of the added or subtracted
segment to the original length of the cut motion. Positive value corresponds to extended cut motion,
negative—to a trimmed one.
- Offset Plane—Select a plane to measure offset from, then type the offset value. Positive value means
that the offset is to the positive side of the surface (away from the solid material).
- Offset Csys—Select a coordinate system to measure offset from. Select axis along which to measure
the offset, then type the offset value. Positive value means the positive axis direction.
5. Click End to adjust the end point and repeat Steps 3 and 4.

Corner conditions can be specified for Area, Profile, and Groove turning, to avoid gouging sharp convex
corners, as well as to easily add necessary fillets and chamfers at the time of machining.
The following types of corner conditions are available in Turning:
· Fillet—A fillet which can be added both at concave and convex corners. The fillet radius is defined by
either the CONCAVE_RADIUS or the CONVEX_RADIUS parameter, depending on the type of the corner.
· Chamfer—A chamfer which can be added both at concave and convex corners. The chamfer size is defined
by the CHAMFER_DIM parameter, which represents the distance cut on each side of the corner.
The graphic below illustrates the corner condition types.
1 3
4
2 5
6 8
7 9
10 11
1 Tool path
2 R
3 Tool path
212 Pro/NC
4 d
5 d
6 Part
7 Fillet
8 Fillet
9 Chamfer
10 R = CONVEX_RADIUS
11 d = CHAMFER_DIM
For Area turning, both the rough and profile passes will take the corner condition into account.
1 2
1 Profile pass
2 Rough passes
3 Part
4 Chamfer corner condition added here

1. On the INT CUT menu, click Corners.
options:
each selection, the corner condition will be added at the selected point. Choose Done Sel when
finished.
- Automatic—Corner conditions will be automatically added at all the corners. You will be prompted to
specify the desired type of corner condition for all concave corners, then for all convex corners.
SELECT menu:
- Show All—Display all the currently added corner conditions. Convex corner conditions will be
highlighted in red, concave—in cyan.
Pro/NC 213
Local Stock Allowance
In general, the amount of stock left after a rough cut or semi-finish NC sequence is controlled by the following
manufacturing parameters: ROUGH_STOCK_ALLOW, PROF_STOCK_ALLOW, and Z_STOCK_ALLOW.
They specify the stock allowance for all the surfaces machined in this NC sequence. In some cases, however,
you may need to specify a different value of stock allowance for certain surfaces; for example, to leave extra
stock for subsequent grinding operations, or adjust stock allowance prior to heat treatment.
You can specify local stock allowance by selecting a chain of segments on a Turn Profile and entering a value
that will apply to this chain only. This functionality is available for Area, 4 Axis Area, Groove, and Profile
Turning.
To Specify Local Stock Allowance

1. On the INT CUT menu, click Stock Allow.
2. Click Define. In Area, 4 Axis Area, and Groove Turning, you can specify separate local stock allowance for
Rough and Profile cuts by using the Rough Portion or Profile Portion option, respectively.
3. Select a chain of entities on the Turn Profile by using the From-To option and selecting two vertices (or
choose Select All), and enter a value for local stock allowance.
The system displays the expected final tool pass by applying the values listed below and the local stock
allowance you specified to the Turn Profile:
- For Rough Portion and for Profile Turning—Ends adjustments, corner conditions,
ROUGH_STOCK_ALLOW, Z_STOCK_ALLOW.
- For Profile Portion—Ends adjustments, corner conditions, PROF_STOCK_ALLOW,
Z_STOCK_ALLOW.
4. Repeat Step 3 to apply other local stock allowances, or choose Done/Return to finish.
Note: You can not apply more than one local stock allowance to the same entity.
5. The following options are available to manipulate existing local stock allowances:
- Modify—All local stock allowance values are displayed. Use the Dimension option, select a value you
want to modify, and enter a new value. You can also modify the underlying parameter values: use the
Parameter option, check off the stock allowance parameter(s) you want to modify, and enter the new
value(s).
- Remove—Select the pair(s) of vertices where local stock allowance is specified (you can also use
Select All). Once you remove a pair, stock allowance control reverts to parameter values.
- Info—Displays the expected final tool pass, along with stock allowance values.
To Specify the Tool Orientation

The orientation of a Turning tool can be controlled by the NC sequence parameter TOOL_ORIENTATION.
The default value for this parameter is 90 degrees, which in most cases orients the tool properly to machine the
outside and face surfaces of the workpiece. To machine the inside surfaces of a cored workpiece, you may need
to change the TOOL_ORIENTATION value to 0. The actual tool orientation is also affected by the turret head
number (Head 1 or Head 2), as well as the holder type (Left or Right). You can preview the tool orientation in
the Preview window of the Tool Setup dialog box.
You can mirror the tool about its vertical axis by setting the Holder_Type parameter to Right. This allows you
to perform back turning of diameters behind the shoulders of parts.
214 Pro/NC
1 2
1 Holder_Type Right
2 Holder_Type Right
To Use Multi-Head Turning

If 4-Axis turning is available in the current workcell, the HEAD 1 and HEAD 2 options will allow you to
specify which head is to be used for the NC sequence (HEAD 1 is the default).
You can synchronize CL output of NC sequences created using Head1 with NC sequences performed on Head2
by using the Synchronize option in the MACHINING menu.
If you perform 4 Axis Area turning, the HEAD1 and HEAD2 options are grayed out, because the system will
automatically use both heads for this NC sequence.
Area Turning
Area turning allows you to define the area in the model cross section where you want the material to be
removed. The tool path will be generated by scanning this area to remove material in step depth increments.
You can control how the intermediate reference part diameters are machined using the combination of the
STEP_DEPTH and MIN_STEP_DEPTH parameters. Pro/NC will generate passes at STEP_DEPTH until a
reference part diameter is located. It will then calculate the depth of a pass at this diameter plus stock allowance,
and compare the distance between that pass and the previous one to MIN_STEP_DEPTH. If this distance is
more than MIN_STEP_DEPTH, the system will make the pass along the diameter, and the scanning algorithm
will start from this pass. If the distance is smaller than MIN_STEP_DEPTH, the diameter pass is ignored and
the scanning algorithm continues from the previous pass.
The MIN_STEP_DEPTH parameter values have the following meaning:
· MIN_STEP_DEPTH = 0—Machine all diameters to stock allowance. This is the default ("-").
· 0 < MIN_STEP_DEPTH < STEP_DEPTH—Intermediate diameters will be machined to stock allowance if
the distance from the previous pass is more than MIN_STEP_DEPTH.
· MIN_STEP_DEPTH = STEP_DEPTH—Only the final diameter will be machined to stock allowance. All
the other passes will be at STEP_DEPTH distance from each other. If you specify MIN_STEP_DEPTH >
STEP_DEPTH, an error message will be issued, and all the passes will be at STEP_DEPTH.
To Create an Area Turning NC Sequence

1. On the MACHINING menu, click NC Sequence > Area | Done. You must be in a Lathe or Mill/Turn
workcell.
Pro/NC 215
2. If you have specified the tool, site, and coordinate systems at setup time, you do not have to click Seq Setup
at this point, and can proceed directly to step 3. If you click Seq Setup, the SEQ SETUP menu will contain
the common options, available for all the NC sequence types.
Select the desired options and click Done. The system will start the user interface for all selected options in
turn.
3. On the NC SEQUENCE menu, click Customize.
4. Select Automatic Cut from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click Insert.
5. If the stock boundary is not defined, the system selects the Stock Bound command on the INT CUT menu.
Specify the stock boundary.
6. The system selects the Turn Profile command on the INT CUT menu and displays the TURN PROFILE
menu. Select or create a Turn Profile.
7. The system selects the Extensions command on the INT CUT menu and displays the EXT DIR menu.
Specify the cut extensions.
8. You can use the other commands on the INT CUT menu:
- Ends—Extend or trim the ends of the cut section. Turning extensions will be applied to the adjusted
ends of the cut section, as specified.
- Corners—Specify the corner conditions, if desired.
- Stock Allow—Specify local stock allowances, if desired.
- Parameters—Adjust the cut motion parameters, if necessary.
9. Click Done Cut. The system creates an Automatic Cut and a Follow Cut motion.
10. Create additional Approach and Exit motions, if needed, by selecting the appropriate options from the drop-
down list in the Customize dialog box.
11. When satisfied with the tool path, click OK.
12. On the NC SEQUENCE menu, click Done Seq or Next Seq.
Example: Face Area Turning

The following illustration shows an example of face Area turning. Sketch the Turn Profile above the centerline
representing the turning axis. Specify the cut extensions as shown.
1 Positive X
2 Turn Profile
3 None
216 Pro/NC
Example: Outside Area Turning
The following example shows Area turning of the outside surfaces of the workpiece. In this example, the area of
the cut is extended past the surface boundary of the reference model by adjusting the Ends of the Automatic Cut
motion.
1. Define the Turn Profile by selecting surfaces of the reference part and specify the cut extensions as shown in
the following illustration.
1
2
1 Positive X
2 Turn Profile
3 Positive Z
2. On the INT CUT menu, click Ends > Start > Specify | Done. Use the mouse to extend the Turn Profile to
the left, as shown in the following illustration. On the END DIM TYPE menu, click Ext Length and accept
the default value.
Pro/NC 217
The resulting tool path is shown in the following illustration.
Example: Inside Area Turning

To turn the inside surfaces of a cored workpiece, set the TOOL_ORIENTATION parameter value to 0. Then
define the Turn Profile and cut extensions as shown in the following illustration.
2
3
1
1 Negative Z
2 Turn Profile
3 Positive Z
To Create a 4 Axis Area Turning NC Sequence

With the 4 Axis Area option, available in 4-axis workcells only, you can define an Area turning NC sequence
with two synchronized heads simultaneously machining the area.
1. On the MACHINING menu, click NC Sequence > 4 Axis Area | Done. You must be in a 2-turret Lathe or a
Mill/Turn workcell. Note that once you click 4 Axis Area, the HEAD1 and HEAD2 options become
unavailable, because the system will use both heads for this NC sequence.
2. Follow the procedure for defining an Area turning NC sequence. When you are finished, the system
automatically generates the tool path for two synchronized heads.
218 Pro/NC
Example: 4 Axis Area Turning
1 2
1 Tool path display in process

2 Tool path display completed
Profile Turning
Profile turning allows you to interactively specify the cut motion trajectory. When defining cut motions, the
On/Offset option in the INT CUT menu provides you with the following choice:
· Offset (default)—The turn profile represents the finished geometry, that is, the trajectory of the tip of the
tool cutting material. This means that if the OUTPUT_POINT parameter is set to CENTER (the default), the
cut motion will be automatically offset by NOSE_RADIUS in the appropriate direction from the specified
trajectory (up for outside turning, down—for inside, to the right—for face turning). If OUTPUT_POINT is
TIP, no offset will be applied.
· On—The turn profile represents the trajectory of the tool control point. No offset will be applied when
creating the cut motion.
Example: Profile Turning

The following illustration shows Profile turning of outside surfaces using the Offset option.
1 Automatic Cut motion 2

2 Automatic Cut motion 1
Pro/NC 219
To Create a Profile Turning NC Sequence
1. On the MACHINING menu, click NC Sequence > Profile | Done. You must be in a Lathe or Mill/Turn
workcell.
turn.
5. The system displays the TURN PROFILE menu. Select or create a Turn Profile.
6. By default, the cut motion will be offset from the Turn Profile by NOSE_RADIUS (if the OUTPUT_POINT
parameter is set to CENTER). If you want the Turn Profile to represent the trajectory of the tool control
point, rather than the finished geometry, on the INT CUT menu, click On/Offset > On. The cut motion will
then coincide with the Turn Profile.
7. Adjust the cut motion ends, if needed, and specify corner conditions. You can also specify local stock
allowances, if desired. Connect the cut motions using the Tool Motion functionality.
Groove Turning
Groove turning is performed with a different type of tool, which has cutting edges on both sides. Note that the
tool origin is at the center of the left-side nose radius.
For Groove turning, the tool always cuts normal to the groove bottom. The distance between two neighboring
cuts is defined by the STEP_OVER parameter, the height of retract between the cuts (the system start level) is
set to CLEAR_DIST. The final retract is controlled by the PULLOUT_DIST parameter. If you specify the
ROUGH_OPTION parameter value as ROUGH_&_PROF, the tool will also make a profiling pass across the
groove. The ROUGH_STOCK_ALLOW and PROF_STOCK_ALLOW parameters define the amount of stock
to be left for the finishing NC sequence.
1
4
1 PULLOUT_DIST
2 STEP_OVER
3 System start level
4 CLEAR_DIST
5 Profiling pass
The SCAN_TYPE value TYPE_ONE_DIR allows you to start the rough grooving NC sequence at one side of
the groove and move to the other side, while with TYPE_1 (the default) the tool starts in the middle and moves
to each of the sides in turn. If you want to start from the other side, set CUT_DIRECTION to REVERSE. To
220 Pro/NC
ensure uniform stock allowance on the sides of the groove after the rough pass, set SCAN_TYPE to
TYPE_1_CONNECT.
The following illustration shows scan types for Rough Groove turning.
42 1 35 5 4 3 2 1 2
1
3 4
1 Profiling pass
2 Profiling pass
3 SCAN_TYPE TYPE_1
4 SCAN_TYPE TYPE_ONE_DIR
Peck Cycle
The peck cycle (illustrated by the following graphic) will be performed for rough groove turning only if the
PECK_DEPTH parameter is set to a value other than 0 (0 is the default):
1. The tool is positioned at the CLEAR_DIST level above the top of the groove.
2. Cut to the PECK_DEPTH offset below the top of the groove.
3. Retract by PULLOUT_DIST.
4. Cut to the (PECK_DEPTH * 2) offset below the top of the groove, retract by PULLOUT_DIST.
5. If FULL_RETRACT_DEPTH is other than 0 (the default), the tool will retract all the way back to
CLEAR_DIST upon reaching this depth below the top of the groove. After retracting, the tool will return
rapidly and proceed cutting at peck increments.
6. Upon reaching the bottom of the groove (plus ROUGH_STOCK_ALLOW, if any), the tool will dwell (if
DELAY is not "-"), retract back to the CLEAR_DIST level (8), step over (9), and continue from Step 1.
Pro/NC 221
1
2
1 2
3 5
3 4
4
6
5 7
8
6
9 10
8
7
11
1 CLEAR_DIST
2 PECK_DEPTH
3 PULLOUT_DIST
4 PECK_DEPTH
5 FULL_RETRACT_DEPTH
6 CLEAR_DIST
7 FULL_RETRACT_DEPTH
8 STOCK_ALLOW
9 CLEAR_DIST
10 CLEAR_DIST
11 STEP_OVER
Finish Groove Turning

To perform finish Groove turning, set the ROUGH_OPTION parameter to PROF_ONLY. The tool then starts
at CLEAR_DIST above the top of the groove, goes down one side of the groove, cuts across the bottom, and
retracts by PULLOUT_DIST, leaving a quality surface finish. The GROOVE_FINISH_TYPE parameter allows
you to specify an intermediate retract when the tool goes along the profile. If it is set to CONTINUOUS, the
tool will enter the groove on one side, cut across, and exit on the other side. If NO_BACKCUT (the default) is
set, the tool will enter the groove on one side, retract at some intermediate point along the groove profile, enter
on the other side and complete the cut. The retract point can be controlled by parameter SIDEWALL_OFFSET,
which specifies the length of the second portion of the cut, that is, the distance between the point of retract and
the end of the bottom of the groove. If the SIDEWALL_OFFSET is "-" (the default), it will be ignored and the
tool will retract at the midpoint of the bottom entity. The GROOVE_FINISH_TYPE and SIDEWALL_OFFSET
parameters have the same effect on the profiling pass of a rough groove turning NC sequence (if
ROUGH_OPTION is set to ROUGH_&_PROF).
222 Pro/NC
Note: Finish turning NC sequences created prior to Release 12.0 cannot be redefined.
The following illustration shows Finish Groove turning.
1
2
4
3
5
6 7
1 PULLOUT_DIST
2 CLEAR_DIST
3 PULLOUT_DIST
4 CLEAR_DIST
5 SIDEWALL_OFFSET
6 ROUGH_OPTION PROF_ONLY GROOVE_FINISH_TYPE CONTINUOUS
7 ROUGH_OPTION PROF_ONLY
GROOVE_FINISH_TYPE NO_BACKCUT
To Create a Groove Turning NC Sequence

1. On the MACHINING menu, click NC Sequence > Groove | Done. You must be in a Lathe or Mill/Turn
workcell.
turn.
5. If the stock boundary is not defined, the system selects the Stock Bound command on the INT CUT menu.
Specify the stock boundary.
6. The system selects the Turn Profile command on the INT CUT menu and displays the TURN PROFILE
menu. Select or create a Turn Profile.
7. The system selects the Extensions command on the INT CUT menu and displays the EXT DIR menu.
Specify the cut extensions.
8. You can use the other commands on the INT CUT menu:
- Ends—Extend or trim the ends of the cut section. Turning extensions will be applied to the adjusted
ends of the cut section, as specified.
- Corners—Specify the corner conditions, if desired.
- Stock Allow—Specify local stock allowances, if desired.
- Parameters—Adjust the cut motion parameters, if necessary.
9. Click Done Cut. The system creates an Automatic Cut and a Follow Cut motion.
10. Create additional Approach and Exit motions, if needed, by selecting the appropriate options from the drop-
down list in the Customize dialog box.
11. When satisfied with the tool path, click OK.
Pro/NC 223
12. On the NC SEQUENCE menu, click Done Seq or Next Seq.
Thread Turning
Thread NC sequences are used to cut threads on a lathe. The threads can be external and internal, blind and
through. This NC sequence does not remove any material from the workpiece on the screen. The proper cutter
path will, however, be generated.
A Thread NC sequence is defined by sketching the first tool movement, which corresponds to the major
diameter for an external thread and to the minor diameter for an internal thread. The final thread depth is
calculated using the THREAD_FEED parameter.
Pro/NC supports ISO standard thread output as well as AI Macro output.
You can reference geometry of existing Thread cosmetic features, created in Part mode. It is especially
convenient for blind threads.
To Create a Thread Turning NC Sequence

1. On the MACHINING menu, click NC Sequence > Thread | Done. You must be in a Lathe or Mill/Turn
workcell.
2. Specify the thread type by selecting Unified, Acme, Buttress, or General; the thread orientation by
selecting Outside, Inside, or Face; and the output type by selecting ISO or AI Macro; then click Done.
contain the following specific option:
Turn Profile—Select or create a Turn Profile. The Turn Profile must consist of a single line, which
represents the first tool motion. For an external thread, the line must correspond to the major diameter; for
an internal thread—to the minor diameter.
either modify the parameters, or use the Customize functionality.
Note: By default, thread cutting is performed in the negative Z-direction of the NC sequence coordinate
system. To reverse the direction, use a right-handed tool.
Examples: Thread Turning

The following illustration shows defining a Thread NC sequence for an external blind thread.
1 Sketch this line
224 Pro/NC
The following illustration shows defining a Thread NC sequence for an internal through thread.
1 Use Edge
The following illustration shows referencing a Thread cosmetic feature.
1 Use Edge
To Create a Facing Thread Turning NC Sequence

A facing thread NC sequence, consisting of a single radial tool move, can be created using the general
procedure of creating a Thread Turning NC Sequence. Choose Face as the tread orientation option, and sketch
the line representing the tool movement at the final thread depth off the face of the part. This NC sequence will
output the OP / THREAD, FACE, and appropriate GOTO commands instead of THREAD/AUTO. You must
specify a nonzero value for THREAD_FEED.
To Perform the Remainder Material Analysis

When turning complicated parts that contain a number of shoulders or small concave elements, it is likely that
certain tools will not be able to completely machine a selected turn profile because of reach problems. In
addition, poor slice distribution may result in larger material remainder values than those specified in the
parameter settings. When displaying the tool path for a Turning NC sequence, you can now perform a color-
coded graphical analysis of the remaining material.
1. Display the tool path.
2. In the PLAY PATH dialog box, click View > Show Remaining Material.
The system highlights the portions of the Turn Profile where the tool path did not provide specified stock
allowance and displays an error dialog box that explains the meaning of the different color-coded segments.
If there is no remainder material left, the system displays a message "No under-machined regions found."
About Turn Profile

To define cut geometry for a Turning NC sequence, you have to create a Turn Profile. A Turn Profile is a
separate feature (similar to a Mill Volume or Mill Window), which you can define either at setup time or when
you define an NC sequence. You can then reference the Turn Profile in more than one Turning NC sequence.
Pro/NC 225
This functionality enables you to define the cut references once, and then use this definition to create rough,
semi-finish, and finish NC sequences.
You can predefine Turn Profiles by choosing the Turn Profile option in the MFG GEOMETRY menu.
A Turn Profile defines the cut geometry for various types of Turning NC sequences in the following manner:
· For Area and Groove turning, you must define the area of the cut by specifying the final stock outline;
usually this is done by specifying the part edges or surfaces to be machined. You can use part edges or
surfaces for rough cuts as well, since the amount of stock left after the rough cut for the finish cut is defined
by the ROUGH_STOCK_ALLOW and PROF_STOCK_ALLOW parameters.
· For Profile turning, you must specify the trajectory of the cut motion for the tool. Then, if the
OUTPUT_POINT parameter is set to CENTER (the default), the cut motion will be automatically offset by
NOSE_RADIUS in the appropriate direction from the specified trajectory (up for Outside turning, down—
for Inside, to the right—for Face). If OUTPUT_POINT is TIP, no offset will be applied.
· For Thread turning, you must specify the first tool movement, which corresponds to the major diameter for
an external thread and to the minor diameter for an internal thread.
To Define a Turn Profile

When you choose Turn Profile from the INT CUT or the MFG GEOMETRY menu, the TURN PROFILE menu
appears with the following options:
· Create Profile—Create a new Turn Profile.
· Select Profile—Select a predefined Turn Profile. Available only at the time of defining an NC sequence.
· Redefine Profile—Redefine an existing Turn Profile. Choose the profile name from a namelist menu.
· Delete Profile—Delete an existing Turn Profile. Available only at setup time. Choose the profile name from
a namelist menu.
To Create a New Turn Profile:
1. Click Create Profile.
2. Select a method of creating the Turn Profile by using one of the following commands on the CREATE
PROFILE menu:
- Sketch—Sketch the profile in the XZ plane of the profile coordinate system.
- Select Surface—Select From and To surfaces, and specify on which side of the centerline the profile is
to be located. The system creates the profile at the intersection of the selected chain of surfaces and the
XZ plane of the profile coordinate system.
- Select Curve—Select segments of a datum curve. You must create the curve before you define the
Turn Profile, for example, by using the Use Xsec option. With this option, you can also select segments
of existing Turn Profiles.
- Section—The system generates a model cross section in the XZ plane of the profile coordinate system.
Select From and To vertices of this cross section, then toggle the chain, if necessary.
- Select Ref Envlp—Select an existing Reference Envelope, then select From and To vertices to specify
the desired portion of this envelope.
- Create Ref Envlp—Create a Reference Envelope, then select From and To vertices to specify the
desired portion of this envelope.
The CURVE: Turn Profile dialog box opens. Depending on the selected method, it will contain some
specific elements, as well as the following common elements:
- Name—The Turn Profile is created with a default name, such as TURN_PROF_000,
TURN_PROF_001, and so on. To change the default name, select the Name element, click Define, and
type the new name.
- Csys—Specify the coordinate system. This element is available only at setup time. When you create a
Turn Profile while defining an NC sequence, Pro/NC uses the NC Sequence coordinate system. If you
are creating the Turn Profile by selecting a Reference Envelope, Pro/NC uses the coordinate system of
the Reference Envelope.
226 Pro/NC
- Adjust Turn Profile—Trim or replace selected portions of the Turn Profile.
3. Define the required elements of the CURVE: Turn Profile dialog box.
4. Click Preview to verify the Turn Profile. Adjust the Turn Profile, if necessary.
5. Click OK.
To Define a Turn Profile by Sketching

1. On the CREATE PROFILE menu, click Sketch | Done.
The CURVE: Turn Profile dialog box opens.
2. If you are defining the Turn Profile at setup time, select or create the coordinate system (at the time of
defining an NC sequence, Pro/NC automatically uses the NC Sequence coordinate system as the Turn
Profile coordinate system).
Pro/NC reorients the model so that the XZ plane of the Turn Profile coordinate system is parallel to the
screen and displays the Sketcher side bar.
3. Select the Sketcher references, sketch the Turn Profile, and dimension as necessary. The sketch must consist
of a single chain of entities. Click Continue to exit Sketcher.
4. Specify the material side by using the Flip and Okay commands. The arrow must point towards the
reference part.
5. Click OK.
Sketching a Turn Profile

When sketching a Turn Profile, keep in mind that the sketch must lie in the XZ plane of the NC Sequence
coordinate system and completely on one side of the x-axis (either positive or negative).
The default orientation of the model upon entering Sketcher is as follows:
· If the workcell is defined as Horizontal—with the z-axis pointing to the right and x-axis pointing up.
· If the workcell is defined as Vertical—with the z-axis pointing up and x-axis pointing to the right.
However, you can sketch in any view orientation of the model provided the XZ plane is parallel to the screen
and the sketch is completely on one side of the NC Sequence x-axis.
The following illustration shows sketching the cut in various view orientations.
1 2
1 Section sketch
2 Section sketch
3 Section sketch
Define a Turn Profile by sketching using the Sketch option in the CREATE PROFILE menu:
· For Area and Groove turning, sketch the final stock outline.
· For Profile turning, sketch the cut motion.
· For Thread turning, sketch the first tool movement, which corresponds to the major diameter for an external
thread and to the minor diameter for an internal thread.
Multiple loops or chains are not allowed when sketching the Turn Profile, that is, the sketch can only contain
one continuous chain of entities. However, you can sketch the final outline for Area or Groove turning so that it
Pro/NC 227
crosses the workpiece boundary (or the Stock Bound section) more than once, thus forming multiple machining
areas.
1
2
1 Workpiece boundary
2 Section sketch
To Define a Turn Profile by Selecting Surfaces

A Turn Profile can also be defined by selecting the start and end surfaces on the reference part. The system will
then machine these two surfaces and all the surfaces in between. If you want to machine one surface only, select
it twice.
1. On the CREATE PROFILE menu, click Select Surface | Done.
3. Select the From surface.
4. Select the To surface.
5. Choose one of:
- Above CtrLn—The cut motion will be created above the centerline, that is, in the positive X area.
- Below CtrLn—The cut motion will be created below the centerline, that is, in the negative X area.
6. Click Done. The system creates an internal cross section of the reference part in the XZ plane of the Turn
Profile coordinate system and selects the appropriate chain of entities in this cross section (between the
selected surfaces in either positive or negative X area) as the Turn Profile.
Example: Defining a Turn Profile by Selecting

Surfaces
The following illustration shows Area turning using surfaces.
1 2
1 To surface
2 From surface
228 Pro/NC
3 Cut extensions
To Define a Turn Profile by Selecting Curves

Turn Profiles are datum curves. With the Select Curve option, you can define new Turn Profiles by selecting
segments from existing Turn Profiles. You can also select segments of other types of datum curves; however,
these datum curves must lie in the XZ plane of the Turn Profile coordinate system.
1. On the CREATE PROFILE menu, click Select Curve | Done.
3. Use the commands on the CHAIN menu to select segments of a datum curve, for example, of an existing
Turn Profile. All segments must form a single continuous chain. Click Done.
4. Specify the material side by using the Flip and Okay commands. The arrow must point towards the
material.
5. Click OK.
Example: Defining a Turn Profile by Section

The following illustration shows Area turning with the Turn Profile defined using Section.
1 2
1 To vertex
2 From vertex
To Define a Turn Profile by Section

If a reference part for turning has a complex contour, the process of defining the cut by selecting edges, or
sketching and aligning, can be time consuming. You can accelerate this process by using the following
technique.
1. On the CREATE PROFILE menu, click Section | Done.
Pro/NC generates a cross section of the model in the XZ plane of the Turn Profile coordinate system and
displays it as a closed loop of cyan entities, with all vertices highlighted in green.
3. Select the From and To vertices on the model cross section.
4. Choose one of:
5. Click Done.
Pro/NC displays a chain of entities between the selected vertices.
6. If the system selected the wrong portion of the cross section loop, click Toggle Profile.
Pro/NC displays the new chain of entities.
Pro/NC 229
7. On the SEL PROFILE menu, click Done/Return.
8. Click OK.
To Define a Turn Profile by Selecting a Reference

Envelope
This option is available only when you have defined a Reference Turning Envelope at setup time. You can then
use this envelope to create multiple Turn Profiles by selecting appropriate chains of entities from the Turning
Envelope.
1. On the CREATE PROFILE menu, click Select Ref Envlp | Done.
2. Select the name of the Reference Envelope from the Names dialog box.
Pro/NC displays the Turning Envelope as a closed loop of cyan entities, with all vertices highlighted in
green.
3. Select the From and To vertices on the Turning Envelope.
4. Choose one of:
5. Click Done.
6. If the system selected the wrong portion of the Turning Envelope, click Toggle Profile.
8. Click OK.
To Define a Turn Profile by Creating a Reference

Envelope
Use this technique if your reference part has a non-circular cross section.
1. On the CREATE PROFILE menu, click Create Ref Envlp | Done.
Pro/NC generates a Turning Envelope of the reference part and displays it as a closed loop of cyan entities,
with all vertices highlighted in green.
3. Select the From and To vertices on the Turning Envelope.
4. Choose one of:
5. Click Done.
6. If the system selected the wrong portion of the Turning Envelope, click Toggle Profile.
8. Click OK.
To Adjust a Turn Profile

You can trim or replace portions of a Turn Profile, for example, to eliminate undercut regions or to simplify
avoiding small grooves.
1. In the CURVE: Turn Profile dialog box, select the Adjust Turn Profile element and click Define.
230 Pro/NC
The Adjust Profile dialog box opens. It contains the following adjustment options:
- Line Connect—Replace a chain on the Turn Profile with a straight line. Specify the chain to replace by
selecting the From and To vertices.
- Trim in Z—Trim the Turn Profile by extending an entity from the selected vertex in the Z direction
until it intersects the Turn Profile.
- Trim in X—Trim the Turn Profile by extending an entity from the selected vertex in the X direction
until it intersects the Turn Profile.
- Trim to Corner—Extend two segments of the Turn Profile at selected endpoints until they form a
corner.
2. To add an adjustment to the Turn Profile, select the desired adjustment option, click the Select arrow next to
the Adjust Profile label, select the appropriate vertices on the Turn Profile, and click Add.
The system displays the name of the adjustment in the list box at the top of the Adjust Profile dialog box.
3. Click Preview to view the adjusted Turn Profile.
4. To remove an adjustment, select its name in the list box at the top of the Adjust Profile dialog box and click
Remove.
5. When satisfied with the adjustments, click OK.
About Holemaking
A Holemaking NC sequence is created by selecting the cycle type and specifying the holes to drill by defining
the Hole Set(s). The order of machining the holes is defined by the SCAN_TYPE parameter value; you can also
build the traversal path between the selected holes either by sketching or by connecting the hole axes.
A Hole Set includes one or more holes to be drilled; each Hole Set has a drilling depth specification or
countersink diameter value associated with it. You can include more than one Hole Set in a single Holemaking
NC sequence; this allows drilling of holes with different depth specifications, as well as having multiple
countersink diameter values, within a single NC sequence.
There are various methods of selecting the holes to be included in a Hole Set:
· By selecting individual hole axes
· By including all holes on a specified surface
· By including all holes of a specified diameter
· By including all holes with a certain value of a feature parameter
· By including all holes with chamfers machinable by the current tool (for countersinking)
· By selecting individual datum points to mark the drill locations
· By including all datum points on a specified surface
· By reading in a file containing the datum points’ coordinates with respect to a specified coordinate system
If you need to perform a series of Holemaking NC sequences on the same group of holes, you can define a Drill
Group using the techniques above, and then reference this Drill Group when defining Hole Sets. This simplifies
the selection process; you can also parametrically update all the NC sequences by modifying the Drill Group.
To Create a Holemaking NC Sequence

1. Choose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu. You must be in a Lathe, Mill, or Mill/Turn workcell.
2. Choose Holemaking and specify the number of machine axes, if applicable. Choose Done.
3. Select the holemaking type and choose Done.
- Holes—Select holes to drill by defining the Hole Sets.
- Check Surfs—Select the surfaces against which gouge checking will be performed. Use this option if
there are obstacles (protrusions) along the traversal path between the holes. When the tool traverses
from hole to hole and a motion will result in gouging a surface selected as Check Surface, the system
Pro/NC 231
will issue the CYCLE / OFF command after machining the previous hole, the tool will retract along Z
axis to the height of CHK_SRF_STOCK_ALLOW above the obstacle height, and move at
FREE_FEED in XY-plane to the location above the next hole, then reissue the CYCLE / ... statement.
This functionality is available for all 3-Axis Holemaking NC sequences except Back boring.
6. The tool path is created automatically depending on the SCAN_TYPE parameter value. Choose Play Path
to verify the tool path. If not satisfied, you can either modify the parameters, or choose Customize to
specify the traversal path between the selected holes.
Three and Five Axis Holemaking

3-Axis Holemaking is available from any type of workcell (Lathe, Mill, or Mill/Turn). When creating a 3-Axis
Holemaking NC sequence, all holes must be oriented parallel to each other and normal to the retract plane.
5-Axis Holemaking allows you to drill holes with axes not necessarily normal to the retract surface. 5-Axis
Holemaking is available only when you are in a 4- or 5-Axis Mill, or a Mill/Turn workcell.
Note: 5-Axis Holemaking is allowed on a Mill/Turn workcell, even if it is defined as 2- or 3-Axis. Select
Head1 Mill in the LATHE TYPE menu, and then select MILL from the SEL MENU when creating the NC
sequence.
If 4-Axis Turning is available, the HEAD 1 and HEAD 2 options in the TURN SEQ menu will allow you to
specify which head is to perform the Holemaking NC sequence.
For 5-Axis Holemaking, if you use a retract plane, the tool moves as shown in the following drawing: it rapids
to the point defined by the CLEARANCE_OFFSET parameter above the intersection of the hole axis with the
start surface, orients itself parallel to the hole axis, drills the hole (stopping at the offset defined by the
CLEAR_DIST parameter), then retracts back to the CLEARANCE_OFFSET, and traverses to the next hole.
6 7
5
9
4
2
8
1
3
1 Start surface for the first hole

2 Drilling cycle finished for the first hole
3 CLEAR_DIST
4 Tool retracts after drilling
5 CLEARANCE_OFFSET
6 Tool is positioned for drilling the second hole
7 Tool starts drilling
8 CLEAR_DIST
9 Start surface for the second hole
If you define a retract surface of revolution for 5-Axis Holemaking, the tool retracts to this surface after drilling
a hole, moves along this surface and normal to it to the point above the next hole, orients itself parallel to the
hole axis, rapids to CLEAR_DIST, drills the hole, then retracts back to the retract surface.
232 Pro/NC
Holemaking Cycle Types
The following holemaking types are available:
· Drill—Drill a hole. Depending on the additional option selected, the following statement will be output to
the CL file:
- Standard (default)—CYCLE / DRILL
- Deep—CYCLE / DEEP
- Break Chip—CYCLE / BRKCHP
- Web—CYCLE / THRU (for multiple plates)
- Back—A series of GOTO and SPINDLE statements to perform back spotting
· Face—Drill a hole with an optional dwell at final depth to help assure a clean surface at the bottom of the
hole. The CYCLE / FACE statement will be output to the CL file.
· Bore—Bore a hole to create a finish hole diameter with high precision. The CYCLE / BORE statement will
be output to the CL file.
· Countersink—Drill a chamfer for a countersunk screw. The CYCLE / CSINK statement will be output to
the CL file. If the Back option is selected together with Countersink, the system will perform back
countersinking.
· Tap—Drill a threaded hole. Pro/NC supports ISO standard thread output. The CYCLE / TAP statement will
be output to the CL file. Two additional options are available:
- Fixed—The feed rate is determined by the combination of thread pitch and spindle speed.
- Floating—Allows you to modify the feed rate using the parameter FLOAT_TAP_FACTOR.
· Ream—Create a precision finish hole. The CYCLE / REAM statement will be output to the CL file.
· Custom—Create and use your own customized cycles for the current machine tool.
Tools Used for Holemaking Cycle Types

The table below summarizes which type of tool can be used for each cycle type:
TOOLS CYCLE TYPES
D D B W B F B C T R
r e r e a a o o a e
I e e b c c r u p a
l p a k e e n m
l k t
c e
h r
i s
p i
n
k
Drill • • • • • • • •
Countersink • • • • • • • •
Tap •
Ream • • • • • • •
Bore • • • • • • •
Center Drill • • • • • • • •
Back Spotting •
End Mill • • • • • • •
Pro/NC 233
Peck Table
For Deep Drilling, two additional options are available in the HOLE MAKING menu:
· Constant Peck—Causes the NC sequence to be executed using a single peck depth.
· Variable Peck—Causes a peck table to be used for controlling the peck depth. When using a peck table, the
PECK_DEPTH parameter will not be included in the list of Cut Parameters.
Variable peck depths are specified in a peck table as a function of tool diameter (CUTTER_DIAM). A peck
table contains four parameters:
· Low Diameter—Low end of the tool diameter range. This value must be less than the tool diameter, and
cannot be equal to the High Diameter.
· High Diameter—High end of the tool diameter range. This value must be greater than or equal to the tool
diameter.
· Peck Depth Ratio—The ratio of the peck depth to the tool diameter.
· Feed Rate—The speed of the tool while drilling.
If you have specified Variable Peck for the NC sequence, and the peck table has not been set up, you will not
be allowed to quit the MFG SET UP menu unless you have entered values in the peck table.
Peck tables can also be created, modified, or deleted at setup time.
To Set Up a Peck Table

1. Choose Peck Table from the PARAM SETUP menu or the MFG PARAMS menu. The PECK TABLE menu
appears with the following options:
- Create—Bring up the Pro/TABLE editor to create a new peck table. An empty table of the proper
format will be displayed.
- Modify—Bring up the Pro/TABLE editor to modify the peck table values. The current peck depth table
will be displayed for editing.
- Delete—(Available only at setup time.) Delete the current peck table. You will be asked to confirm
your command to delete the table.
- Show—Brings up the Information Window, displaying the values in the peck table.
2. Choose Create or Modify from the PECK TABLE menu. The Pro/TABLE editor window appears. Enter
values for Low Diameter, High Diameter, Peck Depth Ratio, and Feed Rate.
3. When you are finished entering values, exit the Pro/TABLE editor and save the changes.
Example: Peck Table

An example of a peck table is shown below:
LOW HIGH PECK DEPTH FEED RATE
DIAMETER DIAMETER RATIO
0.600000 0.950000 0.400000 12.000000
- - 0.350000 12.000000
- - 0.300000 12.000000
- - 0.200000 12.000000
- - 0.100000 10.000000
0.960000 1.100000 0.500000 8.000000
- - 0.400000 8.000000
- - 0.100000 8.000000
This table will produce the following CL output:
234 Pro/NC
$$-> SETSTART / 0.00, 0.00, 1.00
RAPID
GOTO / -5.45, 2.15, 1.00
CYCLE / DEEP, DEPTH, 1.285409, STEP, 0.380000, $
STEP, 0.332500, STEP, 0.190000, IPM, 12.000000, $
STEP, 0.095000, IPM, 10.000000, CLEAR, 1.000000
GOTO / -5.45, 2.15, 0.00
CYCLE / OFF
$$-> END /
FINI
STEP value in the CYCLE command is calculated by multiplying PECK_DEPTH_RATIO by

CUTTER_DIAM.
Example: CUTTER_DIAM = .95
PECK DEPTH RATIO STEP
.5 .95 * .5 = .475
.4 .95 * .4 = .38
.3 .95 * .3 = .285
To Define Hole Sets

The Hole Set option in the HOLES menu allows you to define and modify Hole Sets. If no Hole Sets have been
defined, selecting it will immediately start creating a new Hole Set; otherwise, a selection menu will appear.
Selecting an existing Hole Set name will allow you to modify this Hole Set, choosing the New Set option will
allow you to create a new Hole Set.
1. Choose Hole Set from the HOLES menu. If the SEL MENU appears, choose New Set.
2. The system displays the HoleSet dialog box.
The upper portion of the dialog box contains six tabulated pages that provide means of hole selection:
- Axes—Specify holes by selecting individual hole axes.
- Groups—Select predefined drill groups.
- Points—Specify drill locations by selecting datum points or reading in a file with datum point
coordinates.
- Diameters—Specify holes by entering diameter value(s). The system automatically includes all Hole
or round Slot features of specified diameter(s).
- Surfaces—Specify holes by selecting surfaces of the reference part or workpiece. The system
automatically includes all Hole or round Slot features located on selected surfaces.
- Parameters—Select holes with a certain parameter value.
3. Specify the holes to be drilled using any combination of methods listed above. See Combining Selection
Methods for information on how to use more than one selection method for defining a Hole Set.
Note: Selection by Points can not be used in combination with any of the other selection methods.
4. Click Depth to select the desired depth option and specify references as appropriate to the depth type.
You can also use the following options, located in the lower portion of the Hole Set dialog box:
- Use Prev—Select a Hole Set used in a previous NC sequence. You can then modify this Hole Set for
the current NC sequence.
- Auto Chamfer—If the checkmark is on, the system will automatically include all holes with chamfers
that can be machined with the current tool, and automatically determine depth and direction for
Countersink drilling.
- Start hole for scan—If the SCAN_TYPE parameter is set to SHORTEST or TYPE_SPIRAL, lets you
select the first hole to be machined.
Note: If you set the CUT_DIRECTION parameter to REVERSE, this hole will be machined last.
- Direction for 5-axis drilling—Allows you to flip the direction of drilling for a selected axis (except
Pro/NC 235
axes selected with Auto Chamfer).
- Show rules used in selection—Displays an Info Window listing all the axes, surfaces, diameters, and
so on, selected or explicitly unselected in the current Hole Set.
The Preview button at the bottom of the Hole Set dialog box highlights the axes or points selected so far, as
well as the start and end surfaces, if appropriate. The drilling depth will be listed in the message window.
5. Click OK at the bottom of the Hole Set dialog box when finished selecting the holes.
Hole Sets can be deleted using the Delete option in the HOLES menu. The Show option in the HOLES menu will
highlight the axes included in a selected Hole Set, as well as start and end surfaces, if appropriate. The drilling
depth will be listed in the message window.
Combining Selection Methods

Selecting holes by Diameters, Surfaces, Parameters, and Auto Chamfer implies specifying a rule for hole
selection. For example, if you specify a diameter value, the system will search the model for the holes of this
diameter and include them in the Hole Set. If you select a surface, the system will include all holes on this
surface. If you specify a combination of rules, the system will look for holes that satisfy all of them; that is, if
you specify a diameter value and select a surface, the system will include only the holes of the specified
diameter that are located on the selected surface.
The Axes method lets you explicitly select and unselect hole axes, regardless of other rules used in Hole
selection.
When you select Groups, the system copies the rules used for defining the selected Drill Group, as well as
explicitly selected and unselected axes, into the current Hole Set, and applies them to the model according to the
principles described above.
Selection by Points can not be used in combination with any of the other selection methods.
To Define Depth
All Hole Sets (except for Countersink drilling), require specifying the drill depth type. To define the depth type
and references, click Depth in the HoleSet dialog box. The system displays the Hole Set Depth dialog box. Use
one of the following Hole Depth option buttons:
· Blind—Drill from the start surface (or Z height) to specified depth. Specify the Start and End surfaces (by
either selecting a surface or entering a Z depth). If you select the checkbox next to the Use breakout
distance option, the system adds the BREAKOUT_DISTANCE parameter value when calculating depth.
· Auto—Depth of drilling is determined automatically, by referencing hole geometry. If the selected axis is
associated with several coaxial hole features, the maximum depth will be selected as long as the tool fits
inside the hole diameter.
Note: Auto depth is not available for Tap and Ream tools.
· Thru All—Drill a through hole, from the retract surface all the way through the workpiece(s) or reference
236 Pro/NC
part(s) that the hole intersects. By default, all the reference parts and workpieces are used for depth
calculation; you can unselect some of the parts, if desired, or explicitly select parts, by using the Select and
Unselect buttons in the Hole Set Depth dialog box. Select All selects all the reference parts and
workpieces.
The Tool Depth option buttons, Shoulder and Tip, available for Blind and Auto drilling, determine if the
drilling depth will be with reference to the shoulder or the tip of the tool.
2 3
4 5
1 Drill up to this plane

2 DTM1
3 DTM1
4 Shoulder
5 Tip
To Define the Starting Point for Drilling

For each hole selected to be drilled, the system has to determine the starting point for drilling (output in the
GOTO statement). This point is determined differently for different drilling types.
For Countersink drilling, and for other types with the drill depth Blind, you have to specify the start surface.
You can specify one of:
· Surface—Select a surface or create a datum plane whose intersection with the hole axis will be used as the
starting point.
· Z Depth—Enter the Z coordinate with respect to the NC Sequence coordinate system. An imaginary plane
will be created at this level and its intersection with the hole axis will be used as the starting point.
For other depth types, the starting point will be automatically determined as the point of intersection of the axis
with the topmost surface among the workpiece(s) and reference part(s) that the hole intersects.
By default, all the reference parts and workpieces are used for determining the starting point; you can unselect
some of the parts, if desired, or explicitly select parts, by using the Select and Unselect buttons in the Hole Set
Depth dialog box. Select All selects all the reference parts and workpieces. When you select a hole to drill, the
system will look for the appropriate surface among the selected parts, and use its intersection with the hole axis
as the starting point.
1
3
2
1 Default starting point (both the workpiece and the reference part are considered; top of workpiece is used)
Pro/NC 237
2 Unselect the workpiece
3 New starting point (top of reference part is used)
4 Selected axis
To Define Depth for Blind Drilling

For Blind drilling, after you specify the starting point you have to also define the end surface, to determine the
drilling depth. Use one of:
· Surface—Select a surface or create a datum plane to drill up to. If you select a non-planar surface, the depth
is defined by the point of intersection of this surface with the hole axis.
· Z Depth—Enter an offset value from the starting point (the offset will automatically point towards the
workpiece, that is, in the negative Z direction).
To Select Holes by Axes

The Axes tab in the Hole Set dialog box enables you to select or unselect individual hole axes.
Click Add and select hole axes to add them to the Hole Set.
When you have a pattern of holes, it is not necessary to select all the hole axes. Select Pattern to indicate that
you want all the pattern members to be drilled, then select any axis belonging to a pattern. You can drill only
some holes in the pattern using the Single option.
All axes currently included in the Hole Set are listed in the central list box. If you have selected holes using a
different method (for example, Diameters), the names of these axes also appear on the Axes tab.
To remove a previously selected axis from the Hole Set, highlight its name in the central list box and click
Delete. Similar to adding axes, you can use the Pattern button to remove a whole pattern of holes.
To Select Holes by Surfaces

The Surfaces tab in the Hole Set dialog box enables you to include all holes on the selected surface.
1 Retract plane
Click Add and select surfaces to add all holes located on these surfaces to the Hole Set.
The names of selected surfaces are listed in the central list box on the Surfaces tab. To remove all holes located
on a surface, select its name in the list box and click Delete. To remove some of the holes on a surface, use the
Axes tab.
To Select Holes by Diameters

The Diameters tab in the Hole Set dialog box enables you to include all holes of a specified diameter.
When you click Add, the Select hole diameter dialog box appears. It lists all the hole diameters present in the
238 Pro/NC
model. Select a diameter from the list, or click Select and select a cylindrical surface on the model to specify the
diameter. The system adds all holes of the specified diameter to the Hole Set.
The diameter values selected so far are listed in the central list box on the Diameters tab. To remove all holes
of a specified diameter, select its value in the list box and click Delete. To remove some of the holes of a
specified diameter, use the Axes tab.
To Select Holes by Feature Parameters

The Parameters tab in the Hole Set dialog box enables you to include holes that have certain parameter values.
You can create and modify feature parameters in Part, Assembly, or Manufacture mode.
When you go to the Parameters tab, the Feature Parameter list box contains a list of all feature parameters
associated with Hole and Cosmetic Thread features in the model. When you select a parameter name in the list,
the Value text box below will contain a drop-down list of all the currently present values for this parameter.
1. Select a name of parameter in the Feature Parameter list box.
2. Select an operator from the drop-down list. For parameter types Integer and Real, the operators available
are: "=", "!=", ">", "<". For other parameter types, the only operators available are: "=" and "!=".
3. Select a value from the drop-down list, or type a value.
4. Click Add.
5. The system displays the selected parameter and its value in the list box below and includes all holes with the
appropriate feature parameter values in the Hole Set.
To Select Holes by Points

Holemaking NC sequences can reference datum points instead of axes. If you specify a datum point, the system
will create a temporary datum axis through this point and normal to a certain projection surface, which can be
defined implicitly or explicitly as explained below. This axis will then be used to build the tool path.
Notes:
- If you use the Points method, Auto drill depth is not available.
- The Points method can not be combined with other methods of hole selection. If you try using Points
when some of the holes have already been selected using another method (or vice versa), the system
will ask you if you want to discard the previous selections.
There are three ways to select points for drilling:
· By Points—Select individual datum points, or collect all datum points belonging to a feature.
· On Surface—Collect all datum points on selected surfaces.
· File—Specify a coordinate system to be used as origin for the datum point array file (the coordinate system
is assumed to be Cartesian), then either read in a file with the datum points’ coordinates using the Browse
button (the expected file extension is ".pts"), or enter the coordinate values from the keyboard using the Edit
button. The Edit button also allows you to edit an existing datum point array file after it has been read in.
Projection surfaces are defined differently, depending on the points selection technique:
· On Surface—Surfaces selected for collecting the datum points will also be used as projection surfaces.
· By Points or File—For 3-Axis Holemaking, the projection surface is the retract surface. For 5-Axis
Holemaking, you have to explicitly select projection surfaces.
When selecting using By Points or File, entering a value for Maximum Distance lets you specify how far the
points can be from the projection surfaces. If some or all of the input points are too far from projection surfaces,
they will be disregarded and the system will issue a message.
Pro/NC 239
To Define the Countersink Diameter
Depth for countersink drilling is defined by the start surface and the countersink diameter value, entered at the
time of defining the Hole Set. Instead of entering a countersink diameter, you can specify that the system
automatically finds all the applicable chamfers and makes the necessary calculations.
Countersink diameter is the final diameter of the hole after drilling, measured in the start surface. Tool
parameter Point_Angle defines the chamfer angle.
1
2
1 Start surface
2 Csink Diam
To Use the Automatic Chamfer Selection

If your design model contains Chamfer features that you need to Countersink, you can automate the selection
process by using the Auto Chamfer option, as described below.
1. Create a Countersink NC sequence and set up a tool with the Point_Angle corresponding to the chamfer
geometry that you want to machine (see example).
2. When defining the Hole Set, select the checkbox next to the Auto Chamfer option in the Options section
of the dialog box (this option is available for Countersink drilling only).
3. The system evaluates all the holes in the manufacturing model, and machines only those with chamfers
corresponding to the Point_Angle of the current tool. The names of the axes to be machined are listed in the
central list box of the Axes tab.
Notes:
· You can apply another rule if you want to narrow the selection. For example, if you want to machine only
chamfered holes on a certain surface, use Surfaces and select the surface you want.
· If you change the tool to a one with a different Point_Angle, the system will automatically update the Hole
Set to include the holes matching the new tool.
240 Pro/NC
Example: Automatic Chamfer Selection
1 2
4 5
1 CHAMFER 30 x .2
2 CHAMFER 30 x .16
3 CHAMFER 45 x .2
4 Countersink sequence #1use tool with Point_Angle 90
5 Countersink sequence #2: use tool with Point_Angle 120
To Define Plates for Web Drilling

Web drilling enables you to drill holes through two or more plates, separated by a certain distance, with the tool
moving with FEED_RATE while drilling a plate, and then making a RAPID motion along the tool axis to
position above the next plate.
If you perform Auto or Thru All drilling, the system will determine start and end of drilling for each plate based
on the intersection of the hole axes with the parts selected for depth calculation. By default, all the reference
parts and workpieces are used for depth calculation; you can unselect some of the parts, if desired, or explicitly
select parts, by using the Select and Unselect buttons in the Hole Set Depth dialog box. Select All selects all
the reference parts and workpieces.
If you perform Blind drilling, the Hole Set Depth dialog box contains an extra section at the bottom, Plate
Selection, which lists all the plates defined so far, and has the following buttons:
· Add—Adds a new plate. Define the Start and End surfaces for a new plate, then click this button. The
system adds the plate name to the list in the Defined Plates for Web Drilling box.
· Change—Changes the Start and End surfaces for an existing plate. Highlight the plate name in the Defined
Plates for Web Drilling list box and respecify the Start and End surfaces for this plate, then click this
button.
· Delete—Deletes the highlighted plate.
Back Spotting Specifics

The Back cycle allows you to perform back bore and countersink NC sequences with a special type of tool,
called Back Spotting.
Pro/NC 241
Back drilling is always Blind. You have to specify a start surface or Z depth, and then either select a surface or
enter an offset value to define the drilling depth. Unlike other types of drilling, the offset will automatically
point in the positive Z direction. See the example for more information on setting up an NC sequence and
resulting tool motions for Back drilling and countersinking.
242 Pro/NC
Example: Back Spotting
The following illustration shows an example of setting up a Back Spotting tool based on geometry to be
machined, and specifying the start and end depth for a Back Drill NC sequence.
Pro/NC 243
1 Cutter_Diam 2.4
Length 4
Csink_Angle 30
Cutting_Offset 0.4
Body_Diameter 1.3
Insert_Length 0.6
2 Select this surface (hidden) as start surface
Type an offset value of 0.75 to specify drilling depth
The resulting sequence of tool motions is shown in the following diagram.
244 Pro/NC
For Back Countersink drilling, you have to specify a start surface and a countersink diameter, similar to regular
countersink drilling. The illustration below shows a Back Countersink NC sequence performed with the same
tool as in the previous example.
1
1 Select this face as the start surface (similar to the previous example)
Type 2.2 for countersink diameter
You can also use the Auto Chamfer option for Back Countersink drilling, in which case the system will
automatically include all holes with chamfers that can be machined with the current tool, that is, with the
chamfer angle corresponding to the Csink_Angle of the tool.
About Drill Groups

You can define groups of hole axes at setup time for later use in Holemaking NC sequences. Drill Groups allow
you to:
· Simplify the hole selection. Once a Drill Group is defined, it can be selected for any Holemaking NC
sequence by just selecting its name from a namelist menu.
· Modify Holemaking NC sequences by adding or excluding holes. Modifying a Drill Group will
automatically update all NC sequences that reference this group.
Defining Drill Groups

To access the Drill Group functionality, choose Drill Group from the MFG GEOMETRY menu. The following
options are available:
· Create—Define a new Drill Group.
· Delete—Delete an existing Drill Group. Select the name of the group from a namelist menu.
· Modify—Modify a Drill Group definition.
· Blank—Blank a Drill Group which was previously displayed. Select a name (only unblanked Drill Groups
are shown in the namelist menu), the axes are displayed in the default color (yellow).
· Unblank—Display a Drill Group as it is currently defined. Once you select a Drill Group name from the
namelist menu, all axes included in the group are displayed in magenta.
To Define a Drill Group

1. Choose Mfg Setup, Mfg Geometry, then Drill Group.
2. Choose Create and enter a name for the Drill Group.
Pro/NC 245
3. The system displays an abbreviated version of the Hole Set dialog box. It has four tabbed pages: Axes,
Surfaces, Diameters, and Parameters, to let you select holes to be included in the Drill Group. The
mechanism of hole selection for Drill Group is the same as when creating a Hole Set.
4. Click OK when finished. To display the Drill Group definition, choose Unblank and select the group name.
To Modify a Drill Group

Modifying a Drill Group will automatically update all NC sequences that reference this group.
1. Choose Mfg Setup, Mfg Geometry, then Drill Group.
2. Choose Modify and select the Drill Group name from the namelist menu.
3. The system again displays the abbreviated version of the Hole Set dialog box, as when defining a Drill
Group, allowing you to select more holes or unselect some of them. Click OK when finished.
Using Drill Groups

When you select holes for a Holemaking NC sequence, the Drill Group tab in the Hole Set dialog box lets you
select all holes included into an existing Drill Group.
Drill Groups can not be modified at the time of creating an NC sequence. You can select more holes to be
included in the Hole Set, but they will not be included in the Drill Group. You can also remove some of the
holes from the Hole Set, either by adding more rules or by explicitly removing axes in the Axes tab.
If a hole in the selected Drill Group is not selectable for the current Holemaking NC sequence (for example, its
axis is not parallel to the Z-axis of the NC Sequence coordinate system for 3-Axis Holemaking), this hole will
be ignored. The rest of the group, however, will be included.
If a Drill Group is later modified, the Holemaking NC sequences that reference this group will be updated
accordingly. The rules to remember are:
· If you remove a hole from a Drill Group, it will not be drilled.
· If you add a new hole to the Drill Group and the Customize functionality has not been utilized (that is, the
holes are drilled according to the SCAN_TYPE), the NC sequence will be automatically updated to drill the
new hole.
· If you add a new hole to the Drill Group and the Customize functionality has been utilized, the new hole
will not be drilled until you adjust the Tool Motions.
About Customizing Holemaking Cycles

By using the Custom Cycle functionality, you can develop your own drilling cycle syntax and associate this
syntax with the actual motion of the cycle.
You can define a custom cycle by following these steps:
1. Build the cycle syntax by describing the cycle type, keywords, and variables.
2. Generate a relative motion for the cycle by defining cycle points. Cycle points are defined using the
variables created during cycle syntax definition. Variables may be adjusted by entering a specific value or
manufacturing parameter.
3. Add cycle modifiers at specific cycle points. Modifiers may be user-defined variables or standard
manufacturing parameters.
To place the custom cycle, create a Holemaking NC sequence of type Custom; specify the tool, parameters, and
hole axes; identify cycle point locations and provide the necessary variable and parameter values.
You can create custom cycles when defining or modifying the workcell, or when creating a Custom
Holemaking NC sequence. In either case, the finished custom cycle is listed on the Custom Cycles tabbed page
of the Machine Tool Setup dialog box and stored in the workcell, to be used in other Holemaking NC
sequences of type Custom created in this workcell.
246 Pro/NC
To Create Custom Cycles
You can create custom cycles when defining or modifying a workcell, or when creating a Custom Holemaking
NC sequence.
1. On the MANUFACTURE or MACHINING menu, click Mfg Setup > Workcell.
The Machine Tool Setup dialog box opens.
2. Select the name of the machine tool from the Machine Name drop-down list.
3. Click the Custom Cycles tab.
4. Place your cursor in the Holemaking customized cycles list box and click the right mouse button. Select
Add cycle from the pop-up menu.
The Customize Cycle dialog box opens.
Note: You can also access the Customize Cycle dialog box and create new custom cycles when you create
a new Holemaking NC sequence of type Custom and click Cycle Type on the SEQ SETUP menu.
5. Type the name of the cycle in the Cycle Name text box and press RETURN.
6. Type the keyword for the cycle type in the Cycle Type text box and press RETURN. The cycle type
keyword updates in the Cycle Syntax box at the bottom of the dialog box.
7. Define the cycle references, variables, and prompts.
8. Define the cycle statement syntax by adding the necessary keywords, parameters, and expressions.
9. Define the tool motion for the custom cycle.
10. When finished, click at the bottom of the dialog box to add the custom cycles to the workcell and
close the dialog box. Clicking closes the dialog box without saving the changes to the custom cycles.
The Customize Cycle Dialog Box

The top portion of the Customize Cycle dialog box contains the following icons:
—Define a new cycle for the current workcell.
—Open a previously saved cycle to add it to the current workcell.
—Save the current cycle as a separate file for later use in a different workcell.
—Define the cycle references, variables, and prompts.
—Define the cycle statement syntax by adding the necessary keywords, parameters, and expressions.
—Define the tool motion for the custom cycle.

The Cycle Name box contains the name of the cycle. This is the name under which the cycle is saved in the
workcell or in a separate file. You can type any name, provided it satisfies the requirements for file names on
your system.
The Cycle Type box contains the cycle type keyword, output immediately after CYCLE/ in the cycle statement.
Keywords BORE, BRKCHP, CSINK, DEEP, DRILL, FACE, REAM, and THRU are reserved for the standard
cycle types. Type the keyword and press RETURN to update the cycle type keyword in the Cycle Syntax box
at the bottom of the dialog box.
The middle portion of the Customize Cycle dialog box changes depending on the icon selected on the top
toolbar of the dialog box:
· If you are defining the cycle references, variables, and prompts, then it contains a list of existing cycle
prompts, as well as tools for defining new references and variables.
Pro/NC 247
· If you are defining the cycle statement syntax, then it contains a list of cycles existing in the current
workcell, as well as tools for adding keywords, parameters, and expressions to the cycle syntax.
· If you are defining the tool motion for the cycle, then it contains a list of cycle motions, as well as tools for
defining new motions.
The bottom portion of the Customize Cycle dialog box contains the read-only Cycle Syntax text box, which
displays the cycle statement syntax string as it is currently defined.
The right portion of the Customize Cycle dialog box contains the graphic window, which shows all the
currently defined references for the cycle.
At the bottom of the Customize Cycle dialog box are the following buttons:
—Add the custom cycles to the workcell and close the dialog box.
—Close the dialog box without saving the changes to the custom cycles.
Example: Creating a Custom Cycle

In this example, you are going to create a custom cycle called FDRILL, which makes the tool drill to a certain
depth, change feed, drill the rest of the through hole, and retract.
1. On the Custom Cycles tabbed page of the Machine Tool Setup dialog box, place your cursor in the
Holemaking customized cycles list box and click the right mouse button. Select Add cycle from the pop-
up menu.
The Customize Cycle dialog box opens.
2. Type FDRILL in the Cycle Name text box and press RETURN.
3. Type FDRILL in the Cycle Type text box and press RETURN. The cycle syntax string in the Cycle Syntax
box at the bottom of the dialog box changes to CYCLE/FDRILL.
4. Add a reference called feed surface. Place your cursor in the Cycle Prompts list box, click the right
mouse button, and select Add Reference from the pop-up menu. Type feed surface in the Name text
box. Type a prompt (for example, the depth where the feed changes) in the Description text
box. Click Apply. The system lists the new reference in the Cycle Prompts list box and displays it in the
graphic window on the right.
5. Similarly, add a variable called new feed.
6. Add two expressions:
depth = start surface - end surface + BREAKOUT_DISTANCE
feed depth = start surface - feed surface - CLEAR_DIST
Click See Also for details on how to add an expression.
You have now completed defining the cycle references, variables, and prompts.
7. Click to define the cycle syntax.
8. From the Keyword drop-down list, select DEPTH. Click to add the keyword to the cycle syntax
string.
The cycle syntax string, which is displayed in the read-only Cycle Syntax text box at the bottom of the
dialog box, updates. It is now:
CYCLE/FDRILL, DEPTH
9. From the Expression drop-down list, which contains all the expressions and variables defined for the cycle,
select depth. Add it to the cycle syntax string.
10. From the Expression drop-down list, select feed depth. Add it to the cycle syntax string.
11. The keyword FEED is not included in the Keyword drop-down list. Highlight the keyword currently
displayed in the list box and type FEED instead. Add it to the cycle syntax string.
12. From the NC Parameter drop-down list, select CUT_FEED. Add it to the cycle syntax string.
When a parameter name is added to the cycle syntax string, it is displayed in angle brackets. The cycle
syntax string now reads as follows:
CYCLE/FDRILL, DEPTH, depth, feed depth, FEED, <CUT_FEED>
13. Proceed adding keywords, parameters, and expressions to the cycle syntax string until finally it reads as
248 Pro/NC
follows:
CYCLE/FDRILL, DEPTH, depth, feed depth, FEED, <CUT_FEED>, new feed,
<CUT_UNITS>, CLEAR, <CLEAR_DIST>
You have now completed defining the cycle statement syntax.
14. Click to define the tool motion for the cycle.

15. Place your cursor in the Cycle motion list box and click the right mouse button. Select Add Cycle Point
from the pop-up menu.
16. Define the initial point along the hole axis as the point with the vertical offset of CLEAR_DIST above the
start surface. From the By drop-down list in the Vertical Offset group box, select CLEAR_DIST. Click
.
The system adds the first GOTO point, GOTO CPNT0, to the Cycle motion list box, and displays a cyan
point above the start surface in the graphic window on the right.
17. When you added the reference feed surface, the system places it above the start surface in the graphic
window. To move the feed surface to the right location, click on it in the graphic window and drag it down,
below the start surface.
18. Add another cycle point at the vertical offset of CLEAR_DIST above the feed surface. From the from drop-
down list, select feed surface. Click .

The system adds GOTO CPNT1 to the Cycle motion list box, and displays the new point and the tool
motion in the graphic window on the right.
19. Add a cycle modifier to this point. Select GOTO CPNT1 in the Cycle motion list box, click the right mouse
button, and select Add Cycle Modifier from the pop-up menu. From the NC Parameter drop-down list,
select Feedrate. Click the Select Value option and select CUT from the drop-down list. Click .
The system adds the FEED_RATE cycle modifier under GOTO CPNT1 in the Cycle motion list box.
20. Add another cycle point at the vertical offset of BREAKOUT_DISTANCE below the end surface. To
change direction, click the right-pointing arrow next to the Vertical Offset icon and select the icon.
From the from drop-down list, select end surface. From the By drop-down list in the Vertical Offset group
box, select BREAKOUT_DISTANCE. Click .

21. Add a cycle modifier to this point. From the NC Parameter drop-down list, select Feedrate. Select the
Enter Value option and select new feed from the drop-down list. Click .
22. Finally, make the tool retract back to the staring point at FREE feed. Add another cycle point. From the
from drop-down list, select CPNT0. From the By drop-down list in the Vertical Offset group box, select
dash (–). Click .

23. Add a cycle modifier to this point. From the NC Parameter drop-down list, select Feedrate. Click the
Select Value option and select FREE from the drop-down list. Click .
You have now completed defining the tool motion for the cycle. The completed cycle motion is shown in
the following illustration.
Pro/NC 249
24. Click at the bottom of the dialog box to add the custom cycle to the workcell and close the dialog
box.
To Define the Cycle References, Variables, and

Prompts
1. On the top toolbar of the Customize Cycle dialog box, click .
The middle portion of the Customize Cycle dialog box displays the Cycle Prompts list box with a list of all
the references and variables currently defined for the cycle. At first, the list contains only the two reserved
references: start surface and end surface.
2. Place your cursor in the Cycle Prompts list box and click the right mouse button. Use the following options
on the pop-up menu:
- Add Variable—Add a new variable. Type the name of the variable in the Name text box. The value in
the Type box is automatically set to Variable. Type the prompt for instantiating the variable in the
Description text box. Click Apply. The system lists the new variable in the Cycle Prompts list box.
- Add Reference—Add a new reference. Type the name of the reference Add Reference The value in
the Type box is automatically set to Reference. Type the prompt for instantiating the reference in the
Description text box. Click Apply. The system lists the new reference in the Cycle Prompts list box
and displays it in the graphic window on the right.
- Add Expression—Add a new expression. The Expression Builder dialog box opens (click See Also
for details). When you define the expression and close the Expression Builder dialog box, the system
lists the new expression in the Cycle Prompts list box.
- Change Description—Change the prompt for the reference or variable selected in the Cycle Prompts
list box. Edit the prompt in the Description text box and click Apply. You cannot change the name of a
reference or variable; you have to delete it and add it again with a new name.
250 Pro/NC
- Redefine Expression—Change the definition of the expression selected in the Cycle Prompts list box.
The Expression Builder dialog box opens (click See Also for details).
- Remove Variable—Delete the variable selected in the Cycle Prompts list box.
- Remove Reference—Delete the reference selected in the Cycle Prompts list box.
- Remove Expression—Delete the expression selected in the Cycle Prompts list box.
3. When you have defined all the references, variables, and expressions, proceed to defining the cycle
statement syntax.
Defining the Cycle References, Variables, and

Prompts
Before you start building the cycle statement syntax, you have to define the geometric references and variables
that will be used within the cycle statement:
· Each geometric reference represents a certain height along the hole axis.
There are two reserved reference names: start surface and end surface. Start surface is
mandatory; it has to be instantiated every time the cycle is placed. Start surface and end surface
(if needed) are defined automatically if the cycle is placed with Auto depth option. The cycle designer can
define additional geometric references.
When placing the cycle, you can instantiate a reference by selecting a surface, a datum point, or a quilt. If
you select a slanted or non-planar surface as a reference, the height is determined at the point of intersection
of the surface with the hole axis. You can also type the Z-offset with respect to the NC sequence coordinate
system.
· User-defined variables can include cycle motion dimensions or any other values that can influence the cycle
statement output.
When placing the cycle, you can instantiate a variable by typing its value.
If you want a variable to be calculated as a linear combination of NC sequence parameters and constants,
define it as an expression at the time of cycle design.
During cycle design, you have to supply a description for each reference and variable that you add. During the
cycle placement, this description will be shown as a prompt to the end user when the reference or variable has
to be instantiated.
To Define the Cycle Statement Syntax

The middle portion of the Customize Cycle dialog box displays the Existing Cycles list box with a list of
all the currently defined custom cycles, as well as three drop-down lists:
- Keyword—Contains a list of keywords that you can use for building the cycle statement syntax string.
Click See Also for details.
- NC Parameter—Contains a list of manufacturing parameter names that you can use for building the
cycle statement syntax string. Click See Also for details.
- Expression—Lists the names of all the variables and expressions that you have created while defining
the cycle prompts.
To create a new expression, click and define the expression using the Expression Builder
dialog box (click See Also for details).
2. To add a keyword, NC parameter, or expression to the statement syntax, select it from the appropriate drop-
down list and click next to it.

The system adds a comma and the selected word at the end of the syntax string, which is displayed in the
read-only Cycle Syntax textbox at the bottom of the Customize Cycle dialog box.
3. To remove the last addition to the cycle statement string, click .
Pro/NC 251
4. To erase all the additions to the cycle statement string and start again, click .
5. After you have defined the cycle statement syntax, proceed to defining the tool motion for the cycle.
Keywords and Parameter Names for Custom Cycle

Definition
The following list contains the system-supplied keywords that can be used for defining the custom cycle
statement syntax:
· BACK
· CLEAR
· DEPTH
· DIAMET
· DWELL
· FPT
· LEAD
· NOREVR
· ORIENT
· PERREV
· PERMIN
· RAPOUT
· RAPTO
· RETURN
· REV
· STEP
· TIMES
· TLANGL
The following list contains the manufacturing parameters that can be used for defining the custom cycle
statement syntax:
· ARC_FEED
· BACK_BORE_CLEARANCE
· BREAKOUT_DISTANCE
· CLEAR_DIST
· CLEARANCE_OFFSET
· COOLANT_OPTION
· COOLANT_PRESSURE
· CSINK_DIAM
· CUT_FEED
· CUT_UNITS
· DELAY
· DELAY_UNITS
· FEED_UNITS
· FREE_FEED
· FULL_RETRACT_DEPTH
· INTER_RET_HEIGHT
· JOG_DIST
252 Pro/NC
· MAX_SPINDLE_RPM
· ORIENT_ANGLE
· PECK_DEPTH
· PULLOUT_DIST
· RANGE_NUMBER
· RAPTO_DIST
· SPEED_CONTROL
· SPINDLE_RANGE
· SPINDLE_SENSE
· SPINDLE_SPEED
· SPINDLE_STATUS
· THREAD_FEED
· THREAD_FEED_UNITS
To Define the Tool Motion for the Custom Cycle

2. Place your cursor in the Cycle motion list box and click the right mouse button. Select Add Cycle Point
from the pop-up menu.
3. Define the initial point along the hole axis by specifying its vertical offset from a certain reference. For
example, to start at CLEAR_DIST above the start surface, verify that the arrow in the icon next to the
Vertical Offset label is pointing up, select start surface in the from drop-down list and CLEAR_DIST in
the By drop-down list.
4. Click .
The system lists the GOTO motion, along with the reference and offset, in the Cycle motion list box, and
displays a cyan point in the appropriate location in the graphic window on the right.
5. Add more cycle points to create other GOTO motions:
- Use Radial Offset for horizontal motions away from and back to the hole axis. All radial offsets are
with respect to the hole axis, you only have to supply the offset value in the By drop-down list.
- Use Vertical Offset for vertical motions along the hole axis. You have to supply the reference in the
from drop-down list and the offset value in the By drop-down list.
- To specify direction, use the following icons:
—Move toward the hole axis.
—Move away from the hole axis.
—Move up the hole axis.
—Move down the hole axis.

To change direction, click the right-pointing arrow next to the icon and select the icon you want.
- To specify offset as a mathematical expression, click next to the By drop-down list. The
Expression Builder dialog box opens.
As you add cycle points, the system adds the appropriate GOTO motions to the Cycle motion list box and
displays them in the graphic window, with the cycle points shown in cyan and the tool motions between the
points shown in white.
6. If you select a GOTO motion in the Cycle motion list box, you can use the following options on the pop-up
menu:
- Add Cycle Point—Add a cycle point after the selected point.
Pro/NC 253
- Insert Cycle Point—Insert a cycle point before the selected point.
- Modify Cycle Point—Modify offset, reference, or direction for the selected cycle point.
- Delete Cycle Point—Delete the selected cycle point.
- Add Cycle Modifier—Add a cycle modifier to the selected cycle point. A cycle modifier is an NC
parameter. Select the parameter name from the NC Parameter drop-down list. For parameters with
string values, select the parameter value from the Select Value drop-down list. For parameters with
numeric values, select the expression from the Enter Value drop-down list (or define a new expression
by clicking ). Click to add the modifier to the selected cycle point.

- Delete Cycle Modifier—(Available if you select a previously added cycle modifier.) Delete the current
cycle modifier.
7. After you have successfully defined the tool motion, the custom cycle definition is complete. Click
at the bottom of the dialog box to add the custom cycle to the workcell and close the dialog box.
To Build New Expressions

1. Click Add Expression or in the Customize Cycle dialog box.
The Expression Builder dialog box opens.
2. To change the name of the expression, type the new name in the Expression Name text box. You can use
the default name.
3. Select one of the following options:
- Variable—Use a variable. Select the name of the variable from the drop-down list of variables defined
for the current cycle.
- NC Param—Use a manufacturing parameter. Select the name of the parameter from the drop-down
list.
- Scalar—Use a constant. Type the numeric value in the text box.
- Reference—Use distance between two references, for example, between the start surface and the end
surface. Select the reference names from the First Reference and Second Reference drop-down lists.
The distance is calculated as (first reference – second reference).
4. Click to add the selected element to the right side of the expression string, which is displayed in the
read-only text box below.
5. To continue building the expression syntax, select another element and one of the arithmetic sign icons:
+ —Add
– —Subtract
* —Multiply
6. Click .
The system adds the selected sign and element at the end of the expression string.
7. To remove the last addition to the expression string, click .
8. To erase the entire right side of the expression string and start again, click .
9. When finished, click at the bottom of the dialog box to add the expression and return to the
Customize Cycle dialog box. Clicking closes the Expression Builder dialog box without saving the
expression.
254 Pro/NC
Example: Building an Expression
In this example, you are going to add the following expression to your custom cycle definition:
1. In the Customize Cycle dialog box, place your cursor in the Cycle Prompts list box, click the right mouse
button, and select Add Expression from the pop-up menu.
The Expression Builder dialog box opens.
2. Type depth in the Expression Name text box and press RETURN. The expression name updates in the
read-only text box at the bottom.
3. Select the Reference option.
The First Reference and Second Reference list boxes appear under the Reference text box. The drop-
down lists contain the default references, start surface and end surface, as well as all the user-
defined references, such as feed surface, that you have added to the cycle definition. Both list boxes
display the initial value in the drop-down list, which is start surface.
4. Select end surface from the Second Reference Second Reference drop-down list.
The expression in the read-only Reference text box updates. It is now:
start surface - end surface.
5. Click .
The expression string, which is displayed in the read-only text box at the bottom of the dialog box, updates.
It is now:
depth = start surface - end surface
6. Select the NC Param option.
7. Select BREAKOUT_DISTANCE from the drop-down list of parameter names.
8. Note that the Plus sign (+) is selected as the arithmetic sign icon (+, –, or *). Click .
The system adds the selected arithmetic sign and the parameter name at the end of the expression string. The
expression string is now:
9. Click at the bottom of the dialog box to return to the Customize Cycle dialog box.
The system adds the depth expression to the Cycle Prompts list.
To Modify a Custom Cycle

You can modify a custom cycle when creating a Custom Holemaking NC sequence, by using the Customize
Cycle dialog box.
You can also modify a custom cycle by using the Custom Cycles tabbed page of the Machine Tool Setup
dialog box. Place your cursor in the Holemaking customized cycles list box, click the right mouse button, and
select Add cycle from the pop-up menu to open the Customize Cycle dialog box.

2. Select the name of the cycle in the Existing Cycles list box.
3. Click the right mouse button and select Modify cycle from the pop-up menu.
The Customize Cycle dialog box displays the cycle’s name, type, prompts, syntax string, and tool motions.
You can modify any of these elements, for example, add keywords and parameters to the syntax string,
define new references or variables, or change the tool motions.
To Delete a Custom Cycle

1. In the Machine Tool Setup dialog box, click the Custom Cycles tab.
2. In the Holemaking customized cycles list box, select the name of the custom cycle.
3. Click the right mouse button and select Remove cycle from the pop-up menu.
Pro/NC 255
To Create Holemaking NC Sequences Using Custom
Cycles
1. On the MACHINING menu, click NC Sequence > Holemaking | Done > Custom | Done.
2. On the NC SEQUENCE menu, click Seq Setup.
In addition to the common options, available for all the NC sequence types, the SEQ SETUP menu contains
the following specific options:
- Cycle Type—Specify the cycle type by using the Customize Cycle dialog box.
- Holes—Select holes to drill by defining the Hole Sets.
- Check Surfs—Select the surfaces against which you want gouge checking performed.
system starts the user interface for all selected options in turn.
3. When the Customize Cycle dialog box opens, you can either define a new cycle type or use an existing
customized cycle. To use an existing customized cycle, click on the top toolbar of the Customize
Cycle dialog box, select the name of the cycle in the Existing Cycles list box and click the right mouse
button. Use the following options on the pop-up menu:
- Select cycle and return—Select this cycle type and close the Customize Cycle dialog box.
- Modify cycle—Modify the syntax string of the selected cycle. When finished, click to close the
Customize Cycle dialog box.
4. When defining the Hole Set, select the holes to drill, then click the Place Cycle button, located in the
Options section of the HoleSet dialog box.
The Place Cycle dialog box opens. It contains a list of prompts, a graphic window displaying the cycle
motion and all the references, the Prompt Value section for assigning values to the references and
variables, and options for defining the drilling depth.
5. Select the appropriate drilling depth options (click See Also for details).
6. Assign values to all references and variables that do not have a value listed in the Value column of the
Prompt List box. For example, if the Hole Depth option is Auto, the start surface and end surface are
determined automatically; if you use another depth option, you have to select a surface or specify a Z offset
for each of these references. Click See Also for details.
system. If not satisfied, you can either modify the parameters, or use the Customize functionality to adjust
the tool path.
To Assign Values to References and Variables

When you place a custom cycle, you have to instantiate, or, in other words, assign values to, all references and
variables that do not have a value listed in the Value column of the Prompt List box.
1. In the Prompt List box, select the reference or variable.
2. Use the buttons and text boxes in the Prompt Value section to supply a value:
- To instantiate a reference, you must select a surface, a datum point, or a quilt. If you select a slanted or
non-planar surface as a reference, the height is determined at the point of intersection of the surface
with the hole axis. You can also select the Z offset option and type the Z-coordinate of the NC
sequence coordinate system.
- To instantiate a variable, you must type a value.
3. Click Assign.
Example: Creating a Custom Holemaking NC

Sequence
In this example, you are going to create a Holemaking NC sequence using the custom cycle called FDRILL.
256 Pro/NC
Creating this custom cycle is described in a previous example topic (click See Also for details).
1. On the MACHINING menu, click NC Sequence > Holemaking | Done > Custom | Done.
2. On the NC SEQUENCE menu, click Seq Setup | Done.
3. Specify the tool.
4. On the top toolbar of the Customize Cycle dialog box opens, click , select FDRILL in the Existing
Cycles list box, click the right mouse button, and click the Select cycle and return option on the pop-up
menu.
5. Specify the NC sequence parameters.
6. On the HoleSet dialog box, use any selection method to specify the holes to be drilled. For example, click
the Diameters tab, click Add, select the hole diameter corresponding to the cutter diameter of the tool in the
Select hole diameter dialog box, and click OK.
7. Click Place Cycle.
The Place Cycle dialog box opens. It contains a list of all the references, variables, and manufacturing
parameters used in the cycle definition. The parameter values are listed in the Value column. The default
drilling depth option is Auto, which means that the start surface and the end surface are determined
automatically. You have to assign a value to the feed surface reference and to the new feed
variable.
8. Select feed surface in the prompt list. Select the Z offset option in the Prompt Value section of the dialog
box and type -2 in the text box. This means that the feed surface is 2 inches below the XY-plane of the NC
sequence coordinate system, which in our example coincides with the start surface (see the following
illustration). Click Assign. The value of the feed surface in the prompt list changes to Defined.
9. Select new feed in the prompt list. In the Enter text box, located in the Prompt Value section of the dialog
box, type 30. Click Assign. The value of the new feed in the prompt list changes to 30.0000.
10. Click to complete the cycle placement and close the Place Cycle dialog box. The NC sequence tool
path is shown in the following illustration.
Pro/NC 257
About Auto Drilling
Auto Drilling is an advanced way of creating Holemaking NC sequences. It is easy to use and reduces the time
required to program multiple tool paths.
The Auto Drilling user interface is based on a single dialog box. The system automatically identifies all the
holes present in the model and lists them in a single table. You can customize the look of the table by selecting
the parameters you want to display and changing the width of the columns.
To create Holemaking NC sequences, you select the holes to machine, and specify which drilling method to use
for each hole by selecting from a list of preset Hole Strategies. These Hole Strategies are based on
Manufacturing UDFs.
You can also edit the values of hole parameters, such as hole dimensions, upper and lower tolerances, or thread
parameters. These values override the design part information when you are creating the Auto Drilling
sequences.
To Create an Auto Drilling NC Sequence

1. On the MACHINING menu, click Auto Drilling.
The system displays the Auto-Drilling dialog box, which shows the names of the default NC Sequence
coordinate system and retract plane. You can select a different coordinate system or retract plane, if desired.
2. Click View > Auto-Drilling Table to list all the holes that can be auto drilled using this coordinate system
and retract plane. The auto-drilling table lists the holes with their parameters, as well as the existing hole
machining strategies. You can further filter the holes (for example, by specifying a starting surface or a
diameter), edit hole parameters, or add more machining strategies. You can also customize the table format
by selecting the parameters to display, and change the sorting order.
3. Select the hole(s) you want to machine; then select the desired drill method in the right pane and click << to
apply this method to the selected holes. Proceed applying drill methods to machine all the holes.
4. Click OK to create the NC sequences.
The system again displays the Auto-Drilling dialog box, which now shows all the NC sequences being
created as a result of applying the drill methods. For each NC sequence, the system displays the pocket
number, the tool name, the cycle type, the sequence name, as well as the minimum diameter and maximum
length. You can reorder the NC sequences, if desired.
5. Click OK when finished.
258 Pro/NC
To Select a Coordinate System and Retract Plane
You must specify the coordinate system (Program Zero) and retract plane to be used for Auto Drilling. The
system automatically finds all the holes with the axes parallel to the z-axis of the specified coordinate system
and lists them in the Auto-Drilling table. You can further filter these holes, if desired, and then apply drilling
methods to some or all of them.
1. Click View > Select Csys.
The Auto-Drilling dialog box displays the names of the currently selected coordinate system and retract
plane in text boxes labeled NC Sequence Program Zero and NC Sequence Retract Plane, respectively.
There is a Select icon next to each text box. There are also three buttons below the text boxes: Apply,
Default, and Previous. The list box on the right contains all the previously specified combinations of the
Program zero coordinate system and retract plane.
2. To change the coordinate system, click the Select icon and select a coordinate system on the screen (or
create a new one).
3. To change the retract plane, click the Select icon use the following options in the Retract Selection dialog
box:
- Select—Select a datum plane. It must be normal to the z-axis of the currently selected coordinate
system.
- Along Z Axis—Type the offset value along the z-axis of the currently selected coordinate system.
4. You can also select an existing combination of the Program Zero coordinate system and retract plane from
the list box on the right.
5. Click one of the three buttons below the text boxes:
- Apply—Accept the currently selected combination of the coordinate system and retract plane.
- Default—Use the default coordinate system and retract plane.
- Previous—Ignore the current selections and return to the previous Auto-Drilling table.
The Default Coordinate System and Retract Plane

When you create an Auto Drilling NC sequence, the system uses the current modal settings for the coordinate
system and the retract plane.
If you have specified different Machine and NC Sequence coordinate systems, the system uses the NC
Sequence coordinate system to filter holes according to the machining direction. If the NC Sequence coordinate
system is not defined, the system uses the Machine coordinate system.
Note: Unlike other types of NC sequences, you must define a valid combination of the coordinate system and
retract plane before you select Auto Drilling from the MACHINING menu. You can later change your
selections while defining the Auto Drilling NC sequence.
To Filter Rows
The Auto-Drilling table initially lists all the holes with the axes parallel to the z-axis of the specified coordinate
system. You can apply further filtering rules to these holes, if desired.
1. Click View > Filter Rows.
The Auto-Drilling dialog box displays three list boxes: the Filter by box, on the left, lists all the available
filters; the middle box lists the values available for the filter selected in the left box; and the Selected Filters
box, on the right, lists the currently selected filtering rules. There are three buttons between the middle and
right boxes: >>, <<, and Preview; and three buttons below the list boxes: OK, Apply, and Cancel.
2. Select a name of the filter in the Filter by box. The central box is updated to list the values available for the
current filter (for example, diameter of the holes present in the model).
3. Select the desired value and click the >> button. The filtering rule appears in the Selected Filters box under
the appropriate heading.
4. To view the holes that correspond to the current combination of filtering rules, click Preview. The system
highlights the appropriate holes on the screen (move the dialog box, if necessary, to view the model).
Pro/NC 259
5. To remove a filtering rule, select it in the Selected Filters box and click the << button. To remove all the
filtering rules, select Default in the Filter by box.
6. To complete the filtering process, click one of the three buttons below the list boxes:
- OK—Accept the current filtering rules and return to the Auto-Drilling table.
- Apply—Apply the current filtering rules.
- Cancel—Ignore the current selections and return to the Auto-Drilling table.
Filters Available for Auto Drilling

The following filters are available:
· Surface—Filters holes based on their start surface. The middle list box contains a list of the existing start
surfaces.
· Diameter—Filters holes based on their diameter. The middle list box contains a list of the existing hole
diameters.
· Hole Style—Filters holes based on the assigned drilling method. The middle list box contains a list of the
existing Hole Strategies.
· Parameters—Filters holes based on the specified parameter value. The middle list box contains a list of all
feature parameters associated with Hole and Cosmetic Thread features in the model. When you select a
parameter name in the list, the Value text box below will contain a drop-down list of all the currently
present values for this parameter. Select the desired operator (for example, "!=") from the drop-down
Operator list, and a value from the Value drop-down list to specify a relation. The system displays the
resulting relation in the bottom list box.
· Status—Filters holes based on their machining status. If you select Incomplete, displays only those holes
that have not been programmed.
· Default—Filters holes based on the machining direction of the coordinate system (equivalent to removing
all the selected filters).
If you specify a combination of filters, the system searches for holes that satisfy all of them; that is, if you
specify a diameter value and select a surface, the system includes only the holes of the specified diameter that
are located on the selected surface.
To Edit Hole Parameters

You can edit the values of hole parameters, such as drilling depth, upper and lower tolerances, or thread
parameters. These values override the design part information when you are creating the Auto Drilling
sequences.
1. Click View > Edit Hole Dimensions or View > Edit Thread Parameters. While in Edit mode, you can
toggle between editing the hole dimensions and the thread parameters by selecting either Edit Hole
Parameters or Edit Cosmetic Thread Parameters in the right pane of the Auto-Drilling dialog box.
The system displays the text boxes for the appropriate parameters in the right pane.
2. Select a hole in the Auto-Drilling table by clicking in the appropriate row.
3. To change the start surface, click the Select icon below the Start Surface label and select the desired
surface on the screen.
The surface name appears in the text box below the Start Surface label.
4. To edit other parameters, type the new values in the appropriate text boxes.
5. Click Apply to apply the new values to the selected hole.
The system updates the fields in the Auto-Drilling table to reflect the new parameter values.
6. To revert to the design part parameters, select the hole in the Auto-Drilling table and click Reset. To reset
only one parameter, select From Reference Model in the appropriate text box and click Apply.
To Apply Hole Strategies

You can specify which drilling method to use for each hole by selecting from a list of preset Hole Strategies.
260 Pro/NC
1. Click View > Apply Drilling Method.
2. Select the hole(s) in the Auto-Drilling table. To select one or more holes, click in the appropriate row(s). To
select a range of holes, select the first hole in the range, then hold down the SHIFT key and select the last
hole in the range. Once you select a hole, its row is highlighted. To unselect a single hole and retain the rest
of selections, click again in the highlighted row.
3. Select the Hole Strategy you want to apply to these holes. The existing Hole Strategies are listed in the right
pane of the Auto-Drilling dialog box. You can browse through the directory structure to search for the Hole
Strategies. By default, the search starts in the directory specified by using the configuration option
autodrill_udf_dir <pathname>, or, if not specified, in your working directory.
4. Select one of the depth options on the Hole Strategies tab:
- From Table—The drill depth is defined by the Depth parameter in the Auto-Drilling table. If you
select this option, the Hole Strategy will have the <T> prefix when it is listed in the Hole Style field of
the Auto-Drilling table.
- From Param—The drill depth is defined either by the table or by the UDF NC sequence, depending on
the DEPTH_BY_TABLE parameter value. This feature parameter of type Yes or No must be assigned
to the UDF NC sequence before you create the UDF. If the parameter is set to Yes, then the drill depth
is defined by the Depth parameter in the Auto-Drilling table; if it is No, then the drill depth is defined
by the UDF NC sequence. If you select this option, the Hole Strategy will have the <P> prefix when it
is listed in the Hole Style field of the Auto-Drilling table.
- From Seq—The drill depth is defined by the UDF NC sequence. If you select this option, the Hole
Strategy will have the <S> prefix when it is listed in the Hole Style field of the Auto-Drilling table.
5. Click << to apply the selected strategy to the highlighted holes.
The system displays the name of the Hole Strategy with the appropriate depth prefix in the Hole Style field
of the Auto-Drilling table and changes the Status field from Incomplete to Complete.
6. To remove a previously applied Hole Strategy, select the hole(s) in the Auto-Drilling table and click
Remove.
7. To exit the Auto-Drilling dialog box and create the appropriate Holemaking NC sequences, click OK.
Defining Your Hole Strategies

You can define your Hole Strategies by creating Manufacturing UDFs based on Holemaking NC sequences.
The Holemaking NC sequence used to define a UDF for Auto Drilling has the following characteristics:
· Can machine only one hole (including any coaxial holes, bores, countersinks, and so on)
· Cannot itself be created from a UDF (must be a regular Holemaking NC sequence)
When defining the UDF, you must specify the following references:
· operation—The operation.
· oper_csys—The Machine coordinate system.
· csys—The NC Sequence coordinate system.
· oper_retract—The Operation retract.
· retract—The NC Sequence retract.
· axis—The hole axis.
· start_surface—The start surface for the drilling sequence.
The syntax of these UDF references must be exactly as shown above.
To Customize the Table

You can customize the look of the table by selecting the parameters you want to display and changing the
names and width of the columns.
1. Click View > Customize Columns.
The Auto-Drilling dialog box displays a list of available parameters, with a check box located to the left of
each parameter label. Using the text box located to the right of the parameter label you can switch between
Pro/NC 261
two names for this parameter, one long and one short. This name will be used as a heading in the Auto-
Drilling table. If you select short names, you can later manually change the width of the appropriate
columns to make the table more compact.
Immediately below the list of parameters there are two icons: Select All and Unselect All. Immediately
below these icons there are three buttons: OK, Cancel, and Defaults.
Parameters that are currently displayed in the Auto-Drilling table have their check boxes selected.
2. Select or clear the check boxes as desired, to specify which parameters are to be displayed in the Auto-
Drilling table. You can use the Select All and Unselect All icons to speed up the selection process.
3. To change the name of a column, switch the parameter name by clicking the drop-down arrow next to the
text box.
4. When finished, click one of the three buttons:
- OK—Accept the current selections and return to the Auto-Drilling table. The table display will be
updated to reflect the new parameter selections and column widths.
- Cancel—Ignore the current selections and return to the Auto-Drilling table.
- Defaults—Use the default set of parameters and the default column widths.
To Reorder the NC Sequences Created by Auto

Drilling
When you apply the drilling methods to the selected holes and click OK, the system redisplays the Auto-
Drilling dialog box, and shows all the NC sequences being created as a result of applying the drill methods. For
each NC sequence, the system displays the pocket number, the tool name, the cycle type, the sequence name, as
well as the minimum diameter and maximum length. You can reorder these NC sequences both automatically
and manually.
1. Click Auto Reorder to automatically reorder the NC sequences based on:
a. Process order in UDF
b. Limiting tool changes
If the Consider Orientation checkbox is selected, the system will reorder based on the coordinate system
associated with the holes being drilled.
2. To manually reorder the NC sequences, highlight the appropriate row(s), click Cut, then place the cursor in
the new location and click Paste.
The system inserts the row(s) immediately above the new cursor location.
3. Click Undo or Redo to roll the reordering changes back or forward.
4. Click OK when finished.
About Wire EDM NC Sequences

Wire EDM is the NC sequence performed by Wire Electric Discharge Machines. Pro/NC lets you create 2- and
4-Axis Wire EDM NC sequences, depending on the number of axes specified when defining the workcell.
To Create a 2-Axis Wire EDM NC Sequence

Use 2-Axis Wire EDM NC sequences for any type of 2-axis contouring, including Wire EDM, flame cut, water
jet, and laser.
1. Choose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu. You must be in a WEDM workcell.
2. The MACH AUX menu appears. If in a 4-Axis workcell, choose 2 Axis.
3. Choose Contouring and Done.
4. If you have specified the tool, site, and coordinate systems at setup time, you do not have to select Seq
Setup at this point, and can proceed directly to step 5. If you choose Seq Setup, the SEQ SETUP menu will
contain the common options, available for all the NC sequence types.
262 Pro/NC
in turn.
5. Choose Customize and interactively specify the tool path.
General techniques for creating Automatic Cut motions in Wire EDM are similar to that in Trajectory
Milling. You can automatically create Rough, Finish, and Detach motions referencing the same contour.
You can also create No Core cut motions. Connect the cut motions using the Tool Motion functionality.
Contouring and No Core Cut Motions

There are two general types of 2-Axis Wire EDM cut motions:
· Contouring—The tool will follow a specified trajectory. You can create Rough, Finish, and Detach cut
motions by referencing the same contour.
· No Core—All material within a specified contour will be removed.
To Create Rough, Finish, and Detach Cut Motions

For 2- and 4-Axis Contouring, the INTERACT PATH menu is called WEDM OPT, because it contains additional
options that allow you create Rough and Finish motions within the same NC sequence and using the same
contour, as well as create separate Detach motions to cut off previously machined parts. These options also
appear in the CUT ALONG menu for 2- and 4-Axis Contouring.
If you check off the Rough option, a single Cut Motion will be created. If you also check off the Finish option,
the system will additionally create as many Finish motions as specified by the NUM_PROFILE_PASSES
parameter value. If the appropriate information is present in the register table, it will be used; if the information
is missing, the remaining passes will be computed using the PROF_INCREMENT parameter value.
Pro/NC 263
Rough and Profile Cut Motions
1 2
3
4
9
10
11
1 ATTACH_WIDTH
2 REVERSE_DIST
3 Approach move
4 Thread Poinr
5 Contour of the part to be machined
6 Rough cut motion
7 1st Finish cut motion
8 2nd Finish cut motion
9 PROF_INCREMENT
10 STOCK_ALLOW + SPARK_ALLOW + 0.5*CUTTER_DIAM
11 NUM_PROFILE_PASSES 2
The APPROACH_MOVE parameter allows you to specify if the Approach move will be created (you must also
select or create a start point for the Approach move using the Thread Point or Approach Point option in the
CUT ALONG menu, described below). If you specify the machining offset (CUTCOM), the system
automatically determines the correct application of CUTCOM, based on the location of the start point with
respect to the contour to be machined, as shown in the following illustration.
264 Pro/NC
1 2
6 10
3
8
5 9
4
11 12
17
16
20
14 15 18
19
13
1 Example 1: Machine outside the contour (punch), start point outside the contour
2 Example 2: Machine outside the contour (punch), start point inside the contour
3 reference part
4 Thread point
5 approach CUTCOM RIGHT
6 Contour CUTCOM RIGHT
7 Thread point
8 reference part
9 approach CUTCOM LEFT
10 Contour CUTCOM RIGHT
11 Example 3: Machine inside the contour (die), start point outside the contour
12 Example 4: Machine inside the contour (die), start point inside the contour
13 Reference part
14 Thread point
15 Approach CUTCOM RIGHT
16 Contour CUTCOM LEFT
17 Thread point
18 Reference part
19 Approach CUTCOM LEFT
20 contour CUTCOM LEFT
Note: If CUTCOM_MOVE is specified, it will use the CUTCOM direction for the cut motion, as before. It
is not recommended to specify CUTCOM_MOVE for cases 2 and 3 shown in the illustration above.
The Connect moves between multiple cut motions are defined by the parameter CUT_MOTION_CONNECT.
If you check off the Detach option, a Detach motion will also be created. It will have the same shape as the
Rough motion for which it is created, with its length being equal to (REVERSE_DIST + ATTACH_WIDTH).
Pro/NC 265
Example: Rough, Finish, and Detach Cut Motions
The following two illustrations show an example of creating multiple Rough cut motions within the same NC
sequence and then cutting off the parts in a separate NC sequence referencing the previously created cut
motions.
The following illustration shows multiple Rough cut motions with Approach moves.
1
2
3
5 6
1 REVERSE_DIST
2 ATTACH_WIDTH
3 Thread point
4 Approach move
5 CUT_MOTION_CONNECT CUT_WIRE APPROACH_MOVE YES
6 Rough cut motion
The following illustration shows Detach motions.
2
3
1 ATTACH_WIDTH + REVERSE_DIST
2 Detach cut motion
3 Create the Detach motions using the Use Prev option, and reference the NC sequence shown in the
previous illustration.
4 APPROACH_MOVE NO
266 Pro/NC
To Specify Thread Point and Approach Point
When you create Automatic Cut motions in Wire EDM, the CUT ALONG menu contains the following
additional options:
· Thread Point—Specify the point for threading in the wire by selecting or creating a datum point. By
default (that is, unless you specify a separate Approach point using the option below), the Thread point is
also used as a start point for the Approach move, as described above.
· Approach Point—Specify a datum point, other than the Thread point, to serve as a start point for the
Approach move. If you specify both a Thread point and an Approach point, the system will load wire at the
Thread point, invoke initial power, flush, and feed registers, move the wire directly to the Approach point,
and then make the shortest move from the Approach point to the cut contour. The system will apply the
number of cutcom points and invoke the cutcom and taper registers on this move.
Example: Specifying Thread Point and Approach

Point
1
3 4
2
1 Approach Point
2 Thread Point
3 Thread Point
4 ATTACH_WIDTH + REVERSE_DIST
To Specify Taper Angle for 2-Axis Contouring

The Taper Angle option in the INT CUT menu, available for 2-Axis Contouring Wire EDM only, allows you to
select pairs of points on the tool path: the first point is where the taper angle is turned on, and the second—
where it is turned off.
1. Choose Taper Angle from the INT CUT menu.
2. The TAPER ANGLE menu appears with the options:
- Add—Add pairs of taper points.
- Remove—Delete a previously defined pair of taper points by selecting one of the points.
- Show—Display the currently defined pairs of taper points.
- Redefine—Modify location of taper points or the taper angle value.
3. Choose Add.
4. Select an option from the NOW/NEXT menu to specify when the tool axis position is to be changed:
- Now—At the selected point.
- Next—At the next GOTO point.
5. Select a point on the cut motion to specify where the taper angle is to be turned on.
Pro/NC 267
6. Select the appropriate option from the NOW/NEXT menu, if needed, and select another point on the cut
motion to specify where the taper angle is to be turned off.
7. Choose Enter and enter a value for the taper angle for this pair of points. Previously specified values, if any,
will be available for selection.

Corner conditions can be specified for the vertices of the cut motion created using the Edge or Curve option, to
avoid gouging sharp corners. Wherever a corner condition is added, a small parallelogram will be incorporated
in the cut motion: the tool will continue moving along the first entity, then return to enter tangent to the second
entity. The size of the parallelogram is defined by the path parameter CORNER_LENGTH.
If you add a corner condition along an entity or between two tangent entities, the angle of the parallelogram will
be defined by the CORNER_ANGLE parameter; if the condition is at a vertex and the corner is sharp, the
CORNER_ANGLE value will be ignored and the sides of the parallelogram will be formed as a continuation of
the adjoining entities.
The following graphic illustrates the CORNER_LENGTH and CORNER_ANGLE parameters.
2
1
1 CORNER_LENGTH
2 CORNER_LENGTH
3 CORNER_ANGLE
The following corner condition types are available:
· Straight—Create a straight corner condition.
· Concave—Create a round corner motion for a corner that is concave.
· Convex—Create a round corner motion for a corner that is convex.
· Chamfer—A chamfer whose size is defined by the CHAMFER_DIM parameter, which represents the
distance cut on each side of the corner.
· Bisect—The tool makes a straight cut into the material, bisecting the angle between adjacent (non-tangent)
edges. The length of the cut is defined by the CORNER_LENGTH parameter. Cutter compensation will be
turned off for the corner creation motion and reactivated for the continuation of cut motion. This type of
corner is used to allow the part to flex and spring back during subsequent assembly.
· Fillet—Create a fillet corner motion.
· Loop—Create a loop corner motion. Available for convex corner conditions only.
268 Pro/NC
Example: Corner Conditions
The following illustration shows straight and round corner conditions.
3 4
1 Straight corner condition

2 Round (Loop) corner condition at convex corner
3 design part assembled to workpiece
4 cut motion with corner conditions displayed

1. Choose Corners from the INT CUT menu.
- Redefine—Respecify a corner condition.
options:
each selection, the corner condition will be added at the selection point. Choose Done Sel when
finished.
- Automatic—Corner conditions will be automatically added at all the corners. Corner conditions will
be added according to the following rules:
All concave corners will be filleted.
All convex corners on an outside contour of a part will be filleted.
All convex corners on an inside contour of a part will be looped.
If the system is unable to determine the type of the contour, you will be prompted to specify if this is in
inside or an outside contour using the following options:
- Female Part—Inside contour.
- Male Part—Outside contour.
SELECT menu:
Pro/NC 269
- Show All—Display all the currently added corner conditions. Straight corner conditions will be
highlighted in yellow, convex—in red, and concave—in cyan.
To Create No Core Cut Motions

No Core cut motions remove all material within a specified contour.
1. Create a 2-Axis Wire EDM NC sequence, specify the tool and manufacturing parameters.
4. Choose No Core from the WEDM OPT menu. Select the type of geometric references to use (Sketch, Edge,
or Curve) and choose Done.
5. Use the Thread Point and Approach Point options in the CUT ALONG menu if you are not satisfied with
the system default start point. To specify a Thread point or an Approach point, select or create a datum
point, then choose Done/Return from the DEFN POINT menu.
6. Define a closed contour to be machined by either sketching or selecting edges or curves, based on the type
of geometric references selected in step 4:
- For Sketch—Sketch a closed contour in the XY-plane of the NC Sequence coordinate system.
- For Edge—Select edges to define the area to be removed. The edges must form a closed contour.
- For Curve—Select curves to define the area to be removed. The curves must form a closed contour.
This contour will then be scanned according to the specified scan type (similar to a single slice in milling).
7. Choose Done Cut or Next Cut from the INT CUT menu.
Specifying a Start Point for No Core Cut Motions

When you create a No Core cut motion, the system calculates a default start point, based on the specified
contour and the spiral step. You can specify a different start point for a No Core cut motion by using the
Thread Point option in the CUT ALONG menu and creating or selecting a datum point; the system will then
calculate the scan trajectory and the default start point, and move the wire from the user-defined start point
(Thread point) to the default start point by tracing along the connection portions of the scan pattern.
1 Default start point

2 User-defined start point
3 RETURN_TO_START YES
If the RETURN_TO_START parameter is set to YES (the default is NO), the wire will return to the start point
upon completing the cut motion.
The connection move is defined by the CUT_MOTION_CONNECT parameter. When
CUT_MOTION_CONNECT is set to CUT_WIRE (the default), the wire will be unloaded and fed at
FREE_FEED rate along a straight line to the start point of the subsequent cut motion. If set to CONTINUOUS,
270 Pro/NC
the wire will move from the end of the No Core motion to the start point of the subsequent motion at the
CUT_FEED rate.
If you specify both a Thread point and an Approach point, the system will load wire at the Thread point, move it
directly to the Approach point, and then use the Approach point as a user-defined start point.
To Use Previous Cut Motions

You can create new Automatic Cut motions by following previously created ones. When you choose Use Prev
from the WEDM OPT menu, the USE PRV OPT menu will appear with the options:
· By NC Seq—If you choose this option, a namelist menu of all applicable NC sequences will appear. Once
you select an NC sequence name, all Automatic Cut motions present in this NC sequence will be listed in a
checkmark menu. You can check off as many motions as you like, or use Select All.
· By Cut—If you choose this option, all applicable Automatic Cut motions in all the previously created NC
sequences will be listed. You can select one Automatic Cut motion.
When you redefine an Automatic Cut motion, the Ref Cut Mtn option in the CUT ALONG menu allows you to
select a reference Automatic Cut motion using the same interface as the By Cut option above.
To Mirror Cut Motions

In Wire EDM, you can create Automatic Cut motions by mirroring previously created cut motions. The
mechanism for selecting a cut motion to mirror is the same as when you create cut motions using the Use Prev
option.
Note: You cannot mirror a cut motion that was created using the Mirror option.
3. Choose Mirror from the WEDM OPT menu. Notice that Use Prev highlights automatically and all the other
options become dimmed. Choose Done.
4. Using either By Cut or By NC Seq, select the cut motion to mirror from a namelist menu. The selected cut
motion highlights on the screen.
5. Select or create a plane to mirror about.
6. The mirror cut motion is created.
Example: Mirroring Cut Motions

The following illustration shows mirroring previous cut motions.
1 2
3
1 Reference cut motion

2 Create a datum plane
3 Mirror cut motion created
Pro/NC 271
To Create a 4-Axis Wire EDM NC Sequence in Taper
Angle Format
To create a 4-Axis Wire EDM NC sequence with CL data output in XYZ / IJK format or using the STAN
statement, follow the procedure below.
1. Choose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu. You must be in a 4-axis WEDM workcell.
2. Choose Taper Angle, 4 Axis, and Done from the MACH AUX menu.
3. If you have specified the tool, site, and coordinate systems at setup time, you do not have to select Seq
Setup at this point, and can proceed directly to step 5. If you choose Seq Setup, the SEQ SETUP menu will
contain the common options, available for all the NC sequence types.
in turn.
4. Choose Customize and interactively specify the tool path. You can automatically create Rough, Finish, and
Detach motions referencing the same contour.
To Create a 4-Axis Wire EDM NC Sequence in

Head1/Head2 Format
To create a 4-Axis Wire EDM NC sequence with CL data output in Head1/Head2 format, follow the procedure
below.
1. Choose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu. You must be in a 4-axis WEDM workcell.
2. Choose XY-UV Type, 4 Axis, and Done from the MACH AUX menu.
3. Choose Seq Setup from the NC SEQUENCE menu. The SEQ SETUP menu will include the following
commands:
- XY Plane—Specify the bottom plane for Head2 output.
- UV Plane—Specify the top plane for Head1 output.
Note: The XY Plane and UV Plane settings are modal. That is, you have to specify the top and bottom
planes for the first 4-Axis WEDM NC sequence in the manufacturing model; for subsequent
sequences, the system will automatically use the previous top and bottom planes unless you explicitly
change them.
The CTM DEPTH menu will appear twice to allow you specify both planes. Use:
- Specify Plane—To select or create a plane.
- Z Depth—To locate the plane by entering a value for depth with respect to the NC sequence coordinate
system.
- Use Prev—To use a top or bottom plane from one of the previous NC sequences. Select the sequence
name from a namelist menu.
4. Choose Customize, then select Automatic Cut from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and
click Insert.
5. The INT CUT menu will appear with Cut already chosen, causing the CUT ALONG menu to appear as well,
with Drive Surf already chosen. The following commands will also be listed:
- Thread Point—Select or create a datum point as the loading point for the wire and starting location of
the tool path.
- Approach Point—Select or create a datum point as the alternate starting location of the tool path. The
system will load wire at the Thread point, move it directly to the Approach point, and then start cutting
from the point on the contour closest to the Approach point.
- Contour1—Sketch or select the first contour in the cut.
- Contour2—Sketch or select the second contour in the cut.
Note: When creating the cut motion, the system will attempt to synchronize the entities in the two
contours in the order they were sketched or selected: the first entity of the first contour with the first
272 Pro/NC
entity of the second contour, and so on. Keep this in mind when sketching or selecting the contours, or
supply manual synchronization.
- Side Surfs—Indicate the contours of the cut by selecting side surfaces. This command is used in place
of the Contour1 and Contour2 commands.
- Synch—Brings up the SYNCH menu for specifying points to synchronize the positions of Head1 and
Head2.
- Direction—Indicate the direction the tool will travel in to make the cut.
- Offset—Specify the direction in which the cut motion will be offset.
6. Choose Done from the CUT ALONG menu to begin specifying the cut.
7. Select or create a datum point to use as the Thread point. If you selected Approach Point as well, select or
create another datum point to use as the Approach point.
8. The TRAJ OPT menu will appear in turn for contour1 and contour2; choose Sketch or Select to indicate the
contour.
9. If you are creating synch points, the SYNCH menu appears with the following commands:
- Add—Select a location on a contour to place a synch point.
- Remove—Select an existing synch point to delete.
- Show—Display existing synch points.
- Done/Return—Quit the SYNCH menu and return to defining the cut motion.
10. An arrow appears, originating at the start point that you created in step 7. Choose Flip or Okay to indicate
the direction of the cut motion.
11. The SLOT OFFSET menu appears with the options None, Left, and Right. Choose an option to indicate the
direction of the tool offset.
12. The INT CUT menu reappears; choose Show to display the cut motion.
Note: If you get an error message "Cut motion cannot be created" try adding more synch points.
Automatic Synchronization of Start and End Points

The start and end points of a 4-Axis Wire EDM Automatic Cut motion can be automatically synchronized using
the AUTOSYNCH_START_END parameter, available both at the NC sequence and the Customize levels. This
functionality applies to 4-Axis Automatic Cut motions defined using the Contour1/Contour2 or Side Surfs
options.
By default (AUTOSYNCH_START_END YES), the two heads will be automatically synchronized at the
beginning and the end of each cut, as explained below.
1
6
1 At the beginning of cut, the start of the 1st contour is auto synchronized with the closest point of the 2nd
contour.
Pro/NC 273
2 As the cut starts, use default synchronization.
3 Here, the default synchronization is still used.
4 At the end of cut, the end of the contour completed first is auto synchronized with the closest point of the
other contour.
5 Lower contour
6 Upper contour
The illustration above shows how automatic synchronization works. The cut for the lower guide is the larger
rectangular contour. The cut for the upper wire guide is the smaller contour. On the initial engagement of the
wire to the lower contour, the upper contour will be synchronized automatically by finding the shortest distance
between the two contours. As the wire goes around the profiles, they will automatically be synchronized by
finding corresponding vertices on each. If the vertices are at tangent edges, you have an option to automatically
synchronize the vertices between contours with the same number of entities by setting the
AUTO_SYNCHRONIZE parameter to YES (the default is NO). You can also provide additional
synchronization by manually specifying Synch points.
As the wire approaches the end of the pass on the cut motion, the endpoint synchronization will take effect. In
this example, the wire will complete the upper contour before the lower contour; therefore, a synchronization
point will be automatically made to swing the lower wire in line with the upper wire using the shortest distance
between the two contours. The wire will then step in to the next pass and repeat the process.
Note: If an approach is made on a non-planar surface (for example, a cone), orienting the wire axis as
described above may cause a gouge because the axis may not line up with the u-v lines of the surface.
In this case, you will get a message: "WARNING: Approach is made on non-planar surface and may cause
gouge." Based on this warning, you can either set AUTOSYNCH_START_END to NO or change the
Thread (Approach) point.
If you set AUTOSYNCH_START_END to NO, the start and end points of the upper and lower contours will be
mapped by cut entities; therefore, the upper and lower contours will have different start and end points in XY.
Register Tables
You can specify generator, cutcom, technology, offset, and flush registers, as well as taper and feed values, for
Wire EDM NC sequences by using a register table. This allows you to set different register, taper, and feed
values for each cut motion type (Approach, No Core, Rough, up to 16 Finish motions, and Detach). Register
tables can be created either at setup time, or at the time of defining the NC sequence.
Note: Cutcom and Taper registers are not supported for No Core motions.
If a register table is specified for an NC sequence (either by setting the REGISTER_TABLE parameter or using
the Select option in the CR/SEL RGR menu), then register values for each cut motion specified in the register
table will be output to the CL data file. These values take precedence over the register values and feeds
specified in the NC sequence parameters file.
To Set Up the Register Table(s)

1. Choose Mfg Setup from the MANUFACTURE or MACHINING menu.
2. Choose Param Setup from the MFG SETUP menu.
3. Choose Register from the PARAM SETUP menu.
4. The following options are available:
- Create—Create a new register table. Enter the name for the table, then edit it in Pro/TABLE. You have
to store this table on disk using the Save option below in order to use it in other models.
- Modify—Modify an existing register table. In order to be modifiable, the table has to either be created
in the model, or added to it using the Retrieve option below.
- Retrieve—Read an existing register table from disk to add it to the current manufacturing model.
- Save—Save a register table on disk to use it in another model.
- Delete—Delete an existing register table.
274 Pro/NC
- Show—Display a register table in the Information Window. Select a register table name from a
namelist menu. Only tables that exist in the model can be displayed.
More than one register table can be added to the model. You can specify which table is to be used in an NC
sequence by supplying the name of the table as the REGISTER_TABLE parameter value.
At the time of defining the NC sequence, the Register option appears in the MFG PARAMS menu. It brings up
the CR/SEL RGR menu with the following options:
· Set Up—Brings up the REGISTER menu to allow you to create, read, or modify register tables.
· Select—Select an existing register table. This sets the REGISTER_TABLE parameter value. In order to be
selectable, the table has to either be created in the model, or added to it using the Retrieve option.
Radius Substitution Tables

Certain wire EDM machines are difficult to control when machining corners; as a result, parts are often overcut
during initial passes that are created at a high power setting. Radius substitution allows you to modify selected
reference part radii on a pass-by-pass basis, in order to achieve proper machining of the parts.
Radius substitution is performed by setting up radius substitution tables and associating them with 2-Axis Wire
EDM NC sequences at the time of creating the Rough and Finish cut motions.
Radius substitution tables provide the value of the radius to be used in the toolpath generation depending on:
· The type of the corner (concave or convex)
· The value of the radius of the selected contour to be machined
· The number of the pass (a Rough and up to 16 Finish)
When a table is used, the corner to be cut is evaluated to determine its type and the current pass. The toolpath
for that pass is modified to have the radius from the table rather than that of the contour. The table is
interpolated for contour radii not explicitly listed. Value of 0 (zero) means substituting a sharp corner for the
radius. There is no interpolation between 0 and another substitution value. When a column has zeros in it, sharp
corners are substituted for all values up to that where a non-zero substitution radius is listed. In the example
below, sharp corners will be substituted on the Rough pass for all radii up to 0.007.
To Set Up the Radius Substitution Table(s)

1. Choose Mfg Setup from the MANUFACTURE or MACHINING menu.
2. Choose Param Setup from the MFG SETUP menu.
3. Choose Radius Subst from the PARAM SETUP menu.
4. The RAD SETUP menu comes up with the following options:
- Create—Create a new radius substitution table. Enter the name for the table, then select the radial type:
Concave or Convex. This table will be used for corners of the specified type only, and the appropriate
suffix ("_cvv" or "_cvx") will be added to the table name. The Pro/TABLE comes up; edit the table by
entering the radius values as described in the reference topic. You have to store this table on disk using
the Save option below in order to use it in other models.
- Modify—Modify an existing radius substitution table. In order to be modifiable, the table has to either
be created in the model, or added to it using the Retrieve option below.
- Retrieve—Read an existing radius substitution table from disk to add it to the current manufacturing
model.
- Save—Save a radius substitution table on disk to use it in another model. The file will be saved with
the extension ".rdl".
- Delete—Delete an existing radius substitution table.
- Show—Display a radius substitution table in the INFO window. Select the table name from a namelist
menu. Only tables that exist in the model can be displayed.
Pro/NC 275
Any number of radius substitution tables can be added to a model. To specify which table is to be used, choose
Radius Subst from the MFG PARAMS menu either when setting up the NC sequence or when defining a cut
motion. It brings up the CR/SEL RAD menu with the following options:
· Set Up—Brings up the RAD SETUP menu with the options described above.
· Select—Select existing radius substitution tables from a namelist menu: you can select one for the concave
and one for the convex corners. In order to be displayed in the namelist menu, a table has to either be
created in the model, or added to it using the Retrieve option.
To perform radius substitution, choose Corners from the INT CUT menu, then Table Corners from the
CORNER ADD menu. The corner radii on the tool path will be substituted according to the table values.
About Auxiliary NC Sequences

Auxiliary NC sequences produce a point-to-point tool path. They can be used to specify the connecting tool
motions and change the tool axis orientation, if needed, between two machining NC sequences. They also allow
you to access the on-machine probe functionality. Auxiliary NC sequences are available for any workcell type,
and can be performed with any type of tool.
You do not have to specify a tool for an Auxiliary NC sequence. You will be able to create Tool Motions even
though no tool is specified.
To Create an Auxiliary NC Sequence

1. Choose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu. You can be in any type of workcell.
2. Choose Auxiliary and Done.
3. If you have specified the site and coordinate systems at setup time, you do not have to select Seq Setup at
this point, and can proceed directly to step 4. If you choose Seq Setup, the SEQ SETUP menu will contain
in turn.
4. Choose Customize to specify the auxiliary tool motions (the only Tool Motion types available for Auxiliary
NC sequences are Goto Point, Go Delta, Go Home, and Follow Sketch), or to access the on-machine probe
functionality by inserting CL Commands in the Customize dialog box.
About User-Defined NC Sequences

NC sequences and material removal features can be grouped, the same as part features.
This functionality, in particular, allows you to create the NC sequences necessary to manufacture a group of
features (design UDF) only once. You can then group these NC sequences (and material removal features, if
desired), and place this manufacturing group in any other models containing the same reference features’ group.
If you do not reference a design UDF, the information about the reference part will be stored with the group. If
you then place the group in another manufacturing model containing the same reference part, you will have an
option to automatically resolve the placement references.
Note: If you include a child NC sequence in a group (for example, local milling), make sure the parent NC
sequence is also included. Otherwise, the system will not know which NC sequence to reference when
making the group.
To Define a Manufacturing UDF

1. Choose Utilities from the MACHINING menu, then UDF Library from the MFG UTILS menu.
2. Choose Create from the UDF menu.
3. Enter the name for the group.
4. Select an option from the UDF OPTIONS menu:
- Stand Alone—The UDF will be functional by itself.
276 Pro/NC
- Subordinate—The UDF will be driven by the current model.
5. Define the UDF elements as you would when creating a group of part features. Select manufacturing
features (NC sequences and material removal features) to be grouped.
6. If there is a features’ group referenced by selected NC sequences, the MFG UDF REF menu will appear:
- Design UDF—Use a reference group of features for resolving references. If only one design UDF is
referenced, it will be selected automatically, otherwise select a group to use.
- Ref Part—Use the reference part for resolving references. For assembly machining, you will have to
select a part.
- None—No reference information will be stored.
If no design UDF is referenced, the MFG UDF REF menu will not appear. In regular manufacturing, the
reference part information will be automatically stored. In assembly machining, you will have to select a
reference part to use. If you do not want to select a reference part, choose Done Sel without selecting a part.
7. When the group is successfully defined, the information is automatically stored.
Note: If you have specified a reference design UDF, you will not be prompted for the corresponding
placement references; they will be resolved automatically.
To Place a Previously Defined Group in Another

Manufacturing Model
1. Choose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu. You can be in any type of workcell. Choose User
Defined from the MACH AUX menu and enter the name of a previously defined group.
...or...
From the MFG UTILS menu, choose Group > Create > From UDF Lib and retrieve the group by name.
2. As when placing a group of features, you will have to select if the group is to be Independent or UDF
Driven, and will be prompted for the group elements. If the checkmark next to the Use CurOper option is
on, all the NC sequences in the group will be placed in the currently active operation. If the Use CurOper
option is not selected, you will be prompted to select a parent operation in the new model, unless the
operation is included in the group. When all the prompts are answered successfully, the manufacturing
group will be placed.
Note: The Use CurOper option is available only for UDFs created in Release 16.0 and later.
When you are answering the prompts for group elements, the WHICH REF menu will appear with the
following options:
- Alternate—Select a reference for the current element.
- Same—Use the same reference as in the reference part. This option appears only if the group contains a
reference part information, and this reference part is present in the current manufacturing assembly.
- Skip—Skip the current prompt without selecting a reference. After you have answered all the other
prompts, the system will allow you to redefine the skipped element.
Note: The Skip option is not available for UDFs created prior to Release 16.0.
3. After the UDF placement is completed, a namelist menu of all NC sequences included in the group will
appear. Check off the NC sequence(s) whose tool or parameters you want to modify (you can use Select
All). The MOD NC SEQ menu will appear with the following options:
- Tool—Change the tool.
- Parameters—Modify the NC sequence parameters.
Choose Done when finished.
4. If some of the prompts have been skipped, the system starts the appropriate user interface to allow you
redefine the skipped element. Then the GRP PLACE menu will appear with the following options:
- Redefine—Redefine all elements related to skipped prompts.
- Show Result—Preview the group.
- Info—Display information about the group being created in the Information Window.
Choose Done from the GRP PLACE menu to finalize the group.
5. The group is placed in the new model.
Pro/NC 277
Example: Manufacturing a Group of Features
1 Define a group of NC sequences and material removal features

2 Use Design PDF
3 Make the group here. You will only be prompted for operation and workcell names, the coordinate system,
and the retract plane offset.
Including Operations, Workcells, and Reference

Superfeatures in a Manufacturing UDF
Operation and workcell features can also be included when creating a manufacturing UDF. When you place
such a group:
· The default names for the operation and workcell created in the new model will be OP_CPY### or
MACH_CPY##, respectively (for example, OP_CPY010 and MACH_CPY01).
· All the parameters and tools associated with the workcell will be copied. If tools with the same IDs already
exist in the new model, a message will appear and the workcell tools will not be copied.
· The NC sequences that referenced this operation and workcell in the original model will automatically
retain these references.
Including Reference Superfeatures

If an NC sequence references a Mill Volume, Mill Surface, or Drill Group, there are two ways to define a
group:
· If you include the reference superfeature (Mill Volume, Mill Surface, or Drill Group) in the group
definition, then, at the time of defining the group, you will be requested to enter prompts for the geometric
references used to create this superfeature. When you make this group in another model, you will be
prompted to select these references, and the superfeature of the same name (complete with all component
features such as Gather, Trim) will be created in the new model, then the NC sequence will be created based
on this superfeature.
· If you do not include the reference superfeature, then, at the time of defining the group, you will be
requested to enter prompt for the superfeature itself. When you make this group in another model, you will
278 Pro/NC
be prompted to select a pre-existent superfeature of appropriate type, and the NC sequence will be created
using the superfeature in the new model.
Example: Using a Manufacturing UDF with

Pro/PROGRAM
This example illustrates creation and use of a manufacturing UDF with imbedded logic, which chooses a tool
for drilling based on the diameter of the hole and decides between reaming and boring to finish the hole. It also
includes the use of the Evaluate functionality to capture geometry from the reference part into the UDF.
1 2
3 4
1 Center Drilling
2 Deep Drilling
3 Reaming
4 Boring
5 Countersinking
The manufacturing model shown in the illustration above has five NC sequences defined:
· Center drilling
· Deep drilling
· Reaming
· Boring
· Countersinking
Pro/NC 279
It also has the following relations set up for the workpiece:
These relations:
· Set the diameter of the hole based on the results of Evaluate
· Set the value of a user-defined parameter "bore_ream" based on the value of the hole diameter
· Select a drill based on the value of the hole diameter
To utilize this logic, define a manufacturing UDF (group). Include the workcell and all the five NC sequences.
Create the group using the Subordinate and Pro/Program options (using Subordinate ensures that model
relations are carried into the UDF). Enter prompts required to place the NC sequences.
Note that both Bore and Ream NC sequences are included in the UDF. The system is going to determine which
one to perform based on Pro/PROGRAM logic.
How to Set Up the Bore/Ream Choice

1. Choose Edit Design from the PROGRAM menu.
2. Before FID 117 (Ream NC sequence), add the line:
IF BORE_REAM = fl"REAM"
3. Before FID 160 (next NC sequence, Bore), add the lines:
ENDIF
IF BORE_REAM = fl"BORE"
4. After FID 160, add the line:
ENDIF
5. Save and exit from Pro/PROGRAM editor.
6. Incorporate changes into the model by typing "y" in response to the prompt.
7. Choose Normal and Done from the REGEN TYPE menu.
Retrieve another model and place the group there using the Group option from the MFG UTILS menu. Choose
UDF Driven and Read Only, then follow the placement prompts. Regenerate the model.
280 Pro/NC
You can now modify the diameter of the hole in the new model (regenerate twice) and see how the system
performs different NC sequences and selects a different tool based on the built-in logic.
About the Customize Dialog Box

When you choose Customize from the NC SEQUENCE menu, the system displays the Customize dialog box.
The box enables you to create, modify, and delete the Tool Motions and CL Commands. At the same time, the
system displays the NC sequence CL file, as it currently looks, in the NCL File window.
Depending on the type of NC sequence, the system may have automatically generated some default Tool
Motions (for example, Auto Plunge, Automatic Cut), based on the parameter values and selected geometry. In
this case, the Tool Motions will be listed in the upper portion of the Customize dialog box. You can redefine
these motions, as necessary, or delete them and create new ones. For other NC sequence types (such as
Trajectory Milling, Profile Turning, or Wire EDM), you have to explicitly create all the Tool Motions;
therefore, when you first enter the Customize dialog box, its upper portion contains only the <end of tool path>
line. Creating a new Tool Motion or CL Command adds it to the list in the upper portion of the Customize
dialog box.
To select an item (Tool Motion or CL Command) in the upper portion of the Customize dialog box, click on it.
To select multiple items, click on the first one, then hold the <SHIFT> or <CTRL> key and click on the last
one; the system highlights these items, and all items in between, in the list box. It also highlights the portion of
the toolpath on the screen corresponding to all the selected items, and highlights the first and the last CL lines
for the block of selected items in the NCL File window. The tool is positioned at the beginning of the first
selected Tool Motion.
The middle portion of the Customize dialog box contains the following buttons:
· Insert—Add a Tool Motion or CL command before the selected item in the list box above. Select the type
of entity to insert from the drop-down list to the right of the Insert button, then click Insert.
· Copy—Copy the selected Tool Motion(s) and CL command(s) and place them on the Clipboard, to insert
them at a different control point.
· Paste—Insert the contents of the Clipboard at a specified control point.
· Cut—Remove the selected Tool Motion(s) and CL command(s) and place them on the Clipboard, to insert
them at a different control point.
· Delete—Remove the selected Tool Motion(s) and CL command(s).
· Modify—Modify dimensions associated with the selected Tool Motion.
· Redefine—Change the selected Tool Motion or CL command.
· Params—Modify parameters of the selected Tool Motion.
· Clipboard—Show the current contents of the Clipboard.
The bottom portion of the Customize dialog box contains the OK and Cancel action buttons.
Tool Motions
You can insert the following types of Tool Motions:
· Automatic Cut—Reference model geometry to generate the path followed by the tool while actually
cutting workpiece material.
· Follow Sketch—Set up the sketching plane and sketch the tool path.
· GoTo Point—Go to a datum point or to a point on the tool path. For 4- and 5-Axis NC sequences, you can
also specify the tool axis orientation.
· Go Delta—Allows you to specify tool motions in terms of increments along the axes of the NC sequence
coordinate system (with respect to the current position of the tool).
· Go Home—Go directly to the Operation HOME point (if specified, using the Home option, when creating
the operation).
Pro/NC 281
· Plunge—Create a plunge before another Tool Motion. The tool will move horizontally (that is, at its current
Z depth) straight to the location directly above the start of the selected motion and then plunge down.
· Retract—Go from the current location vertically up to the retract plane.
· Appr Along Tool Axis—Create an approach motion along the tool axis. Appears for 4- and 5-axis NC
sequences only.
· Exit Along Tool Axis—Create an exit motion along the tool axis. Appears for 4- and 5-axis NC sequences
only.
· Tangent Approach—Create an approach motion tangent to the Automatic Cut motion
· Tangent Exit—Create an exit motion tangent to the Automatic Cut motion.
· Normal Approach—Create an approach motion normal to the direction of the Automatic Cut motion.
· Normal Exit—Create an exit motion normal to the direction of the Automatic Cut motion.
· Lead In—Approach the Automatic Cut motion tangentially, along an arc of specified radius.
· Lead Out—Exit from the current point tangentially to the Automatic Cut motion along an arc of specified
radius.
· Helical Approach—Create a helical approach motion. This option is available for Milling NC sequences,
except Thread milling. For Thread milling, you can automatically generate helical approach exit motions
using the APPROACH_TYPE parameter.
· Helical Exit—Create a helical exit motion. This option is available for Milling NC sequences, except
Thread milling. For Thread milling, you can automatically generate helical exit motions using the
EXIT_TYPE parameter.
Generally, you create the Automatic Cut motions first, and then connect them using other types of tool motions.
Notes:
- The Tool Motion functionality is slightly different for Holemaking NC sequences.
- For Automatic Cut motions composed of closed loops, an approach motion will reset the start point of
the loop.
To Create a Control Point

A control point is an internal datum point on the tool path that you can reference as a target point for tool
motions. Control points can be created "on the fly" as necessary when creating tool motions.
Whenever you need to reference a control point (to define a Follow Sketch motion, specify the portion of an
Automatic Cut motion to follow), the CTRL PNT menu will appear with following options:
· Select—Select an existing control point.
· Create—Create a control point by selecting a point on an Automatic Cut motion. A datum point is created
at the select point; you will also see a tiny axis that is tangent to the Automatic Cut motion at the control
point. The point and axis will be displayed only while in the Customize mode.
Once a control point is created, you will be able to select it for reference in other steps.
There are no dimensions connected to a control point, its location is determined by the select point.
Offset Control Points

It may be desirable that the tool comes close to the final point at high speed, and then changes speed just for the
final motion to the point. To achieve this, you can create on-the-fly a point "offset" from your final destination
point, and use this new point as a target for the current motion. This functionality is available for the following
types of tool motions:
· GoTo Point
· Plunge
· Tangent Approach
· Normal Approach
282 Pro/NC
To Create an Offset Control Point
1. Press the Offset button in the appropriate dialog box.
2. The Offset From Goto Point dialog box appears.
3. Enter offsets along the axes of the NC Sequence coordinate system.
4. Click OK to create the offset point, Cancel—to quit. The Reset button resets all the offsets to 0.
To Create an Automatic Cut Motion

The types of Automatic Cut motions depend on the type of the NC sequence; refer to the topic describing NC
sequences of a particular type for information on the Automatic Cut motions for this NC sequence. Once an
Automatic Cut motion is generated, you can incorporate it in the tool path fully or partially.
2. The system displays the menus appropriate for creating Automatic Cut motions within the current NC
sequence type. Create an Automatic Cut motion.
The system creates an implicit Follow Cut motion that follows the Automatic Cut motion from start to end.
3. If you want to the tool to follow only certain portions of the Automatic Cut motion, or to change the Follow
Cut parameters, redefine the Follow Cut motion. Click See Also for details.
4. The Preview button allows you to preview the tool motion defined. Click OK if satisfied, Cancel—to quit
creating the tool motion.
To Redefine a Follow Cut Motion

When you create an Automatic Cut motion, the system creates an implicit Follow Cut motion that follows the
Automatic Cut motion from start to end. If you want to the tool to follow only certain portions of the Automatic
Cut motion, or to change the Follow Cut parameters, redefine the Follow Cut motion.
1. Select the Follow Cut motion in the list box at the top of the Customize dialog box and click Redefine.
The Follow Cut dialog box opens.
2. Redefine the Follow Cut motion as needed. You can:
- Change the Follow Cut limits, that is, specify the start and end points for the tool, to make it follow
only a portion of the Automatic Cut motion.
- Reverse the cut direction.
- Modify the Follow Cut motion parameters.
- Split the Follow Cut motion into multiple segments.
- Add other Follow Cut motions (for example, following a different portion of the same Automatic Cut
motion).
- Remove some of the segments of the Follow Cut motion.
3. Click OK to finish redefining the Follow Cut motion and close the Follow Cut dialog box. If you created
multiple segments of a Follow Cut motion, they will all be listed in the Customize dialog box below the
Automatic Cut motion that they follow.
The Follow Cut Dialog Box

The top portion of the Follow Cut dialog box contains a list box with the names of all the Follow Cut motion
segments. Below this list box there are the following action buttons:
· Split—Split the selected segment of the Follow Cut motion into multiple segments.
· Add—Add a Follow Cut motion segment. When you click Add, the system adds a default Follow Cut
motion that follows the Automatic Cut motion from start to end. Click Redefine to change the Follow Cut
limits as needed.
· Remove—Delete the selected segment of the Follow Cut motion.
· Redefine—Redefine the selected segment of the Follow Cut motion.
Pro/NC 283
The middle portion of the Follow Cut dialog box contains the options for redefining a Follow Cut motion:
· Name—Displays the name of the selected Follow Cut segment. This name is displayed for information
purposes only; you can not modify it. Click next to the Name label to preview the Follow Cut
segment as it is currently defined.
· Follow Cut Limits—Change the start and end points of the Follow Cut motion:
- First Point—Specify a different start point for the Follow Cut motion. You can select or create a datum
point on the tool path, or select Start of Cut to make the Follow Cut segment start at the Start point of
the Automatic Cut motion.
- Second Point— Specify a different end point for the Follow Cut motion. You can select or create a
datum point on the tool path, or select End of Cut to make the Follow Cut segment end at the End
point of the Automatic Cut motion.
· Reverse Cut Direction—Select this option to reverse the direction of the Follow Cut motion.
· Follow Cut Parameters— Edit the Follow Cut motion parameters. Click the Right arrow next to the label
to expand this field; then click the Feed, Spindle, or Coolant button to open the appropriate dialog box and
edit the parameter values.
Once you redefined a Follow Cut segment, click Apply to finalize the changes you made. To discard these
changes, click Reset.
To Split a Follow Cut Motion

If you need to insert a CL command (for example, GOTO/x,y,z) in the middle of a Follow Cut motion, it is
recommended that you split the Follow Cut motion first.
1. Select the Follow Cut motion segment in the list box at the top of the Follow Cut dialog box and click Split.
The Create Split Point dialog box opens.
2. Click Add and select a point on the tool path where you want to split the Follow Cut motion.
The system creates a datum point at the selected location.
3. If you want to split the Follow Cut motion into more than two segments, repeat Step 2 to create additional
split points.
4. Once a split point is created, you can select its name in the list box at the top of the Create Split Point dialog
box and click one of the following buttons:
- Remove—Delete the selected split point.
- Move—Move the selected split point. The system highlights the selected point. Select the new location
on the tool path.
5. Click Preview to view the results. If satisfied, click OK.
To Create a Follow Sketch Motion

Follow Sketch motions let you sketch the tool path that the tool will follow. You can change the tool axis
orientation at selected points along the sketch for 4- and 5-Axis NC sequences.
1. Choose Follow Sketch from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click Insert.
2. The Follow Sketch dialog box appears.
3. Edit the Tool Motion parameters, if desired, using the Feed, Spindle, and Coolant buttons in the top portion
of the box.
4. Click Sketch to sketch the tool motion. The sketching plane setup depends on the following selection:
- If the Control Point option button is selected, you will be prompted to select or create a control point.
The sketching plane will pass through the specified control point. The axis belonging to the control
point will lie horizontally in the sketching plane.
- If the Setup Plane option button is selected, use the regular sketcher setup technique to select or create
the sketching plane and the Sketcher orientation reference.
284 Pro/NC
5. Once the model is reoriented, sketch the tool motion. The SKETCHER menu will contain two additional
options, specific to sketching the Tool Motions:
- Tool Kerf—Creates a construction circle with the diameter equal to the Cutter_Diam of the tool,
centered at the location you select on the screen. You can reference this entity when sketching the tool
path.
- CL Command—Insert CL commands along the sketched tool path. You will be prompted to select
location for the CL commands by selecting on a sketched entity. Then supply the contents of the CL
command using the Sketcher CL Command dialog box. The system places a Sketcher point at the
location of the CL command. If you later modify the sketch, the CL command placement will be
determined by the new location of this point entity.
Note: Sketcher CL commands are listed in the Customize dialog box under the Follow Cut motion
they belong to. They are indented to show that their placement is controlled by the sketch. To modify
placement of such a command, redefine the Follow Sketch motion and modify dimensions of the point
entity corresponding to the CL command.
6. Choose Done from the SKETCHER menu.
7. If this is a 4- or 5-Axis NC sequence, you can also change the tool axis orientation at selected points along
the sketch using the Specify Axis button.
The AXIS DEF menu then appears with the following options:
- Add—Add an axis orientation definition.
- Remove—Remove an axis orientation definition.
- Redefine—Respecify the axis orientation at an existing location.
- Show—Display existing axis definitions. The SHOW menu appears with the listing of existing axis
definitions (Axis Def #1, Axis Def #2, ...). Placing the cursor over a definition name in the menu
displays the corresponding axis definition as a cyan vector, which disappears once you move the cursor
away from the menu item.
To add an axis definition, choose Add and select a point on the sketched tool motion where you want to
specify the tool axis orientation. Once you selected a point, you will be prompted to enter a parameter value
along the entire sketch (with the start point of the sketch 0.0 and the end point 1.0). The parameter value
corresponding to your selection will appear as an option in the selection menu, or you can choose Enter and
enter another value.
Once you specified the location, the DEFINE AXIS menu will appear with the following options:
- Along Z Dir—The tool axis will be parallel to the Z-axis of the Machine coordinate system.
- Datum Axis—Select or create a datum axis that the tool axis will be parallel to, then specify the axis
direction using Flip and Okay options.
- Enter Value—Specify tool axis orientation be entering i,j,k values with respect to the Machine
coordinate system.
Example: Using Tool Kerf and CL Command

The following is an example of using the Tool Kerf and CL Command functionality in Follow Sketch motions.
1 Sketching plane
Pro/NC 285
To produce the tool path shown above, where the tool machines the edge and stops right before touching the
part to check gauge, create a Follow Sketch motion, as shown in the following illustration.
1
3
2
1 Add Tool Kerf entities and dimension as needed.

2 Sketch two tool motion segments between the Tool Kerf entities’ centers.
3 At the Tool Kerf center, add CL Command: PPRINT / CHECK GAUGE
STOP
The resulting CL data is listed below:
286 Pro/NC
To Create a GoTo Point Motion
GoTo Point motions enable the tool to go to any datum point (not just a control point). You can restrict moves
along some of the axes of the NC sequence coordinate system. For 4- and 5-Axis NC sequences, you can also
change the tool axis orientation.
1. Choose GoTo Point from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click Insert.
2. The Goto Point dialog box appears.
of the box.
4. Click Specify Point to create or select the control point. The CR/SEL POINT menu appears with the options:
- Select—Select an existing control point or datum point.
- Create—Create a new control point or datum point:
On Toolpath—Create a new control point by selecting on the tool path.
Datum Point—Create a new datum point using the regular functionality for creating datum points.
The datum point will belong to the workpiece in Part machining, and to the manufacturing assembly in
Assembly machining.
5. The Specify Offset button allows you to specify a target point offset from the control point created using the
Specify Point button, described above.
6. The next portion of the dialog box allows you to restrict moves along some of the axes of the NC Sequence
coordinate system:
- If the Simultaneous option button is selected, then, depending on whether the X axis, Y axis, or Z
axis checkbox is selected or unselected, the tool is allowed or disallowed to move along this axis. By
default, all the axes are allowed; the tool then moves directly from the current position to the target
point. If some of the axes are disallowed, the final tool position is computed based on the current point
and the axes allowed. For Turning, only the X axis and Z axis buttons will appear in the dialog box.
- If the Z First option button is selected, the tool moves along the Z-axis from the current position to the
level of target point; it then moves using all remaining available axes to the target point (for Turning,
this is the X-axis; for other types of NC sequences, this is the XY plane).
- If the Z Last option button is selected, the tool moves along the X-axis (for Turning), or in the XY
plane (for other types of NC sequences), from the current position to the location of the selected point,
and then moves along the Z-axis to arrive at selected point.
7. If this is a 4- or 5-Axis NC sequence, you can also change the tool axis orientation at target point:
- Along Z Axis—Use the default orientation of the tool (parallel to the Z-axis of the NC Sequence
coordinate system).
- Use Previous—Use the previous tool orientation.
- Specify New Axis—Click Specify Axis and select an edge or axis that the tool axis will be parallel to,
or a surface that the tool axis will be normal to. Finalize the tool orientation using Flip and Okay
options; note that the red arrow must point from the tool tip towards the toolholder.
To Create a Go Delta Motion

Go Delta motions enable you to specify tool motions in terms of increments along the axes of the NC sequence
coordinate system (with respect to the current position of the tool).
1. Choose Go Delta from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click Insert.
2. The Go Delta dialog box appears.
of the box.
4. Enter offsets along the axes of the NC Sequence coordinate system. The Reset button resets all the offset
values to 0.
5. If this is a 4- or 5-Axis NC sequence, you can also change the tool axis orientation at target point:
Pro/NC 287
- Along Z Axis—Use the default orientation of the tool (parallel to the Z-axis of the NC Sequence
coordinate system).
- Use Previous—Use the previous tool orientation.
- Specify New Axis—Click Specify Axis and select an edge or axis that the tool axis will be parallel to,
or a surface that the tool axis will be normal to. Finalize the tool orientation using Flip and Okay
options; note that the red arrow must point from the tool tip towards the toolholder.
Modifying the Go Delta Increments

You can later modify all the increments for a Go Delta motion using the Modify button in the Customize dialog
box. The Go Delta increments can also be included in relations. To find out the dimension symbols
corresponding to the Go Delta increments, use the Seq Info option, choose List and select the GO DELTA
motion from the menu. The information displayed will include the increment values and dimension symbols
assigned to the increments.
To Create a Go Home Motion

Go Home motions make the tool go directly to the Operation HOME point (if specified, using the Home option,
when creating the operation).
1. Choose Go Home from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click Insert.
2. The Go Home dialog box appears.
of the box.
4. If this is a 4- or 5-Axis NC sequence, you can specify the tool axis orientation using the Specify Axis
button.
Plunge Motions
Plunge motions make the tool plunge before a selected Automatic Cut motion (or another approach motion).
The tool will perform the following motions:
· Move at RAPID speed along the retract surface to the location directly above the start point of the next Tool
Motion. This location is determined as follows:
- In case of a retract plane, the projection of the start point of the next Tool Motion on the retract plane.
- In case of a retract surface of revolution, the intersection of the tool axis at the start point of the next
Tool Motion with the retract surface.
· Plunge at RAPID speed to the location offset from the start point of the next Tool Motion by
(CLEAR_DIST + a), where a is an extra offset value, which depends on the type of NC sequence. It is:
- STEP_DEPTH—For Volume, Local, Face, Profile, Pocket, and Trajectory milling.
- ROUGH_STEP_DEPTH—For Conventional Surface milling.
- OFFSET_INCREMENT—For Surface-by-Surface Contour milling and Cutline machining.
288 Pro/NC
- 0—For all other types of NC sequeences.
· Move at PLUNGE_FEED to the start point of the next Tool Motion.
To Create a Plunge Motion

1. Choose Plunge from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click Insert.
2. The Plunge dialog box appears.
of the box.
4. The Specify Offset button allows you to specify a target point offset from the start point of the Tool Motion
that you plunge to.
button.
6. Edit the Clear Distance value in the corresponding text box, if needed.
To Create a Retract Motion

A Retract motion makes the tool go from the current location vertically up to the retract plane.
1. Choose Retract from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click Insert.
2. The Retract dialog box appears.
of the box.
button.
To Create a Tangent Approach Motion

Tangent Approach motions let you make the tool approach an Automatic Cut motion (or another approach
motion) in the direction tangent to the motion at its start point. The length of the approach motion is determined
by the APPROACH_DISTANCE parameter value.
1. Choose Tangent Approach from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click Insert.
2. The Tangent Approach dialog box appears.
3. Edit the Tool Motion parameters, if desired, using the Feed, Spindle, Coolant, and Cutcom buttons in the
top portion of the box.
4. The Specify Offset button allows you to specify a target point offset from the start of the selected
button.
6. Edit the Approach Distance value in the corresponding text box, if needed.
To Create a Tangent Exit Motion

Tangent Exit motions let you make the tool exit from the current point in the direction tangent to the Automatic
Cut motion at this point. The length of the exit motion is determined by the EXIT_DISTANCE parameter value.
1. Choose Tangent Exit from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click Insert.
2. The Tangent Exit dialog box appears.
of the box.
Pro/NC 289
button.
5. Edit the Exit Distance value in the corresponding text box, if needed.
To Create a Normal Approach Motion

Normal Approach motions let you make the tool approach an Automatic Cut motion (or another approach
motion) in the direction normal to the motion at its start point. The length of the approach motion is determined
by the APPROACH_DISTANCE parameter value.
1. Choose Normal Approach from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click Insert.
2. The Normal Approach dialog box appears.
4. The Specify Offset button allows you to specify a target point offset from the start of the selected
button.
6. Select the arrow direction using the Left and Right option buttons. The arrow indicates from which side the
tool will approach the control point.
7. Edit the Approach Distance value in the corresponding text box, if needed.
To Create a Normal Exit Motion

Normal Exit motions let you make the tool exit from the current point in the direction normal to the Automatic
Cut motion at this point. The length of the exit motion is determined by the EXIT_DISTANCE parameter value.
1. Choose Normal Exit from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click Insert.
2. The Normal Exit dialog box appears.
of the box.
button.
6. Select the arrow direction using the Left and Right option buttons. The arrow indicates the exit direction.
Lead In and Lead Out Motions

Lead In motions let you make the tool approach an Automatic Cut motion (or another approach motion)
tangentially along an arc of specified radius. The radius of the arc is determined by the LEAD_RADIUS
parameter value, the lengths of the preceding linear segments—by TANGENT_LEAD_STEP and
NORMAL_LEAD_STEP, the angle of the arc is defined by the ENTRY_ANGLE parameter value.
Lead Out motions let you make the tool exit from the current point tangentially to the Automatic Cut motion
along an arc of specified radius. The radius of the arc is determined by the LEAD_RADIUS parameter value,
the lengths of the linear segments—by TANGENT_LEAD_STEP and NORMAL_LEAD_STEP, the angle of
the arc is defined by the EXIT_ANGLE parameter value.
290 Pro/NC
The following diagram illustrates Lead In and Lead Out motions.
2 7 9 6
8
5
3
4
1 NORMAL_LEAD_STEP
2 TANGENT_LEAD_STEP
3 ENTRY_ANGLE
4 Automatic Cut Motion
5 EXIT ANGLE
6 TANGENT_LEAD_STEP
7 Lead In
8 LEAD_RADIUS
9 Lead Out
To Create a Lead In Motion

1. Choose Lead In from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click Insert.
2. The Lead In dialog box appears.
button.
6. Edit the Entry Angle, Tangent Lead Step, Normal Lead Step, and Lead Radius values in the corresponding
text boxes, if needed. If the Use Default checkbox underneath a parameter text box is selected, the system
will automatically assign a value to this parameter. If you clear the checkbox, you will be able to edit the
parameter value in the text box.
To Create a Lead Out Motion

1. Choose Lead Out from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click Insert.
2. The Lead Out dialog box appears.
of the box.
button.
6. Edit the Exit Angle, Tangent Lead Step, Normal Lead Step, and Lead Radius values in the corresponding
text boxes, if needed. If the Use Default checkbox underneath a parameter text box is selected, the system
will automatically assign a value to this parameter. If you clear the checkbox, you will be able to edit the
Pro/NC 291
To Create a Helical Approach Motion
Helical Approach motions let you make the tool approach an Automatic Cut motion (or another approach
motion) along a helix. The ENTRY_ANGLE parameter defines the angle of the helical approach motion.
CLEAR_DIST controls the height of the helical approach motion.
1. Choose Helical Approach from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click Insert.
2. The Helical Lead In dialog box appears.
button.
6. Edit the Entry Angle, Clear Distance, Normal Lead Step, and Lead Radius values in the corresponding text
boxes, if needed. If the Use Default checkbox underneath a parameter text box is selected, the system will
automatically assign a value to this parameter. If you clear the checkbox, you will be able to edit the
To Create a Helical Exit Motion

Helical Exit motions let you make the tool exit an Automatic Cut motion (or another exit motion) along a helix.
The EXIT_ANGLE parameter defines the angle of the helical exit motion. PULLOUT_DIST controls the
height of the helical exit motion.
1. Choose Helical Exit from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click Insert.
2. The Helical Lead Out dialog box appears.
of the box.
button.
6. Edit the Exit Angle, Pullout Distance, Normal Lead Step, and Lead Radius values in the corresponding text
boxes, if needed. If the Use Default checkbox underneath a parameter text box is selected, the system will
To Create an Approach Motion Along Tool Axis

You can create the Approach motions Along Tool Axis for 4- and 5-axis NC sequences.
1. Choose Appr Along Tool Axis from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click Insert.
2. The Approach for Along Tool Axis dialog box appears.
of the box.
4. Edit the Approach Distance, Clear Distance, and Pullout Distance values in the corresponding text boxes, if
needed. If the Use Default checkbox underneath a parameter text box is selected, the system will
292 Pro/NC
To Create an Exit Motion Along Tool Axis
You can create the Exit motions Along Tool Axis for 4- and 5-axis NC sequences.
1. Choose Exit Along Tool Axis from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click Insert.
2. The Exit for Along Tool Axis dialog box appears.
of the box.
To Specify Parameters for a Tool Motion

By default, tool motion parameter values are inherited from the NC sequence parameters. You can change the
parameter values for a tool motion by using the following procedure.
1. Press the appropriate button (Feed, Spindle) in the Tool Motion dialog box.
2. Another dialog box pops up with input fields for all parameters in the selected group. For example, if you
press Spindle for a Tool Motion in a Volume milling NC sequence, the Spindle Parameters dialog box will
contain input fields for:
- Spindle Speed
- Spindle Control
- Spindle Sense
- Max Spindle RPM
- Range Number
- Spindle Range
Each of the input fields contains the current parameter value. Inherited values are shown in parentheses.
3. You can either enter the new value directly in the corresponding input field, or press the down arrow to the
right of the input field to select from a drop-down list of values.
For FEED_RATE, for example, you can either enter numeric values, or use one of the following keywords:
APPROACH, EXIT, RETRACT, PLUNGE, CUT, FREE (only those that are applicable for the current NC
sequence will appear in the drop-down list in the dialog box).
4. When finished modifying the parameters, press OK in the dialog box used for editing. The new parameter
values will appear in the read-only fields in the Tool Motion dialog box.
When you change Feed or Machine parameters at the Tool Motion level, the appropriate statements (SPINDL,
COOLNT, CUTCOM, or FEDRAT) will be output in the CL data file before the GOTO commands of the Tool
Motion.
If you insert a CUTCOM, SPINDL, or COOLNT statement using the CL Command functionality, it will
overwrite the Tool Motion parameter value from the insertion location to the end of the Tool Motion.
Implicit Tool Motions

In order to automate the process of customizing a tool path as much as possible, the following Tool Motions are
implicitly created in Milling:
· A Retract motion is implicitly created before an Automatic Cut motion if other tool motions are already
present.
· An implicit Plunge motion (Auto Plunge) is created where the tool automatically plunges to the beginning
of an Automatic Cut.
If you are not satisfied with the implicitly created motions, you can delete or redefine them.
Pro/NC 293
CL Commands
The CL Command option in the drop-down list of the Customize dialog box allows you to add the specific
post-processor words required for correct NC output. These commands will be output to the NC sequence CL
file. If you add a tool motion command, the corresponding motion will be also shown in the tool path display on
the screen.
When typing values for CL commands, you can input model parameters, preceded by an ampersand(&) sign. If
there is a corresponding parameter defined in relations, its value will be used in the CL command. If the
parameter is not found, the system will prompt you for the parameter’s type and value, and this parameter will
be added to the relations. This way, the CL command can be changed at the top level (through Relations).
To Insert a CL Command
You can insert a customized CL command anywhere along the tool path. You can either select a location on the
tool path, or insert a command at the current tool position. Additional location options, Near Datum Point and
On Surface, are available if you associate the CL Command with a Follow Cut motion. In order to do this,
highlight the name of the Follow Cut motion in the list box at the top of the Customize dialog box before
inserting the CL command.
1. Choose CL Command from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click Insert.
2. The CL Command dialog box opens.
3. Select location for the CL command by using the following option buttons:
- Current—The CL command will be output at the current tool position.
- On Tool Path—Click Select and select a location on the tool path. You can select anywhere on the
tool path as it is defined so far.
For WEDM NC sequences with multiple passes, you can place the CL command on all the passes in
the selected location, or on some of the passes, by using an additional button, Multi Passes. When you
click Multi Passes, the Select Passes dialog box opens with a list of all the passes and the Select All
and Unselect All icons. Select the passes where you want to insert the CL command and click OK. If
you use Select All, and later add some more passes, the CL command will be placed on the new passes
as well.
- Near Datum Point—The CL command will be placed on the tool path at the closest location to a
datum point. You can either create a datum point, or select an existing point.
- On Surface—The CL command will be placed on the tool path relative to selected surface(s). You can
also select whether you want the CL command to be placed on the First Pass, Last Pass, or All
Passes.
4. Specify the command contents using one of the following methods:
- Place the cursor in the Command text box and type the command, line-by-line. Note that this method
does not provide syntax checking.
- Click Menu and compose the command by selecting appropriate keywords from the syntax menus and
typing values in response to the system prompts.
- Click File and read in a file containing the CL command lines. The browser window will appear to let
you select the file name. The expected file extension is ".cmd".
Notes:
- You can edit the contents of the Command text box at any point by placing the cursor in it and using
the keyboard.
- If you supply more than one command line, they will be treated as a "block", that is, you will be able to
move, copy, or delete only the whole block of command lines.
5. The Preview button inserts the command line(s) in the CL file at the selected location to let you preview the
result. Click OK to insert the command at selected location, Cancel—to quit inserting the command.
294 Pro/NC
Modifying CL Commands
Once you insert a CL command, its first line appears in the list in the upper portion of the Customize dialog
box.
You can modify both the contents and the placement of a previously added user-defined CL command by
selecting it in the list and clicking Redefine. This will bring up the CL Command dialog box. Use the same
techniques for specifying the new location or editing the contents, as when inserting a CL command.
Note: This way, you can also modify contents of a Sketcher CL command (that is, a command added while
creating a Follow Sketch motion). However, if you modify placement of such a command, it will no longer
be connected with the sketch. To modify placement of a Sketcher CL command and retain associativity,
redefine the Follow Sketch motion and modify dimensions of the point entity corresponding to the CL
command.
You can also copy, cut, paste, and delete previously added CL commands by using the appropriate command
buttons in the Customize dialog box.
To Create a Follow Sketch Motion in Holemaking

You can sketch the traversal path between the holes’ axes by following the procedure below.
1. Choose Follow Sketch from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click Insert.
2. The Follow Sketch dialog box appears.
of the box.
4. Click the Sketch button to sketch the tool motion. The location of traversal path will depend on the
following:
- If the At Retract Plane option button is selected, the traversal path will lie in the retract plane. If you
later modify the retract plane height, the traversal path will update automatically.
- If the Specify Plane option button is selected, you will have to select a plane parallel to the XY plane
of the NC Sequence coordinate system and enter offset from this plane in the indicated direction. The
traversal path will lie in the offset plane.
As you start sketching, all selected holes are automatically marked by Sketcher points at the selected axes’
locations. The sketched path may contain as many entities as you want. If the sketched path passes through
the Sketcher point that marks a selected axis, this hole will be drilled (you do not have to break the sketched
entity at this point, or align it to the hole axis—the system will automatically make these assumptions). All
entities included in the same sketch are parts of a single Tool Motion segment. A valid sketch must pass
through at least one hole axis.
The following illustration shows sketching the traversal path.
1 2
1 Previous path segment

2 Sketch
Pro/NC 295
To Create a Connect Motion
Connect the hole axes by selecting them in the same order you want them to be drilled. As you select an axis,
the current tool location is connected with this axis by a straight line parallel to the retract plane. Each selection
creates a separate Connect segment. Note that the level of a Connect segment is determined by the level of the
endpoint of the previous segment.
The following illustration shows creating the traversal path using the Connect option.
1 Select this axis.
To Redefine the Connect Motions

The Redefine button in the Customize dialog box allows you to respecify any of the traversal path segments
created so far. When you choose Redefine, a namelist menu of the Tool Motion segments appears. Select a
segment you want to redo. The selected segment and all the subsequent Tool Motion segments temporarily
disappear.
· If it is a sketched segment, you can re-specify your sketching plane, then sketch the tool path (note that the
old sketch is deleted automatically).
· If it is a Connect segment, select a hole axis to go to.
Once you are finished, the rest of the tool path is regenerated. The subsequent Connect segments may change
depending on modifications to the current segment. If you redefine a segment immediately preceding a sketched
one, it is your responsibility to place the end of the segment being redefined at the beginning of the next
sketched segment, or to redefine the sketched segment as well.
The following illustration shows modifying the traversal path.
1 Select this axis.

2 Redefine DRL CONN #3.
About Customizing the Operation Tool Path

The following options allow you to apply more control to the tool path at the operation level:
· Output Order—Specify order of tool path output for the NC sequences.
296 Pro/NC
· Synchronize—Synchronize output of NC sequence tool paths.
· CL Command—Add CL commands along the tool path. You can place CL commands on specific
instances of a pattern and Pro/NC will remember the commands parametrically.
Note: These options apply to the current operation. Before selecting these options, activate the operation
whose tool path you want to customize.
To Reorder Output of NC Sequence Tool Paths

The Output Order option in the MACHINING menu allows you to specify the order of tool path output for the
NC sequences within the operation. This affects the order of CL data output only. It does not reorder the NC
sequences in the feature list; use the Reorder functionality to change the order in which the NC sequences are
regenerated.
1. Choose Output Order.
2. Choose Define from the OPER ORDER menu.
3. The following options are available:
- By Rule—NC sequences included in the operation will be sorted automatically:
By FeatList—Output NC sequences in the same order as they appear in the feature list.
By Tool—Minimize the tool changes. All tools used within the operation will be listed in the ORDER
TOOL menu. You will be prompted to select the tools in desired order. The system will output the tool
paths for all NC sequences using the first selected tool, then move to the next tool. NC sequences using
the same tool will be output in the order they appear in the feature list.
- By Pick—Explicitly specify the order of output by selecting NC sequence names from the ORDER
PICK menu.
The Info option in the OPER ORDER menu displays the current order of the NC sequence output. The following
information is provided for each NC sequence:
· Order of CL data output
· Sequence type
· Sequence number in the model
· Tool ID
· Feature number
· Feature ID
To Synchronize Output of NC Sequence Tool Paths

The Synchronize option in the MACHINING menu allows you to synchronize output of NC sequence tool paths
created using HEAD1 and HEAD2 options in the MACH AUX menu. These options are available for 4-Axis
Turning and Holemaking.
1. Choose Synchronize.
2. Select which head will control the spindle speed by selecting HEAD1 or HEAD2 from the HEAD SELECT
menu.
3. The system displays the SYNCH OPER menu with the following options:
- Define—Select a group of NC sequences, first on Head1 and then on Head2, to be synchronized with
each other.
- Remove—A namelist menu of synchronized groups of NC sequences appears. Select a group to
remove.
- Synch Points—Define synchronization points (synch points) for CL output of synchronized NC
sequences. Click See Also for details.
4. Choose Define.
5. The system displays the HEAD1 NCSEQ menu containing the names of all NC sequences created using
Head1. Put checkmarks next to NC sequences you want to synchronize with sequences on Head2 (you will
have the options to Select All and Unsel All), then choose Done Sel.
Pro/NC 297
6. The system displays the HEAD2 NCSEQ menu containing the names of all NC sequences created using
Head2. Again, select the NC sequences to synchronize and choose Done Sel.
7. The system creates a synchronized group with a default name (SYNCHRONIZE #1, SYNCHRONIZE #2).
To Specify Synch Points

1. Choose Synch Points from the SYNCH OPER menu.
2. A namelist menu of synchronized groups of NC sequences appears. Select a group where you want to define
synch points.
3. The system displays the tool paths of synchronized NC sequences and the SYNCH POINTS menu with the
following options:
- Add—Define pairs of synchronized points on tool paths for Head1 and Head2.
- Move—Modify location of an existing synch point. Select a synch point, then select a new location for
it on the appropriate tool path.
- Remove—Remove a pair of synch points. Select a synch point. The system highlights the second synch
point in the pair and prompts you for confirmation.
- Show—Show the synch pairs currently defined. You can either show them in turn by using the Next
and Previous options, or use Show All.
4. Choose Add.
5. The system displays the tool paths for Head1 in cyan. Select a point on the tool path.
6. The system displays the tool paths for Head2 in cyan. Select a point to be synchronized with the first point.
7. Repeat Steps 4 through 6 to define other pairs of synch points.
Adding CL Commands at the Operation Level

When you choose CL Command from the MACHINING menu, the current CL data file is displayed in the NCL
File window, and the CL COMMAND menu appears with the options:
· Create—Insert a new user-defined command.
· Modify—Modify placement or contents of an existing user-defined command.
· Copy—Copy an existing user-defined command to another location.
· Delete—Delete an existing user-defined command.
· Find—Search for CL text strings or locate previously entered user-defined commands.
You can insert a customized CL command anywhere along the tool path. For your convenience, separate
options allow you to insert CL commands at the beginning and at the end of the tool path, or at the current tool
position.
1. Choose Create from the CL COMMAND menu.
2. The LOCATE CMD menu appears with the options:
- Select—Select on the tool path to specify the command placement.
- Beginning—The CL command will be output before the first cutter position of the NC sequence (or the
first cutter position of the operation if you are optimizing an operation tool path).
- End—The CL command will be output after the last cutter position of the NC sequence (or the last
cutter position of the operation if you are optimizing an operation tool path).
3. The CL file in the Info Box is scrolled to the appropriate line. The CREATE CMD menu appears with the
options:
- Add—Enter the command using one of the following options:
Menus—Compose the command by selecting appropriate keywords from the syntax menus.
Keyboard—Enter the command line-by-line using the keyboard. This method does not provide syntax
checking, as opposed to the method above.
From File—Read in a file containing the CL command lines. The file must have an extension ".cmd".
298 Pro/NC
- Edit—Brings up a system window to allow you to edit the command using the system editor. No
checking as to the syntax, is done at this point.
- Show—Display all the lines currently included in the user-defined command in an Information
Window (separate from the NCL File Window containing the CL file).
4. Enter the command line(s) using the options above, then choose Done from the CREATE CMD menu. The
command line(s) are inserted in the CL file at the selected location.
Notes:
· If you add more than one command line at a certain point, they will be treated as a "block", that is, you will
be able to move, copy, or delete only the whole block of command lines.
· Only one CL command can be specified as located at the beginning or end of the tool path (it can have
multiple lines). Therefore, if you try to repeatedly select the Beginning or End option, a message will
inform you that a command already exists at this location, and you can modify it. Add the appropriate lines
to the existing CL command using the Command option in the MODIFY CMD menu, described below.
To Modify a CL Command
You can modify either the contents or the placement of a previously added user-defined CL command by
following the procedure below.
1. Choose Modify from the CL COMMAND menu.
2. Locations of the previously added user-defined CL commands are highlighted in cyan and all the commands
are listed in a namelist menu. You can select a command by either selecting on the screen or from the menu.
Once a command is selected, it is simultaneously highlighted on the screen and in the menu. Choose Done
Sel if that is the command you want.
3. The MODIFY CMD menu appears with the options:
- Placement—Relocate the command using the LOCATE CMD options described above.
- Command—Add more lines or edit the command text using the CREATE CMD options described
above.
4. Check off either one or both options and choose Done. If both options are checked off, the system will start
the appropriate user interface in turn.
To Find a CL Command
A command location is not marked by a control point, and is normally invisible. A quick way to display all the
CL command locations along the tool path is to choose Delete. This will highlight all the points where CL
commands are added. To find a particular CL command, use the Find option in the CL COMMAND menu. You
can also use this option to search through the whole CL file for a particular command (for example, to check
values, or to determine where to insert a user-defined command).
1. Choose Find from the CL COMMAND menu.
2. The FIND COMMAND menu appears with the following options:
- Enter String—Enter a string to search for. The system will search through all the commands in the
Info Box (both system-generated and user-defined). You can view the results using the Next, Previous,
and Show All options in the SHOW DATA menu.
- UserDefCmd—Find a previously inserted user-defined CL command. A namelist menu with all the
inserted commands appears. Put checkmarks next to the command(s) you want to find, or choose Select
All to display all the command locations.
If a block of commands has been added, only the first command will appear in the search list, followed by
the number of lines in the block. For example, if you choose "FEDRAT/1.000000, IPR (2 lines)" from the
namelist menu, locations of all two-line blocks starting with the "FEDRAT/1.000000, IPR" command will
be shown, even if the other commands in the block are different.
To Delete a CL Command
To delete a previously inserted user-defined command, follow the procedure below.
Pro/NC 299
1. Choose Delete from the CL COMMAND menu.
2. All the CL command locations are indicated by cyan points and all the commands are listed in a namelist
menu. You can select a command by either selecting on the screen or from the menu. Once a command is
selected, it is simultaneously highlighted on the screen and in the menu. Choose Done Sel if that is the
command you want.
If the selected location contains a block of commands, the whole block will be deleted. A single command
can be deleted from the block using the Modify option.
To Copy a CL Command
Instead of adding a new command, you can copy an existing CL command to a new location by following the
procedure below.
1. Choose Copy from the CL COMMAND menu.
2. A namelist menu with all the inserted commands appears. Select a command you want to copy. A block of
commands is selected by the first command and number of lines. The system will highlight in red the
location where the selected command or block is currently inserted (that is, where it will be copied from).
3. Select a new location on the tool path. The command is added, with a cyan point indicating the new
location.
About CL Data
Cutter Location (CL) data files are generated from the cutter paths specified within Pro/NC NC sequences. Each
NC sequence generates a separate CL file. You can also create a single file for a whole operation. These CL
data files can then be passed to machine-specific or generic post-processors for NC tape generation or DNC
communications.
To Write CL Data to a File

When writing CL data to a file, you have an option of immediately post-processing the data and creating an
MCD file, or writing a CL file, which can be post-processed later.
1. Choose Output from the CL DATA menu.
2. Choose one of:
- Select Set – Select a set of NC sequences.
- Select One – Select an NC sequence. Selecting an operation (using the Operation option in the
SELECT FEAT menu) will output merged CL data of all NC sequences included in the operation.
3. Choose File to print the CL data to a file.
4. Choose an option from the OUTPUT TYPE menu:
- CL File – Generate a CL data file. Type a filename, or press ENTER to accept the default filename
generated by the system.
- MCD File – Generate an MCD file. If you select this option, the system will first generate a CL file
(you will be prompted for the file name), and then post-process it. This option is not available with the
Batch option below.
- Interactive – Perform toolpath computation within your current session.
- Batch – Perform toolpath computation as a separate process in batch mode.
Default CL File Names

The CL file name format is CLfile.ncl.#, where CLfile is the name of the file, # is the version number. CL file
extension can be set to something different than ".ncl". Use the configuration file option:
ncl_file_extension file_extension (without ncl ext)
Notes:
- File extension length is limited to 3 characters. If you specify a longer file extension, it will be
truncated and a warning will be issued.
300 Pro/NC
- Do not change the CL file extension if you are using a default post-processor, a dedicated post-
processor, or a post-processor created with Pro/NCPOST.
When you output CL data to a file, the system generates a default name for this file, based on the following
rules:
· If you output CL data for an operation, the default name will be the operation name. For example, if the
operation name is OP010, the default CL file name is op010.ncl.1.
· If you output CL data for an NC sequence that has a name, the default name will be the NC sequence name.
For example, if the NC sequence name is volume01, the default CL file name is volume01.ncl.1.
· If you output CL data for an NC sequence that does not have a name, the default name will be seq#####,
where ##### is the sequence number. For example, for the 5th NC sequence in the manufacturing model,
the default CL file name is seq00005.ncl.1.
· If you output CL data for a set of NC sequences, the default name will be the set name. For example, if the
set name is nc_set, the default CL file name is nc_set.ncl.1.
You can customize the default CL file name for an operation or NC sequence using the NCL_FILE parameter at
the appropriate level. If the NCL_FILE parameter is set to something other than the default (-), the system will
use the parameter value as the default name for CL data output (and add the extension and version number to
it).
When the system suggests a default name, you can either accept it by pressing ENTER, or type a different name.
The system will add the extension and version number to the name you typed.
Sets of NC Sequences
When outputting CL data, you generally select either a single NC sequence, or an operation, which outputs to a
single file CL data for all the NC sequences in this operation. The Select Set option in the OUTPUT menu
allows you to output to a single file CL data of only certain NC sequences within an operation, or even NC
sequences that belong to different operations, by creating sets of NC sequences.
Note: When outputting a set of NC sequences, you have to add the appropriate connection moves, if needed.
When you choose Select Set from the OUTPUT menu, the system displays the OUTPUT SET menu with the
following options:
· Create—Create a new set of NC sequences.
· Modify—Modify an existing set of NC sequences:
- Name—Enter a new name for the set.
- Content—Add or remove NC sequences by selecting or unselecting them, similar to when creating a
set.
· Delete—Delete an existing set of NC sequences (this option deletes the name of the set; it does not affect
the NC sequences themselves).
· Info—Display information about the NC sequences included in a set.
· Output—Output CL data for a set of NC sequences.
To Create a Set of NC Sequences

1. Choose CL Data > Output > Select Set.
2. Choose Create from the OUTPUT SET menu.
3. Enter a name for the set.
4. The system brings up a namelist menu containing all operation and NC sequence names. Put the
checkmarks next to the NC sequences you want included in the set. When you select or unselect an
operation makes the system automatically select or unselect all the NC sequences in this operation. You can
also use the Select All and Unsel All options.
5. Choose Done Sel when finished selecting NC sequences.
Pro/NC 301
To Output CL Data for a Set of NC Sequences
1. Choose CL Data > Output > Select Set.
2. Choose Output.
3. Select a name of an existing set from the namelist menu.
4. Choose the desired output type option (such as File or Display) from the PATH menu, then follow the
appropriate procedure, as if outputting a single operation or NC sequence.
To Process CL Data on a Remote Machine

The Batch option in the OUTPUT TYPE menu allows you to perform the tool path computation in the
background, as a separate process, and even on a separate host machine, which lets you do other work while the
tool path computation occurs. It is your responsibility to avoid working on a model until its toolpath
computation is complete.
The Queue Manage option in the CL DATA menu enables you to perform management of the jobs in the queue:
· Delete—Enables deletion of jobs that you have submitted.
· Fetch—Enables fetching of completed jobs.
· Update—Shows status of all jobs in queue.
· Close—Closes the dialog box.
Remote batch processing requires a separate Pro/ENGINEER license. The host machine for remote toolpath
computation must have prorembatch and proremd executables installed, and certain environment variables set.
This is done automatically at installation time when you designate a machine as a remote host for processing CL
data.
To enable toolpath computation on a separate host machine, set up the following configuration option on your
machine:
prorembatch_queue_manager proc_name:host:0:proc_num:1
where:
proc_name = the processor name (any descriptive name)
host = the remote machine hostname
0 = type of transport, always set to 0
proc_num = RPC number of processor (must match the PRORB_RPCNUM environment variable on remote
machine; if you specify 0, the system will use the default RPC number)
1 = version of queue manager, currently 1
To Input a CL Data File

You can "play" an existing CL file by reading it in. The system will display the corresponding tool path.
1. Choose Input from the CL DATA menu.
2. Enter the filename of the CL file.
Note: If the first feature in a CL data file is a 4-axis Wire EDM NC sequence, and the file contains any NC
sequence other than a Wire EDM NC sequence, the input process will be quit.
To Display CL Data for an Operation, NC Sequence,

or a Set of NC Sequences
You can display the tool path for an operation or an NC sequence by following the procedure below.
1. Choose Output from the CL DATA menu.
2. Choose one of:
- Select Set—Select a set of NC sequences.
- Select One—Select an NC sequence or operation.
3. Choose Display from the PATH menu to display the tool path on the screen.
302 Pro/NC
4. Use the DISPLAY CL menu options to customize the tool path display and click Done. Click See Also for
details.
If you are displaying tool path for an operation, all NC sequence tool paths will be displayed in turn.
Synchronized display for HEAD1 and HEAD2 will be used for 4-Axis turning where appropriate. VERIFY
and PROBE statements will be graphically simulated during CL data display.
When displaying the tool path, the solid line represents the tip of the cutter as it cuts the material (kerf
display is available for certain NC sequence types). The tool path displayed as a dotted line corresponds to
the RAPID movements (that is, when FREE_FEED is 0). If you specify a nonzero FREE_FEED, rapid
traverse will be displayed as a solid line.
Notes:
- In some cases, the display may not reflect the exact coordinates in the generated Pro/CLfile.
- You can display tool motions in different colors according to their feed values.
The configuration option cl_arrow_scale allows you to control the size of the tool path arrow. The default
is 1. If you set it to 0, the arrows will not be displayed. Specifying any other positive number will scale the
arrow accordingly.
You can abort the cutter path display at any time by clicking on the STOP sign in the bottom-right corner of the
Pro/ENGINEER window.
The DISPLAY CL Menu

The DISPLAY CL menu contains the following options:
· Tool—Depending on whether the checkmark is on or off, display or do not display the tool.
· Disp Cycles—Appears only for Holemaking NC sequences and Thread Turning. If the checkmark is on, all
the tool motions included in the CYCLE command or in the thread cycle will be displayed. If the checkmark
is off, a simplified display will be used.
· Status Box—When you display the tool path, additional information appears in the Info Box, such as the
feedrate, the spindle speed, the current XYZ coordinates of the tool, the current IJK coordinates of the tool
axis. This option causes the cutter coordinates in the Info Box to update with each GOTO statement, to
reflect the intermediate cutter positions during the tool path display.
· StopAtStart—Makes the tool stop at the beginning of the tool path, to allow you check the cutter location
coordinates in the Info Box. Choose Continue from the CL CONTROL menu when you are ready to proceed
displaying the tool path.
· Compute CL—Forces the system to recompute the CL data at this time; if this option is not selected, the
system will use CL data stored in the "manufacturename.tph" file and only recompute it if you made
changes affecting the CL data (such as changing the manufacturing parameters or model geometry) after the
tool path has last been stored by the system.
The next two options represent two ways to control the frequency of consecutive tool displays on the tool path.
They are mutually exclusive; the one that you select last will be used.
· Time Increment—Puts the tool display in the real time mode. Enter a value for the time increment (in
seconds) between two consecutive tool displays.
· Cutter Step—Displays the tool at uniform distances along the tool path. Enter a value for step size (in the
units of the workpiece). If you enter a large value for step size, the tool will be displayed at the GOTO
locations only.
Notes:
- If a solid tool model is used when creating the NC sequence, you will have an option to display model
geometry instead of the default tool.
- Once you display a tool path, Pro/NC will remember the options used and select them as defaults when
next displaying a tool path within the manufacturing session. If the options last used are inapplicable
for a particular NC sequence type (for example, you used Kerf display before, and now are displaying a
Turning tool path), the system will automatically reset the default as appropriate.
Pro/NC 303
Once you have set up the CL display environment, choose Done CL. The tool path is displayed according to
the specified options. Then the CL CONTROL menu appears with the following options:
· Position—Select a point along the tool path. The tool will be positioned at this point.
· Next—The tool is displayed at the location corresponding to the next GOTO command.
· Prev—The tool is displayed at the location corresponding to the previous GOTO command.
· CL Measure—Access the Pro/ENGINEER Measure functionality to compute tool interference, clearance.
If a solid tool model is used, its geometry can be selected for measuring. If the tool is defined by a
parameter file, it will be temporarily converted into a "dummy" part whose geometry is defined by the
appropriate tool parameters: the tool section for a turning tool will be extruded by 0.1 of the tool length; for
all other tool types the tool section will be revolved around the center axis.
· Time Increment and Cutter Step—The same as in the DISPLAY CL menu.
· Continue—Proceed with the tool path display from the current position of the tool.
· Done—Display the tool path for the next NC sequence, or, if only a single NC sequence is present, exit the
CL CONTROL menu.
· Quit—Exit the CL Control menu. This command will appear only if multiple NC sequences are present.
Note: The tool will always be displayed while you move it using the CL CONTROL menu options, even if
the Tool checkmark in the DISPLAY CL menu was turned off. Once you choose Continue from the CL
CONTROL menu, the tool display will again be controlled by the CL display environment.
You can interrupt the cutter path display at any time by clicking on the STOP sign in the lower-right corner of
the Pro/ENGINEER window.
Example: Translating CL Data

1 2
1 Create a milling NC sequence

2 CL data for the milling NC sequence without translating
3 CL data translated along Y-axis by the amount of pattern dimension increment
To Rotate or Translate CL Data

You can rotate and translate CL data before sending it to file or displaying it on the screen. It is especially
useful for machining patterned features.
1. Choose CL Data, Output, and select the NC sequence or operation. You can also select a set of NC
sequences.
2. Choose Rotate or Translate from the PATH menu.
3. Choose the NC Sequence coordinate system axis to rotate or translate about from the CL TRANSF menu.
4. Enter a value for rotation or translation.
304 Pro/NC
5. Choose File or Display from the PATH menu.
CL data rotations and translations are cumulative. You can repeat Steps 2–4 as many times as necessary to
change the CL output location. To change rotation or translation value back to 0, choose Quit from the CL
TRANSF menu.
Example: Mirroring CL Data

1 2
1 Create a milling NC sequence

2 Mirror CL data about this datum plane
To Mirror CL Data
You can mirror CL data before sending it to file or displaying on the screen.
sequences.
2. Choose Mirror from the PATH menu.
3. Select a plane, or create a datum, to mirror the CL data about.
4. The CL data is mirrored. Choose File or Display from the CUT PATH menu.
To Scale CL Data
The Scale option in the PATH menu allows you to scale CL data before displaying it or writing to a file.
sequences.
2. Choose Scale from the PATH menu.
3. Enter the scaling factor.
4. The CL data is scaled. Choose File or Display from the CUT PATH menu.
To Output CL Data in Different Units

When an NC sequence is created, the CL data is generated in the units of the workpiece. Later, however, CL
data can be output in any units.
sequences.
2. Choose Units from the PATH menu.
3. Select the units for CL data to be output in from the LENGTH menu.
4. Choose File from the PATH menu.
Note: You can use only standard units. The Other unit option is inapplicable for CL data output.
To Edit CL Data Files

The Edit option in the CL DATA menu allows you to edit CL data for an operation, or view CL data for an NC
sequence. Changes to CL data are played back only when the CL data for the operation is output.
Pro/NC 305
When editing an operation, you will be asked if you want to create a new file. This will output the current CL
data for this operation in a file (you will be prompted for the file name), and then bring it up for editing in a text
window at the top of the screen.
If you answer [n], you can edit an existing CL file for this operation (you will be prompted for the file name). In
this case, however, it is the file and not the current operation data that will be edited. For example, if some
changes occurred to the CL data after it was last output, these changes will be lost for editing. It is therefore
recommended to output the CL data to a new file, to make sure that all the latest changes are reflected.
Operations remember changes on a per NC sequence basis; if the CL data for one of the NC sequences in an
operation changes, the other NC sequences will not be affected.
Note: The first four lines of a CL file act as a header, and must be kept intact if the file is to be read in
during editing or inputting CL data. Changing or reordering these lines will cause an error message to
appear.
The editor commands available are:
· Insert File—Insert a move into the CL file, before the current line.
· Save File—Save the CL file (as is). You can enter a different file name.
· Show Path—Show tool path from the start of file to the current position.
· Show Edits—Bring up the Information Window, listing all of the changes that have been made in the CL
data file. The information will include the line number, the editing function that was performed, and the CL
commands that were added.
· Clear Edits—Delete any changes you have made to the CL data file.
· Screen Edit—Enter the screen editing mode.
· Insert—Add any valid line to the CL file, before the current line.
· Append—Add any valid line to the CL file, after the current line.
· Delete—Delete the specified number of lines, starting from the current line. Enter the number of lines to
delete (the default is 1). If you enter 0, no lines will be deleted.
· Change—Change the current line. The CL command must be the same.
· Copy Text—Copy lines in the CL file to another location. Select the range of lines to copy by entering the
first and the last line number (to copy one line only, enter its number for both prompts). Then enter the
number of the destination line.
· Move Text—Move lines in the CL file to another location. Works the same as Copy Text, the difference
being that with Move Text selected lines will be deleted from the original location.
· Search/Repl—Start the automatic replacement procedure.
· Step—Move through the CL file step-by-step, displaying tool and path for every line on your way.
· Jump—Move directly to the specified line without displaying the tool path. The tool will be immediately
displayed in its new position.
· Position—Position the file by line number or by selecting a point. When you choose Position, you will
have two options:
- Line—Position the cursor in the CL file (and the tool on the screen) by entering the line number to go
to. The valid range is shown in the prompt.
- Pick—Select an approximate point on a surface being machined where you want to position the tool.
The system will interpolate the coordinates of your selection to determine the nearest available tool
location. It will then display the tool coordinates in the prompt and ask for confirmation. If you answer
[y], the tool will be moved to this location and the cursor positioned on the appropriate line in the CL
file. If you answer [n], the position will not be changed; and you can make another selection.
· Next—Go to the next line.
· Prev—Go to the previous line.
· FF—Search forward to a particular text pattern.
· Rew—Search backward to a particular text pattern.
306 Pro/NC
· Measure—Access the Pro/ENGINEER Measure functionality to compute tool interference, clearance. This
works similar to the CL Measure option in the CL CONTROL menu.
· NC Check—Access the NC Check functionality.
As you step through the file, the cutter location updates accordingly. The STOP sign is displayed at the right
end of the message window. You can click on it at any moment to interrupt scrolling the file and stop at the
current cursor position.
In Holemaking NC sequences, for deep and break chip cycles, the cycles will be displayed as you edit the CL
file.
To Perform Screen Editing of CL Data

The screen editing mode allows you to use the cursor, arrow keys, and some built-in functions directly in the
text editor window.
1. Choose Screen Edit from the CL EDIT menu.
2. Edit the CL data using the following function keys:
- <F2>—ToggleInput—Alternates between editing and browsing. In browse mode, you can walk
through the file but cannot change it. In edit mode, the whole line that your cursor is on will be
highlighted and you can edit it by typing.
- <F5 >—Line#—Display/remove line numbers in front of the lines.
- <F6>—DelLine—Delete the current line (edit mode only).
- <F7>—Cut—Cut the highlighted lines (edit mode only). To highlight several lines, press the LEFT
mouse button and hold it down while dragging the mouse across the file.
- <F9>—Search—Search for a text string. Enter the string. The file is repositioned with the cursor on the
first occurrence of the search pattern.
You can use the mouse to position the cursor and move through the file using the arrow keys, <PgDn> and
<PgUp>, scroll bar at the side of the window.
3. When done, hit <F1> or <ESC> to quit the screen edit mode and return to the CL EDIT menu. Whichever
key you use, all changes made in the screen edit mode will stay in the file. If you do not want to keep the
changes, choose Quit from the CL EDIT menu.
Note: If you are running on a SUN workstation, you may need to modify your ".xinitrc" file to allow the use
of function key <F1> by your applications.
To Perform Search/Replace
The automatic replacement procedure allows you to search the CL data file for a text pattern and replace all or
some occurrences with another string.
1. Choose Search/Repl from the CL EDIT menu.
2. Choose All or Some.
3. Enter the search string.
4. Enter the replacement string.
5. If you have chosen All, all the occurrences of the search string will automatically be replaced. If Some has
been chosen, each occurrence will be highlighted in turn. Use one of:
- Replace—Replace the highlighted string.
- Skip—Move to the next occurrence without replacing the current one.
- Done—Stop the search/replace process.
To Perform CL Data Gouge Checking

Gouge checking capabilities are provided to allow you a quick check of CL data for Milling NC sequences.
1. Choose Gouge Check from the CL DATA menu.
2. The SEL/CR NCL menu appears with the options:
- Select—Select a preexistent CL file to run from a namelist menu.
Pro/NC 307
- Create—Create a new file. Select an NC sequence or operation, then enter a name for the CL file.
3. The SELECT SRFS menu appears. Select the surfaces you want to check for gouging. The following options
are available:
- Add—Select surfaces to check for gouging. You can select:
Surface—Individual surfaces.
Part—All surfaces on a part.
- Remove—Unselect some of the selected surfaces. You can also use the Surface and Part options
above.
- Remove All—Restart the surface selection process.
- Show—Show the surfaces selected so far. The surfaces will be highlighted in blue.
4. Choose Done/Return from the SELECT SRFS menu when finished selecting surfaces.
5. Choose Run from the GOUGE CHECK menu to start the gouge checking process. You can interrupt this
process at any time by clicking on the STOP sign at the right end of the message window. If you press the
STOP sign, the following options will be available:
- Continue—Continue gouge checking.
- Abort—Abort gouge checking.
- Show—Show gouges detected so far.
6. If no gouges are detected upon completing the check, the system will inform you with a message.
Otherwise, the first detected gouge will be shown and the SHOW GOUGE menu will appear with the
following options:
- Show All—Show all detected gouges.
- Next—Show next gouge.
- Previous—Show previous gouge.
- Info—Output clearance between the tool and check surfaces, as well as information about all detected
gouges, to a file. The number of decimal places output for cutter position will be defined by the
configuration option "mfg_xyz_num_digits" (this option also defines the number of decimal places
when outputting tool coordinates in CL data files). If this option is not specified, the default number of
decimal places for Gouge Checking is 4.
7. You can check another NC sequence by choosing Filename from the GOUGE CHECK menu and selecting or
creating another CL file. The Surfaces option in the GOUGE CHECK menu allows you to add or remove
surfaces to check for gouging. You can also change the accuracy of system calculations by selecting
Tolerance and entering the gouge tolerance value. The smaller the tolerance value, the greater the accuracy.
Note: The tolerance value specified for Gouge Checking should not be less than the TOLERANCE value
used when creating the NC sequence. A good "rule of thumb" is to set the gouge check tolerance to 1.5
times the NC sequence tolerance for the tool path being checked.
The Step option in the GOUGE CHECK menu allows you to change the step size for gouge checking (that is,
the tool positions where gouge checking is performed). You can either enter a value for step size, or let the
system automatically calculate the value to maximize the speed of display. Entering a smaller step size will
increase the number of gouge check positions.
8. Choose Done/Return from the GOUGE CHECK menu when finished.
NC Aliases
The NC Alias option in the CL SETUP menu enables you to establish aliases for CL commands. NC aliases are
useful if the post-processor that you are using does not support the default CL commands output by
Pro/ENGINEER; the NC aliases will substitute a command you have provided into the CL data. The NC alias
may also include additional CL data associated with the command, as well as dimensions, user-defined
parameters, and text. NC aliases are saved in a file with the extension ".ncd". NC alias files will be stored
automatically whenever the manufacturing model is saved.
Four CL commands are supported for aliasing: MFGNO, PARTNO, LOADTL, and TURRET. You cannot
enter additional CL commands into this list to assign them aliases. NC aliases employ functionality similar to
that of drawing notes: you can specify dimensions, parameters, or other fields to be output in the CL command.
308 Pro/NC
For example:
CL Command User Command

(system default) (NC alias)
LOADTL MACRO_LOAD :
&nc_full_arg with &d1
and &param1 and &param2
where:
· "LOADTL" is the default CL command output by Pro/NC. For this example, the complete output statement
is: "LOADTL / 3, LENGTH, 5.0".
· "MACRO_LOAD" is the CL command being substituted for "LOADTL".
· "&nc_full_arg" is the output which follows the "/" in the output. In this example, it is "3, LENGTH, 5.0".
The individual fields in this string can be output using "&nc_arg[arg_num]" (with "arg_num" beginning at
1). For instance, "&nc_arg2" would output "LENGTH".
· "d1" is a dimension value.
· "param1" / "param2" are user-defined parameters; "&" indicates that their values should be displayed (as in
drawing notes). For this example, the value of "param1" is "BLUE" and the value of "param2" is "GREEN".
The output in the CL data file will read: "MACRO_LOAD : 3, LENGTH, 5.0, with 10.00 and BLUE and
GREEN"
Note: When using Pro/TABLE to define an NC alias, it must be contained on a single line.
To Specify an NC Alias
1. Choose Mfg Setup from the MANUFACTURE or MACHINING menu, then choose CL Setup.
2. Choose NC Alias from the CL SETUP menu. The NC ALIASES menu appears with the following commands:
- Modify—Bring up the Pro/TABLE editor to define aliases.
- Retrieve—Choose from a list of previously saved ".ncd" files. Bring a previously saved NC alias table
into the model.
- Save—Save the NC alias table in the current directory. NC alias tables are saved with the extension
".ncd".
- Show—Bring up the Information Window to list all of the NC aliases specified for the manufacturing
model.
3. Choose Modify. The Pro/TABLE window appears. The table contains two columns, labeled "CL
Command" and "User Command". The CL commands that are supported for aliasing are listed under "CL
Command".
4. For each supported CL command that you want to assign an alias to, enter the alias in the corresponding cell
in the "User Command" column.
5. Exit Pro/TABLE and save the file.
To Include Pre- and Post-Machining Files

You can include user-defined macros, like setting the post-processor registers, at the very beginning and the
very end of a CL file, using two parameters:
PRE_MACHINING_FILE—Enter the name of the file you want to be included at the very beginning of the
CL file (after the PARTNO, MACHIN, and UNITS commands).
POST_MACHINING_FILE—Enter the name of the file you want to be included at the very end of the CL
file.
Filenames are entered without the extension, and should have the extension ".ncl", or the default CL file
extension if specified in the configuration file.
The contents of these files will be included in the CL file of the current NC sequence between "$$ —>
BLOCK_START" and "$$ —> BLOCK_END". These contents will be ignored when reading a CL file using
Pro/NC 309
the Input option in the CL DATA menu.
Notes:
· Both these files are included into a CL file before it goes to the post-processor.
· If you set the Startup and Shutdown files at the operation level, these files will be added only when
outputting CL data for the operation. The Startup file is output right after the PARTNO, MACHIN, and
UNITS commands, before the pre-machining file for the first NC sequence; the Shutdown file is output at
the very end of the CL file, after the post-machining file for the last NC sequence.
Converting CL Files
The Pro/ENGINEER editor can handle lines up to 80 characters long. Therefore, the CIRCLE statements and
GOTO statements with an axis (i, j, k vector) will be broken in two lines, with the continuation character ($)
output automatically at the end of the first line.
Before sending CL files to the post-processor, you may need to convert them to the format without the
continuation character using the "pro_ncl_cvt" command.
To Convert a CL File
1. In the directory where your CL file resides, type:
pro_ncl_cvt
2. Enter the CL file name.
3. Enter a different name for the output file.
To Display Tool Path for an NC Sequence

You can display the cutter path and a simulation of the tool prior to completing the NC sequence, to verify the
tool path and make a visual check for interference with fixtures and model features. All simulated tool
dimensions represent the parameters defined during tool setup. All tools except turning appear three
dimensional in isometric or trimetric views.
When you choose Play Path from the NC SEQUENCE menu, the PLAY PATH menu appears with the following
options:
· Compute CL—Forces the system to recompute the CL data at this time; if this option is not selected, the
system will use CL data stored in the "manufacturename.tph" file and only recompute it if you made
changes affecting the CL data (such as changing the manufacturing parameters or model geometry) after the
tool path has last been stored by the system.
· Screen Play—Display the tool path on the screen and view the contents of the CL data file using the PLAY
PATH dialog box. Click See Also for details.
· Play Steps—Appears only if the tool path has been customized. Allows you to display the tool path step-by-
step. Use Continue to display the next step, Quit—to quit the display process.
· NC Check—Access the NC Check functionality.
· Gouge Check—Access the Gouge Check functionality. Available for Milling NC sequences only.
About the PLAY PATH Dialog Box

When you display a tool path, the system opens the PLAY PATH dialog box. The collapsible upper portion of
this dialog box lists the cutter location (CL) data for the NC sequence or operation. You can save this CL data in
a CL file or an MCD file directly from the PLAY PATH dialog box, by clicking the appropriate option in the
File menu.
The lower portion contains the following buttons:
310 Pro/NC
Button Name Description
Play Back Display the tool motion going back from the current position of
the tool.
Stop Stop displaying the tool path.
Play Forward Display the tool motion going forward from the current position
of the tool.
Go To Previous CL Record Go to the previous CL record in the file.
Rewind Rewind to the start of the tool path.
Fast Forward Fast forward to the end of the tool path.
Go To Next CL Record Go to the next CL record in the file.
The Tool Clearance button lets you access the Measure functionality, to compute tool interference, and
clearance. If a solid tool model is used, its geometry can be selected for measuring. If the tool is defined by
parameters, it will be temporarily converted into a "dummy" part, with geometry based on the appropriate tool
parameters.
The Position Cutting Tool button lets you select a point on the tool path to position the cutting tool. To
position the cutting tool at a certain CL data line, click NCL File > Position Tool.
At the bottom of the dialog box, there is a slider to adjust the display speed. Moving the slider to the right
makes the display faster; moving it to the left slows the display.
The Close button closes the PLAY PATH dialog box.
When displaying the tool path, you can make the tool stop at certain points by adding break points. You can
also insert customized CL commands, such as the specific post-processor words required for correct NC output,
at desired locations within the CL file. When you save the CL data, these commands will be output to the CL
file. If you add a tool motion command, the corresponding motion will be also shown in the tool path display on
the screen.
To Display the Tool Path

1. When defining an NC sequence, on the NC SEQUENCE menu, click Play Path > Screen Play.
The system opens the PLAY PATH dialog box and displays the cutting tool simulation in the initial
location.
2. Click the Play Forward button to start playing the tool motion.
The system starts scrolling through the CL data file, moving the tool to reflect its current position on the
screen. The solid red line represents the tip of the cutter as it cuts the material.
3. Click the Stop button to stop the tool motion display. The tool also stops upon reaching a break point placed
in the CL file (indicated by a red downward arrow appearing to the left of the CL record). Use the other tool
positioning options in the PLAY PATH dialog box, as needed.
4. You can save the current tool path to a CL or an MCD file. To do this, click File > Save or File > Save As
MCD, respectively.
5. To finish displaying the tool motion and close the PLAY PATH dialog box, click Close.
To Add a Break Point

When displaying the tool motion, you can make the tool stop at certain points by adding break points in the CL
file listing.
1. In the CL data listing, select a line where you want the tool to stop.
2. Click NCL File > Add break point.
Pro/NC 311
3. The system indicates the break point by placing a red downward arrow to the left of the selected CL line.
When you play the tool motion, the tool stops upon reaching the break point line. You can, for example, click
Tool Clearance at this point, to measure tool interference or clearance. To resume playing the tool path, click
the Play Forward button again.
Manipulating Break Points

When you add break points in a CL file listing, the system indicates them by placing a red downward arrow to
the left of the appropriate CL line. When you play the tool path, the tool stops upon reaching the break point
line in the CL data listing.
To display the tool motion without stopping at break points, click NCL File > Suppress all break points. The
break point information, however, will be retained; when you click NCL File > Resume all break points, all
the break points will reappear.
To delete an existing break point, select the appropriate line in the CL data listing, then click NCL File > Delete
break point.
To Position the Tool

When you play the tool path, the position of the cutting tool on the screen corresponds to the position of the
cursor in the CL data listing in the top portion of the PLAY PATH dialog box.
To change the tool position, use one of the following methods:
· Click the Position Cutting Tool button in the lower portion of the PLAY PATH dialog box and select a
point on the tool path to position the cutting tool.
· Select a line in the CL data listing, then click NCL File > Position Tool to position the tool at this line.
You can insert a customized CL command anywhere along the tool path. Use this functionality to add the
specific post-processor words required for correct NC output.
1. Click NCL File > Insert CL Command.
The CL Command dialog box opens.
2. To select location for the CL command, click and select either a point on the tool path on the screen or
a line in the CL file listing.
3. Specify the command contents using one of the following methods:
- Place the cursor in the Command text box and type the command, line-by-line. Note that this method
does not provide syntax checking.
- Click Menu and compose the command by selecting appropriate keywords from the syntax menus and
typing values in response to the system prompts.
- Click File and read in a file containing the CL command lines. The browser window will appear to let
you select the file name. The expected file extension is ".cmd".
Notes:
- You can edit the contents of the Command text box at any point by placing the cursor in it and using
the keyboard.
- If you supply more than one command line, they will be treated as a "block", that is, you will be able to
move, copy, or delete only the whole block of command lines.
4. The Preview button inserts the command line(s) in the CL file at the selected location to let you preview the
result. Click OK to insert the command at selected location, Cancel—to quit inserting the command.
Using Parameters in CL Commands

When typing values for CL commands, you can input model parameters, preceded by an ampersand(&) sign. If
312 Pro/NC
there is a corresponding parameter defined in relations, its value will be used in the CL command. If the
parameter is not found, the system will prompt you for the parameter’s type and value, and this parameter will
be added to the relations. This way, the CL command can be changed at the top level (through Relations).
To Delete a CL Command
You can only delete user-defined CL commands, that is, the CL commands previously added by using the
Insert CL Command option.
1. Select a user-defined CL command.
2. Click NCL File > Delete CL Command.
3. The system deletes the selected command from the CL file listing.
To Redefine a CL Command
You can only redefine user-defined CL commands, that is, the CL commands previously added by using the
Insert CL Command option.
1. Select a user-defined CL command.
2. Click NCL File > Redefine CL Command.
The CL Command dialog box opens.
3. To select a new location for the CL command, click and select either a point on the tool path on the
screen or a line in the CL file listing.
4. To edit the command contents, use one of the following methods:
- Place the cursor in the Command text box and edit the command. Note that this method does not
provide syntax checking.
- Place the cursor in the Command text box and delete the current contents. Then, click Menu and
compose the command by selecting appropriate keywords from the syntax menus and typing values in
response to the system prompts.
- Place the cursor in the Command text box and delete the current contents. Then, click File and read in a
file containing the CL command lines. The browser window will appear to let you select the file name.
The expected file extension is ".cmd".
Note: If you do not delete the contents of the Command text box before using the Menu or File option, you
will create additional command lines. From then on, these lines will be treated as a "block", that is, you will
be able to move, copy, or delete only the whole block of command lines.
5. The Preview button lets you preview the result. Click OK to complete redefining the command, Cancel—
to quit.
To Save CL Data in a File

When you display a tool path, you can save the current CL data in a CL file or an MCD file directly from the
PLAY PATH dialog box:
1. On the top menu bar of the PLAY PATH dialog box, click File.
2. Click one of the following options:
- Save—Output CL data to a CL file, with the name corresponding to the name of the Tool Path feature.
- Save As—Output CL data to a CL file with a different name. Type the new name in the browser
window.
- Save As MCD—Post-process CL data and output it as an MCD file. The Post Processor Options
window opens. Select the desired options and click Output.
About Subroutine Programming

Subroutine programming enables you to create NC sequences, place them as macros at the beginning of the CL
file, and then call them from the main body of the CL file as many times as needed. This enhancement reduces
Pro/NC 313
the size of CL files, making them easier for the controller to handle and for the programmer to read and edit.
Typical applications include tombstone work, multiple parts setup on a pallet, and turbine impellers where each
blade is the same.
When you select Subroutines from the MACHINING menu, the SUBROUTINES menu appears with the
following options:
· Create—Create a new subroutine pattern.
· Redefine—Redefine a subroutine pattern.
· Delete—Delete a subroutine pattern.
· Info—Obtain information about subroutine patterns.
To Create a New Subroutine Pattern

1. Choose Create from the SUBROUTINES menu.
2. To select NC sequences to be patterned, place a checkmark next to their names in the namelist menu (which
also provides Select All and Unselect All options). Choose Done Sel when finished.
3. The system displays the Subroutines dialog box.
4. The top portion of the dialog box contains the option buttons and checkboxes that allow you to specify the
type of subroutine pattern and desired CL output format:
- If you select the Group option button, the sequences you have selected will be patterned as a group.
This means that the selected sequences and all the sequences in between form a patterned internal
group. If you select Individual, each selected sequence is patterned individually; the sequences in
between are not affected.
- If you select the Absolute option button, CL data for the subroutine will be output in absolute mode. If
you select Incremental, the system will output the MODE/INCR and MODE/ABSOL commands for
each NC sequence that is placed in a subroutine.
- If you select the Multax checkbox, the system will output transformed CL data rather than outputting
Rotate Table commands.
- If you select the Copy CL checkbox, the system will output CL data without the subroutine definitions
and calls. Redefine a pattern to use this option if you want to temporarily suppress subroutine pattern
definitions in CL output.
5. The 1st Direction tab lets you define the pattern in the first direction:
- Pattern Type—Use one of the following option buttons:
Translate—Translate the CL data along the axes of the base coordinate system. Type the translation
values in the X value, Y value, and Z value text boxes.
Rotate—Rotate the CL data about one of the axes of the base coordinate system. Specify the desired
axis by selecting the X, Y, or Z option button. Type the rotation value in the Angle text box.
Csys—This option enables you to select or create coordinate systems for placing instances of the
subroutine. The system calculates the correct TRANS/ROTATE statements for each instance, based on
the location of the coordinate system specified for this instance with respect to the base coordinate
system. Click Select to create, select, remove, or show the coordinate systems.
- Base Coordinate System—Specify which coordinate system, Machine or NC Sequence, is to be used
as the base coordinate system for patterning CL data.
- Number—Specify the number of instances in the first direction.
6. The 2nd Direction tab lets you define the pattern in the second direction. It contains the same options as the
1st Direction tab, except the Csys option button is replaced by None, which means no pattern in this
direction (this is the default).
7. The Fixture tab lets you increment the fixture offset register value.
If you select Use Fixture Compensation, the system will output the "SET/OFSETL, n" command for each
patterned sequence, where n is the fixture offset register number, defined as follows:
- Initial Register specifies the fixture offset register number for the first instance.
- 1st Direction Increment specifies the incremental value for each subsequent instance in the first
direction.
314 Pro/NC
- 2nd Direction Increment specifies the incremental value for instances in the second direction. This
text box only appears if the subroutine pattern is bidirectional.
- If you click Custom, the system displays the Subroutine Fixture Offsets Setup dialog box, where it lists
all instances of the pattern (based on the number of instances in each direction), and current register
numbers for each instance (based on the values for Initial Register, 1st Direction Increment, and 2nd
Direction Increment).
Select an instance where you want to customize the fixture offset and type the new value in the Fixture
Offset text box. The Reset button resets all the offsets back to default values. Click OK to finish
customizing the offsets.
8. Click OK in the Subroutines dialog box to create the subroutine pattern.
Note: NC sequences included in a subroutine pattern cannot be selected for another subroutine pattern.
Redefine the existing pattern instead.
Limitations
If subroutines are present, the following limitations on modifying CL data exist:
· The CL Edit functionality lets you display and scan CL data, but you cannot modify it.
· The CL Command option in the MACHINING menu will be disabled.
To Redefine a Subroutine Pattern

1. Choose Redefine from the SUBROUTINES menu.
2. Select the name of the pattern to redefine.
3. The REDEF SUB menu appears with the following options:
- Sequences—Reselect sequences to be included in the pattern.
- Pattern Def—Brings up the Subroutines dialog box to let you redefine the pattern.
4. Select the desired option(s) from the REDEF SUB menu, then choose Done. The system will start the user
interface for all the selected options in turn.
Examples: Subroutine Programming

Example 1: Group vs. Individual
If an operation contains four NC sequences, and you selected sequences 1 and 3 for subroutine patterning with
number of instances equal to two, the output will look like this:
Group Individual
CALSUB / 1 CALSUB / 1
CALSUB / 3 SEQ2
CALSUB / 3 SEQ4
SEQ4
Example 2: Incremental Output

If Incremental is selected, the system outputs two additional commands, MODE/INCR and MODE/ABSOL,
for each NC sequence that is placed in a subroutine. This triggers the post processor to process and output the
data as incremental moves (the output in the subroutine is still absolute):
DEFSUB / 1
MODE / INCR
GOTO ... (absolute output)
Pro/NC 315
MODE / ABSOL
ENDSUB
About NC Post-Processing
Pro/NC generates cutter location (CL) data files in an ASCII format that need to be post-processed to create
Machine Control Data (MCD) files before any machining operation occurs.
Each Pro/NC module includes a standard set of NC post-processors that can be executed directly or modified
using an optional module. You can control which post-processing module to use by setting the configuration
option ncpost_type. The values are:
· gpost (default)—Use the G-Post post-processors provided by Intercim Corporation.
· ncpost—Use the Pro/NCPOST post-processors.
Other post-processors are certified for use with Pro/NC CL data files.
External Post-Processors
The following post-processors are certified for use with Pro/NC CL Data files:
Post-Processor Supplied by
CAM-POST ICAM Technologies Corporation
IntelliPost Software Magic, Inc.
NC Post Plus CAD/CAM Resources, Inc.
Other post-processor reading APT should also, with little additional code, be able to process Pro/NC CL files.
Execution of the Post-Processor

From within Pro/NC, you can:
· Select which post-processor to use.
· Execute post-processors with option to run CL file.
· Execute post-processors with options directly upon output of tool path.
To Generate a CL File and an MCD File at the Same

Time
1. On the CL DATA menu, click Output.
2. Select an NC sequence. Selecting an operation (using the Operation option in the SELECT FEAT menu) will
output merged CL data and MCD of all the NC sequences included in this operation.
3. Click File to create the CL and the MCD file.
4. The OUTPUT TYPE menu opens with the following options:
- CL File—Generate a CL data file only.
- MCD File—Generate a CL file and then post-process it into an MCD file.
5. Select MCD File and click Done.
6. Type a filename. The files will be named <fname>.ncl.# for the CL file and <fname>.tap for the MCD file
(where <fname> is the name you typed and # is the version number).
7. The PP OPTIONS menu opens with the following options:
- Verbose—Start the verbose display of post-processing.
- Trace—Trace all macros and CL records in the listing file.
- MACHIN—Use the post-processor file for the machine specified in the MACHIN statement of the CL
file. If this option is not checked off, you will be prompted to select a post-processor from the namelist
menu of all available post-processors.
- PID—If this option is checked off, you will be prompted for the process identification string. The
string should not contain any spaces.
316 Pro/NC
8. Select the desired options and click Done.
9. The post-processor is started with the specified options. The post-processed file will be named
<fname>.tap, where <fname> is the name of the CL file being processed.
To Generate an MCD File from an Existing CL File

1. On the CL DATA menu, click Post Process.
The system opens a browser window with a listing of CL data files, starting from the current directory.
2. Select a CL file name.
The PP OPTIONS menu opens.
3. Select the desired options and click Done.
4. The post-processor is started with the specified options. The post-processed file will be named
<fname>.tap, where <fname> is the name of the CL file being processed.
About CL Output
A subset of the Automatically Programmed Tools (APT) commands is automatically sent by Pro/NC to a CL
data file. These commands are shown below with their associated parameters and definitions.
Other commands can be included in the CL data files using the Edit or CL Command functionality. Please refer
to your post-processor documentation for description of the commands available.
Supported CL Data Commands

$$—any line or portion of a line preceded by "$$" is a comment or command for the use of Pro/NC.
Command Description Attributes
CALSUB/a where:
a=subroutine name.
CIRCLE/ x, y, z {, i, j, k} , r output for circular

interpolated tool movement
COOLNT / type, pressure where:

type = ON, OFF, FLOOD, MIST,
TAP, or THRU.
pressure = LOW, MEDIUM, or
HIGH (if the value for the
COOLANT_PRESSURE parameter
is NONE, it will not be output).
CUTCOM / LEFT {,n} where:

LEFT, RIGHT = the direction of
cutter compensation offset.
n = the number of the register of the
machine controller that holds the
tool compensation data. If
CUTCOM_REGISTER is 0, it is not
output.
CUTCOM / RIGHT {,n}
CUTCOM / OFF
CYCLE / type output for Holemaking
cycles
Pro/NC 317
DEFSUB / a start of a subroutine where:
definition a = subroutine name (by default, the
number of the corresponding NC
sequence).
DELAY / t where:
t = delay in seconds
ENDSUB end of a subroutine definition
FEDRAT/f,units where:
f = feedrate value in the specified
units.
units = units for feedrate. Can be
FPM, IPM, FPR, IPR, MMPM,
MMPR.
FEDRAT / INVERS, AUTO specifies the inverse time

feed rate, or the rate of
rotation, for machines with
rotary axes (if you set
INVERSE_FEED to YES)
FEDRAT / INVERS, OFF output at the end of an NC
sequence with inverse time
feed rate.
FINI last statement in the program.
FLUSH / ON, a where:

a = flush register (if specified)
FROM / x, y, z {, i, j, k} where:
x, y, z—coordinates of the tool
control point.
i, j, k—the tool axis vector.
GENRTR / genrtr register
GOTO / x, y, z {, i, j, k} where:
x, y, z—coordinates of the tool
control point.
i, j, k—the tool axis vector.
HEAD / n, OPTION, # output for multiple turrets
HEAD / BOTH output before a pair of

synchronized NC sequences.
HEAD / OFF output after a pair of

synchronized NC sequences.
LINTOL / r where:
318 Pro/NC
r—the value of the manufacturing
parameter LINTOL. Used by post-
processor for interpolation. Will be
output only if the LINTOL
parameter value is other than dash (-
).
LOADTL / n, LENGTH, l, where:
OSETNO, o n = TOOL_POSITION (defined
using the tool table). If the tool is not
included in the tool table, its
TOOL_ID (as set in the parameters
file) will be used.
LENGTH, l = gauge length value for
a tool. Will be output only if
GAUGE_Z_LENGTH is other than
dash (-).
OSETNO, o = tool offset change
specified in the tool table (if any).
MACHIN / name, m where:

name = the NC sequence parameter
MACH_NAME
m = the NC sequence parameter
MACH_ID
MODE/INCR and output inside subroutine

MODE/ABSOL definitions to make the post
transform the subroutine data
into incremental data.
MODE/MILL and output for the Mill/Turn

MODE/TURN centers.
MULTAX / ON puts the post-processor in the

multi-axis output mode (to
process the i,j,k vector).
When in multi-axis output
mode, Pro/NC outputs the
i,j,k vector even when the
tool is in 0, 0, 1 orientation.
OP / THREAD, TURN, ISO output for Thread where:

DEPTH, totdepth, TPI, Turning. DEPTH, totdepth = the depth of cut
thread_feed, MULTRD, t, for the thread.
CUTS, c, FINCUT, n, TPI (or MMPR, or IPR), thread_feed
CUTANG, a = thread pitch (parameters
THREAD_FEED_UNITS,
THREAD_FEED).
MULTRD, t = number of threading
starts in multiple start threading.
CUTS, c = the number of times the
tool is positioned to a multiple cut
(parameter NUMBER_CUTS).
FINCUT, n = the number of passes
Pro/NC 319
made at the final thread depth
(NUMBER_FIN_PASSES).
CUTANG, a = angle at which the
tool begins the cut
(INFEED_ANGLE).
OP / THREAD, NOMORE designates the end of ISO

thread output
PARTNO part name
PIVOTZ / z2, z1, z2, z1, z1 output for 4-Axis Wire EDM z2 = the highest mid-point of the
only. surfaces traversed
PPRINT output model information. In
order to issue this command,
you have to set up the
PPRINT table.
PROBE / ON, OFF, RANGE, probe statements.
CALIB
RAPID next motion statement will
be a rapid traverse feed.
ROTATE / AAXIS|BAXIS| rotational transition between where:
CAXIS, INCR, a, CLW|CCLW the Machine and NC AAXIS, BAXIS, CAXIS—rotate
Sequence coordinate systems about X, Y, or Z axis respectively.
if CL_DATA_MODE is a = rotation angle value.
TRANS_ROTABL CLW = clockwise motion.
CCLW = counter-clockwise motion.
SET / OFSETL, n and SET / where:

OFSETL, OFF n = FIXT_OFFSET_REG
output only if the
FIXT_OFFSET_REG parameter
value is other than dash (-).
SPINDL / RPM, s,
CLW|CCLW, MAXRPM, m,
RANGE, r
SPINDL / SFM or SMM, v,
CLW| CCLW, MAXRPM, m,
RANGE, r
SPINDL / ON
SPINDL / OFF
SPINDL / PARLEL, m = MAX_SPINDLE_RPM. If

XAXIS|ZAXIS (Mill/Turn MAX_SPINDLE_RPM is set to
milling only) dash (-), "MAXRPM, m" will not be
output.
r = range value
(SPINDLE_RANGE). Can be LOW,
MEDIUM, HIGH. If
SPINDLE_RANGE is NUMBER,
then r is equal to the
320 Pro/NC
RANGE_NUMBER parameter
value. If SPINDLE_RANGE is
NO_RANGE, "RANGE, r" will not
be output.
PARLEL indicates which axis the
milling spindle is parallel to.
STAN / a, [ LEAD | LAG, b ], [ output for tool axis in Wire NOW—Update the tool axis position
NOW | NEXT ] EDM, if at the current point (available for 2-
CL_OUTPUT_MODE is set Axis Wire EDM only).
to TAPER NEXT (default)—Update the tool
axis position at the next GOTO
point.
THREAD/AUTO, x1, y1, z1, AI Macro output for Thread where:

TO, x2, y2, z2, TPI, Turning, TPI(or MMPR, or IPR), thread_feed
thread_feed, AT, percent, = thread pitch (parameters
DEEP, depth, LAST, n, TYPE, THREAD_FEED_UNITS,
0, totdepth, angle, IPM, ipm, THREAD_FEED).
FEDTO, d, x, TIMES, t, AT, percent = the percentage of
OFSETL, n, o remaining metal to be removed with
each pass (PERCENT_DEPTH).
DEEP, depth = determines the final
programmed thread depth
(STOCK_ALLOW).
LAST, n = the number of passes
made at the final thread depth
(NUMBER_FIN_PASSES).
TYPE, 0, totdepth, angle = provides
thread depth and infeed angle.
IPM, ipm = feedrate used during
each threading cycle.
FEDTO, d = the clearance distance
from the workpiece.
x = IN (internal thread), OUT
(external thread—default), FACE
(facing thread).
TIMES, t = the number of threading
starts.
OFSETL
n = the number of times the tool is
positioned to a multiple cut.
o = offset distance between each of
the cuts.
TRANS / x, y, z linear translation between the

Machine and NC Sequence
coordinate systems if
CL_DATA_MODE is
TRANS_ROTABL.
Will be commented out if the
FIX_OFFSET_REGISTER
parameter value is other than dash (-
).
TURRET / n, XAXIS, x, output for turning NC
Pro/NC 321
ZAXIS, z, OSETNO, o sequences, and for Mill and
Holemaking NC sequences
performed on lathes and
Mill/Turn centers, instead of
LOADTL.
"XAXIS, x" and "ZAXIS, z"
will only be output if
GAUGE_X_LENGTH and
GAUGE_Z_LENGTH for
the tool are other than dash (-
).
UNITS / u length units used for the NC
sequence (INCHES, MM,
etc.)
VERIFY / CORNER, PNT, probe statements.
RCTNGL, ROUND, XYZ
CL Output for Holemaking Cycles

This topic describes CL output for standard Holemaking cycles. You can also define your own customized
cycles for each machine tool (workcell).
If the configuration option "cycle_format" is set to "fixed", the following output will be generated for all
Holemaking cycles:
CYCLE / type, z, f, units, t, r, i
where:
type = DRILL, DEEP, BRKCHP, THRU, FACE, CSINK, TAP, BORE, REAM, OFF.
z = the depth to feed the tool to.
f = feedrate.
units = units for cycle feedrate. Can be IPM, IPR, MMPM, MMPR.
t = threads per inch (applies to TAP cycle only).
r = rapid to r depth.
i = depth increment (applies to DEEP cycle only).
If the configuration option "cycle_format" is set to "couplet" (the default), the CL output for Holemaking cycles
is described below.
DRILL Cycle
Output when using the cycle type options Drill, Standard.
CYCLE / DRILL, DEPTH, a, IPM, b, CLEAR, c, RAPTO, d, RETURN, e
where:
a—The depth value calculated by Pro/NC.
IPM—Given by the parameter CUT_UNITS.
b—The value of CUT_FEED.
c—Given by CLEAR_DIST.
d—Given by RAPTO_DIST; allows for further rapid advance as measured from CLEAR_DIST toward the
cycle control point (optional).
e—Given by PULLOUT_DIST; allows for an optional return to a point other than the CLEAR_DIST
(optional). If programmed at 0, retract to the retract plane.
DEEP Cycle
Output when using the cycle type options Drill, Deep. The deep cycle allows for incremental steps into a deep
322 Pro/NC
hole.
CYCLE / DEEP, DEPTH, a, STEP, b, IPM, c, CLEAR, d, RAPTO, e, RETURN, f
where:
b—Given by PECK_DEPTH.
c—The value of CUT_FEED.
d—Given by CLEAR_DIST.
e—Given by RAPTO_DIST; allows for further rapid advance as measured from CLEAR_DIST toward the
f—Given by PULLOUT_DIST; allows for an optional return to a point other than the CLEAR_DIST
BREAKCHIP Cycle
Output when using the cycle type options Drill, Break Chip. The breakchip cycle is similar to the deep cycle,
except that the retraction at each increment does not come all the way out of the hole. A full retraction out of
hole is also allowed.
CYCLE / BRKCHP, DEPTH, a, STEP, b, IPM, c, CLEAR, d, RAPTO, e, RETURN, f, DWELL | BACK |
REV, g, TIMES, h
where:
b—Given by PECK_DEPTH.
h—Provides a full retract out of hole as in deep cycle; calculated based on FULL_RETRACT_DEPTH/
PECK_DEPTH.
The choice of DWELL, BACK, and REV is as follows:
· If the parameter INTER_RET_HEIGHT is programmed, the chipbreak couplet will be:
BACK, g ("g" is the value of INTER_RET_HEIGHT)
· If INTER_RET_HEIGHT is "-" and a non-zero DELAY is programmed, the couplet will be:
DWELL, g—if DELAY_UNITS is SECONDS
REV, g—if DELAY_UNITS is REVS
("g" is the value of DELAY)
THRU Cycle
Output when using the cycle type options Drill, Web. It enables you to drill holes through two or more plates,
separated by a certain distance, with the tool moving with FEED_RATE while drilling a plate, and then making
a RAPID motion along the tool axis to position above the next plate.
CYCLE / THRU, DEPTH, a1, a2, a3, ..., IPM, b, CLEAR, c, RAPTO, d, RETURN, e
where:
a1—The depth value of the first plate, calculated by Pro/NC.
a2—The depth value to top of the second plate, calculated by Pro/NC.
a3—The depth value of the second plate, calculated by Pro/NC.
Pro/NC 323
FACE Cycle
Output when using the cycle type option Face. It is essentially the same as the drill cycle, except face allows for
an optional dwell at depth.
CYCLE / FACE, DEPTH, a, IPM, b, CLEAR, c, RAPTO, d, RETURN, e, DWELL | REV, f
where:
f—The value of DELAY.
DWELL or REV will be based on DELAY_UNITS set to SECONDS or REVS, respectively.
COUNTERSINK Cycle
Output when using the cycle type option Countersink. Allows the addition of a chamfered edge to a hole. It
also provides for dwell at depth to assure good finish.
CYCLE / CSINK, DIAMET, a, TLANGL, b, IPM, c, CLEAR, d, RAPTO, e, RETURN, f, DWELL | REV, g
where:
a—The outside diameter of the chamfer (Csink Diam).
b—The value of the countersink tool parameter POINT_ANGLE.
g—The value of DELAY.
TAP Cycle
Output when using the cycle type options Tap and either Fixed or Floating. Allows the creation of a threaded
hole. Floating tap cycle allows a modified feed rate other than that given by the combination of thread pitch and
spindle speed.
CYCLE / TAP, DEPTH, a, TPI | MMPR | IPR, b, CLEAR, c, RAPTO, d, RETURN, e
where:
TPI | MMPR | IPR—Determined by THREAD_UNITS.
b—The value of THREAD_FEED.
324 Pro/NC
BORE Cycle
Output when using the cycle type option Bore. Used to create a finish hole diameter with high precision. In
order to assure good quality finish, there are provisions to allow dwell at depth and to back an asymmetric tool
away from the finished wall before retraction.
CYCLE / BORE, DEPTH, a, IPM, b, CLEAR, c1, c2, RAPTO, d, RETURN, e, ORIENT, f, DWELL | REV, g
where:
c1—Given by CLEAR_DIST.
c2—Given by JOG_DIST, if programmed.
f—Given by ORIENT_ANGLE, if programmed.
g—The value of DELAY.
REAM Cycle
Output when using the cycle type option Ream. An alternative for creating a precision finish hole. It creates the
good surface finish by feeding out of the hole with the spindle turning.
CYCLE / REAM, DEPTH, a, IPM, b, CLEAR, c, RAPTO, d, RETURN, e, DWELL | REV, f
where:
f—The value of DELAY.
CL Output for Circular Interpolation

You can specify circular interpolation for tool motion in Pro/NC by using the parameter
CIRC_INTERPOLATION. If POINTS_&_ARC or ARC_ONLY is specified, the CL file will contain the
following lines for each arc or circle encountered:
GOTO / x, y, z
CIRCLE / x, y, z, i, j, k, r
GOTO / x, y, z
x, y, z
x, y, z
.
.
.
Pro/NC 325
x, y, z
The GOTO statement preceding the CIRCLE command specifies the start point of the arc. The following
GOTO statements specify the points on the arc, the last line specifying the arc end point. For POINTS_&_ARC,
the number of points output is controlled by the tolerance (the smaller the tolerance, the greater the number of
points). For ARC_ONLY, a minimum number of points, determined by the NUMBER_OF_ARC_PTS
parameter value, is output.
Note: The GOTO statements have the format shown above if the tool axis is parallel to the Z-Axis of the
Machine coordinate system; otherwise, the tool axis vector will also be output.
The CIRCLE command specifies circular interpolated tool movement, where:
x, y, z—Coordinates of the center.
i, j, k—Plane vector.
r—Radius.
The plane vector determines the plane and direction using the "right hand rule":
i j k Plane Direction
0 0 1 XY CCW
0 0 1 XY CW
0 1 0 ZX CCW
0 1 0 ZX CW
1 0 0 YZ CCW
1 0 0 YZ CW
APT Format
If CIRC_INTERPOLATION is set to APT_FORMAT, the CL output for each arc or circle encountered will be
in the auxiliary format:
INDIRV / i, j, k
TLON
GOFWD / (CIRCLE / x, y, z, r), ON, (LINE / x1, y1, z1, x2, y2, z2)
where:
i, j, k—The unit vector.
x, y, z—Coordinates of the circle center.
r—Circle radius.
x1, y1, z1 and x2, y2, z2—Coordinates of the two points defining the exit line.
Helical Interpolation
Helical interpolation is provided for Thread Milling. Output format uses CIRCLE with differing Z coordinates
at the start and end point. Difference in Z values is based on the thread pitch and the fraction of the distance
travelled around the helix. For the CIRCLE statement, Z dimension used is the same as the initial point. Sample
output is shown below:
...
FEDRAT / 12.000000, IPM
GOTO / 8.198000, 0.000000, -0.625000
FEDRAT / 8.000000, IPM
CIRCLE / 8.000000, 0.000000, -0.625000, $ $$ 1ST ORBIT
0.000000, 0.000000, 1.000000, 0.198000
GOTO / 8.198000, 0.000000, -0.583333
CIRCLE / 8.000000, 0.000000, -0.583333, $ $$ 2ND ORBIT
0.000000, 0.000000, 1.000000, 0.198000
GOTO / 8.198000, 0.000000, -0.541667
FEDRAT / 12.000000, IPM
...
326 Pro/NC
Synchronized Output for XY-UV 4-Axis Wire EDM
The following commands apply to 4-Axis Wire EDM output:
Command Description
SET/ UPPER, a, LOWER, b Indicates the Z values of the upper and lower contours.
"a" and "b" are real numbers.
CLDIST / c Indicates the distance that the top head is above the
upper contour
n
LOAD / WIRE, n Indicates that wire "n" should be threaded. "n" is an
integer.
GENRTR / n Indicates the power setting for subsequent motions.
SYNCTR / NEXT, n Indicates a position where the two heads should be

located simultaneously. There will be matching
statements in the output of each head.
SYNCTR / LOWER|UPPER Indicates that subsequent motions will be for lower or

upper contour respectively.
UNLOAD / WIRE Indicates that the wire should be cut.
OPSTOP May be added automatically to indicate an optional stop.
About NC Check
NC Check is a dynamic simulation of material removal on the computer screen. It allows you to view a step-by-
step simulation of material removal as the tool is cutting the workpiece.
Do not confuse the automatic material removal simulation with the NC Check process:
Material Removal NC Check
Permanently removes material Simulates material removal for
from the workpiece; creates a new display purposes only; does not
feature. create geometry.
Is based on a set of assumptions Always takes into account the
and may produce simplified actual tool path and shape.
representation of material removal,
depending on the NC sequence
type.
NC Check can be performed:

· At the time of creating an NC sequence (from the PLAY PATH menu) to check the current tool path.
· From the CL DATA menu after the NC sequence or operation is created. You will be prompted for a CL file
name. At this point, you can either select an existing file, or create a new one.
· When editing CL data.
You can control which NC Check simulation module to use by setting the configuration option nccheck_type.
The values are:
Pro/NC 327
· vericut (default)—Use Vericut provided by CGTech.
· nccheck—Use Pro/NC-CHECK.
About Using Vericut

If you are using Vericut, then, after you click the NC Check command, the system opens the NC
VERIFICATION menu, with the following options:
· CL File—Select a name of a CL file from a browser window.

· G-Code File—Select a name of a G-Code file from a browser window.
· Interactive—Perform NC Check Verification within your current session.
· Batch—Perform NC Check Verification as a separate process in batch mode.
Select the desired options, specify the file name, and click Done. The system opens a separate Vericut window
to perform the NC Check simulation. For more information, click Help on the top menu bar of the Vericut
window.
About Using Pro/NC-Check

Optional module Pro/NC-CHECK allows you to display a step-by-step simulation of material removal as the
tool is cutting the workpiece. This dynamic simulation process is called NC Check.
NC Check is implemented for all types of NC sequences. If a tool model has been used, it will be replaced by
the default tool of appropriate type, as defined by the tool parameter values. If a sketched tool is used, the tool
display will be based on the sketch (revolved for Trajectory milling, extruded for Trajectory turning).
Note: The sketched tool’s section cannot contain splines or self-intersecting entities.
The material is removed according to the actual tool shape and motion, that is, all scallops left by the tool passes
will be displayed.
Note: NC Check is not implemented for Side Mill tools.
To Access NC Check at the Time of Creating an NC

Sequence
When you are creating an NC sequence, you can "run" it through the NC Check process to check your current
tool path.
1. Choose Play Path from the NC SEQUENCE menu.
2. Choose NC Check.
3. Choose Display.
4. Set up the display as desired. You can change the default colors for display, select the tool viewing option
and the frequency of successive tool displays.
5. Choose Run. The system starts running the current CL data through NC Check.
To Access NC Check at Any Time

At any time during your manufacturing process, you can "run" the CL data of an existing NC sequence through
the NC Check process to check the tool path and resulting geometry. Running several NC sequences on top of
each other without Refresh will give you a comprehensive picture of workpiece geometry after machining. CL
data for all the NC sequences you are going to run must be output to CL files prior to starting the NC Check
process.
1. Choose CL Data from the MANUFACTURE or MACHINING menu.
2. Choose NC Check.
3. Choose Display.
4. Choose Filename and select or create a CL file to run; otherwise, you will be prompted for the name of the
file when you choose Run.
328 Pro/NC
5. Set up the display as desired. You can change the default colors for display, select the tool viewing option
and the frequency of successive tool displays.
6. Choose Run. The system starts running the specified CL file.
7. Once the NC Check process is completed (or aborted), you can run another NC sequence file.
To Set Up the Display

Before running the CL data through NC Check you can set up the display: change the default system colors,
select a tool viewing option. These settings are active for the current NC Check session only: once you choose
NC Check again all options will be reset back to system defaults. Another way to set up the display is restoring
a previously saved NC Check image.
NC Check Colors
The Color option in the NC DISP menu allows you to control the following NC Check colors:
· NC Sequence—The color of the workpiece where it is cut during the current NC sequence. As the tool cuts
the workpiece, machined surfaces are displayed in this color when they are not coincident with the reference
part surfaces. The default NC Sequence color is yellow.
· Ref Part—The color of the reference part where it is visible. Whenever the workpiece surfaces are
coincident with the surfaces of the reference part, they are displayed in this color. The default Ref Part
color is magenta.
· Workpiece—The original color of the workpiece. The default Workpiece color is green.
· Tool—The color of the tool. The default Tool color is yellow.
· Fixtures—The color of the fixture(s). The default Fixtures color is white.
· Transition—The color which will designate areas where the tool may be grazing or gouging the reference
part. Use Clip planes and appropriate view reorientation to check if the gouging actually takes place. The
default Transition color is cyan.
To Change a Default NC Check Color

1. Choose Display from the NC CHECK menu.
2. Choose Color. The NC COLOR menu appears; for each option, the current color definition is shown in a
small window inside the menu button.
3. Select which color you want to modify.
4. In NC Check, you cannot mix your own colors. Instead, you will have seven preset color definitions to
choose from:
- Color 1—Red
- Color 2—Yellow
- Color 3—White
- Color 4—Blue
- Color 5—Green
- Color 6—Cyan
- Color 7—Magenta
5. Choose a color definition. It will be used in NC Check display for the appropriate type of objects or
surfaces. For example, if you have chosen Tool color in step 3 and then Color 6, the tool will be displayed
in cyan.
To Store the Color Setup

Any color modifications are for the length of the current NC Check session only. When you choose NC Check
again, all colors will be reset to system defaults. If you want to customize you color setup, store the desired
color definitions:
Pro/NC 329
· StoreCurrent—Stores the current NC Check color settings to a file called "nc_check.col" in your working
directory.
· Restore File—Restores the color settings specified in the "nc_check.col" file.
To Control the Tool Display

The Tool View option in the NC DISP menu allows you to control the tool display. The display can be set to:
· Visible—The tool and the workpiece are displayed as solid.
· Invisible—The material will be removed, but the tool will not be seen.
· Transparent—The tool will be displayed as transparent: all workpiece geometry will be visible through it.
· Part Transp—The workpiece is "transparent" for the tool.
· Visible Len—Allows you to show just the cutting portion of the tool, to increase the speed of display. Enter
the visible tool length (valid range is shown in the prompt).
To Change the Step Size

The Step Size option in the NC DISP menu allows you to control the frequency of successive tool displays.
When you choose Step Size, you will have two options:
· Enter—Enter the step size. If step size is smaller that a tool motion, the intermediate positions in a CL file
line will be displayed. If step size is large, some positions at the end of a CL line will not be shown until the
total distance the tool travels exceeds the step size.
· Automatic—The step size will be calculated automatically to produce the fastest display. This is the
default.
Note: The Step size functionality works differently for Sheet Metal manufacturing operations. Therefore, if
the NC Check process is started from the CL DATA menu, you must specify the filename before entering
step size, so that the system can present the proper interface depending on the NC sequence type.
To Change the Resolution

The Resolution option in the NC CHECK menu allows you to modify the resolution value and, consequently,
the speed of NC Check display.
The options available in the NC CHK RESOLUTION menu are: 1x1 pix, 1x2 pix, 2x1 pix, 2x2 pix, 2x3 pix, 3x2
pix, and 3x3 pix. They determine how many pixels in the resulting image are processed together during the NC
Check data generation. The first value represents the amount of pixels along the horizontal direction, the
second—along the vertical direction. 1x1 pix will produce the finest resolution; however, it is the slowest. The
default is 2x2 pix.
To Run the CL Data

As you select Run, the system starts running the CL data. The model is shaded and the tool starts "cutting" the
material. As the tool moves along the CL path, the material removed by the tool motion is reflected in the
workpiece display.
You can interrupt the NC Check process at any time by clicking on the STOP sign at the right end of the
message window.
When NC Check is interrupted, the only options available in the NC DISP menu are Clip Plane and Change
Image. At the same time, the INTERRUPT menu appears with the following options:
· Continue—Proceed with running the CL data from where it stopped. You can select this option after
changing the view of the model (for example, zooming in), or adjusting a Clip plane.
· Abort—Abort running the current CL data. When you abort the display, all options in the NC DISP menu
become available again. You can change the display set-up (for example, colors or step size) and then run
330 Pro/NC
the same data from the very beginning (or run another CL file if NC Check is started from the CL DATA
menu).
Note: Refer to the discussion of the Refresh functionality for more information on what options are
available after Abort.
Clip Planes
The Clip Plane option allows you to create or select a datum plane to cut through the operation area. Only the
portion of the model behind the Clip plane will be shown, which opens up the model for inside inspection of the
cutting process. The Clip planes can be moved parallel to themselves within the limits of the model boundaries.
The following options are available:
· Make Datum—Create a new datum plane to be used for clipping. However, this plane will not be used until
you select it explicitly under Move Plane.
· Move Plane—Allows you to create a new clipping or modify an existing one by moving the Clip plane
parallel to itself.
· Delete Clip—Allows you to remove a previously specified clipping.
· Del All Clips—Allows you to remove all clippings from the model.
When moving a Clip plane, be aware of the following:
· The Clip plane must stay within the workpiece boundaries. Thus the values appearing at the opposite ends
of the scale for Continuous or as the valid range for Discrete represent the distance from the initial plane
position to the two opposite sides of the part (in the direction normal to the clipping plane).
· When you move a Clip plane, the actual datum plane used for the clip is not affected. It will appear in its
original location after the NC Check process is finished.
To Create or Modify a Clip Plane

1. Choose Clip Plane.
2. Choose Move Plane and select a datum plane from a namelist menu. If a datum plane of desired orientation
does not exist, create it using Make Datum prior to selecting this option.
3. An arrow appears showing the direction of the clip. Select the direction using Flip and Okay options. The
side where the arrow points will be erased.
4. The DIS/CONT menu appears with two options:
- Discrete—Allows you to enter values from the keyboard. Valid range is defined by the part outline. As
you enter a value, the model is repainted according to the new clip position. When satisfied, press
ENTER without entering a value.
- Continuous—A single thermometer-type scale appears with the current position of the Clip plane
designated by 0. The scale range is defined by the part outline. You can move the Clip plane parallel to
itself by selecting on the scale using the left mouse button. As you do it, the image is repainted to
reflect the new clip location. When satisfied, select in the top box of the scale.
To Change Image
The Change Image option allows you to modify the viewing scale, location, and orientation of the model
within the NC Check process. When you choose Change Image, the following options are available:
· Flip View—Allows you to view the model from the direction exactly opposite to the original one. This is
the only reorientation option available within the NC Check process. To otherwise change the model
orientation, use the top-level View functionality.
· Set Center—Moves the model with respect to the screen without modifying the scale.
· Resize—Magnifies or decreases the viewing display of model geometry using a menu scale.
· Show Diff—Toggles the display of the reference part. This allows you to better see the material that is left
to be machined. When you select Show Diff for the first time, the reference part is removed from display, so
what you actually see is the difference between the workpiece and the reference part. Selecting Show Diff
Pro/NC 331
again brings the reference part back.
· Original—Allows you to quickly restore the original view (that is, discard all the changes made using the
options above).
To Refresh the Display

The Refresh option determines if the previous display will be erased before running CL data:
· If the checkmark is on, the NC Check material removal will start by erasing the previous display and freshly
shading the workpiece.
· If the checkmark is off, the new image will be created based on the existing one.
Do not forget to turn the Refresh off if you want to run several CL files on top of one another to see the
resulting geometry, or if you have restored an NC Check image from file and want to run CL data over it.
If you are running NC Check with Refresh off, you can only modify the Operation color. However, you can
create and move Clip planes, modify step size or tool view. The top-level View functionality will be unavailable
but you can use the CHANGE IMAGE options. Resolution can not be changed without refreshing the display.
To Access NC Check When Editing CL Data

When NC Check is performed when editing CL data, the Run option in the NC DISP compound menu is
replaced by the file positioning options: Position, Next, Prev, FF, and Rew. You can run just the lines you
want (for example, those you have changed or added), line-by-line.
1. Position the CL file as desired and choose NC Check.
2. Choose Display.
3. Set up the display.
4. Start moving through the file using the Position, Next, Prev, FF, or Rew options. As you do it, the tool
moves along the CL path, and the material removed by the tool motion is reflected in the workpiece display.
Notes:
· Make sure the Refresh option is turned off, otherwise the screen will be repainted at every line.
· When you move backward through the file (for example, using the Prev option), the display will not be
updated.
To Set Up Trim Planes

Trim planes can be used before starting the display process to blank the portions of the workpiece that are not
affected by the current NC sequence. This cuts down on the amount of time needed to create the initial image.
When you choose Trim Plane, the following options are available:
· Create Trim—Specify a new trim. Select a planar surface or datum plane (a datum can be created "on the
fly") to be used as a trim plane, then specify the direction of the trim, that is, which side to remove from
display.
· Delete Trim—Delete a trim. Select a trim to delete by selecting the name of the trim plane from a namelist
menu (they are given default names upon creation: Trim Plane #1, Trim Plane #2). You will have a Select
All option. Once a plane is selected, it will be temporarily displayed in cyan to let you visually check the
correctness of you selection. If you have made a mistake, unselect the plane by turning off the checkmark
next to its name. Note that deleting a trim does not delete the trim datum plane itself.
Trim planes are similar to Clip planes, except that:
· Trim planes can not be dynamically moved.
· Trim planes are supposed to remove portions outside the operation area; therefore, they do not affect the
tool display.
Note: The Trim Plane option does not appear when running NC Check at the time of creating an NC
sequence.
332 Pro/NC
To Save an Image
The Save option in the NC CHECK menu allows you to store the NC Check image to a file. NC Check image
files are not the same as regular shade files: they also contain all the NC Check specific information. NC Check
image files have the ".nck" extension.
1. Choose Save from the NC CHECK menu.
2. Enter a file name.
3. The image will be saved in your current directory as "filename.nck.#", where # is the version number.
Note: Image files are very large, so only store them if you really need them, and don’t forget to purge
unwanted files.
To Restore an Image
The Restore option allows you to read in a previously stored ".nck" file. This file contains all information
necessary to initialize the NC Check process, which means you can run the same or another file on top of this
image right away.
If any Clip planes have been set when the image was saved, they will be active upon subsequent displays unless
you delete them using the Delete Clip or Del All Clip option.
1. Choose Restore from the NC CHECK menu.
2. Enter a file name. Entering [?] will activate a menu-driven search among the ".nck" files in the current
directory.
3. The image will be displayed complete with the Clip planes, NC Check colors and other attributes.
To Use Shaded Images

You may want to save some "highlights" of your NC Check process as regular shade files to be able to display
them quickly on top of one another at a later time. Shade files are somewhat smaller than the image files and
they take less time to be displayed.
When you choose Interface from the NC CHECK menu, the INTRFACE menu appears with the following
options:
· Shade Save—Save the image as a shade file. The file will be saved in the current directory with the ".shd"
extension, and can be eventually displayed using the Shade Restore option, or the Restore option in the
SHADE menu.
· Shade Restore—Display a shaded image. This option allows you to display only regular shade files with
the ".shd" extension.
Unlike the ".nck" files, ".shd" files do not contain the data necessary to initialize the NC Check process. If you
read in a regular shade file using the Shade Restore option, the screen will be repainted and the NC Check
image displayed as soon as you choose Run.
About Modifying NC Sequences

NC sequences and material removal features can be deleted, suppressed, or resumed, as any other workpiece or
assembly features. These topics describe specific techniques of modifying, redefining, and patterning NC
sequences and material removal features.
To Modify an NC Sequence
1. Choose Modify from the MFG UTILS menu and NC Sequence from the MOD PROCESS menu.
or
Choose Modify from the MANUFACTURE menu, then choose Mod NC Seq from the MFG MODIFY menu.
2. Select the NC sequence to be modified from the namelist menu.
3. The MOD NC SEQ menu appears with the following options:
Pro/NC 333
- Tool—Modify the tool used for the NC sequence. You can retrieve another tool or modify parameters
of the current tool.
- Dimensions—Modify the Tool Motion dimensions. Select which Tool Motions you want to modify
using the namelist menu (you can select all). The appropriate dimensions are displayed. Select the
dimension you want to modify and enter a new value.
- Parameters—Modify parameters of the NC sequence. You can also modify parameters of any or all
Automatic Cut motions. Select which parameters you want to modify by checking the appropriate
entries in the namelist menu (you can select all). If more than one NC sequence component is selected
at once, you can only use the Set option, otherwise you will have the regular MFG PARAMS menu
options.
- Motion Params—Modify parameters of the Tool Motions.
4. Choose Done/Return from the MOD NC SEQ menu when finished.
5. Regenerate the manufacturing model.
Modifying Parameters of Multiple Automatic Cut

Motions
If several NC sequence components (e.g., the NC sequence itself and some of the Automatic Cut motions) have
been selected for modifying parameters, a multi-column table will appear in the Param Tree dialog window to
let you simultaneously modify parameters of any or all the components selected.
To Change a Parameter Value for All Cut Motions at

Once
If you want to change a parameter to the same value for all the selected components, you can use the following
shortcut. It copies the contents of the highlighted cell and applies this value to all cells in the current row.
1. Type the new value in a cell (for example, in the first column).
2. Choose Edit > Copy.
3. Choose Edit > Paste Row.
4. The system changes the parameter values for the whole row, that is, in all the columns of the table.
To Regenerate the Manufacturing Model

You have to regenerate the manufacturing model when either part dimensions or manufacturing parameters that
affect workpiece geometry (such as STOCK_ALLOW) have been modified. If you modify other parameters
(such as STEP_OVER), the CL data is automatically recalculated and there is no need to regenerate.
To regenerate the manufacturing model:
1. On the MANUFACTURE or the MFG UTILS menu, click Regenerate.
2. Select parts to regenerate or use the Automatic command. If you select no parts, only placement constraints
between the design model and workpiece will regenerate.
When the workpiece is selected for regeneration, the REGEN TYPE menu appears with the following
commands:
- Normal—Regenerates a part normally.
- Slow—Regenerates a part, displaying the part and tool path after regenerating each manufacturing
feature.
- Step—Regenerates a part, waiting for user input after regenerating and displaying each manufacturing
feature.
- Supp Fail—Makes the system automatically suppress all features failed upon regeneration, along with
their children.
- Compute CL—Allows you to specify if you want the CL data to be recalculated at regeneration time.
If a checkmark next to the Compute CL option is on, the system will recalculate CL data every time it
334 Pro/NC
regenerates an NC sequence. To reduce the regeneration time, you may turn it off. If Compute CL is
off, only workpiece geometry will be regenerated.
To Redefine an NC Sequence
The MFG UTILS menu option Redefine allows you to modify how an NC sequence is created. When the NC
sequence has children (e.g., material removal), you will be prompted to delete all the children before proceeding
with the NC sequence redefinition.
Note: If an NC sequence has been patterned, it cannot be redefined. Use Del Pattern first.
1. Choose Utilities from the MACHINING menu, then choose Redefine.
2. Choose NC Sequence from the SELECT FEAT menu and select the NC sequence to be redefined.
3. Select from the following options in the REDEF NC SEQ menu:
- Attributes—Allows you to redefine the NC sequence attributes, such as 5 Axis to 4 Axis, Holemaking
cycle type (e.g., Drill to Tap). After redefining the Attributes, you will have to redefine References as
well.
- References—Brings you directly to the NC SEQUENCE menu. You can redefine sequence references,
change the tool motions.
- Operation—Specify another parent operation and workcell for the NC sequence. The operation must
be older than the NC sequence (reorder the features first, if necessary). The system will also check that
the NC sequence is compatible with the workcell type.
The NC sequence will be recreated using the new definitions. If any changes are made to the NC sequence
that cause its regeneration to abort, then the redefining process will abort and the NC sequence will return to
its original references.
Note: If you want to just redefine References of an existing NC sequence, you can choose NC Sequence
from the MACHINING menu and then select the name of the NC sequence from the namelist menu.
To Reorder an NC Sequence
The order in which NC sequences are regenerated can be changed through NC sequence reorder. Choose
Reorder from the MFG UTILS menu and follow the regular procedure for reordering features.
Note: If you want to just change the order of outputting CL data for the NC sequences within an operation,
it is not necessary to reorder the NC sequences themselves. The Output Order functionality provides
multiple ways of reordering the tool path output: by pick, as well as sorting by tool.
Reordering an NC sequence means moving the whole set of features associated with the NC sequence (tool
motions) to the new location in the workpiece feature sequence.
Note: If you reorder an NC sequence for which a material removal feature has been created, the material
removal feature will not be reordered automatically. The material removal feature must also be reordered if
it is to immediately follow the NC sequence.
All features associated with an NC sequence form an internal NC group. The NC sequence feature is ordered
first and the Tool Path feature, containing all Tool Motions,is ordered last.
Cut motions can be reordered within the NC sequence (to select a cut motion, use Sel By Menu and feature
number), but no Cut Motion or Tool Path feature can be reordered to a place outside its NC group.
Similarly, no other feature can be reordered to fall inside an NC group. If you try to enter a location within an
NC group, an error message: "Can not insert into this group of features", will appear and
you will be prompted to enter another location.
Mill volumes and surfaces can also be reordered using the Reorder option in the MFG UTILS menu. The whole
set of features included in the volume/surface will be moved to the specified position in the workpiece feature
sequence.
To select a volume/surface for reordering, you can either select its first feature (base volume or quilt), or use Sel
By Menu and select the volume/surface name.
Pro/NC 335
To Suppress or Delete Mill Volumes and Surfaces
When suppressing or deleting features in a manufacturing model, two additional options will appear in the
SELECT FEAT menu to simplify the selection process:
· User Def Vol—Select a name of a Mill Volume from the namelist menu to suppress or delete all features
included in the Mill Volume.
· User Def Srf— Select a name of a Mill Surface from the namelist menu to suppress or delete all features
included in the Mill Surface.
About Patterning NC Sequences

You can create patterns of NC sequences using the Pattern option in the MFG UTILS menu. These patterns can
be either Coordinate or Reference (similar to Dimensional and Reference patterns in regular Pro/ENGINEER):
· Coordinate patterns are created using the Csys Pattern option by translating or rotating CL data with
respect to either the NC Sequence or the Machine coordinate system.
· Reference patterns are created using the Ref Pattern option. This type of pattern can be created only if the
NC sequence to be patterned references a patterned feature (e.g., Holemaking).
Info about patterns is shown in the Manufacture Info.
A pattern can be deleted using the Del Pattern option in the MFG UTILS menu.
Note: Operations cannot be patterned.
Patterning NC Sequences with Tool Motions

Note: If an NC sequence has Tool Motion features, it cannot be reference patterned.
You can create Coordinate patterns of NC sequences that have Tool Motion features. You can also create a
regular Dimensional pattern of an NC sequence if it contains a Tool Motion with dimensions that can be used to
drive the pattern.
If you try to pattern an NC sequence that has Tool Motions, the system creates an internal local group
containing these features and patterns this local group. If the NC sequence references another feature, such as
Mill Volume or Drill Group, two situations are possible:
1. If the reference feature immediately precedes the NC sequence in the feature list, the system will prompt
you if you want to include the reference feature in the pattern or not.
2. If there are other features in between the reference feature and the NC sequence, the system will issue a
warning and the reference feature will not be patterned. If you want the reference feature to be patterned
along with the NC sequence, reorder it to be immediately before the NC sequence in the feature list before
creating the pattern.
Coordinate System Patterns

Coordinate patterns can reference either the NC Sequence or the Machine coordinate system. They can be
unidirectional or bidirectional. For each direction you can specify either displacement along the X,Y,Z axes, or
rotation about any axis. When the pattern is created, appropriate CL paths are generated and can be displayed or
written to file by choosing CL Data > Output and selecting the patterned NC sequence.
To Create a Coordinate Pattern of an NC Sequence

1. Choose Utilities from the MACHINING menu, then choose Pattern.
2. Select the NC sequence to pattern.
3. Choose Csys Pattern and Done.
4. Select patterning type in first direction by choosing Rotate or Translate from the PAT TYPE menu.
- If you have chosen Translate, choose either NCSeq Csys or Mach Csys and enter displacements in X,
Y, and Z directions.
336 Pro/NC
- If you have chosen Rotate, enter rotation angle, then specify which coordinate system to use, and
which axis to rotate about, by selecting options from the ROT TYPE menu.
5. Enter total number of instances in this direction.
6. Select patterning type in second direction, or if you want a unidirectional pattern, choose None. If you want
a bidirectional pattern, repeat actions in steps 4 and 5 for the second pattern direction.
7. You can abort the patternization of an NC sequence about a coordinate system by choosing Quit from the
PAT TYPE menu.
Note: Patterning in second direction will use the same coordinate system as specified for the first direction.
If you select for patterning an NC sequence that already has a pattern defined, an error message will appear.
You can modify the existing pattern, or delete the existing pattern using the Del Pattern option and then define
a new pattern.
Using Relations
You can use relations when specifying displacements and rotation angles. For example, when prompted to enter
displacement in the Y direction, you can enter:
STEP_OVER:FID_# / 2
(where # is the internal feature ID of the NC sequence)
All displacements and rotation angles will be treated as dimensions and assigned dimension IDs; number of
instances will be treated as an integer parameter (similar to the number of instances in Pro/ENGINEER feature
patterns). All the pattern information (including the pattern type, dimension and parameter values and IDs, and
relations used, if any) will be listed in the NC Sequence info.
To Create a Rotary Table Pattern of an NC Sequence

When creating a rotational pattern of an NC sequence, you have an option to use an Index table. Index tables
currently work for rotation about one axis with patternization in one direction.
Note: The Index Table patterns can be created only with respect to the Machine coordinate system.
2. Select the NC sequence to pattern.
3. Choose Csys Pattern and Done.
4. Choose Rotate from the PAT TYPE menu as the patterning type in first direction.
5. Enter the rotation angle.
6. Choose Mach Csys, Index Table, and the axis to rotate about from the ROT TYPE menu.
7. Choose None as the patterning type in second direction.
8. Enter the number of instances. The pattern is created.
If you use a Rotary table, CL Data for all instances of the pattern will be displayed at the same location (that of
the first instance), with the NC Sequence coordinate system rotating appropriately for each instance.The
following graphic illustrates the difference in CL Data display depending on the ROT TYPE option used.
1 2
3 4
Pro/NC 337
1 Tool moves from instance to instance
2 Coordinate system rotates for each instance
3 Rotate CL
4 Index Table
To Modify a Coordinate Pattern of an NC Sequence

1. Choose Modify from the MANUFACTURE menu, then choose Mod Pattern.
2. Select NC sequence to modify the pattern.
3. Choose appropriate options from the PAT MODIFY menu:
- First—Modify the first pattern direction.
- Second—Modify the second pattern direction.
- Num Inst—Modify only the number of instances in the selected direction. If the number of instances is
modified to 1, the pattern in this direction will be deleted.
- All Opts—Modify all options for this direction. If you choose it, the PAT TYPE menu comes up.
4. Choose Done from the PAT MODIFY menu.
5. Depending on the selected option, either enter number of instances, or select the patterning type and enter
all the necessary values.
Only one pattern direction can be modified at a time. To modify the second direction, choose Mod Pattern
again.
Reference Patterns
A Reference manufacturing pattern can be created when the NC sequence to be patterned references a patterned
feature. The functionality is similar to creating Reference patterns of features in regular Pro/ENGINEER.
NC sequences with a sketched cut section may be Reference patterned only if the section sketch for the NC
sequence is created with Use Edge and references edges of a patterned feature.
Note: If silhouette edges are used by the sketch, the Reference pattern will not be created. For Turning, the
work-around would be to use datum curves.
After an NC sequence is patterned (using either pattern type), an Automatic material removal feature based on it
can be reference patterned.
Reference manufacturing patterns cannot be modified using the Mod Pattern option. They automatically
follow the pattern of the referenced feature.
To Create a Reference Manufacturing Pattern

2. Select an NC sequence that references a patterned feature, or an Automatic material removal feature that
references a patterned NC sequence.
3. Choose Ref Pattern, and Done.
4. The pattern is created automatically.
To Reference pattern a Milling NC sequence that uses a Mill Volume or Mill Surface, you have to pattern the
Mill Volume/Mill Surface first. For example, to perform Volume milling on a pattern of slots, follow the
procedure below.
To Reference Pattern a Volume Milling NC Sequence

1. Create a Mill Volume by referencing slot geometry. You can either Gather, or Sketch with Use Edge.
2. Reference pattern the volume. Choose Utilities, Pattern, Sel By Menu, and select the volume name.
3. Create a Volume milling NC sequence by selecting the original volume.
4. Reference pattern the milling NC sequence.
338 Pro/NC
To Create a Dimension Pattern of an NC Sequence
Dimension patterns of NC sequences can be created if the NC sequences contain a Tool Motion with
dimensions that can be used to drive the pattern.
About Changing Feed Colors

The Feed Color option in the CL SETUP menu (accessible by choosing CL Setup from the MFG SETUP menu)
allows you to display tool motions in different colors depending on the feed value.
The system default feed ranges and the corresponding colors are:
· Rapid—Yellow (motions corresponding to the RAPID command)
· Default—Red (feeds not falling into any of the specified ranges)
· < 20—White
· 20-40—Blue
· 40-60—Green
· 60-80—Cyan
· 80-100—Magenta
· > 100—Orange
You can at any time modify both the range limits and the color corresponding to a certain range.
To Change a Feed Color

The procedure below shows you how to use a different color to display a certain feed range. You can not mix
your own colors for this purpose; the system will let you choose from a built-in set of predefined colors. You
can set the same color to more than one range, if desired.
1. Choose Feed Color from the CL SETUP menu.
2. Choose Set Colors. The COLOR/RANGE menu appears; for each feed range, the current color definition is
shown in a small window inside the menu button.
3. Select which feed range color you want to modify.
4. You will have eight preset color definitions to choose from:
- Color 1—Red
- Color 2—Yellow
- Color 3—White
- Color 4—Blue
- Color 5—Green
- Color 6—Cyan
- Color 7—Magenta
- Color 8—Orange
5. Choose a color definition. It will be used to display tool motions in the appropriate range of feeds.
To Change a Feed Range

When modifying range limits, keep in mind that ranges cannot overlap. If you try to enter a minimum or
maximum value that falls into any of the currently specified ranges, the system will not accept it. Therefore, the
order of modifying range limits is important: for example, if you have two ranges, 20-40 and 40-60, and want to
modify them to be 20-30 and 30-60, modify the 20-40 range first.
1. Choose Feed Color from the CL SETUP menu.
2. Choose Set Range. The COLOR/RANGE menu appears; for each color definition, the current feed range is
shown.
Pro/NC 339
3. Select which feed range you want to modify.
4. Enter the minimum value for feed range (the current minimum value is shown as default in the prompt).
Entering [0] will make the range start with a "less than" sign.
5. Enter the maximum value for feed range (the current maximum value is shown as default in the prompt).
Entering [0] will make the range start with a "greater than" sign.
6. The new feed range is shown in the COLOR/RANGE menu. All tool motions in the specified feed range will
be displayed in the color shown in a small window inside the menu button.
About Model Tree

You can display a graphical hierarchy of a manufacturing model in the form of a Model Tree Window.
When you create or retrieve a manufacturing model, the system displays the Model Tree Window.
To Display the Manufacturing Features

1. Choose Tree > Show.
2. Put the checkmark next to Features. By default, the system displays all the manufacturing features in the
Model Tree window.
3. Choose Tree > Expand > All to see all the manufacturing features at all levels.
To Select the Features to Display

1. Choose Tree > Show > MFG Features.
2. The system displays the MFG Features Filter dialog box. Put a checkmark next to the feature type(s) you
want to appear in the Model Tree Window:
- Operation
- Workcell
- Sequence
- Mfg Geometry
- Material Removal
- Show all features—If you select this option, the checkmarks next to all the options above disappear.
The Model Tree Window will contain all the features (including regular Pro/ENGINEER features) in
the manufacturing assembly and in all the components.
3. Press OK to display the selected feature types in the Model Tree Window.
To Display the Manufacturing Parent/Child

Relationships
1. Choose Tree > Show.
2. Put the checkmark next to Mfg Owner.
3. The Model Tree Window displays the name of the parent in square brackets after the name of each
manufacturing feature. For example, the operations will list the name of associated workcell, the NC
sequences—the name of the parent operation.
The Add/Remove Columns dialog box in Pro/NC contains an additional option, Machining Params, which
allows you to add columns with the manufacturing parameter values to the Model Tree Window.
To Add Manufacturing Parameters

1. Choose Tree > Columns > Add/Remove.
2. Under the Type panel, scroll to the Machining Params filter. All the parameter names appear in the
Available panel below. Selecting one of the filters below Machining Params (such as Names. Feeds, Cut
Options) will display only the appropriate subset of the parameter names.
3. Select a parameter name in the Available panel and move it to the Current panel by pressing the << button.
340 Pro/NC
After selecting all the parameters you want to add, press the OK button.
To remove an unwanted parameter from the Model Tree Window, select it in the Current panel and move it to
the Available panel by pressing the >> button.
About Process Information

These topics describe various ways of delivering information about your manufacturing process and producing
in-process documentation.
To Output Manufacturing Information

1. Choose Info > Manufacturing from the Pro/ENGINEER menu bar.
2. The system displays the Manufacturing Info dialog box.
3. Select the type of report you want using the option buttons in the top portion of the dialog box:
- Manufacturing Model—Output information about the whole manufacturing process. You can
configure types of information to output using the Filter button. All operations and all NC sequences
will be output according to their current Filter configurations. NC sequences will be sorted by
operations.
- Operation—Output information about selected operation(s). Select the operation names from the list
box. You can configure types of information to output using the Filter button. All NC sequences
included in the selected operations will be output according to the current Filter configuration for the
NC sequence.
- NC Sequence—Output information about selected NC sequence(s). You can configure types of
information to output using the Filter button.
- Manufacturing Geometry—Output information about the following types of manufacturing geometry
(select the desired type from the Geometry Type drop-down list):
Mill Window—Output information about Mill Windows existing in the model.
Mill Volume—Output information about Mill Volumes existing in the model.
Mill Surface—Output information about Mill Surfaces existing in the model.
Turn Profile—Output information about Turn Profiles existing in the model.
Drill Group—Output information about Drill Groups existing in the model.
Machined Geometry—Output information about machined geometry.
Hole Set—Output information about Hole Sets existing in the model.
Process Refs—Output information about process references.
- Route Sheet—Output the route sheet. Click See Also for details.
4. Use the Screen and File checkboxes to specify if you want to output information on the screen, to a file, or
both.
5. Click Apply to output information.
6. Click Close to close the Manufacturing Info dialog box.
To Set Up Filter Configuration

1. Click Filter in the Manufacturing Info dialog box.
2. The system displays the Manufacturing Information: Filters dialog box.
3. Select one of the option buttons in the top portion of the dialog box:
- Manufacturing Model—Set Filter configuration to output information about the whole manufacturing
process.
- Operation—Set Filter configuration to output information about operations.
- NC Sequence—Set Filter configuration to output information about NC sequences.
4. The system displays the applicable filters in the middle portion of the dialog box. If a filter has a checkmark
next to it, this type of information will be output. Select and clear the checkboxes as appropriate to set up
the desired Filter configuration (you can use the Select All and Unselect All buttons to speed up the
process).
5. Click Apply to set the Filter configuration.
Pro/NC 341
6. Click Close to return to the Manufacturing Info dialog box.
Route Sheet
A route sheet is a list of all NC sequences performed on the workpiece and the associated setup and cutting
times for a particular manufacturing process. The route sheet can be edited within Pro/NC, as well as outside,
using the system editor.
To Generate a Route Sheet

1. Choose Info > Manufacturing from the top bar of the Pro/ENGINEER Main Window.
2. Select the Route Sheet option button in the Manufacturing Info dialog box.
3. The system displays the route sheet in an editor window. You can edit the route sheet as desired, then save
it. The route sheet is saved in the current directory as manufacturename.ppl.
The default route sheet consists of three sections. The first section identifies the route sheet by supplying the
design model name. You can edit the route sheet to add the name of the author in the first section.
The second section describes the NC sequences for a particular manufacturing process. The route sheet lists the
description of the machining NC sequences, the volume of material removed by each NC sequence, the time it
takes to set up for the NC sequence (entered by choosing Setup Time from the FIX SET menu when defining a
fixture setup), and the time to perform each NC sequence. You can edit the route sheet to add the tool name and
additional set up time.
The third section consists of totals for removed volume, set up time, and run time. You can edit the route sheet
to account for additional set up time.
Using Pro/REPORT in Pro/NC

You can generate customized reports on your manufacturing processes using the Pro/REPORT functionality.
Pro/REPORT allows you to access manufacturing parameters for documentation and customize the report
format to suit your specific needs. For more information on using Pro/REPORT and the complete list of
parameters available, refer to the appropriate help topics in the Drawings domain. Parameters specific to
Pro/NC are listed in the table below.
Parameter Name Definition
&mfg.oper.name Lists the operation names.
&mfg.oper.User Defined Lists the specified operation
parameters.
&mfg.oper.workcell.name Lists the workcell names.
&mfg.oper.workcell.User Defined Lists the specified workcell
parameters.
&mfg.oper.workcell.head.head_number Displays the workcell head number.
&mfg.oper.workcell.head.tooltbl.tool_id Lists the tools in the turret.
&mfg.oper.workcell.head.tooltbl.tool_pocket. Lists the tool comments for the turret.
tool_comment
&mfg.oper.workcell.head.tooltbl.tool_pocket. Lists the tool pocket locations in the
tool_position turret.
&mfg.oper.workcell.head.tooltbl.tool_pocket. Lists the tool registers in the turret.
tool_register
&mfg.oper.workcell.head.tooltbl.User Defined Lists the specified tool parameters.
&mfg.oper.workcell.turret.holder_size Lists the holder sizes for the turrets.
&mfg.oper.workcell.turret.index Lists the turret indices.
&mfg.oper.workcell.turret.indexable Lists the turret indexability.
342 Pro/NC
&mfg.oper.workcell.turret.offset_reg Lists the offset registers for the turrets.
&mfg.oper.workcell.turret.orient Lists the turret orientation.
&mfg.oper.workcell.turret.standard Lists the turret standard.
&mfg.oper.workcell.turret.tool_name Lists the tool names for the turret.
&mfg.oper.ncseq.name Lists the NC sequence names.
&mfg.oper.ncseq.User Defined Lists the specified NC sequence
parameters.
&mfg.oper.ncseq.cutmtn.name Lists the cut motion names.
&mfg.oper.ncseq.cutmtn.User Defined Lists the specified cut motion
parameters.
You can access any manufacturing parameter for an operation, NC sequence, or cut motion by selecting User
Defined at the appropriate level and entering the parameter name.
To Create a Customized Report on a Manufacturing

Process
1. Choose Report from the MODE menu.
2. Choose Create and enter the report name.
3. Select the paper size.
4. Choose Views from the REPORT menu and enter the name of the manufacturing assembly as a model name.
5. Proceed creating views and detailing the report as desired.
6. Choose Table from the REPORT menu. Create a table.
7. Define the repeat regions using the Repeat Region option in the TABLE menu.
8. Choose Enter Text option in the TABLE menu. Enter the table headings using the Keyboard option. Use
the Report Sym option to enter the report symbols in the repeat region cells.
9. To fill in the table, choose Repeat Region from the TABLE menu, then Update Tables.
Examples: Creating a Customized Report on a

Manufacturing Process
Example 1: Tool Listing
To produce the tool listing for a manufacturing model, define your repeat regions as shown in the following
illustration (enter report symbols into cells as shown).
Pro/NC 343
1 2
TOOL LISTING for &asm.name
OPERATION MACHINE TOOL COMMENT POCKET #
mfg.oper.name
1 Outer region
2 Inner region
3 mfg.oper.workcell.name
4 mfg.oper.workcell.head.tooltbl.tool_pocket.tool_id
5 mfg.oper.workcell.head.tooltbl.tool_pocket.tool_comment
6 mfg.oper.workcell.head.tooltbl.tool_pocket.tool_position
The resulting table may look like the one shown below.
TOOL LISTING for SUPPORT_PLATE
OPERATION MACHINE TOOL COMMENT POCKET #
OP010 Makino T0001 1" FEM 12
T0003 0.550 Std Tooling 13
T0003 0.550 Std Tooling 2
OP020 Cincy D0004 5
A0010 7
Example 2: Accessing NC Sequence Parameters

To produce a listing of all NC sequences along with selected parameters, define your repeat regions as shown in
the following illustration (enter report symbols into cells as shown).
2
1
OPERATION SEQUENCE NAME TOOL FEED COOLANT
mfg.oper.name mfg.oper.ncseq.name
3 4
5
1 Outer region
2 Inner region
344 Pro/NC
3 mfg.oper.ncseq.tool_id
4 mfg.oper.ncseq.cut_feed
5 mfg.oper.ncseq.coolant_option
Note: To enter TOOL, FEED, and COOLANT symbols in the example above, choose Report Sym from
the ENTER CELL menu, then choose mfg, oper, ncseq, User Defined, and type tool_id, cut_feed, or
coolant_option, respectively.
The resulting table may look like the following.
OPERATION SEQUENCE NAME TOOL FEED COOLANT
OP010 1: Volume T0001 12 FLOOD
2: Cleanup T0003 10 OFF
3: Profile T0003 15 OFF
OP020 6: Holemaking D0004 8 FLOOD
8: Countersink A0010 9.5 OFF
About Naming Conventions

The following naming conventions are used in this optional module:
.asm Assembly file
.aux Auxiliary parameter data file
.cel Machine parameter data file
.cmd File containing the CL command lines to insert
.dat Data files created for editing, such as relations data
.drl Holemaking parameter data file
.drw Drawing file
.edm Wire EDM parameter data file
.gph User-defined feature file (including workcells)
.grv Mill grooving parameter data file
.inf Information data file
.memb Assembly member information file
.mfg Manufacturing process file
.mil Milling parameter data file
.mtn Tool motion parameter file
.ncd CL syntax alias file
.nck NC Check image file
.ncl CL data file (including pre- and post-machining files)
.plt Plot file
.ppl Route sheet data file
.ppr PPRINT settings table file
.prt Part file
.ptd Part family table file
.sec Section file
.shd Shade display file
.sit Site parameter data file
.tph Tool path storage file
.tpm Tool parameter file
.trn Turning parameter data file
Pro/NC 345
Index
A E
assembly machining .................................... 26 Engraving command...................................187
manufacturing model................................ 32
manufacturing process....................... 27, 28 F
reclassifying components......................... 32 Face command...........................................169
auto drilling ........................................ 260, 264 fixtures ..............................................44, 45, 46
creating .................................................. 260 activating...................................................46
reordering............................................... 264 creating .....................................................45
modifying...................................................46
C
circular interpolation............................... 79, 80 H
setting up ............................................... 328 high speed machining.................................140
CL data ...................................................... 302 Hole Set command .....................................237
adding CL commands ............................ 296 holemaking .........................................234, 248
deleting a command............................... 315 5-axis ..............................................234, 235
displaying the tool path .......................... 314 custom cycles .........................................248
editing ............................................ 308, 309 depth options ..........................................239
including post-processor words.............. 315 selecting holes
NC aliases.............................................. 311 by axes ................................................240
outputting for a set of NC sequences..... 303 by diameter..........................................241
outputting to a file................................... 302 by feature parameters .........................241
redefining a command............................ 315 by points ..............................................242
subroutine programming ........................ 316 on a surface.........................................241
using parameters ................................... 315 pattern selection ..................................240
using parameters ................................... 296 using Drill Group..................................248
coordinate systems...................................... 46 using previous Hole Set ......................237
machine ................................................... 47 starting point ...................................239, 240
NC sequence ........................................... 47
selecting ................................................... 48 L
z-axis orientation ...................................... 47
lathe..............................................................39
Countersink command............................... 235
horizontal ..................................................39
custom cycles in holemaking248, 249, 256,
vertical.......................................................39
257, 258
Local Mill command....................................146
creating .................................................. 249
deleting .................................................. 257 M
modifying................................................ 257
using in NC sequences .......................... 258 machinability database .................................72
Cut Line machining .................................... 153 setting up ..................................................72
cut motions ................................................ 140 using ...................................................73, 74
for volume and profile milling ................. 140 machine tools ...............................................39
cutter compensation output.......................39
D default post ...............................................39
lathe ....................................................39, 42
design model ............................................... 30
mill.............................................................39
assembling in assembly machining.......... 31
mill/turn .........................................39, 41, 42
assembling in part machining................... 29
wedm ........................................................39
replacing .................................................. 30
manufacturing...............................................25
Drill command............................................ 235
assembly machining ...........................28, 29
Drill Group command................................. 247
coordinate systems .............................46, 47
drilling (see holemaking)............................ 233
Info Box...............................................33, 34
machining process ....................................32
Pro/NC 347
material removal....................................... 54 milling
NC sequence ........................................... 48 4-axis ......................................................133
parameters ................................... 74, 75, 76 Build Cut at NC sequence level ..............133
part machining.......................................... 28 defining Mill Volume................................191
route sheet ............................................. 344 defining Mill Window ...............................189
setting up local.................................................145, 146
machinability database ......................... 72 plunge .............................................187, 188
PPRINT table.................................. 42, 43 region ......................................................143
sites ...................................................... 69 Milling .........................................148, 149, 165
tool motion colors ............................... 341 engraving ................................................187
subroutine programming ........................ 316 facing ......................................................166
using part families .................................... 30 pocketing.................................................171
using Pro/REPORT ........................ 281, 345 profiling ...........................................169, 170
workpiece ................................................. 26 surface ............................................148, 149
manufacturing model ............................. 27, 28 swarf .......................................................165
assembly machining................................. 31 thread......................................................183
creating .................................................... 29 trajectory .................................................172
part machining volume ............................................137, 138
example .................................... 26, 27, 28
retrieving .................................................. 29 N
manufacturing parameters74, 76, 77, 78, 81, NC sequence130, 210, 233, 264, 278, 283,
108, 120, 124, 129 284
common parameters ................................ 78 auxiliary...................................................278
holemaking parameters.......................... 120 creating .....................................................48
milling parameters.................................... 81 creating customized tool motions............283
setting up ................................................. 76 grouping ..................................................278
turning parameters ................................. 108 milling......................................................130
using in relations .................................... 129 patterning ................................................339
using previous parameters....................... 77 redefining ................................................338
using sites ................................................ 77 reordering................................................338
wire EDM parameters ............................ 124 turning .....................................................210
manufacturing UDF.................................... 278 user-defined ............................................278
material removal .......................................... 54 wire EDM ................................................264
Mill surface NC Sequence command ..............................48
merging .................................................. 209
modifying................................................ 209 O
trim ......................................................... 209
operation.....................................34, 35, 36, 37
Mill Surface ................................................ 204
activating...................................................36
adding patches....................................... 204
creating ...............................................34, 35
creating .................................................. 204
specifying comments ................................36
shade ..................................................... 209
Mill Volume ................................................ 191 P
copying................................................... 202
for through pockets ................................ 197 Plunge command........................................187
example .............................................. 199 Pocketing command ...................................172
gathering ................................................ 191 PPRINT table................................................43
modifying................................................ 203 Profile command.........................................171
offset .............................................. 201, 202 Program Zero ...............................................47
round...................................................... 202 R
shading .................................................. 203
sketching ................................................ 198 relations ......................................................130
trim ......................................................... 200 using manufacturing parameters.............129
Mill Window ............................................... 189 retract surface.........................................50, 51
creating .................................................. 190
using reference quilts ............................. 191 S
Mill/Turn command ...................................... 39 simulated tool path .....................................313
348 Pro/NC
sites ............................................................. 69 Trajectory command...................................173
activating .................................................. 70 traverse plane.........................................53, 54
associating with a workcell....................... 71 turning.........................................................227
creating .................................................... 70 4-axis area ..............................................220
modifying.................................................. 69 area.........................................................217
saving....................................................... 69 groove .............................222, 223, 224, 225
subroutine programming............................ 316 multiple machining areas ........................230
Surface Mill command ............................... 149 output coordinates ..................................210
surface milling profile ......................................................221
Cut Line.......................................... 153, 154 remainder material analysis ....................227
Isolines ................................................... 152 thread......................................................226
Projected Cuts........................................ 159 turn profile ...............................................228
Straight Cut ............................................ 150 using tool outline .......................................67
Surface milling ........................................... 161 turning envelope .........................................211
entry and exit moves ...................... 161, 162
Swarf Mill command .................................. 165 V
Volume command.......................................138
T
Thread command....................................... 184 W
tool change time .......................................... 39 wire EDM ....................................264, 265, 274
tool motion ......................................... 283, 284 2-axis ......................................................264
customizing ............................................ 283 4-axis ......................................................274
tool path..................................................... 314 contouring cut motions ............................265
adding break points................................ 314 Head1/Head2 format...............................274
displaying the tool motion....................... 314 mirroring cut motions ..............................273
positioning the tool ................................. 315 No Core cut motions ...............................272
saving to file ........................................... 316 radius substitution ...................................277
tool travel limits ............................................ 39 register tables .........................................276
tools ....................................................... 62, 66 workcell.........................................................39
bill of materials ......................................... 62 creating .....................................................39
materials setup......................................... 60 types .........................................................37
saving tool parameters............................. 58 workpiece .............................26, 27, 28, 29, 30
selecting for NC sequences ..................... 58 assembling in assembly machining...........31
setting up in advance ............................... 58 assembling in part machining....................29
sketching ................................................ 172 creating .....................................................29
solid tools in Turning ................................ 67 deleting .....................................................29
specifying speeds and feeds.................... 61 redefining ..................................................29
using models ............................................ 66 Workpiece
Tools no geometry ..............................................30
creating models........................................ 65
models library........................................... 64
Pro/NC 349

NC

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

NC

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

®

Parametric Technology Corporation

Registered Trademarks of Parametric Technology Corporation or a Subsidiary

Trademarks of Parametric Technology Corporation or a Subsidiary

UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND

Pro/NC Concepts ............................................................................................... 26

To Create a Manufacturing Model .................................................................... 29

To Retrieve a Manufacturing Model ................................................................. 29

To Place a Workpiece in Part Machining......................................................... 29

To Manipulate a Workpiece .............................................................................. 30

To Place a "No Geometry" Workpiece in Part Machining.............................. 30

Part Family Tables in Pro/NC............................................................................ 30

To Replace a Design Model in Part Machining ............................................... 30

Example: Replacing a Design Model ............................................................... 31

To Build a Manufacturing Model in Assembly Machining ............................. 31

To Reclassify Components of a Manufacturing Assembly ........................... 32

About Manufacturing Process.......................................................................... 32

To Get Process Status and Tool Path Information......................................... 34

About Operations .............................................................................................. 34

To Create an Operation ..................................................................................... 35

The Operation Setup Dialog Box...................................................................... 35

To Specify Comments for an Operation .......................................................... 37

To Activate an Operation .................................................................................. 37

About Workcells ................................................................................................ 37

Workcell Types .................................................................................................. 37

To Create a Machine Tool (Workcell)............................................................... 39

Machine Tool Settings....................................................................................... 40

To Set Up a PPRINT Table ................................................................................ 43

The PPRINT Table.............................................................................................. 43

About Fixtures ................................................................................................... 45

To Create a Fixture Setup ................................................................................. 45

The Fixture Setup Dialog Box........................................................................... 45

To Activate a Fixture Setup .............................................................................. 46

To Modify a Fixture Setup................................................................................. 46

To Delete a Fixture Setup.................................................................................. 47

About Coordinate Systems............................................................................... 47

Machine and NC Sequence Coordinate Systems ........................................... 47

To Specify a Coordinate System...................................................................... 48

About NC Sequences ........................................................................................ 49

Elements of NC Sequence Setup ..................................................................... 49

To Customize a Name of an NC Sequence ..................................................... 50

To Specify Comments for an NC Sequence.................................................... 50

To Set Up Start and End Points for an NC Sequence .................................... 50

To Select an NC Sequence ............................................................................... 50

About Retract Surface....................................................................................... 51

To Set Up a Retract Surface ............................................................................. 52

To Set Up a Retract Sphere .............................................................................. 52

To Set Up a Retract Cylinder ............................................................................ 53

To Set Up a Traverse Plane .............................................................................. 53

About Automatic Material Removal ................................................................. 54

To Create a Material Removal Feature ............................................................ 54

Material Removal for Assembly Machining .................................................... 54

Automatic Material Removal in Milling ............................................................ 55

Automatic Material Removal in Turning .......................................................... 56

Automatic Material Removal in Holemaking ................................................... 56

Automatic Material Removal in Wire EDM ...................................................... 56

About Elements of Tool Setup ......................................................................... 56

To Set Up Tools in Advance ............................................................................. 58

To Set Up a Tool when Creating an NC Sequence ......................................... 58

Saving Tool Parameters.................................................................................... 58

To Save Tool Parameters.................................................................................. 59

Tool Parameters Library ................................................................................... 59